Canadian Cancer Registry System Guide – 2009 Edition

Part II – Data Loading and Tabulation Master Files

Introduction
0.1 Canadian Cancer Registry Overview
0.2 CCR System Guide Document Organization
0.3 Part II Document Organization – Data Loading and TMF
0.4 Changes to the CCR Data Loading and TMF for the 2007 and 2008 Reference Years
0.5 Contacts in Statistics Canada

Chapter 3 – Data Loading
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Data Importing
3.3 Data Conditioning
3.4 Validation Edits
3.5 Correlation Edits
3.6 Match Edits
3.7 Data Posting

Chapter 4 – Tabulation Master Files
4.1 Description
4.2 Scope
4.3 Content and layout
4.4 Derived variable calculations
4.5 Confidentiality

Appendices
Appendix C – AJCC TNM reference tables
Appendix D – Multiple primary tumour rules for CCR
Appendix E – Interval and mean times between dates
Appendix F – Auxiliary tables
Appendix G – Guidelines for reporting grade, differentiation or cell indicator
Appendix H – CCR ambiguous Terms
Appendix I – Guidelines for abstracting and determining Death Certificate Only (DCO) Cases for Provincial/Territorial Cancer Registries (PTCRS) in Canada (for T12 and P18)
Appendix J – Interval between two dates (complete or partial)
Appendix T – Residency guidelines in Canada
Appendix X – CCR_ID Check digit routine
Appendix Z – Reference
Footnotes

Introduction

  • Canadian Cancer Registry Overview
  • CCR System Guide Document Organization
  • Part II Document organization – Data Loading and TMF
  • Changes to the CCR Data Loading and TMF for the 2007 and 2008 Reference Years
  • Statistics Canada Contacts

0.1 Canadian Cancer Registry Overview

The patient-oriented Canadian Cancer Registry (CCR) evolved from the event-oriented National Cancer Incidence Reporting System (NCIRS). Beginning with cases diagnosed in 1992, incidence figures collected by Provincial and Territorial Cancer Registries (PTCRs) have been reported to the CCR, which is maintained by Statistics Canada. Established as a person-oriented database, the CCR includes mechanisms for updating and clearing death records and is linked to provincial and territorial databases to help track patients across Canada who have been diagnosed with tumours.

0.2 CCR System Guide Document Organization

The CCR System Guide has been separated into three parts to improve access and navigation. Although the three parts are separate, the three documents should be used in conjunction with each other. The different sections of the three-part CCR System Guide often refer to each other. The CCR System Guide is now composed of:

Part I: CCR Data Dictionary provides explanation on the reporting of data, including the scope and detailed information on the input and derived variables.

Part II: CCR Data Loading and Tabulation Master Files provides information on the data loading process, including in-depth descriptions of the various edits performed on the data. Part II also provides information on the Tabulation Master Files, including the scope, content and layout. Part II is followed by several appendices that contain supporting information such as explicit code set tables, guidelines to assist coders and other supportive information.

Part III: CCR Core Reference Tables provides detailed information on the CCR Core Reference Tables such as descriptions of the tables, their usage and any revisions made. Part III is an accompanying document to the Core Reference Tables 2009.xls.

0.3 Part II Document organization – Data Loading and TMF

Chapter 3 – Data loading describes in great detail all the verification performed against reported data prior to their loading into the CCR System. Related business rules, Edit logic and feedback report messages are described for all edits. It also describes the data conditioning and the data posting phase.

Chapter 4 – Tabulation master file describes the main output of the system.

Appendices contain supporting information such as explicit code set tables, guidelines to assist coders, lists of changes from previous versions of the system, etc.

0.4 Changes to the CCR Data Loading and TMF for the 2007 and 2008 Reference Years

Please refer to the relevant section in the System Guide – Data Loading and TMF for more details related to these changes.

Changes to the CCR Data Loading and TMF for the 2007 and 2008 Reference Years
Section Item(s) Description of change Effective (reference year)
3.1.5 Step 2: Core data items validation New validation edits added, TVAL53-57 2008
3.1.5 Step 7: CS data items validation New validation edit TVAL52 added in to step 2007
3.1.7 CS fatal error CS data item T52 added 2007
3.1.7 CS error CS data item T52 added 2007
3.3.1 Data formatting – Table 22 Impact of data formatting step on tumour data items New variables added: T53, T54, T55, T56, T57 2008
New variable added – T52 2007
3.4 Validation Edits –
PVAL6
PVAL7
PVAL8
PVAL9
PVAL13
Business rules changed – acceptable accented characters specified 2007
3.4.2 Tumour validation edits – Table 25 New Tumour validation edits – TVAL53, TVAL54, TVAL55, TVAL56, TVAL57 2008
New Tumour validation edit – TVAL52 2007
3.4.2 Tumour validation edits –
TVAL6
Business rules changed – acceptable accented characters and special characters specified
Edit logic – New edit logic added
Feedback report messages – New messages added
2007
3.4.2 Tumour validation edits –TVAL8 Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages added – SGC 2006 2006
3.4.2 Tumour validation edits –
TVAL9
Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages added – Census tract effective date range ended in 2005. For 2006 onwards T9 must be blank 2006
3.4.2 Tumour validation edits –
TVAL27
TVAL28
TVAL29
TVAL30
TVAL31
TVAL32
TVAL33
TVAL34
TVAL35
TVAL36
TVAL37
TVAL38
TVAL39
TVAL40
TVAL41
Referenced fields, Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: now using recommended version of AJCC CS algorithm 2007
3.4.2 Tumour validation edits –
TVAL52
New validation edit added 2007
3.4.2 Tumour validation edits –
TVAL53
TVAL54
TVAL55
TVAL56
TVAL57
New validation edits added 2008
3.5.2 Tumour correlation edits – Table 27 New correlation edits – TCOR26, TCOR27 2008
3.5.2 Tumour correlation edits – Table 27 New correlation edits – TCOR13 2007
3.5.2 Tumour correlation edits – TCOR1 Referenced fields, Business rules, edit logic changed – new data items added T53, T54, T55, T56, T57 2008
Referenced fields, Business rules, edit logic changed – new data items added T52 2007
3.5.2 Tumour correlation edits – TCOR3 Business rules and Edit logic changed: includes combinations where census tract indicates area outside CMA 2006
3.5.2 Tumour correlation edits – TCOR10
TCOR11
Referenced fields, Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages changed: Verification now includes Date of diagnosis. 2007
3.5.2 Tumour correlation edits – TCOR13 New correlation edit added 2007
3.5.2 Tumour correlation edits – TCOR18 Referenced fields and Edit logic updated: T52 added as a new CS variable 2007
3.5.2 Tumour correlation edits – TCOR26, TCOR27, TCOR29 – TCOR35 New correlation edits 2008
3.6.3 Data item match edits –
DIM6
Revision – Edit no longer used after 2006 2006
3.7.2 Add tumour record processing – CS data items Added new data item T52 2007
3.7.7 Patient derived variable calculation PD7 – Name of variable changed 2007
4.2 Table 24 – Scope - topography codes from ICD-O-2 and ICD-O-3 considered a single site in the definition of multiple cancers Topography group added: C38.4 2007
4.3 Table 36 TMF record layout Addition/deletion of variable – T52 CS version 1st added TD20 deleted 2007
PD7 – Variable acronym changed
New variables added – T53 to T57
2008
4.3 Table 37 – Derived variable calculations at TMF time PD2 – Vital status now derived at TMF time 2007
Appendices Appendices – Appendix A moved to Part III of system guide. Appendix A now included in Part III of system guide 2008
Additions to Appendices Appendix H now includes T53
Appendix I now includes P18
2008
Table 50 – updated table Updated stage group II with T1a, T1b and T1c 2008
New Appendices added to system guide New Appendices
Appendix G – Grade, differentiation or cell indicator guidelines
Appendix H - CCR Ambiguous Terms
Appendix I – Guidelines for abstracting and determining death certificate only (DCO) cases for PTCRs in Canada
2007
Appendix J – Interval between two dates (complete or partial) 2008
Appendices deleted from system guide Appendix Y - Removed and replaced with Section 0.4 Changes to the CCR Data Loading and TMF for the 2007 and 2008 reference years 2008
Appendix Z - References Updates to several references 2007
  • Additional updates have been made; however, only the changes that require action on the part of the PTCRs have been included in this table.
  • Note that changes effective in the 2006 reference year have also been included here.

0.5 Statistics Canada Contacts

PTCRs employees are encouraged to bring forward any questions by contacting one of the following:

For additional information regarding the processing of CCR data, please contact:

Colette Brassard
Section Chief
Operations and Integration Division
Statistics Canada
Tel: (613) 951-7282
Fax: (613) 951-0709
For any subject matter related questions/queries, please contact:

Kim Boyuk
Chief, Cancer Statistics
Health Statistics Division
Statistics Canada
Tel: (613) 951-2510
Fax: (613) 951-0792

Hollie Anderson
Manager, Canadian Cancer Registry
Health Statistics Division
Statistics Canada
Tel: (613) 951-0757
Fax: (613) 951-0792

Chapter 3 – Data loading

  • Data importing
  • Data conditioning
  • Data editing
  • Data posting

3.1 Introduction

The data loading process is done in 4 distinct phases:

1. Data importing: Reads in input patient and tumour record files and breaks them down into separate data items using the proper record layout.
2. Data conditioning: Formats the data, filters the old classification data, computes some missing input variables and adjusts the laterality code. This phase alters the reported data.
3. Data editing: Identifies errors in input records and provides sufficient feedback to correct them. This phase does not alter the data. The documentation about this phase has been divided into 3 sections:

  • Validations edits,
  • Correlation edits,
  • Match edits.

4. Data posting: Computes some derived variables, transfers valid data in the CCR database and generates additional reports.

Since the data editing is the most complex phase of the overall process, the remaining pages of the introduction present its key components. An overview of the overall data loading process is also presented at the end of the introduction.

3.1.1 Business rules

The main purpose of the edit process is to enforce a given number of rules on the CCR Data items. Some rules are related to the subject matter (subject matter rules) whereas some others are related to the transmission of data between the PTCR and Statistics Canada (transactional rules). The expression "Business rules" has been retained to express both subject matter and transactional rules that apply to the CCR System.

3.1.2 Edits and sub-edits

Each individual edit in the CCR system enforces a set of related business rules. For the purpose of reporting, an edit may be divided into sub-edits in order to provide more detailed feedback. Thus, each Sub-edit has its own logic and message.

3.1.3 Edit logic

Edit logic are logical expressions that can be evaluated to true or false. They are built from data item names, operators and functions. The principal language elements are described in the following tables.

Table 14 Logical operators
Operator Syntax and meaning
AND expr1 AND expr2
The expression is true if and only if both expr1 and expr2 are true, otherwise the expression is false.
OR expr1 OR expr2
The expression is true whenever expr1 or expr2 is true, otherwise the expression is false.
NOT NOT expr1
The expression is true only if it does not equal expr1, otherwise the expression is false.
Table 15 Comparison operators
Operator Syntax and meaning
<> Expr1 <> expr2
Assesses whether expr1 is different from expr2.
= Expr1 = expr2
Assesses whether expr1 is equal to expr2.
> Expr1 > expr2
Assesses whether expr1 is greater than expr2.
>= Expr1 >= expr2
Assesses whether expr1 is greater than or equal to expr2.
< Expr1 < expr2
Assesses whether expr1 is less than expr2.
<= Expr1 <= expr2
Assesses whether expr1 is less than or equal to expr2.
BETWEEN Expr1 BETWEEN (expr2, expr3)
Assesses whether expr1 is greater than or equal to expr2 and less than or equal to expr3.
LIKE Expr1 LIKE expr2
Assesses whether expr1 complies with expr2 pattern. Expr2 may contain Underscore (_) and percent (%) characters which stand respectively for any single character and any number (including 0) of characters.
Ex: ‘951-5555' LIKE ‘951-_ _ _ _' is true.
EX: ‘951-5555' LIKE ‘653-_ _ _ _' is false.
Table 16 Functions
Function Syntax and meaning
AVERAGE AVERAGE (X1, X2, ..., Xn)
Returns the arithmetic mean of X: X1+X2+...+Xn / n. This function ignores NULL values.
BLANK BLANK(x1)
Returns x1 blank character(s).
CALCULATE_CCR_CHECK_DIGIT CALCULATE_CCR_CHECK_DIGIT (str1)
Returns a CCR_ID check digit based on str1.
CONTAINS_WORD CONTAINS_WORD (str1, str2, x1)
Assesses whether str1 contains a word of at least x1 character(s) from str2.
IS_COMPOSED_OF IS_COMPOSED_OF (str1, str2)
Assesses whether str1 is only composed of characters from str2.
IS_VALID_DATE IS_VALID_DATE (str1)
Assesses whether str1 is a calendar date.
LENGTH LENGTH (str1)
Returns the length of str1 including trailing blanks.
UPPER UPPER (str1)
Returns str1 where letters and accented characters are converted to their uppercase equivalent. Special characters and numbers remain the same.
Table 17 String operator
Operator Syntax and meaning
|| str1 || str2
Returns a unique string containing str1 and str2 concatenated (juxtaposed).
Table 18 Set operators and symbols
Operator and symbol Syntax and meaning
[] [Expr1,...]
[A-Z]
[A]
Indicates an explicit list of values, a range of values or set of values known as Set A.
IN expr1 IN [A]
Assesses whether expr1 is included in Set A.

3.1.4 Edit families and groups

For ease of use, edits have been grouped into families and groups depending on the scope of the business rules they enforce. There are 3 families:

  1. Validation edits: Enforce business rules on each individual field.
  2. Correlation edits: Enforce business rules between valid fields on the same input record.
  3. Match edits: Enforce business rules between valid fields on different records.

The following table describes the scope of each edit group.

Table 19 Edit scope by family and group
Family Group Scope
Validation Patient validation (PVAL)  Enforce business rules on Patient fields.
Tumour validation (TVAL)  Enforce business rules on Tumour fields.
Correlation Patient correlation (PCOR)  Enforce business rules between valid Patient fields.
Tumour correlation (TCOR)  Enforcebusiness rules between valid Tumour fields.
Match Key input match (KIM) Ensure that Input patient and Tumour records respect the submission rules in terms of matching keys.
Hey base match (KBM) Ensure that Input patient and Tumour records respect the actual state of the CCR in terms of matching keys.
Data item match (DIM) Enforce the business rules between data items (other than keys) found on different records.
Pre–posting match (PPM) Identify error–free4 Input records that cannot be posted to CCR because some other related Input records are either missing or in error.

3.1.5 Edits order of execution and edit control

Because of the dependencies between the edits, edit processing must respect a given order of execution. Since CS and AJCC TNM data item edits depend on core data items, core data item edits must be done first. For each of the following steps, the number of eligible input records will depend on the outcome of preceding steps.

Step 1: Core data items minimum requirements assessment

The core data items minimum requirements consist of an Input record with a valid record type and date of transmission and no missing core data items (P1-P19 or T1-T26). The following edits must be successful in order to respect the minimum requirements:

  • Patient records: PCOR1, PVAL4 and PVAL19.
  • Tumour records: TCOR1, TVAL5 and TVAL26.

Step 2: Core data items validation

Remaining core data items validation edits (PVAL1-19, TVAL1-26 and TVAL53-57) can be performed on the Input records that respect the core data items minimum requirements. The following order must be respected:

  • PVAL11 before PVAL12;
  • PVAL14 before PVAL15 and PVAL17;
  • TVAL12 before TVAL8 and TVAL9;

Step 3: Core data items correlation, key input match and key base match edits

These edits are run based on the outcome of the core data item validation edits. That is, for a given edit, only the Input records where all referenced fields have been successfully validated are eligible. (This implies that Input records that do not respect the minimum requirements or that fail a required field validation edit are not eligible.) These edits can be run in any order.

Step 4: Core data item match edits

Those edits can only be performed on Input records that have no core data items errors. A special processing order must be respected. See Section 3.6.3 Data Item Match Edits for details.

Step 5: Core data items pre-posting match edits

Those edits can only be performed on Input records that have no core data items errors. These edits can be run in any order.

Step 6: CS data items minimum requirements assessment

CS data items minimum requirements consist of an input tumour record with valid date of diagnosis and no missing CS data items. The following edit must be successful in order to respect the minimum requirements:

Tumour records: TCOR18.

Step 7: CS data items validation

CS Validation edits (TVAL27 to 41 and TVAL52) can be performed on the input tumour records that respect the CS minimum requirements and where all core referenced fields are valid. These edits can be run in any order.

Step 8: AJCC TNM data items minimum requirements assessment

AJCC TNM data items minimum requirements consist of an input tumour record with valid date of diagnosis, ICD-O-2/3 topography, ICD-O-3 histology and ICD-O-3 behaviour and no missing AJCC TNM data items. The following edit must be successful in order to respect the minimum requirements SITE-SPECIFIC MEANING: Tumour records: TCOR19.

Step 9: AJCC TNM data items validation

AJCC TNM validation edits (TVAL42 to 51) can be performed on the input tumour records that respect the AJCC TNM minimum requirements and where all core referenced fields are valid. These edits can be run in any order.

Step 10: AJCC TNM data items correlation

These edits are run based on the outcome of previous validation edits. That is, for a given edit, only the Input records where all referenced fields (core and AJCC TNM) have been successfully validated are eligible. These edits can be run in any order.

See section 3.1.9 flowchart of the data loading process for an illustration of the edits dependencies.

3.1.6 Sub-edits order of execution

Except for data item match Sub-edits; all sub-edits from a given edit may be performed in any order. See Section 3.6.3.1 Special order of execution for more details about data item match Sub-edits special order of execution.

3.1.7 Message types

The severity of an error is expressed by its corresponding message's type. The following list describes each possible message type and gives an indication of when they are issued and how they change the editing process flow.

Fatal error: When a group of data items does not respect the minimum requirements. Related editing is stopped.

Core fatal error: Core data items (P1 to P19 and T1 to T26) do not respect the minimum requirements. The input record will not undergo any other edits and will be rejected.

CS fatal error: CS data items (T27 to T41 and T52) do not respect the minimum requirements. CS data items will not undergo any other related edits and will not be loaded on the CCR database. CS Fatal error does not prevent valid core and AJCC TNM data items from being loaded on the CCR database.1

AJCC TNM Fatal error: AJCC TNM data items (T42 to T51) do not respect the minimum requirements. AJCC TNM data items will not undergo any other related edits and will not be loaded on the CCR database. AJCC TNM fatal error does not prevent valid core and CS data items from being loaded on the CCR database.5

Error: Normal edits failure. Editing is not stopped. Unless specified otherwise, the input record can be edited by other edits based on the validity of their corresponding referenced fields.

Core error: Error found in core patient (P1 to P19) or Tumour (T1 to T26) data items. Core error causes the Input record to be rejected.

CS error: Error found in CS data items (T27 to T41 and T52). CS data items will not be loaded on the CCR database.CS error does not prevent valid core and AJCC TNM data items from being loaded on the CCR database.5

AJCC TNM error: Error found in AJCC TNM data items (T42 to T51). AJCC TNM data items will not be loaded on the CCR database. AJCC TNM error does not prevent valid core and CS data items from being loaded on the CCR database.5

Warning: Informative message to PTCR. Warnings do not prevent Inputrecords from being loaded on the CCR.

3.1.8 Edit description pages

For ease of use, each edit is described using a standard format: name, purpose, referenced fields, business rules, edit logic and feedback report messages. When needed, other parameters, revisions and notes are also added to give more detail. The following table describes each possible section.

Table 20 Edit presentation breakdown
Section Description
Name A unique name for the edit.
Purpose Edit main purpose.
Referenced fields List of all input file fields (or part of fields) involved in the edit.
Other parameters List of additional parameters needed to perform the edit.
Business rules Rules that describe the eligible field value or relationship between many field values. These rules are written in plain English.
Edit logic Each Sub-edit condition that identifies invalid records. These conditions are usually written using logical expressions.
Feedback report messages List of all possible edit messages.
Revision List of all changes that have been applied to the edit over time.
Notes Any remarks.

3.1.9 Flowchart of the data loading process

3.1.9 Flowchart of the data loading process

Notes:
*See 3.1.5 Edits Order of Execution and Edit Control for exact sequencing.
**DIM Edits have a special processing order. See specific section for more details.

3.2 Data importing

During the data importing phase, the input patient record file and/or input tumour record file is read in by the system. Every record is then cut into separate data items using the proper record layout.

3.2 Data Importing

3.3 Data conditioning

The purpose of the data conditioning phase is threefold. Its intent is to:

  • Reduce PTCR response burden by automatically correcting small errors such as the use of lowercase characters in code fields or improper alignment of values.
  • Eliminate older classification data (ICD-9 and ICD-O-2) when not reported as the source classification data. This eliminates the risk of incoherence between the source classification and any former classification data.
  • Bring all reported data up to a uniform classification (ICD-O-3). This facilitates a comparison of all tumours reported to the CCR.

To achieve these objectives, the following steps are performed on the data:

  1. Data formatting;
  2. Old classification filtering;
  3. ICD-O-2/3 topography calculation;
  4. ICD-O-3 histology and behaviour calculation; and,
  5. Laterality adjustment.

The steps listed above must be executed in sequential order. Each step may alter the reported data. Refer to the corresponding section below for a description of how these reported data are altered.

3.3.1 Data formatting

Description

Data formatting is composed of three operations:

Left justified: Removes blank character preceding the data item value.

Uppercase: Converts all lower case alphabetic characters to uppercase letters.
Converts lower case French accents (é, è, ê, ë, ç…) to corresponding uppercase letters (é à É). Special characters and digits remain unchanged.

Removal of trailing blanks: Removes any blank characters trailing the data item value. Data items containing only blank characters will be converted to NULL. This is an important assumption used in the data editing phase.

Purpose

Data formatting reduces PTCR response burden by fixing small formatting errors that would otherwise cause an input record to be rejected. It also converts blank data items to NULL values in order to be compliant with the data editing specification.

Logic

  • Left justification is applied on any fields longer than 1 character.
  • Uppercase is applied on any fields that may contain letters.
  • Removal of trailing blanks is applied on all fields.

The following two tables summarize the impact of the data formatting step on patient and tumour data items. X and – indicate whether the corresponding transformation is applicable or not.

Table 21 Impact of data formatting step on patient data items
Variable Name Variable Left justify Uppercase Removal of trailing blanks
P1 Patient reporting province/territory X - X
P2 Patient identification number X X X
P3 CCR identification number X - X
P4 Patient record type - - X
P5 Type of current surname - - X
P6 Current surname X X X
P7 First given name X X X
P8 Second given name X X X
P9 Third given name X X X
P10 Sex - - X
P11 Date of birth X - X
P12 Province/territory or country of birth X - X
P13 Birth surname X X X
P14 Date of death X - X
P15 Province/territory or country of death X - X
P16 Death registration number X - X
P17 Underlying cause of death X X X
P18 Autopsy confirming cause of death - - X
P19 Patient date of transmission X - X
Table 22 Impact of data formatting step on tumour data items
Variable Name Variable Left justify Uppercase Remove trailing blank
T1 Tumour reporting province/territory X - X
T2 Tumour patient identification number X X X
T3 Tumour reference number X X X
T4 CCR identification number X - X
T5 Tumour record type - - X
T6 Name of place of residence X X X
T7 Postal code X X X
T8 Standard geographic code X - X
T9 Census tract X - X
T10 Health insurance number X X X
T11 Method of diagnosis - - X
T12 Date of diagnosis X - X
T13 ICD–9 cancer code X - X
T14 Source classification flag - - X
T15 ICD–O–2/3 Topography X X X
T16 ICD–O–2 Histology X - X
T17 ICD–O–2 Behaviour X - X
T18 Filler - - -
T19 Laterality - - X
T20 Filler - - -
T21 ICD–O–3 Histology X - X
T22 ICD–O–3 Behaviour - - X
T23 Grade, differentiation or cell indicator - - X
T24 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis - - X
T25 Diagnostic confirmation - - X
T26 Date of transmission X - X
T27 CS tumour size X - X
T28 CS extension X - X
T29 CS tumour size/ext eval - - X
T30 CS lymph nodes X - X
T31 CS reg nodes eval - - X
T32 Regional nodes examined X - X
T33 Regional nodes positive X - X
T34 CS mets at dx X - X
T35 CS mets eval - - X
T36 CS site-specific factor 1 X - X
T37 CS site-specific factor 2 X - X
T38 CS site-specific factor 3 X - X
T39 CS site-specific factor 4 X - X
T40 CS site-specific factor 5 X - X
T41 CS site-specific factor 6 X - X
T42 AJCC clinical T X X X
T43 AJCC clinical N X X X
T44 AJCC clinical M X X X
T45 AJCC pathologic T X X X
T46 AJCC pathologic N X X X
T47 AJCC pathologic M X X X
T48 AJCC clinical TNM stage group X X X
T49 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group X X X
T50 AJCC TNM stage group X X X
T51 AJCC TNM edition number X - X
T52 CS Version 1st X - X
T53 Ambiguous Terminology Diagnosis - - X
T54 Date of Conclusive Diagnosis X - X
T55 Type of Multiple Tumours Reported as One Primary X - X
T56 Date of Multiple Tumours X - X
T57 Multiplicity Counter X - X

Revision

Year Description
2008 Tumour input variables T53 to T57 have been added to the record layout. Different formatting processes are done to each new variable.
2007 T52 – CS Version 1st – tumour input variable added to record layout. It is left justified and trailing blanks are removed.
2004 In order to reduce response burden, some data items will automatically be uppercased, left justified and right truncated (removal of trailing blanks) by the CCR system.
T3 – Tumour reference number: Values will not be zero left filled anymore.

3.3.2 Old classification filtering

Description

This step deletes disease classification information reported by PTCRs older than that indicated by the source classification flag.

Purpose

This step eliminates the possibility of incoherence between source classification data (as identified by the source classification flag) and any former classification data.

Logic

  • If the Source classification flag indicates that ICD-9 is the source classification, then all reported data are kept as is.
  • If the Source classification flag indicates that ICD-O-2 is the source classification, then reported ICD-9 Cancer Code is replaced by '0000'.
  • If the Source classification flag indicates that ICD-O-3 is the source classification, then reported ICD-9 Cancer Code and ICD-O-2 Histology are replaced by '0000' and reported ICD-O-2 Behaviour is replaced by '0'.
  • In any other case, all reported data are kept as is.

This step will not create a feedback message. The following examples and table illustrate possible scenarios.

Example 1: If source classification flag indicates ICD-9, then no change.
Example 2: If source classification flag indicates ICD-O-2, then ICD-9 is not loaded.
Example 3: If source classification flag indicates ICD-O-3, then ICD-9 and ICD-O-2H/B are not loaded. ICD-O-2/3T is kept since it also belongs to ICD-O-3.

Table 23 Old classification filtering
Example TSCF ICD-9 ICD-O-2/3T ICD-O-2H ICD-O-2B ICD-O-3H ICD-O-3B
1 Before 1 175 C509 8521 3 8521 3
After 1 175 C509 8521 3 8521 3
2 Before 2 175 C509 8521 3 8521 3
After 2 0000 C509 8521 3 8521 3
3 Before 4 175 C509 8521 3 8521  
After 4 0000 C509 0000 0 8521 3

3.3.3 ICD-O-2/3 Topography calculation

Background

For cases diagnosed from 1992 to 2000, the Canadian Council of Cancer Registries adopted the International Classification of Diseases for Oncology, Second Edition (ICD-O-2) as the standard for reporting diagnostic information to the Canadian Cancer Registry (CCR). This classification was chosen because it provides detailed information on the site (topography), the histology and the behaviour of the neoplasm. The site codes are based on the malignant neoplasms section (C00-C80) of the International Statistical Classification of Diseases and Related Health Problems, Tenth revision (ICD-10). The morphology codes are revised and expanded from its predecessor, the ICD-O-1. The International Classification of Diseases is a classification system which covers the broad range of diseases and other health problems for which health care services may be rendered. The ICD has been in use in Canada for many decades for morbidity (hospitalization) and mortality (death) reporting. The Ninth revision (ICD-9), in use since 1979, has been replaced by the ICD-10 for morbidity and mortality. Chapter 2 of the ICD-9 (Neoplasms) provides a classification of tumours, primarily by site and includes behaviour. The ICD-O-2 supplements site information with tumour morphology detail. This greater level of specificity makes ICD-O more suitable for cancer registration purposes.

By 1992, the data year for which the CCR became operational, all provincial/territorial cancer registries except Ontario and Québec had implemented the ICD-O-2 for reporting tumour site and morphology. Ontario and Québec had adopted the ICD-O-2 for reporting tumour morphology information, but continued to report the site of tumours using the ICD-9, for administrative reasons. In order to bring all data to a common basis, the ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion was created, cooperatively by Statistics Canada, the Ontario Cancer Treatment and Research Foundation and the Fichier des tumeurs du Québec.

Description

This step computes ICD-O-2/3 Topography code from the reported ICD-9 Cancer code when needed.

Purpose

This step ensures that, for each reported tumour, the site is described using the ICD-O-3 classification. This facilitates the comparison between all tumours reported to the CCR.

Logic

If ICD-O-2/3 Topography = '0000' and Source classification flag = '1' then
If ICD-9 Cancer code is found in ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table6 then
ICD-O-2/3 Topography = ICD-O-2/3 Topography code associated to ICD-9 Cancer code in ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table.
Else (ICD-9 Cancer code is NULL or NOT found in ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table)
Warning saying "ICD-O-2/3 Topography calculation: Conversion failed." is sent to the reporting PTCR.
End If
End If

Directions

The process of converting coded information from one disease classification system to another can result in a distortion or loss of original diagnostic detail. Whenever possible, it is recommended that the original descriptive diagnosis be coded directly, using the preferred, most recent classification system.

Registries using both the ICD-O-2/3 topography and the ICD-9 to code tumour sites are requested to report only ICD-O-2/3 topography codes to the CCR. ICD-9 codes should only be reported to the CCR if ICD-O-2/3 topography codes are not available.

3.3.4 ICD-O-3 Histology and behaviour calculation

Background

For cases diagnosed from 2001 onwards, the Canadian Council of Cancer Registries adopted the International Classification of Diseases for Oncology, Third edition (ICD-O-3) as the standard for reporting diagnostic information to the Canadian Cancer Registry (CCR). The topography section of the Third edition remains the same as the Second edition; however it includes revised morphologies and new classifications especially for lymphomas and leukemias. This classification was adopted because it represents the most current classification of diseases for oncology.

Description

This step computes the ICD-O-3 Histology and the ICD-O-3 behaviour from reported ICD-O-2 histology and ICD-O-2 behaviour when needed.

Purpose

This step ensures that, for each reported tumour, the histology and behaviour are described using the ICD-O-3 classification. This facilitates the comparison between all tumours reported to the CCR.

If ICD-O-3 Histology = '0000' and ICD-O-3 Behaviour = '0' and Source Classification Flag = '1' or '2' 'then
If ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-2 Histology and ICD-O-2 Behaviour combination is found in ICD-O-2 to ICD-O-3 conversion table6 then
ICD-O-3 Histology = ICD-O-3 Histology code associated to ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-2 Histology and ICD-O-2 Behaviour combination in ICD-O-2 to ICD-O-3 conversion table
ICD-O-3 Behaviour = ICD-O-3 Behaviour code associated to ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-2 Histology and ICD-O-2 Behaviour combination in ICD-O-2 to ICD-O-3 conversion table
If the Review Flag associated to ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-2 Histology and ICD-O-2 Behaviour combination in ICD-O-2 to ICD-O-3 conversion table = '1' then
Warning saying "ICD-O-3 Histology and Behaviour calculation: Values must be manually reviewed." is sent to the reporting PTCR.
Else (ICD-O-2/3 Topography is NULL or ICD-O-2 Histology is NULL or ICD-O-2 Behaviour is NULL or the combination is NOT found in ICD-O-2 to ICD-O-3 conversion table)
Warning saying "ICD-O-3 Histology and Behaviour calculation: Conversion failed." is sent to the reporting PTCR.
End If
End If

This step ensures that, for each reported tumour, the histology and behaviour are described using the ICD-O-3 classification. This facilitates the comparison between all tumours reported to the CCR

3.3.5 Laterality adjustment

Background

Although the ICD-9 and the ICD-O-3 may be used for similar purposes, they are not totally compatible. Since the ICD-9 and the ICD-O-3 use different topographic groupings, there are cases where the laterality code may be coherent with a given ICD-9 Cancer code but may be incoherent with the closest corresponding ICD-O-2/3 topography code. Thus, for these exceptional cases, the laterality code must be altered to be compliant with the ICD-O-3 classification.

Description

This step alters the laterality code when specific ICD-9 Cancer codes are reported as source classification data and corresponding ICD-O-2/3 topography codes conflict with the reported laterality code due to classification incompatibility.

Purpose

This step reduces PTCR response burden by fixing classification incompatibility issues that would otherwise cause an input record to be rejected.

Logic

If Source Classification Flag = '1' and ICD-9 Cancer Code in ['1460','2021','2022','2382'] and Laterality = '0' then
Laterality = '9'
Warning saying "Laterality Adjustment: Laterality code has been changed from '0' to '9' in order to be compliant with ICD-O-3 classification." is sent to the reporting PTCR.
End if

3.4 Validation Edits

The purpose of the Validation edits is to enforce the business rules on each individual field. For ease of use, validation edits have been divided into two groups:

  • Patient validation edits: enforce business rules on patient fields;
  • Tumour validation edits: enforce business rules on tumour fields.

3.4.1 Patient validation edits

The following table summarizes the purpose of each individual edit of this category.

Table 24 Patient validation edits summary
Edit name Purpose
PVAL1 Validates the Patient reporting province/territory code.
PVAL2 Validates the Patient identification number.
PVAL3 Validates the CCR identification number.
PVAL4 Validates the Patient record type code.
PVAL5 Validates the Type of current surname code.
PVAL6 Validates the Current surname.
PVAL7 Validates the First given name.
PVAL8 Validates the Second given name.
PVAL9 Validates the Third given name.
PVAL10 Validates the Sex code.
PVAL11 Validates the Date of birth.
PVAL12 Validates the Province/territory or country of birth code.
PVAL13 Validates Birth surname.
PVAL14 Validates Date of death.
PVAL15 Validates the Province/territory or country of death code.
PVAL16 Validates Death registration number.
PVAL17 Validates the Underlying cause of death code.
PVAL18 Validates Autopsy confirming cause of death code.
PVAL19 Validates Patient record date of transmission.

PVAL1

This edit validates the patient reporting province/territory code.

Referenced fields (PVAL1)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
Other parameters (PVAL1)
Parameters Length Description
PTCR_CODE 2 Province/territory code of the PTCR that is submitting the data.

Business rules

For Input patient records
  • Patient reporting province/territory must be equal to province/territory code of the PTCR submitting the data7.
Edit logic (PVAL1)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL1-1 P1 <> PTCR_CODE Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL1)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL1-1 Patient reporting province/territory code does not match PTCR province/territory code. Core error
Revision (PVAL1)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

PVAL2

Purpose

This edit validates the patient identification number.

Referenced fields (PVAL2)
Field Length Description Acronym
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN

Business rules

On any type of Input patient record, Patient identification number
  • Must be exclusively composed of any of the following:
    • Uppercase letters: A to Z
    • Numbers: 0 to 9
  • Cannot be exclusively composed of zeros.
Edit logic (PVAL2)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL2-1 IS_COMPOSED_OF (P2, ‘0') Record rejected
PVAL2-2 NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (P2, ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789') Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL2)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL2-1 Patient identification number cannot be exclusively composed of zeros. Core error
PVAL2-2 Patient identification number is not exclusively composed of uppercase letters and/or numbers. Core error
Revision (PVAL2)
Year Description
2004 Business rule changed: Apostrophes, hyphens, periods and inner spaces are not accepted anymore.

PVAL3

Purpose

This edit validates the CCR identification number.

Referenced fields (PVAL3)
Field Length Description Acronym
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P3.ID 8 First 8 digits of P3 (CCR ID sequence number) Not applicable
P3.CHECK_DIGIT 1 9th digit of P3 (CCR ID check digit) Not applicable
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE

Business rules

For Update and Delete Patient records, CCR identification number
  • Must be exclusively composed of numbers: 0 to 9
  • Must be 9 digits long.
  • Cannot be all zeros.
  • Must have a valid check digit8.
Edit logic (PVAL3)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL3-1 P4 IN [‘2', ‘3'] AND (LENGTH (P3) <> 9 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (P3, ‘0123456789')) Record rejected
PVAL3-2 P4 IN [‘2', ‘3'] AND P3 = ‘000000000' Record rejected
PVAL3-3 P4 IN [‘2', ‘3'] AND P3 <> ‘000000000' AND LENGTH (P3) = 9 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P3, ‘0123456789') AND P3.CHECK_DIGIT <> CALCULATE_CCR_CHECK_DIGIT (P3.ID) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL3)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL3-1 CCR identification number is not 9 digits long. Core error
PVAL3-2 CCR identification number cannot be all zeros. Core error
PVAL3-3 CCR identification number is invalid. Core error
Revision (PVAL3)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

PVAL4

Purpose

This edit validates the patient record type code.

Referenced fields (PVAL4)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE

Business rules

For Input Patient records, Patient record type
  • Cannot be blank.
  • Must be one of the Eligible patient record type codes9.
Edit logic (PVAL4)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL4-1 P4 IS NULL OR P4 NOT IN [Eligible Patient record type codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages(PVAL4)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL4-1 Patient record type code is missing or invalid. Core fatal error
Revision (PVAL4)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

PVAL5

Purpose

This edit validates the type of current surname code.

Referenced fieldds (PVAL5)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P5 1 Type of current surname PTYP_CUR

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • Type of Current Surname must be one of the Eligible type of current surname codes10.
Edit logic (PVAL5)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL5-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P5 NOT IN [Eligible type of current surname codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL5)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL5-1 Type of current surname code is invalid. Core error
Revision (PVAL5)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

PVAL6

Purpose

This edit validates the current surname.

Referenced fields (PVAL6)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P6 25 Current surname PCURSNAM

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • Current surname can be blank.
  • If Current surname is not blank then
    • It must be exclusively composed of any of the following:
      • Letters: A to Z (upper or lowercase)
      • Accented characters: Â À Ç É Ê Ë È Î Ï Ô Û Ü (upper or lowercase)
      • Special characters: space ( ), period (.), apostrophe ('), hyphen (-)
    • It must contain at least one letter.
Edit logic (PVAL6)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL6-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P6 IS NOT NULL AND NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P6), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') Record rejected
PVAL6-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P6 IS NOT NULL AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P6), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') AND NOT CONTAINS_WORD (UPPER (P6), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ', 1) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL6)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL6-1 Current surname is not exclusively composed of acceptable letters, accented characters or special characters. Core error
PVAL6-2 Current surname does not contain at least one letter. Core error
Revision (PVAL6)
Year Description
2007 Business rules changed: Acceptable accented characters are specified.
2004 Business rules changed: Titles are now allowed in current surname.

PVAL7

Purpose

This edit validates the first given name.

Referenced fields (PVAL7)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P7 15 First given name PGNAME_1

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • First given name can be blank.
  • If First given name is not blank then
    • It must be exclusively composed of any of the following:
      • Letters: A to Z (upper or lowercase)
      • Accented characters: Â À Ç É Ê Ë È Î Ï Ô Û Ü (upper or lowercase)
      • Special characters: space ( ), period (.), apostrophe ('), hyphen (-)
    • It must contain at least one letter.
Edit logic (PVAL7)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL7-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P7 IS NOT NULL AND NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P7), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') Record rejected
PVAL7-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P7 IS NOT NULL AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P7), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') AND NOT CONTAINS_WORD (UPPER (P7), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ', 1) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL7)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL7-1 First given name is not exclusively composed of acceptable letters, accented characters or special characters. Core error
PVAL7-2 First given name does not contain at least one letter. Core error
Revision (PVAL7)
Year Description
2007 Business rules changed: Acceptable accented characters are specified.

PVAL8

Purpose

This edit validates the second given name.

Referenced fields (PVAL8)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P8 15 Second given name PGNAME_2

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • Second given name can be blank.
  • If Second given name is not blank then
    • It must be exclusively composed of any of the following:
      • Letters: A to Z (upper or lowercase)
      • Accented characters: Â À Ç É Ê Ë È Î Ï Ô Û Ü (upper or lowercase)
      • Special characters: space ( ), period (.), apostrophe ('), hyphen (-)
    • It must contain at least one letter
Edit logic(PVAL8)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL8-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P8 IS NOT NULL AND NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P8), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') Record rejected
PVAL8-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P8 IS NOT NULL AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P8), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') AND NOT CONTAINS_WORD (UPPER (P8), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ', 1) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL8)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL8-1 Second given name is not exclusively composed of acceptable letters, accented characters or special characters. Core error
PVAL8-2 Second given name does not contain at least one letter. Core error
Revision (PVAL8)
Year Description
2007 Business rules changed: Acceptable accented characters are specified.

PVAL9

Purpose

This edit validates the third given name.

Referenced fields (PVAL9)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P9 7 Third given name PGNAME_3

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • Third given name can be blank.
  • If Third given name is not blank then
    • It must be exclusively composed of any of the following:
      • Letters: A to Z (upper or lowercase)
      • Accented characters: Â À Ç É Ê Ë È Î Ï Ô Û Ü (upper or lowercase)
      • Special characters: space ( ), period (.), apostrophe ('), hyphen (-)
    • It must contain at least one letter.
Edit logic (PVAL9)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL9-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P9 IS NOT NULL AND NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P9), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') Record rejected
PVAL9-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P9 IS NOT NULL AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P9), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') AND NOT CONTAINS_WORD (UPPER (P9), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ', 1) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL9)
Sub edit Text Type
PVAL9-1 Third given name is not exclusively composed of acceptable letters, accented characters or special characters. Core error
PVAL9-2 Third given name does not contain at least one letter. Core error
Revision (PVAL9)
Year Description
2007 Business rules changed: Acceptable accented characters are specified.

PVAL10

Purpose

This edit validates the sex code.

Referenced fields (PVAL10)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P10 1 Sex PSEX

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • Sex must be one of the Eligible sex codes11.
Edit logic (PVAL10)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL10-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P10 NOT IN [Eligible sex codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL10)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL10-1 Sex code is invalid. Core error
Revision (PVAL10)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

PVAL11

Purpose

This edit validates the date of birth.

Referenced fields (PVAL11)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P11 8 Date of birth PDATBIR
P11.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of P11 (year of date of birth) Not applicable
P11.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of P11 (month of date of birth) Not applicable
P11.DAY 2 7th and 8th digits of P11 (day of date of birth) Not applicable
Other parameters (PVAL11)
Parameters Length Description
CYCLE_YEAR 2 Reference year

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records, Date of birth
  • Must be 8 digits long.
  • Must be between January 1st, 1875 and December 31st of Reference year inclusively.
  • If Year is unknown then Month must be unknown.
  • If Month is unknown then Day must be unknown.
  • If Year, Month and Day are known then it must be a valid calendar date.
  • If Year and Month are known and Day is unknown then month must be a valid month.
Edit logic (PVAL11)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL11-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (LENGTH (P11) <> 8 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (P11, ‘0123456789')) Record rejected
PVAL11-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (P11) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P11, ‘0123456789') AND ((P11.YEAR = ‘9999' AND P11.MONTH <> ‘99') OR (P11.MONTH = ‘99' AND P11.DAY <> ‘99')) Record rejected
PVAL11-3 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (P11) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P11, ‘0123456789') AND P11.YEAR <> ‘9999' AND (P11.YEAR < 1875 OR P11.YEAR > CYCLE_YEAR) Record rejected
PVAL11-4 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (P11) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P11, ‘0123456789') AND P11.YEAR <> ‘9999' AND P11.MONTH <> ‘99' AND P11.DAY <> ‘99' AND IS_VALID_DATE (P11) Record rejected
PVAL11-5 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (P11) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P11, ‘0123456789') AND P11.YEAR <> ‘9999' AND P11.MONTH NOT IN [‘01'-'12', ‘99'] AND P11.DAY = ‘99' Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL11)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL11-1 Date of birth is not 8 digits long. Core error
PVAL11-2 Date of birth: Improper use of the ‘Unknown' code. Core error
PVAL11-3 Date of birth must be between the year 1875 and the current reference year inclusively. Core error
PVAL11-4 Date of birth is not a valid calendar date. Core error
PVAL11-5 Date of birth is not a valid partial date: month is invalid. Core error
Revision (PVAL11)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

PVAL12

Purpose

This edit validates the province/territory or country of birth code.

Referenced fields (PVAL12)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P11.YEAR 4 First 4 characters of P11 (year of date of birth) Not applicable
P12 3 Province/territory or country of birth PPROVBIR

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If Date of birth is before 1996 then Province/territory or country of birth must be one of the Eligible Province/territory and country codes prior to 199612.
  • If Date of birth is on or after 1996 then Province/territory or country of birth must be one of the Eligible Province/territory and country codes in and after 199612
  • If Date of birth is unknown then Province/territory or country of birth must be either one of the Eligible Province/territory and country codes prior to 199612 or Eligible Province/territory and country codes in and after 199612.
Edit logic (PVAL12)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL12-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P11.YEAR <> ‘9999' AND P11.YEAR < 1996 AND P12 NOT IN [Eligible Province/territory and country code prior to 1996] Record rejected
PVAL12-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P11.YEAR <> ‘9999' AND P11.YEAR >= 1996 AND P12 NOT IN [Eligible Province/territory and country code in and after 1996] Record rejected
PVAL12-3 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P11.YEAR = ‘9999' AND P12 NOT IN [Eligible Province/territory and country code prior to 1996] AND P12 NOT IN [Eligible Province/territory and country code in and after 1996] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL12)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL12-1 Province/territory or country of birth code is invalid for Date of birth prior to 1996. Core error
PVAL12-2 Province/territory or country of birth code is invalid for Date of birth in and after 1996. Core error
PVAL12-3 Province/territory or country of birth code is invalid. Core error
Revision PVAL12)
Year Description
2004 Business rules changed: Province/territory or country of birth code is now validated against Province/territory or country codes valid at time of birth.

PVAL13

Purpose

This edit validates birth surname.

Referenced fields (PVAL13)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P13 25 Birth surname PBIRNAM

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • Birth surname can be blank.
  • If Birth surname is not blank then
    • It must be exclusively composed of any of the following:
      • Letters: A to Z (upper or lowercase)
      • Accented characters: Â À Ç É Ê Ë È Î Ï Ô Û Ü (upper or lowercase)
      • Special characters: space ( ), period (.), apostrophe ('), hyphen (-)
    • It must contain at least one letter.
Edit logic (PVAL13)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL13-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P13 IS NOT NULL AND NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P13), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') Record rejected
PVAL13-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P13 IS NOT NULL AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P13), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') AND NOT CONTAINS_WORD (UPPER (P13), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ', 1) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL13)
Sub edit Text Type
PVAL13-1 Birth surname is not exclusively composed of acceptable letters, accented characters or special characters. Core error
PVAL13-2 Birth surname does not contain at least one letter. Core error
Revision Feedback report messages (PVAL13)
Year Description
2007 Business rules changed: Acceptable accented characters are specified.

PVAL14

Purpose

This edit validates date of death.

Referenced fields (PVAL14)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P14 8 Date of death PDATDEA
P14.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of P14 (year of date of death) Not applicable
P14.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of P14 (month of date of death) Not applicable
P14.DAY 2 7th and 8th digits of P14 (day of date of death) Not applicable
P19.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of P19 (year of date of transmission) Not applicable
P19.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of P19 (Month of date of transmission) Not applicable
P19.DAY 2 7th and 8th digits of P19 (Day of date of transmission) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records, Date of death
  • Must be 8 digits long.
  • Can be all zeros (when patient is not known to have died).
  • Must be between January 1st, 1992 and Date of transmission inclusively.
  • If Year is unknown then Month must be unknown.
  • If Month is unknown then Day must be unknown.
  • If Year, Month and Day are known then it must be a valid calendar date.
  • If Year and Month are known and Day is unknown then Month must be a valid month.
Edit logic (PVAL14)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL14-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (LENGTH (P14) <> 8 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (P14, ‘0123456789')) Record rejected
PVAL14-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (P14.YEAR = ‘0000' OR P14.MONTH = ‘00' OR P14.DAY = ‘00') AND NOT (P14.YEAR = ‘0000' AND P14.MONTH = ‘00' AND P14.DAY = ‘00') Record rejected
PVAL14-3 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (P14) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P14, ‘0123456789') AND P14.YEAR NOT IN [‘0000', ‘9999'] AND ((P14.MONTH = ‘99' AND P14.DAY = ‘99' AND (P14.YEAR < 1992 OR P14.YEAR > P19.YEAR)) OR (P14.MONTH IN [‘01'-'12'] AND P14.DAY = ‘99' AND (P14.YEAR < 1992 OR P14.YEAR||P14.MONTH > P19.YEAR||P19.MONTH)) OR (P14.MONTH IN [‘01'-'12'] AND P14.DAY IN [‘01', ‘31'] AND IS_VALID_DATE (P14) AND (P14.YEAR < 1992 OR P14 > P19)) Record rejected
PVAL14-4 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (P14) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P14, ‘0123456789') AND ((P14.YEAR = ‘9999' AND P14.MONTH <> ‘99') or (P14.MONTH = ‘99' AND P14.DAY <> ‘99')) Record rejected
PVAL14-5 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (P14) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P14, ‘0123456789') AND P14.YEAR NOT IN [‘0000', ‘9999'] AND P14.MONTH NOT IN [‘00', ‘99'] AND P14.DAY NOT IN [‘00', ‘99'] AND NOT IS_VALID_DATE (P14) Record rejected
PVAL14-6 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (P14) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P14, ‘0123456789') AND P14.YEAR NOT IN [‘0000', ‘9999'] AND P14.MONTH NOT IN [‘00', ‘01'-'12', ‘99'] AND P14.DAY = ‘99' Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL14)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL14-1 Date of death is not 8 digits long. Core error
PVAL14-2 Date of death: Improper use of ‘Patient is not known to have died' code. Core error
PVAL14-3 Date of death must be between January 1st, 1992 and the Date of Transmission inclusively. Core error
PVAL14-4 Date of death: Improper use of ‘Unknown' code. Core error
PVAL14-5 Date of death is not a valid calendar date. Core error
PVAL14-6 Date of death is not a valid partial date: month is invalid. Core error
Revision (PVAL14)
Year Description
2004 Business rules changed: Date of death cannot be beyond Date of transmission.

PVAL15

Purpose

This edit validates the province/territory or country of death code.

Referenced fields (PVAL15)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P14.YEAR 4 First 4 characters of P14 (year of date of death) Not applicable
P15 3 Province/territory or country of death PPROVDEA

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If Date of death is before 1996 then Province/territory or country of death must be one of the Eligible province/territory and country codes prior to 199612.
  • If Date of death is on or after 1996 then Province/territory or country of death must be one of the Eligible province/territory and country codes in and after 199612.
  • If Date of death is unknown then Province/territory or country of death must be either one of the Eligible province/territory and country codes prior to 199612 or Eligible province/territory and country codes in and after 199612.
Edit Logic (PVAL15)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL15-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P14.YEAR NOT IN [‘0000', ‘9999'] AND P14.YEAR < 1996 AND P15 NOT IN [Eligible province/territory or country codes prior to 1996] Record rejected
PVAL15-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P14.YEAR NOT IN [‘0000', ‘9999'] AND P14.YEAR >= 1996 AND P15 NOT IN [Eligible province/territory or country codes in and after 1996] Record rejected
PVAL15-3 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P14.YEAR = ‘9999' AND P15 NOT IN [Eligible Province/Territory or Country of Death codes in and after 1996] AND P15 NOT IN [Eligible province/territory or country codes prior to 1996] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL15)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL15-1 Province/territory or country of death code is invalid for Date of death prior to 1996. Core error
PVAL15-2 Province/territory or country of death code is invalid for Date of death in and after 1996. Core error
PVAL15-3 Province/territory or country of death code is invalid. Core error
Revision (PVAL15)
Year Description
2004 Business rules changed: Province/territory or country of death code is now validated against Province/territory or country codes valid at time of death.

PVAL16

Purpose

This edit validates the death registration number.

Referenced fields (PVAL16)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P16 6 Death registration number PDEAREG

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records, Death registration number
  • Must be exclusively composed of numbers: 0 to 9
  • Must be 6 digits long
Edit logic (PVAL16)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL16-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (LENGTH (P16) <> 6 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (P16, ‘0123456789')) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL16
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL16-1 Death registration number is not 6 digits long. Core error
Revision (PVAL16)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

PVAL17

Purpose

This edit validates the underlying cause of death code.

Referenced fields (PVAL17)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P14.YEAR 4 First 4 characters of P14 (year of date of death) Not applicable
P17 3 Underlying cause of death PCAUSDEA

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • IF Date of death is unknown then Underlying cause of death must be coded as ‘Unknown/unavailable Underlying cause of death'.
  • IF Date of death is before 2000 then Underlying cause of death must be one of the Eligible ICD-9 underlying cause of death codes12.
  • IF Date of death is between 2000 and 2002 inclusively then Underlying cause of death must be one of the Eligible ICD-10 underlying cause of death codes in 2000-200212
  • IF Date of death is in or after 2003 then Underlying cause of death must be one of the Eligible ICD-10 underlying cause of death codes in 2003 and after13.
Edit logic (PVAL17)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL17-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P14.YEAR = ‘9999' AND P17 <> ‘0009' Record rejected
PVAL17-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P14.YEAR NOT IN [‘0000', ‘9999'] AND P14.YEAR < 2000 AND P17 NOT IN [ICD-9 – Cause of death] Record rejected
PVAL17-3 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P14.YEAR NOT IN [‘0000', ‘9999'] AND P14.YEAR >= 2000 AND P14.YEAR <= 2002 AND P17 NOT IN [ICD-10 – Cause of death in 2000-2002] Record rejected
PVAL17-4 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P14.YEAR NOT IN [‘0000', ‘9999'] AND P14.YEAR >= 2003 AND P17 NOT IN [ICD-10 – Cause of death in 2003 and after] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL17)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL17-1 Underlying cause of death must be set to unknown when the Date of death is unknown. Core error
PVAL17-2 Underlying cause of death code is either invalid or not eligible for Date of death prior to 2000. Core error
PVAL17-3 Underlying cause of death code is either invalid or not eligible for Date of death between 2000 and 2002 inclusively. Core error
PVAL17-4 Underlying cause of death code is either invalid or not eligible for Date of death in or after 2003. Core error
Revision (PVAL17)
Year Description
2004 Business rules added:
If Date of death is unknown then Underlying cause of death must be coded as ‘Unknown/unavailable Underlying cause of death'.
If Date of death is in 2003 or after then Underlying cause of death must be coded using the latest revision of ICD-10 Underlying cause of death (2003 and after).

PVAL18

Purpose

This edit validates autopsy confirming cause of death code.

Referenced fields (PVAL18)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P18 1 Autopsy confirming cause of death PAUTOPSY

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • Autopsy confirming cause of death must be one of the eligible autopsy confirming cause of death codes14.
Edit logic (PVAL18)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL18-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P18 NOT IN [Eligible Autopsy confirming cause of death codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL18)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL18-1 Autopsy confirming cause of death code is invalid. Core error
Revision (PVAL18)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

PVAL19

Purpose

This edit validates the patient record date of transmission.

Referenced fields (PVAL19)
Field Length Description Acronym
P19 8 Patient Date of transmission PDATTRAN
P19.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of P19 (year of date of transmission) Not applicable
P19.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of P19 (month of date of transmission) Not applicable
P19.DAY 2 7th and 8th digits of P19 (day of date of transmission) Not applicable
Other parameters (PVAL19)
Parameters Length Description
LOAD_DATE 8 Statistics Canada loading date: date on the Statistics Canada computer clock when the data are loaded on the CCR database.

Business rules

For Input Patient records, Patient Date of transmission
  • Cannot be blank
  • Must be exclusively composed of numbers: 0 to 9
  • Must be 8 digits long
  • Must be a valid calendar date
  • Must be within the previous 10 months from Statistics Canada loading date
Edit logic (PVAL19)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL19-1 P19 IS NULL Record rejected
PVAL19-2 P19 IS NOT NULL AND (LENGTH (P19) <> 8 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (P19, ‘0123456789')) Record rejected
PVAL19-3 P19 IS NOT NULL AND LENGTH (P19) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P19, ‘0123456789') AND NOT IS_VALID_DATE (P19) Record rejected
PVAL19-4 P19 IS NOT NULL AND LENGTH (P19) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P19, ‘0123456789') AND IS_VALID_DATE (P19) AND P19 > LOAD_DATE () Record rejected
PVAL19-5 P19 IS NOT NULL AND LENGTH (P19) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P19, ‘0123456789') AND IS_VALID_DATE (P19) AND P19 < (LOAD_DATE – 10 months) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL19)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL19-1 Patient Date of transmission is missing. Core fatal error
PVAL19-2 Patient Date of transmission is not 8 digits long. Core fatal error
PVAL19-3 Patient Date of transmission is not a valid calendar date. Core fatal error
PVAL19-4 Patient Date of transmission is after Statistics Canada loading date. Core fatal error
PVAL19-5 Patient Date of transmission is more than 10 months before Statistics Canada loading date. Core fatal error
Revision (PVAL19)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

3.4.2 Tumour validation edits

The following table summarizes the purpose of each individual edit of this category.

Table 25 Tumour validation edits summary

Table 25 Tumour validation edits summary
Edit name Purpose
TVAL1 Validates the Tumour reporting province/territory code.
TVAL2 Validates the Tumour patient identification number.
TVAL3 Validates the Tumour reference number.
TVAL4 Validates the CCR identification number.
TVAL5 Validates the Tumour record type code.
TVAL6 Validates the Name of place of residence.
TVAL7 Validates the Postal code.
TVAL8 Validates the Standard geographic code.
TVAL9 Validates the Census tract.
TVAL10 Validates the Health insurance number (HIN).
TVAL11 Validates the Method of diagnosis code.
TVAL12 Validates the Date of diagnosis.
TVAL13 Validates the ICD-9 cancer code.
TVAL14 Validates the Source classification flag.
TVAL15 Validates the ICD-O-2/3 Topography code.
TVAL16 Validates the ICD-O-2 Histology code.
TVAL17 Validates the ICD-O-2 Behaviour code.
TVAL18 Not applicable
TVAL19 Validates the Laterality code.
TVAL20 Not applicable
TVAL21 Validates the ICD-O-3 Histology code.
TVAL22 Validates the ICD-O-3 Behaviour code.
TVAL23 Validates the grade, differentiation or cell indicator code.
TVAL24 Validates the Method used to establish the date of diagnosis code.
TVAL25 Validates the Diagnostic confirmation code.
TVAL26 Validates the Date of transmission.
TVAL27 Validates CS tumour size.
TVAL28 Validates CS extension.
TVAL29 Validates CS tumour size/ext eval.
TVAL30 Validates CS lymph nodes.
TVAL31 Validates CS reg nodes eval.
TVAL32 Validates Regional nodes examined.
TVAL33 Validates Regional nodes positive.
TVAL34 Validates CS mets at dx.
TVAL35 Validates CS mets eval.
TVAL36 Validates CS site-specific factor 1.
TVAL37 Validates CS site-specific factor 2.
TVAL38 Validates CS site-specific factor 3.
TVAL39 Validates CS site-specific factor 4.
TVAL40 Validates CS site-specific factor 5.
TVAL41 Validates CS site-specific factor 6.
TVAL42 Validates AJCC clinical T.
TVAL43 Validates AJCC clinical N.
TVAL44 Validates AJCC clinical M.
TVAL45 Validates AJCC pathologic T.
TVAL46 Validates AJCC pathologic N.
TVAL47 Validates AJCC pathologic M.
TVAL48 Validates AJCC clinical TNM stage group.
TVAL49 Validates AJCC pathologic TNM stage group.
TVAL50 Validates AJCC TNM stage group.
TVAL51 Validates AJCC edition number code.
TVAL52 Validates CS Version 1st.
TVAL53 Validates Ambiguous Terminology Diagnosis.
TVAL54 Validates Date of Conclusive Diagnosis.
TVAL55 Validates Type of Multiple Tumours Reported as One Primary.
TVAL56 Validates Date of Multiple Tumours.
TVAL57 Validates Multiplicity Counter.

TVAL1

Purpose

This edit validates the Tumour reporting province/territory code.

Referenced Fields (TVAL1)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
Other parameters (TVAL1)
Parameters Length Description
PTCR_CODE 2 Province/territory code of the PTCR that is submitting the data.

Business rules

For Input Tumour records
  • Tumour reporting province/territory must be equal to province/territory code of the PTCR that is submitting the data15.
Edit logic (TVAL1)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL1-1 T1 <> PTCR_CODE Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL1)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL1-1 Tumour reporting province/territory code does not match PTCR province/territory code. Core error
Revision (TVAL1)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL2

Purpose

This edit validates the tumour patient identification number.

Referenced fields (TVAL2)
Field Length Description Acronym
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN

Business rules

For Input Tumour records, Patient identification number
  • Must be exclusively composed of any of the following:
    • Uppercase letters: A to Z
    • Numbers: 0 to 9
  • Cannot be exclusively composed of zeros.
Edit logic (TVAL2)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL2-1 IS_COMPOSED_OF (T2, ‘0') Record rejected
TVAL2-2 NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (T2, ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789') Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL2)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL2-1 Patient identification number cannot be exclusively composed of zeros. Core error
TVAL2-2 Patient identification number is not exclusively composed of uppercase letters and/or numbers. Core error
Revision (TVAL2)
Year Description
2004 Business rule changed: Apostrophes, hyphens, periods and inner spaces are not accepted anymore.

TVAL3

Purpose

This edit validates the tumour reference number.

Referenced fields (TVAL3)
Field Length Description Acronym
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN

Business rules

For Input Tumour records, Tumour reference number
  • Must be exclusively composed of any of the following:
    • Numbers: 0 to 9
    • Uppercase letters: A to Z
    • Special characters: space ( ), period (.), apostrophe (‘), hyphens (-)
  • Cannot be exclusively composed of zeros.
Edit logic (TVAL3)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL3-1 IS_COMPOSED_OF (T3, ‘0') Record rejected
TVAL3-2 NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (T3, ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789 -‘.') Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL3)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL3-1 Tumour reference number cannot be exclusively composed of zeros. Core error
TVAL3-2 Tumour reference number is not exclusively composed of acceptable letters, numbers or special characters. Core error
Revision (TVAL3)
Year Description
2004 Business rule added: Tumour reference number cannot be exclusively composed of zeros.

TVAL4

Purpose

This edit validates the CCR identification number.

Referenced fields (TVAL4)
Field Length Description Acronym
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T4.ID 8 First 8 digits of T4 (CCR ID sequence number) Not applicable
T4.CHECK_DIGIT 1 9th digit of T4 (CCR ID check digit) Not applicable

Business rules

For Input Tumour records
  • If CCR identification number is reported then
    • Must be exclusively composed of numbers: 0 to 9
    • Must be 9 digits long;
    • Cannot be all zeros;
    • Must have a valid check digit16.
Edit logic (TVAL4)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL4-1 T4 IS NOT NULL AND (LENGTH (T4) <> 9 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (T4, ‘0123456789')) Record rejected
TVAL4-2 T4 = ‘000000000' Record rejected
TVAL4-3 T4 IS NOT NULL AND T4 <> ‘000000000' AND LENGTH (T4) = 9 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T4, ‘0123456789') AND T4.CHECK_DIGIT <> CALCULATE_CCR_CHECK_DIGIT (T4.ID) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL4)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL4-1 CCR identification number is not 9 digits long. Core error
TVAL4-2 CCR identification number cannot be all zeros. Core error
TVAL4-3 CCR identification number is invalid. Core error
Revision (TVAL4)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL5

Purpose

This edit validates the tumour record type code.

Referenced fields (TVAL5)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE

Business rules

For Input Tumour records, Tumour record type
  • Cannot be blank.
  • Must be one of the Eligible tumour record type codes17 .
Edit logic (TVAL5)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL5-1 T5 IS NULL OR T5 NOT IN [Eligible tumour record type codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL5)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL5-1 Tumour record type code is missing or invalid. Core fatal error
Revision (TVAL5)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL6

Purpose

This edit validates the name of place of residence.

Referenced fileds (TVAL6)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T6 25 Name of place of residence TPLACRES

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Name of place of residence can be blank.
  • If Name of place of residence is not blank then it can be any combination of the following:
    • Letters: A to Z (upper or lowercase)
      • Accented characters: Â À Ç É Ê Ë È Î Ï Ô Û Ü (upper or lowercase)
      • Special characters: space ( ), period (.), apostrophe ('), hyphen (-), exclamation mark (!), ampersand (&), forward slash (/), parenthese [“(“and”)”], number sign (#), comma (,)
  • It must contain a word of at least 2 letters.
Edit logic TVAL6)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL6-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T6 IS NOT NULL AND IS NOT COMPOSED OF (UPPER (T6), ‘ABCDEFGHILKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ.'-!&/()#,') Record rejected
TVAL6-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T6 IS NOT NULL AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (T6), ‘ABCDEFGHILKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-!&/()#,') AND NOT CONTAINS_WORD (UPPER (T6), ‘ABCDEFGHILKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ', 2) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL6)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL6-1 Name of place of residence is not exclusively composed of acceptable letters, accented characters or special characters. Core error
TVAL6-2 Name of place of residence does not contain a word of at least 2 letters. Core error
Revision (TVAL6)
Year Description
2007 Business rules changed: Acceptable accented characters and special characters are specified.
Edit logic: New edit logic added.
Feedback report messages: New message added.

TVAL7

Purpose

This edit validates the postal code.

Referenced fields (TVAL7)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T7 6 Postal code TPOSTCOD
T7.FIRST 1 1st character of T7 Not applicable
T7.SECOND 1 2nd character of T7 Not applicable
T7.THIRD 1 3rd character of T7 Not applicable
T7.FOURTH 1 4th character of T7 Not applicable
T7.FIFTH 1 5th character of T7 Not applicable
T7.SIXTH 1 6th character of T7 Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records, Postal code
  • Must be 6 characters long.
  • Can be unknown.
  • If not unknown then
    • 1st, 3rd and 5th characters must be uppercase letters: A-Z
    • 2nd, 4th and 6th characters must be numbers: 0-9
Edit logic (TVAL7)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL7-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (LENGTH(T7) <> 6 OR (T7 <> ‘999999' AND (T7.FIRST NOT IN [A-Z] OR T7.SECOND NOT IN [0-9] OR T7.THIRD NOT IN [A-Z] OR T7.FOURTH NOT IN [0-9] OR T7.FIFTH NOT IN [A-Z] OR T7.SIXTH NOT IN [0-9]))) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL7)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL7-1 Postal code has an invalid format. Core error
Revision (TVAL7)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL8

Purpose

This edit validates the Standard geographic code.

Referenced fields (TVAL8)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T8 7 Standard geographic code TCODPLAC
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Date of diagnosis is between 1992 and 1995 then Standard geographic code must be one of the Eligible Standard geographic classification codes from 1992 to 199512.
  • If Date of diagnosis is between 1996 and 2000 then Standard geographic code must be one of the Eligible Standard geographic classification codes from 1996 to 200012.
  • If Date of diagnosis is between 2001 and 2005 then Standard geographic code must be one of the Eligible Standard geographic classification codes from 2001 to 200512.
  • If Date of Diagnosis is between 2006 and 2010 then Standard geographic code must be one of the Eligible Standard geographic classification codes from 2006 and 2010.
Edit logic (TVAL8)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL8-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR BETWEEN (‘1992', ‘1995') AND T8 NOT IN [Eligible Standard geographic classification codes from 1992 to 1995] Record rejected
TVAL8-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR BETWEEN (‘1996', ‘2000') AND T8 NOT IN [Eligible Standard geographic classification codes from 1996 to 2000] Record rejected
TVAL8-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR BETWEEN (‘2001', ‘2005') AND T8 NOT IN [Eligible Standard geographic classification codes from 2001 to 2005] Record rejected
TVAL8-4 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR BETWEEN (‘2006', ‘2010') AND T8 NOT IN [Eligible Standard Geographic Classification codes from 2006 to 2010] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL8)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL8-1 Standard geographic code is invalid according to the Standard geographic classification – 1991. Core error
TVAL8-2 Standard geographic code is invalid according to the Standard geographic classification – 1996. Core error
TVAL8-3 Standard geographic code is invalid according to the Standard geographic classification – 2001. Core error
TVAL8-4 Standard geographic code is invalid according to the Standard geographic classification – 2006. Core error
Revision (TVAL8)
Year Description
2006 Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages added: SGC – 2006 added
2001 Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages added: SGC – 2001 added
1996 Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages added: SGC – 1996 added

TVAL9

Purpose

This edit validates the census tract.

Referenced fields (TVAL9)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T9 9 Census tract TCENTRAC
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Date of diagnosis is between 1992 and 1995 then Census tract must be reported and must be one of the Eligible Census tracts from 1992 to 199512.
  • If Date of diagnosis is between 1996 and 2000 then Census tract must be reported and must be one of the Eligible Census tracts from 1996 to 200012.
  • If Date of diagnosis is between 2001 and 2005 then Census tract must be reported and must be one of the Eligible Census tracts from 2001 to 200512
  • If Date of Diagnosis is 2006 and onwards then Census Tract must not be reported (field should be left blank).
Edit logic (TVAL9)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL9-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR BETWEEN (‘1992', ‘1995') AND (T9 IS NULL OR T9 NOT IN [Eligible Census tracts from 1992 to 1995]) Record rejected
TVAL9-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR BETWEEN (‘1996', ‘2000') AND (T9 IS NULL OR T9 NOT IN [Eligible Census tracts from 1996 to 2000]) Record rejected
TVAL9-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR BETWEEN (‘2001', ‘2005') AND (T9 IS NULL OR T9 NOT IN [Eligible Census tracts from 2001 to 2005]) Record rejected
TVAL9-4 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= (‘2006') AND T9 <> NULL Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL9)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL9-1 Census tract is invalid according to the Census tract Data Dictionary – 1991. Core error
TVAL9-2 Census tract is invalid according to the Census tract Data Dictionary – 1996. Core error
TVAL9-3 Census tract is invalid according to the Census tract Data Dictionary – 2001. Core error
TVAL9-4 Census tract must not be reported for cases diagnosed in 2006 and onwards. Core error
Revision (TVAL9)
Year Description
2006 Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages added: Census tract effective date range ended in 2005. For cases diagnosed in 2006 and onwards, T9 (Census Tract) must be reported as blank (null)
2001 Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages added: Eligible Census tracts – 2001 added
1996 Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages added: Eligible Census tracts – 1996 added

TVAL10

Purpose

This edit validates the health insurance number (HIN).

Referenced fields (TVAL10)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T10 15 Health insurance number THIN

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records,
  • If Health insurance number is reported then
  • It must be at least 6 characters long.
  • It must be exclusively composed of any of the following:
    • Uppercase letters: A to Z
    • Numbers: 0 to 9
Edit logic (TVAL10)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL10-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T10 IS NOT NULL AND LENGTH (T10) < 6 Record rejected
TVAL10-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T10 IS NOT NULL AND NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (T10, ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789') Record rejected
Feddback report messages (TVAL10)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL10-1 Health insurance number is less than 6 characters long. Core error
TVAL10-2 Health insurance number is not exclusively composed of uppercase letters and/or numbers. Core error
Revision (TVAL10)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL11

Purpose

This edit validates the method of diagnosis code.

Referenced fields (TVAL11)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T11 1 Method of diagnosis TMETHDIAG

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Method of diagnosis must be one of the Eligible method of diagnosis codes18.
Edit logic (TVAL11)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL11-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T11 NOT IN [Eligible method of diagnosis codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL11)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL11-1 Method of diagnosis code is invalid. Core error
Revision (TVAL11)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL12

Purpose

This edit validates the date of diagnosis.

Referenced fields (TVAL12)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12 8 Date of diagnosis TDATDIAG
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T12.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of T12 (month of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T12.DAY 2 Last 2 digits of T12 (day of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
Other parameters (TVAL12)
Parameters Length Description
CYCLE_YEAR 4 Reference year

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records, Date of Diagnosis
  • Must be exclusively composed of numbers: 0 to 9.
  • Must be 8 digits long.
  • Must be between January 1st, 1992 and December 31st of Reference year inclusively.
  • Year cannot be unknown.
  • If Month is unknown then Day must be unknown.
  • If Year, Month and Day are known then it must be a valid calendar date.
  • If Year and Month are known and Day is unknown then Month must be a valid month.
Edit logic (TVAL12)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL12-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (LENGTH (T12) <> 8 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (T12, ‘0123456789')) Record rejected
TVAL12-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T12) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T12, ‘0123456789') AND T12.MONTH = ‘99' AND T12.DAY <> ‘99' Record rejected
TVAL12-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T12) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T12, ‘0123456789'' AND (T12.YEAR < 1992 OR T12.YEAR > CYCLE_YEAR) Record rejected
TVAL12-4 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T12) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T12, ‘0123456789') AND T12.MONTH <> ‘99' AND T12.DAY <> ‘99' AND NOT IS_VALID_DATE (T12) Record rejected
TVAL12-5 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T12) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T12, ‘0123456789') AND T12.MONTH NOT IN [‘01'-'12', ‘99'] AND T12.DAY = ‘99' Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL12)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL12-1 Date of diagnosis is not composed of 8 numbers. Core error
TVAL12-2 Date of diagnosis: Improper use of ‘Unknown' code. Core error
TVAL12-3 Date of diagnosis must be between January 1st, 1992 and December 31st of Reference year inclusively. Core error
TVAL12-4 Date of diagnosis is not a valid calendar date. Core error
TVAL12-5 Date of diagnosis is not a valid partial date: month is invalid. Core error
Revision (TVAL12)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL13

Purpose

This edit validates the ICD-9 cancer code.

Referenced fields (TVAL13)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T13 4 ICD-9 cancer code TICD_9

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If ICD-9 Cancer code is reported then it must be one of the Eligible ICD-9 Cancer codes19.
Edit logic (TVAL13)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL13-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T13 <> ‘0000' AND T13 NOT IN [Eligible ICD-9 Cancer codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL13)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL13-1 ICD-9 Cancer code is either invalid or not eligible for the CCR system. Core error
Revision (TVAL13)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL14

Purpose

This edit validates the source classification flag.

Referenced fields (TVAL14)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T14 1 Source classification flag TSCF

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Source classification flag must be one of the Eligible source classification flags20.
Edit logic (TVAL14)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL14-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T14 NOT IN [Eligible source classification flags] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL14)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL14-1 Source classification flag is invalid. Core error
Revision (TVAL14)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL15

Purpose

This edit validates the ICD-O-2/3 topography code.

Referenced fields (TVAL15)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • ICD-O-2/3 Topography must be one of the Eligible ICD-O-2/3 Topography codes12.
Edit logic (TVAL15)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL15-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T15 NOT IN [Eligible ICD-O-2/3 Topography codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL15)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL15-1 ICD-O-2/3 Topography code is either invalid or not eligible for the CCR System. Core error
Revision (TVAL15)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL16

Purpose

This edit validates the ICD-O-2 histology code.

Referenced fields (TVAL16)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T16 4 ICD-O-2 Histology TICD_O2H

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If ICD-O-2 Histology is reported then it must be one of the Eligible ICD–O–2 Histology codes12.
Edit logic (TVAL16)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL16-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T15 <> ‘0000' AND T16 NOT IN [Eligible ICD-O-2 Histology codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL16)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL16-1 ICD-O-2 Histology code is either invalid or not eligible for the CCR System. Core error
Revision (TVAL16)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL17

Purpose

This edit validates the ICD-O-2 Behaviour code.

Referenced fields (TVAL17)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T17 1 ICD-O-2 Behaviour TICD_O2B

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If ICD-O-2 Behaviour is reported then it must be one of the Eligible ICD–O–2 Behaviour codes21.
Edit logic (TVAL17)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL17-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T17 NOT IN [Eligible ICD–O–;2 Behaviour codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL17)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL17-1 ICD-O-2 Behaviour code is either invalid or not eligible for the CCR system. Core error
Revision (TVAL17)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL18

Purpose

Not applicable

Referenced fields (TVAL18)
Field Length Description Acronym
T18 4 Filler Not applicable

Business rules

For Input Tumour records
  • Filler can be anything, including blank.
Edit logic (TVAL18)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Feedback report messages (TVAL18)
Sub–edit Text Type
Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Revision (TVAL18)
Year Description
2004 Edit removed: Filler can be anything, including blank.

Note
This empty validation is kept as a placeholder for future requirement implementation.

TVAL19

Purpose

This edit validates the laterality code.

Referenced fields (TVAL19)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T19 1 Laterality TLATERAL

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Laterality must be one of the Eligible laterality codes22.
Edit logic (TVAL19)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL19-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T19 NOT IN [Eligible laterality codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL19)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL19-1 Laterality code is invalid. Core error
Revision (TVAL19)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL20

Purpose

Not applicable

Referenced fields (TVAL20)
Field Length Description Acronym
T20 1 Filler Not applicable

Business rules

For Input Tumour records
  • Filler can be anything, including blank.
Edit logic TVAL20)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Feedback report messages (TVAL20)
Sub–edit Text Type
Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Revision (TVAL20)
Year Description
2004 Edit removed: Filler can be anything, including blank.

Note:
This empty validation is kept as a placeholder for future requirement implementation.

TVAL21

Purpose

This edit validates the ICD-O-3 Histology code.

Referenced fields (TVAL21)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • ICD-O-3 Histology must be one of the Eligible ICD–O–3 Histology codes12,23.
Edit logic (TVAL21)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL21-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T21 NOT IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Histology codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL21)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL21-1 ICD-O-3 Histology code is either invalid or not eligible for the CCR System. Core error
Revision (TVAL21)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Validation edit No.21M.

TVAL22

Purpose

This edit validates the ICD-O-3 Behaviour code.

Referenced fields TVAL22)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • ICD-O-3 Behaviour must be one of the Eligible ICD–O–3 Behaviour codes24.
Edit logic (TVAL22)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL22-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T22 NOT IN [Eligible ICD–O–3 Behaviour codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages TVAL22)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL22-1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour code is either invalid or not eligible for the CCR system. Core error
Revision (TVAL22)
Year Description
2004 Edit reorganized: Edit formerly known as Validation edit No.22 moved to TVAL26.
Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Validation edit No.21B.

TVAL23

Purpose

This edit validates the grade, differentiation or cell indicator code.

Referenced fields (TVAL23)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T23 1 Grade, differentiation or cell indicator TGRADE

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Grade, differentiation or cell indicator must be one of the Eligible grade, differentiation or cell indicator codes25.
Edit logic (TVAL23)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL23-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T23 NOT IN [Eligible grade, differentiation or cell indicator codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL23)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL23-1 Grade, differentiation or cell indicator code is invalid. Core error
Revision (TVAL23)
Year Description
2004 Edit reorganized: Edit formerly known as Validation edit No.23 moved to TVAL24.
Edit added: New edit.

TVAL24

Purpose

This edit validates the method used to establish the date of diagnosis code.

Referenced fields (TVAL24)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T24 1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis TMETHUSED

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Method used to establish the date of diagnosis must be one of the Eligible method used to establish the date of diagnosis codes26.
Edit logic (TVAL24)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL24-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T24 NOT IN [Eligible method used to establish the date of diagnosis codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL24)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL24-1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis code is invalid. Core error
Revision(TVAL24)
Year Description
2004 Edit reorganized: Edit formerly known as Validation edit No.24 moved to TVAL25.
Edit renamed: Current edit formerly known as Validation edit No.23.

TVAL25

Purpose

This edit validates the diagnostic confirmation code.

Referenced fields (TVAL25)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T25 1 Diagnostic Confirmation TMETHCONF

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Diagnostic confirmation must be one of the Eligible diagnostic confirmation codes27.
Edit logic (TVAL25)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL25-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T25 NOT IN [Eligible diagnostic confirmation codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL25)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL25-1 Diagnostic confirmation code is invalid. Core error
Revision (TVAL25)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Current edit formerly known as Validation edit No.24.

TVAL26

Purpose

This edit validates the tumour date of transmission.

Referenced fields (TVAL26)
Field Length Description Acronym
T26 8 Tumour date of transmission TDATTRAN
T26.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T26 (year of date of transmission) Not applicable
T26.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of T26 (month of date of transmission) Not applicable
T26.DAY 2 7th and 8th digits of T26 (day of date of transmission) Not applicable
Other parameters (TVAL26)
Parameters Length Description
LOAD_DATE 8 Statistics Canada loading date: Date on the Statistics Canada computer clock when the data are loaded on the CCR database.

Business rules

For Input Tumour records, Tumour date of transmission
  • Cannot be blank.
  • Must be exclusively composed of numbers: 0 to 9.
  • Must be 8 digits long.
  • Must be a valid calendar date.
  • Must be within the previous 10 months from Statistics Canada loading date.
Edit logic (TVAL26)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL26-1 T26 IS NULL Record rejected
TVAL26-2 T26 IS NOT NULL AND (LENGTH (T26) <> 8 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (T26, ‘0123456789')) Record rejected
TVAL26-3 T26 IS NOT NULL AND LENGTH (T26) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T26, ‘0123456789') AND NOT IS_VALID_DATE (T26) Record rejected
TVAL26-4 T26 IS NOT NULL AND LENGTH (T26) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P26, ‘0123456789') AND IS_VALID_DATE (T26) AND T26 > LOAD_DATE Record rejected
TVAL26-5 T26 IS NOT NULL AND LENGTH (T26) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T26, ‘0123456789') AND IS_VALID_DATE (T26) AND T26 < (LOAD_DATE – 10 months) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL26)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL26-1 Tumour date of transmission is missing. Core fatal error
TVAL26-2 Tumour date of transmission is not 8 digits long. Core fatal error
TVAL26-3 Tumour date of transmission is not a valid calendar date. Core fatal error
TVAL26-4 Tumour date of transmission is after Statistics Canada loading date. Core fatal error
TVAL26-5 Tumour date of transmission is more than 10 months before Statistics Canada loading date. Core fatal error
Revision (TVAL26)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Current edit formerly known as Validation edit No.22.

TVAL27

Purpose

This edit validates CS tumour size.

Referenced fields (TVAL27)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS tumour size must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL27)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL27-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <>'999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_TUMOUR_SIZE(T15, T21, T27) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL27)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL27-1 CS tumour size is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL27)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL28

Purpose

This edit validates CS extension.

Referenced fields (TVAL28)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD—O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR Collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable,
  • CS extension must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL28)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL28-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_EXTENSION(T15, T21, T28) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL28)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL28-1 CS extension is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL28)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL29

Purpose

This edit validates CS tumour size/ext eval.

Referenced fields (TVAL29)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS tumour size/ext eval must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL29)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL29-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID _CS_TUMOUR_SIZE/EXT_EVAL(T15, T21, T29) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL29)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL29-1 CS tumour size/ext eval is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL29)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL30

Purpose

This edit validates CS lymph nodes.

Referenced fields (TVAL30)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS lymph nodes must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL30)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL30-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID CS_LYMPH_NODES(T15, T21, T30) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL30)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL30-1 CS lymph nodes is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL30)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL31

Purpose

This edit validates CS reg nodes eval.

Referenced fields (TVAL31)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS reg nodes eval must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL31)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL31-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_REG_NODES_EVAL(T15, T21, T31) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL31)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL31-1 CS reg nodes eval is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL31)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL32

Purpose

This edit validates regional nodes examined.

Referenced fields (TVAL32)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • Regional nodes examined must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL32)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL32-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_REGIONAL_NODES_EXAMINED(T15, T21, T32) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL32)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL32-1 Regional nodes examined is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL32)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL33

Purpose

This edit validates regional nodes positive.

Referenced fields (TVAL33)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • Regional nodes positive must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL33)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL33-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_REGIONAL_NODES_POSITIVE(T15, T21, T33) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages TVAL33)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL33-1 Regional nodes positive is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL33)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL34

Purpose

This edit validates CS mets at dx.

Referenced fields (TVAL34)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS mets at dx must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL34)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL34-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38 <>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_METS_AT_DX(T15, T21, T34) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL34)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL34-1 CS mets at dx is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL34)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL35

Purpose

This edit validates CS mets eval.

Referenced fields (TVAL35)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS mets eval must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL35)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL35-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2']AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_METS_EVAL(T15, T21, T35) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL35)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL35-1 CS mets eval is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL35)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL36

Purpose

This edit validates CS site-specific factor 1.

Referenced fields (TVAL36)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS site-specific factor 1 must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL36)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL36-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_SITE-SPECIFIC_FACTOR_1(T15, T21, T36) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL36)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL36-1 CS site-specific factor 1 is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL36)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm.
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL37

Purpose

This edit validates CS site-specific factor 2.

Referenced fields (TVAL37)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS site-specific factor 2 must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL37)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL37-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_SITE-SPECIFIC_FACTOR_2(T15, T21, T37) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL37)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL37-1 CS site-specific factor 2 is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL37)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm.
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL38

Purpose

This edit validates CS site-specific factor 3.

Referenced fields (TVAL38)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS site-specific factor 3 must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL38)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL38-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_SITE-SPECIFIC_FACTOR_3(T15, T21, T38) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL38)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL38-1 CS site-specific factor 3 is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL38)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm.
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL39

Purpose

This edit validates CS site-specific factor 4.

Referenced fields (TVAL39)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS site-specific factor 4 must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL39)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL39-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_SITE-SPECIFIC_FACTOR_4(T15, T21, T39) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL39)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL39-1 CS site-specific factor 4 is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL39)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm.
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL40

Purpose

This edit validates CS site-specific factor 5.

Referenced fields (TVAL40)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS site-specific factor 5 must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL40)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL40-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_SITE-SPECIFIC_FACTOR_5(T15, T21, T40) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL40)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL40-1 CS site-specific factor 5 is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL40)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL41

Purpose

This edit validates CS site-specific factor 6.

Referenced fields (TVAL41)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD–O–2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS site-specific factor 6 must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL41)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL41-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_SITE-SPECIFIC_FACTOR_6(T15, T21, T41) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL41)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL41-1 CS site-specific factor 6 is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL41)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL42

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC clinical T

Referenced fields (TVAL42)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T42 9 AJCC clinical T TAJCCCLINT

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC clinical T must be one of the Eligible AJCC clinical T values for the corresponding site30.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TVAL42)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL42-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T42 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC clinical T for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL42)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL42-1 AJCC clinical T is invalid for reported site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL42)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL43

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC clinical N.

Referenced fields (TVAL43)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T43 3 AJCC clinical N TAJCCCLINN

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC clinical N must be one of the Eligible AJCC clinical N values for the corresponding site31.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example : Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TVAL43)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL43-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T43 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC clinical N for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL43)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL43-1 AJCC clinical N is invalid for reported site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL43)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL44

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC clinical M.

Referenced fields (TVAL44)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T44 3 AJCC clinical M TAJCCCLINM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC clinical M must be one of the Eligible AJCC clinical M values for the corresponding site32.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Ex: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TVAL44)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL44-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T44 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC clinical M for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL44)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL44-1 AJCC clinical M is invalid for reported site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL44)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL45

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC pathologic T.

Referenced fields (TVAL45)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T45 9 AJCC pathologic T TAJCCPATHT

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC pathologic T must be one of the Eligible AJCC pathologic T values for the corresponding site33.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TVAL45)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL45-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T45 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC pathologic T for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL45)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL45-1 AJCC pathologic T is invalid for reported site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL45)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL46

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC pathologic N.

Referenced fields (TVAL46)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T46 3 AJCC pathologic N TAJCCPATHN

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC pathologic N must be one of the Eligible AJCC pathologic N values for the corresponding site34.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TVAL46)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL46-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T46 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC pathologic N for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL46)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL46-1 AJCC pathologic N is invalid for reported site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL46)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL47

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC pathologic M.

Referenced fields (TVAL47)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T47 3 AJCC pathologic M TAJCCPATHM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC pathologic M must be one of the Eligible pathologic M values for the corresponding site35.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TVAL47)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL47-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T47 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC pathologic M for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL47)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL47-1 AJCC pathologic M is invalid for reported site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL47)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL48

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC clinical TNM stage group.

Referenced fields (TVAL48)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T48 4 AJCC clinical TNM stage group TAJCCCLINSG

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC clinical TNM stage group must be one of the Eligible AJCC clinical TNM stage group values for the corresponding site38.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TVAL48)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL48-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T48 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC clinical TNM stage group for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL48)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL48-1 AJCC clinical TNM stage group is invalid for reported site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL48)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL49

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC pathologic TNM stage group.

Referenced fields (TVAL49)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T49 4 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group TAJCCPATHSG

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC pathologic TNM stage group must be one of the Eligible AJCC pathologic TNM stage group values for the corresponding site37.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast orprostate.

Edit logic (TVAL49)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL49-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T49 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC pathologic TNM stage group for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL49)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL49-1 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group is invalid for reported site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL49)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL50

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC TNM stage group.

Referenced fields (TVAL50)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T50 4 AJCC TNM stage group TAJCCSG

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC TNM stage group must be one of the Eligible AJCC TNM stage group values for the corresponding site37.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TVAL50)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL50-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T50 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC TNM stage group for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL50)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL50-1 AJCC TNM stage group is invalid for reported site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL50)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL51

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC edition number code.

Referenced fields (TVAL51)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T51 2 AJCC edition number TAJCCEDNUM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC edition number must be one of the Eligible AJCC edition number codes38.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TVAL51)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL51-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T51 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC edition number codes] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL51)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL51-1 AJCC edition number code is either invalid or not eligible for the CCR system. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL51)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL52

Purpose

This edit validates CS Version 1st.

Referenced fields (TVAL52)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS version 1st must be one of the Eligible CS Version 1st codes.
Edit logic (TVAL52)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL52-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2006' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' or T52 <> ‘999999') AND T52 NOT IN [Eligible CS Version 1st codes] CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL52)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL52-1 CS Version 1st is not a valid version number CS error
Revision (TVAL52)
Year Description
2007 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL53

Purpose

This edit validates the Ambiguous terminology diagnosis code.

Referenced fields (TVAL53)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T53 1 Ambiguous Terminology Diagnosis TAMBIGTERM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Ambiguous terminology diagnosis must be one of the Eligible Ambiguous terminology diagnosis codes.
Edit logic (TVAL53)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL53-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T53 IS NOT NULL AND NOT IN [Eligible Ambiguous terminology diagnosis codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL53)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL53-1 Ambiguous terminology diagnosis code is invalid. Core error
Revision (TVAL53)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL54

Purpose

This edit validates the Date of conclusive diagnosis.

Referenced fields (TVAL54)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T54 8 Date of conclusive diagnosis TDATCONCLUSDIAG
T54.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T54 (year of date of conclusive diagnosis) Not applicable
T54.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of T54 (month of date of conclusive diagnosis) Not applicable
T54.DAY 2 Last 2 digits of T56 (day of date of conclusive diagnosis) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records, Date of conclusive diagnosis
  • Must be exclusively composed of numbers: 0 to 9.
  • Must be 8 digits long.
  • If Year or Month or Day is accessioned then the Date of conclusive diagnosis must be accessioned.
  • If Year or Month or Day is not applicable then the Date of conclusive diagnosis must be not applicable.
  • If Year is unknown then Month and Day must be unknown.
  • If Month is unknown then Day must be unknown.
  • If Year and Month are known and Day is unknown then Month must be a valid month.
  • If Year, Month and Day are known then it must be a valid calendar date.
  • Must be between January 1st, 2008 and December 31st of Reference year inclusively.
Edit logic (TVAL54)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL54-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T54) <> 8 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (T54, ‘0123456789') Record Rejected
TVAL54-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T54) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T54, ‘0123456789') AND (T54.YEAR = ‘0000' OR T54.MONTH='00' OR T54.DAY='00') AND (T54.YEAR <> ‘0000' OR T54.MONTH <> ‘00' OR T54.DAY <> ‘00') Record Rejected
TVAL54-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T54) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T54, ‘0123456789') AND (T54.YEAR = ‘8888' OR T54.MONTH='88' OR T54.DAY='88')  AND (T54.YEAR <> ‘8888' OR T54.MONTH <> ‘88' OR T54.DAY <> ‘88') Record Rejected
TVAL54-4 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T54) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T54, ‘0123456789') AND T54.YEAR = ‘9999' AND (T54.MONTH <> ‘99' OR T54.DAY <> ‘99') Record Rejected
TVAL54-5 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T54) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T54, ‘0123456789') AND T54.MONTH = ‘99' AND T54.DAY <> ‘99' Record Rejected
TVAL54-6 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T54) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T54, ‘0123456789') AND T54.MONTH NOT IN [‘01'-'12', ‘99'] AND T54.DAY = ‘99' Record Rejected
TVAL54-7 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T54) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T54, ‘0123456789') AND T54 NOT IN [‘00000000', ‘88888888', ‘99999999'] AND T54.MONTH <> ‘99' AND T54.DAY <> ‘99' AND NOT IS_VALID_DATE Record Rejected
TVAL54-8 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T54 NOT IN [‘00000000', ‘88888888', ‘99999999'] AND (T54.YEAR < 2008 OR T54.YEAR > CYCLE_YEAR) Record Rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL54)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL54-1 Date of conclusive diagnosis is not composed of 8 numbers. Core Error
TVAL54-2 Year, month and day must be ‘accessioned'. Core Error
TVAL54-3 Year, month and day must be ‘not applicable'. Core Error
TVAL54-4 Year, month and day must be ‘unknown'. Core Error
TVAL54-5 Date of conclusive diagnosis: month and day must be ‘unknown'. Core Error
TVAL54-6 Date of conclusive diagnosis is not a valid partial date: month is invalid. Core Error
TVAL54-7 Date of conclusive diagnosis is not a valid calendar date. Core Error
TVAL54-8 Date of conclusive diagnosis is out of scope. Core Error
Revision (TVAL54)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL55

Purpose

This edit validates the Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary code.

Referenced fields (TVAL55)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T55 2 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary TMULTTUMONEPRIM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records, Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary code
  • Must contain a valid code.
Edit logic (TVAL55)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL55-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T55 IS NOT NULL AND T55 NOT IN [Eligible Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL55)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL55-1 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary code is invalid. Core error
Revision (TVAL55)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL56

Purpose

This edit validates the Date of multiple tumours.

Referenced fields (TVAL56)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T56 8 Date of multiple tumours TDATMULT
T56.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T56 (year of date of multiple tumours) Not applicable
T56.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of T56 (month of date of multiple tumours) Not applicable
T56.DAY 2 Last 2 digits of T56 (day of date of multiple tumours) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records, Date of multiple tumours
  • Must be exclusively composed of numbers: 0 to 9.
  • Must be 8 digits long.
  • If Year or Month or Day relates to a single tumour then the Date of multiple tumours must contain all zeros.
  • If Year or Month or Day is not applicable then the Date of multiple tumours must be not applicable.
  • If Year is unknown then Month and Day must be unknown.
  • If Month is unknown then Day must be unknown.
  • If Year and Month are known and Day is unknown then Month must be a valid month.
  • If Year, Month and Day are known then it must be a valid calendar date.
  • Must be between January 1st, 2008 and December 31st of Reference year inclusively.
Edit logic (TVAL56)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL56-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T56) <> 8 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (T56, ‘0123456789') Record Rejected
TVAL56-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T56) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T56, ‘0123456789') AND (T56.YEAR = ‘0000' OR T56.MONTH = ‘00' OR T56.DAY = ‘00') AND (T56.YEAR <> ‘0000' OR T56.MONTH <> ‘00' OR T56.DAY <> ‘00') Record Rejected
TVAL56-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T56) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T56, ‘0123456789') AND (T56.YEAR = ‘8888' OR T56.MONTH = ‘88' OR T56.DAY = ‘88') AND (T56.YEAR <> ‘8888' OR T56.MONTH <> ‘88' OR T56.DAY <> ‘88') Record Rejected
TVAL56-4 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T56) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T56, ‘0123456789') AND T56.YEAR = ‘9999' AND (T56.MONTH <> ‘99' OR T56.DAY <> ‘99') Record Rejected
TVAL56-5 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T56) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T56, ‘0123456789') AND T56.MONTH = ‘99' AND T56.DAY <> ‘99' Record Rejected
TVAL56-6 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T56) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T56, ‘0123456789') AND T56.MONTH NOT IN [‘01'-'12', ‘99'] AND T56.DAY = ‘99' Record Rejected
TVAL56-7 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T56) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T56, ‘0123456789') AND T56 NOT IN [‘00000000', ‘88888888', ‘99999999'] AND T56.MONTH <> ‘99' AND T56.DAY <> ‘99' AND NOT IS_VALID_DATE Record Rejected
TVAL56-8 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T56 NOT IN [‘00000000', ‘88888888', ‘99999999'] AND (T56.YEAR < 2008 OR T56.YEAR > CYCLE_YEAR) Record Rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL56)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL56-1 Date of multiple tumours is not composed of 8 numbers. Core Error
TVAL56-2 Year, month and day must relate to a single tumour (all zeros). Core Error
TVAL56-3 Year, month and day must be ‘not applicable'. Core Error
TVAL56-4 Year, month and day must be ‘unknown'. Core Error
TVAL56-5 Date of multiple tumours: month and day must be ‘unknown'. Core Error
TVAL56-6 Date of multiple tumours is not a valid partial date: month is invalid. Core Error
TVAL56-7 Date of multiple tumours is not a valid calendar date. Core Error
TVAL56-8 Date of multiple tumours is out of scope. Core Error
Revision (TVAL56)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL57

Purpose

This edit validates the Multiplicity counter.

Referenced fields (TVAL57)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T57 2 Multiplicity counter TMULTCOUNT

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records, Multiplicity counter
  • Must be a numeric value between ‘01' and ‘87', or ‘88' or ‘99'
Edit logic (TVAL57)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL57-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T57 IS NOT NULL AND T57 NOT IN [Eligible Multiplicity counter codes] Record Rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL57)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL57-1 Multiplicity counter is invalid Core error
Revision (TVAL57)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

3.5 Correlation edits

The purpose of the correlation edits is to enforce the business rules between fields on the same Input record. For ease of use, correlation edits have been divided into two groups:

  • Patient correlation edits: enforce business rules between valid patient fields;
  • Tumour correlation edits: enforce business rules between valid tumour fields.

Correlation edits are only performed on Input records where all referenced fields are valid.

3.5.1 Patient correlation edits

The following table summarizes the purpose of each individual edit of this category.

Table 26 Patient correlation edits summary
Edit name Purpose
PCOR1 Ensures that the content of the patient record is consistent with the action described in the Patient record type.
PCOR2 Verifies the likelihood of given names and gender.
PCOR3 Ensures that first given name, second given name and third given name are used coherently.
PCOR4 Ensures that type of current surname code accurately reflects the content of the current surname field.
PCOR5 Ensures that birth surname and current surname are consistent with type of current surname.
PCOR6 Ensures that at least one surname is reported, either the current surname or the birth surname.
PCOR7 Ensures that date of birth and date of death respect a chronological sequence and time frame.
PCOR8 Ensures that death-related variables present a consistent reporting of the patient's vital status.
PCOR9 Ensures that Death registration number and province/territory or country of death are consistent.
PCOR10 Ensures Death registration number and date of death are consistent.
PCOR11 Ensures Death registration number and Underlying cause of death are consistent.

PCOR1

Purpose

This edit ensures that the content of the patient record is consistent with the action described in the patient record type.

Referenced fields (PCOR1)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P5 1 Type of current surname PTYP_CUR
P6 25 Current surname PCURSNAM
P7 15 First given name PGNAME_1
P8 15 Second given name PGNAME_2
P9 7 Third given name PGNAME_3
P10 1 Sex PSEX
P11 8 Date of birth PDATBIR
P12 3 Province/territory or country of birth PPROVBIR
P13 25 Birth surname PBIRNAM
P14 8 Date of death PDATDEA
P15 3 Province/territory or country of death PPROVDEA
P16 6 Death registration number PDEAREG
P17 4 Underlying cause of death PCAUSDEA
P18 1 Autopsy confirming cause of death PAUTOPSY

Business rules

For Add Patient records
  • Patient reporting province/territory, Patient identification number, Type of Current surname, Sex, Date of birth,Province/territory or country of birth, Date of death, Province/territory or country of death, Death registration number, Underlying cause of death and Autopsy confirming cause of death must be provided.
  • CCR identification number must be blank.

For Update Patient records
  • Patient reporting province/territory, Patient identification number, CCR identification number, Type of Current surname, Sex, Date of birth, Province/territory or country of birth, Date of death, Province/territory or country of death, Death registration number, Underlying cause of death and Autopsy confirming cause of death must be provided.

For Delete Patient records

  • Patient reporting Province/territory, Patient identification number, CCR identification number must be provided.
  • Type of Current surname, Current surname, First given name, Second given name, Third given name, Sex, Date of birth, Province/territory or country of birth, Birth surname, Date of death, Province/territory or country of death, Death registration number, Underlying cause of death and Autopsy confirming cause of death must be blank.
Edit logic (PCOR1)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR1-1 P4 = ‘1' AND (P1 IS NULL OR P2 IS NULL OR P3 IS NOT NULL OR P5 IS NULL OR P10 IS NULL OR P11 IS NULL OR P12 IS NULL OR P14 IS NULL OR P15 IS NULL OR P16 IS NULL OR P17 IS NULL OR P18 IS NULL) Record rejected
PCOR1-2 P4 = ‘2' AND (P1 IS NULL OR P2 IS NULL OR P3 IS NULL OR P5 IS NULL OR P10 IS NULL OR P11 IS NULL OR P12 IS NULL OR P14 IS NULL OR P15 IS NULL OR P16 IS NULL OR P17 IS NULL OR P18 IS NULL) Record rejected
PCOR1-3 P4 = ‘3' AND (P1 IS NULL OR P2 IS NULL OR P3 IS NULL OR P5 IS NOT NULL OR P6 IS NOT NULL OR P7 IS NOT NULL OR P8 IS NOT NULL OR P9 IS NOT NULL OR P10 IS NOT NULL OR P11 IS NOT NULL OR P12 IS NOT NULL OR P13 IS NOT NULL OR P14 IS NOT NULL OR P15 IS NOT NULL OR P16 IS NOT NULL OR P17 IS NOT NULL OR P18 IS NOT NULL) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PCOR1)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR1-1 Input record does not respect the Add Patient record format. There are missing or extra values. Core fatal error
PCOR1-2 Input record does not respect the Update Patient record format. There are missing values. Core fatal error
PCOR1-3 Input record does not respect the Delete Patient record format. There are missing or extra values. Core fatal error
Revision (PCOR1)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Correlation Edit No.1.

PCOR2

Purpose

This edit verifies the likelihood of given names and sex.

Referenced fields (PCOR2)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P7 15 First given name PGNAME_1
P8 15 Second given name PGNAME_2
P9 7 Third given name PGNAME_3
P10 1 Sex PSEX
Other parameters (PCOR2)
Parameters Length Description
NAME_SEX_THRESHOLD 3 Tolerated average likelihood of First given name, Second given name and Third given name to be associated to the opposite gender according to given name and Sex registry2. Value must be between 0 and 100. Default value is 95.

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If the average likelihood of First given name, Second given name and Third given name to be associated to the opposite gender according to given name and Sex registry is greater than NAME_SEX_THRESHOLD, then a warning must be sent.
Edit logic (PCOR2)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR2-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P10 IN ['1', '2'] AND AVERAGE ([Probability of P7 to be associated to opposite gender], [Probability of P8 to be associated to opposite gender], [Probability of P9 to be associated to opposite gender]) > NAME_SEX_THRESHOLD Warning
Feedback report messages (PCOR2)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR2-1 Reported given names are not likely for reported Sex. Warning
Revision (PCOR2)
Year Description
2004 Edit removed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.2 has been removed.
Edit added: Current edit was not documented before.

PCOR3

Purpose

This edit ensures that first given name, second given name and third given name are used coherently.

Referenced fields (PCOR3)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P7 15 First given name PGNAME_1
P8 15 Second given name PGNAME_2
P9 7 Third given name PGNAME_3

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If First given name is blank then Second given name and Third given name must be blank.
  • If Second given name is blank then Third given name must be blank.
Edit logic (PCOR3)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR3-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P7 IS NULL AND (P8 IS NOT NULL OR P9 IS NOT NULL) Record rejected
PCOR3-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P8 IS NULL AND P9 IS NOT NULL Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PCOR3)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR3-1 First given name is missing. Core error
PCOR3-2 Second given name is missing. Core error
Revision (PCOR3)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Correlation Edit No.3.

PCOR4

Purpose

This edit ensures that type of current surname code accurately reflects the content of the current surname field.

Referenced fields (PCOR4)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P5 1 Type of current surname PTYP_CUR
P6 25 Current surname PCURSNAM

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If Type of Current surname is ‘Current Surname unknown' (0) then Current surname must be blank.
  • If Current surname is blank then Type of Current surname must be ‘Current surname unknown' (0).
Edit logic (PCOR4)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR4-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND ((P5 = ‘0' AND P6 IS NOT NULL) OR (P6 IS NULL AND P5 <> ‘0')) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PCOR4)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR4-1 Type of current surname and Current surname do not agree. Core error
Revision (PCOR4)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Correlation Edit No.4.

PCOR5

Purpose

This edit ensures that birth surname and current surname are consistent with type of current surname.

Referenced fields (PCOR5)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P5 1 Type of Current surname PTYP_CUR
P6 25 Current surname PCURSNAM
P13 25 Birth surname PBIRNAM

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If Type of Current surname is ‘Birth surname' then Current surname and Birth surname must be the same.
Edit logic (PCOR5)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR5-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P5 = ‘1' AND P6 <> P13 Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PCOR5)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR5-1 Current surname and Birth surname are different while Type of current surname indicates that they should be the same. Core error
Revision (PCOR5)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Correlation Edit No.5.

PCOR6

Purpose

This edit ensures that at least one surname is reported, either the current surname or the birth surname.

Referenced fields (PCOR6)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P6 25 Current surname PCURSNAM
P13 25 Birth surname PBIRNAM

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • Current surname and Birth surname cannot both be blank.
Edit logic (PCOR6)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR6-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P6 IS NULL AND P13 IS NULL Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PCOR6)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR6-1 Current surname and Birth surname cannot both be blank. Core error
Revision (PCOR6)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Correlation Edit No.6.

PCOR7

Purpose

This edit ensures that date of birth and date of death respect a chronological sequence and time frame.

Referenced fields (PCOR7)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P11 8 Date of birth PDATBIR
P11.YEAR 4 First 4 characters of P11 (year of date of birth) Not applicable
P11.MONTH 2 5th and 6th characters of P11 (month of date of birth) Not applicable
P11.DAY 2 7th and 8th characters of P11 (day of date of birth) Not applicable
P14 8 Date of death PDATDEA
P14.YEAR 4 First 4 characters of P14 (year of date of death) Not applicable
P14.MONTH 2 5th and 6th characters of P14 (month of date of death) Not applicable
P14.DAY 2 7th and 8th characters of P14 (day of date of death) Not applicable
P19 8 Date of transmission PDATTRAN

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If Date of birth and Date of death are at least partially known then
    • Date of death must be on or after Date of birth;
    • Year of Date of death and year of Date of birth should not be more than 110 years apart.
  • If Date of birth is at least partially known and the patient is not known to have died then
    • Year of Date of birth and year of Date of transmission should not be more than 110 years apart.
Edit logic (PCOR7)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR7-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P11 <> ‘99999999' AND P14 NOT IN [‘00000000', ‘99999999'] AND ((P11.DAY <> ‘99' AND P14.DAY <> ‘99' AND P14 < P11) OR (P11.MONTH <> ‘99' AND P14.MONTH <> ‘99' AND P14.YEAR || P14.MONTH < P11.YEAR || P11.MONTH) OR (P14.YEAR < P11.YEAR)) Record rejected
PCOR7-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P11 <> ‘99999999' AND ((P14 NOT IN [‘00000000', ‘99999999'] AND P14.YEAR – P11.YEAR > 110) OR (P14 = ‘00000000' AND P19.YEAR – P11.YEAR > 110)) Warning
Feedback report messages (PCOR7)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR7-1 Date of death is before Date of birth. Core error
PCOR7-2 The patient is more than 110 years old. Warning
Revision (PCOR7)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Correlation Edit No.7.
Business rules added: Special handling for patients over 110 years old.

PCOR8

Purpose

This edit ensures that death-related variables present a consistent reporting of the patient's vital status.

Referenced fields (PCOR8)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P14 8 Date of death PDATDEA
P15 3 Province/territory or country of death PPROVDEA
P16 6 Death registration number PDEAREG
P17 4 Underlying cause of death PCAUSDEA
P18 1 Autopsy confirming cause of death PAUTOPSY

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If any of the death-related variables (Date of death, Province/territory or country of death, Death registration number, Underlying cause of death and Autopsy confirming cause of death) indicate that the patient is deceased then no variables should indicate that the patient is not known to have died.
Edit logic (PCOR8)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR8-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (P14 <> ‘00000000' OR P15 <> ‘000' OR P16 <> ‘000000' OR P17 <> ‘0000' OR P18 <> ‘0') AND (P14 = ‘00000000' OR P15 = ‘000' OR P16 = ‘000000' OR P17 = ‘0000' OR P18 = ‘0') Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PCOR8)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR8-1 Some death-related variables indicate that the patient is deceased whereas at least another indicates that the patient is not known to have died. Core error
Revision (PCOR8)
Year Description
2004 Edit removed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.8 was redundant with PVAL11.
Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Correlation Edit No.10.

PCOR9

Purpose

This edit ensures that death registration number and province/territory or country of death are consistent.

Referenced fields (PCOR9)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P15 3 Province/territory or country of death PPROVDEA
P16 6 Death registration number PDEAREG

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If Death registration number is known then Province/territory or country of death must indicate a specific location in Canada or United States of America.
  • If Death registration number indicated that the Patient died outside Canada then Province/territory or country of death must indicate a foreign country or unknown place.
  • If Death registration number is unknown then Province/territory or country of death must be either a location in Canada or an unknown place.
Edit logic (PCOR9)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR9-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P16 IN [000001-999997] AND P15 NOT IN [840, 910, 911, 912, 913, 924, 935, 946, 947, 948, 959, 960, 961, 962] Record rejected
PCOR9-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P16 = ‘999998' AND P15 IN [909, 910, 911, 912, 913, 924, 935, 946, 947, 948, 959, 960, 961, 962] Record rejected
PCOR9-3 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P16 = ‘999999' AND P15 NOT IN [909, 910, 911, 912, 913, 924, 935, 946, 947, 948, 959, 960, 961, 962, 999] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PCOR9)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR9-1 If Death registration number is known then province/territory or country of death must indicate a specific location in Canada or United States of America. Core error
PCOR9-2 If Death registration number indicated that the patient died outside Canada then province/territory or country of death must indicate a foreign country or unknown place. Core error
PCOR9-3 If Death registration number is unknown then province/territory or country of death must be either a location in Canada or an unknown place. Core error
Revision (PCOR9)
Year Description
2004 Edit reorganized: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.9 merged with PVAL14.
Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Correlation Edit No.11.
Business rules changed: If Death registration number is known then province/territory or country of death must indicate a specific location in Canada or United States of America; If Death registration number is unknown then province/territory or country of death must be either a location in Canada or an unknown place.
Business rules added: If Death registration number indicated that the patient died outside Canada then province/territory or country of death must indicate a foreign country or unknown place.

PCOR10

Purpose

This edit ensures death registration number and date of death are consistent.

Referenced fields (PCOR10)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P14 8 Date of death PDATDEA
P16 6 Death registration number PDEAREG

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If Death registration number is known then Date of death must be at least partially known.
Edit logic (PCOR10)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR10-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P16 IN [000001-999997] AND P14.YEAR = ‘9999' Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PCOR10)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR10-1 Date of death cannot be unknown if Death registration number is known. Core error
Revision (PCOR10)
Year Description
2004 Edit reorganized: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.10 moved to PCOR8.
Edit added: New edit.

PCOR11

Purpose

This edit ensures death registration number and underlying cause of death are consistent.

Referenced fields (PCOR11)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P16 6 Death registration number PDEAREG
P17 3 Underlying cause of death PCAUSDEA

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If Death registration number is unknown then Underlying cause of death cannot be ‘Officially unknown'.
Edit logic (PCOR11)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR11-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P16 = ‘999999' AND P17 IN = [‘R99', ‘7999'] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PCOR11)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR11-1 Underlying cause of death cannot be ‘Officially unknown' when Death registration is unknown. Core error
Revision (PCOR11)
Year Description
2004 Edit reorganized: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.11 moved to PCOR9.
Edit added: New edit.

3.5.2 Tumour correlation edits

The following table summarizes the purpose of each individual edit of this category.

Table 27 Tumour correlation edits summary
Edit name Purpose
TCOR1 Ensures that the content of the core tumour fields is consistent with the operation described in the Tumour record type.
TCOR2 Ensures that Postal code and Standard geographic code are coherent.
TCOR3 Ensures that Census tract and Standard geographic code are coherent.
TCOR4 Rejects tumour data for patients living outside the reporting province/territory at time of diagnosis.
TCOR5 Ensures that expected topography, histology and behaviour values are reported based on the Source classification flag.
TCOR6 Ensures the consistency between ICD-9 Cancer code and related ICD-O-2 values.
TCOR7 Ensures the consistency between related ICD-O-2 and ICD-O-3 values.
TCOR8 Not applicable. (Placeholder for future requirement implementation.)
TCOR9 Rejects tumour records that are outside the CCR core scope.
TCOR10 Ensures that invalid combinations of topography and histology are rejected.
TCOR11 Ensures that invalid combinations of histology and behaviour codes are rejected.
TCOR12 Ensures the consistency between the topography and the laterality.
TCOR13 Ensures that invalid combinations of Method used to establish the date of diagnosis and Diagnostic confirmation codes are rejected.
TCOR14 Ensures that Method of diagnosis is only reported for tumours diagnosed prior to 2004.
TCOR15 Ensures that Method used to establish the date of diagnosis is only reported for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards.
TCOR16 Ensures that Diagnostic confirmation is only reported for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards.
TCOR17 Ensures that Grade, differentiation or cell indicator is only reported for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards.
TCOR18 This edit ensures that Collaborative Staging variables are reported for tumours within the CCR collaborative staging scope.
TCOR19 This edit ensures that AJCC TNM staging variables are reported for tumours within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope.
TCOR20 Ensures that TNM stage group is reported only when clinical and pathologic TNM stage group are not reported.
TCOR21 Ensures that the combination of AJCC clinical TNM stage group and individual clinical T, N, M values is acceptable.
TCOR22 Ensures that the combination of AJCC pathologic TNM stage group and the individual pathologic T, N, M values is acceptable.
TCOR23 Ensures that the combination of AJCC TNM stage group and the individual clinical/pathologic T, N, M values is acceptable.
TCOR24 Ensures that AJCC edition number is coherent with all remaining AJCC TNM staging variables.
TCOR26 Ensures the consistency between Ambiguous terminology diagnosis and Date of conclusive diagnosis.
TCOR27 Ensures the consistency between Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter.
TCOR29 Ensures the consistency between Ambiguous terminology diagnosis and Date of Conclusive Diagnosis.
TCOR30 Ensures that date of diagnosis and date of conclusive diagnosis respect a chronological sequence and time frame.
TCOR31 Ensures the consistency between ICD-O-2/3 Topography and Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary.
TCOR32 Ensures the consistency between ICD-O-3 Behaviour and Multiple tumours reported as one primary.
TCOR33 Ensures the consistency between Type of Multiple Tumours Reported as One Primary,  ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology.
TCOR34 Ensures the consistency between Date of multiple tumours and Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary.
TCOR35 Ensures the consistency between Method Used to Establish the Date of Diagnosis, Type of Multiple Tumours Reported as One Primary, Date of Multiple Tumours and Multiplicity Counter.

TCOR1

Purpose

This edit ensures that the content of the core tumour fields is consistent with the operation described in the tumour record type.

Referenced fields (TCOR1)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T6 25 Name of place of residence TPLACRES
T7 6 Postal code TPOSTCOD
T8 7 Standard geographic code TCODPLAC
T9 9 Census tract TCENTRAC
T10 15 Health insurance number THIN
T11 1 Method of diagnosis TMETHDIAG
T12 8 Date of diagnosis TDATDIAG
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T13 4 ICD-9 cancer code TICD_9
T14 1 Source classification flag TSCF
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T16 4 ICD-O-2 Histology TICD_O2H
T17 1 ICD-O-2 Behaviour TICD_O2B
T19 1 Laterality TLATERAL
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T23 1 Grade, differentiation or cell indicator TGRADE
T24 1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis TMETHUSED
T25 1 Diagnostic confirmation TMETHCONF
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T42 9 AJCC clinical T TAJCCCLINT
T43 3 AJCC clinical N TAJCCCLINN
T44 3 AJCC clinical M TAJCCCLINM
T45 9 AJCC pathologic T TAJCCPATHT
T46 3 AJCC pathologic N TAJCCPATHN
T47 3 AJCC pathologic M TAJCCPATHM
T48 4 AJCC clinical TNM stage group TAJCCCLINSG
T49 4 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group TAJCCPATHSG
T50 4 AJCC TNM stage group TAJCCSG
T51 2 AJCC edition number TAJCCEDNUM
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER
T53 1 Ambiguous Terminology Diagnosis TAMBIGTERM
T54 8 Date of Conclusive Diagnosis TDATCONCLUSDIAG
T55 2 Type of Multiple Tumours Reported as One Primary TMULTTUMONEPRIM
T56 8 Date of Multiple Tumours TDATMULT
T57 2 Multiplicity Counter TMULTCOUNT

Business rules

For Add Tumour records
  • Tumour reporting province/territory, Tumour patient identification number, Tumour reference number, Postal code, Standard geographic code, Method of diagnosis, Date of diagnosis, ICD-9 cancer code, Source classification flag, ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-2 Histology, ICD-O-2 Behaviour, Laterality, ICD-O-3 Histology, ICD-O-3 Behaviour, Grade, differentiation or cell indicator, Method used to establish the date of diagnosis, Diagnostic confirmation must be provided39.
  • Fillers (T18 and T20) are ignored.
For Update Tumour records
  • Tumour reporting province/territory, Tumour patient identification number, Tumour reference number, CCR identification number, Postal code, Standard geographic code, Method of diagnosis, Date of diagnosis, ICD-9 cancer code, Source classification flag, ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-2 Histology, ICD-O-2 Behaviour, Laterality, ICD-O-3 Histology, ICD-O-3 Behaviour, Grade, differentiation or cell indicator, Method used to establish the date of diagnosis, Diagnostic confirmation must be provided39.
  • Fillers (T18 and T20) are ignored.
For Delete Tumour records
  • Tumour reporting province/territory, Tumour patient identification number, Tumour reference number and CCR identification number must be provided.
  • Name of place of residence, Postal code, Standard geographic code, Census tract, Health insurance number, Method of diagnosis, Date of diagnosis, ICD-9 cancer code, Source classification flag, ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-2 Histology, ICD-O-2 Behaviour, Laterality, ICD-O-3 Histology, ICD-O-3 Behaviour, Grade, differentiation or cell indicator, Method used to establish the date of diagnosis, Diagnostic confirmation, CS tumour size, CS extension, CS tumour size/ext eval, CS lymph nodes, CS reg nodes eval, Regional nodes examined, Regional nodes positive, CS mets at dx, CS mets eval, CS site-specific factor 1, CS site-specific factor 2, CS site-specific factor 3, CS site-specific factor 4, CS site-specific factor 5, CS site-specific factor 6, AJCC clinical T, AJCC clinical N, AJCC clinical M, AJCC pathologic T, AJCC pathologic N, AJCC pathologic M, AJCC clinical TNM stage group, AJCC pathologic TNM stage group, AJCC TNM stage group, AJCC edition number, CS Version 1st, Ambiguous Terminology Diagnosis, Date of conclusive diagnosis, Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours, and Multiplicity Counter must be blank.
  • Fillers (T18 and T20) are ignored.
Edit logic (TCOR1)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR1-1 T5 = ‘1' AND (T1 IS NULL OR T2 IS NULL OR T3 IS NULL OR T7 IS NULL OR T8 IS NULL OR T11 IS NULL OR T12 IS NULL OR T13 IS NULL OR T14 IS NULL OR T15 IS NULL OR T16 IS NULL OR T17 IS NULL OR T19 IS NULL OR T21 IS NULL OR T22 IS NULL OR T23 IS NULL OR T24 IS NULL OR T25 IS NULL) OR (T12 IS NOT NULL AND T12.YEAR < 2006 AND T9 IS NULL)) Record rejected
TCOR1-2 T5 = ‘2' AND (T1 IS NULL OR T2 IS NULL OR T3 IS NULL OR T4 IS NULL OR T7 IS NULL OR T8 IS NULL OR T11 IS NULL OR T12 IS NULL OR T13 IS NULL OR T14 IS NULL OR T15 IS NULL OR T16 IS NULL OR T17 IS NULL OR T19 IS NULL OR T21 IS NULL OR T22 IS NULL OR T23 IS NULL OR T24 IS NULL OR T25 IS NULL) OR (T12 IS NOT NULL AND T12.YEAR < 2006 AND T9 IS NULL) Record rejected
TCOR1-3 T5 = ‘3' AND (T1 IS NULL OR T2 IS NULL OR T3 IS NULL OR T4 IS NULL OR T6 IS NOT NULL OR T7 IS NOT NULL OR T8 IS NOT NULL OR T9 IS NOT NULL OR T10 IS NOT NULL OR T11 IS NOT NULL OR T12 IS NOT NULL OR T13 IS NOT NULL OR T14 IS NOT NULL OR T15 IS NOT NULL OR T16 IS NOT NULL OR T17 IS NOT NULL OR T19 IS NOT NULL OR T21 IS NOT NULL OR T22 IS NOT NULL OR T23 IS NOT NULL OR T24 IS NOT NULL OR T25 IS NOT NULL OR T27 IS NOT NULL OR T28 IS NOT NULL OR T29 IS NOT NULL OR T30 IS NOT NULL OR T31 IS NOT NULL OR T32 IS NOT NULL OR T33 IS NOT NULL OR T34 IS NOT NULL OR T35 IS NOT NULL OR T36 IS NOT NULL OR T37 IS NOT NULL OR T38 IS NOT NULL OR T39 IS NOT NULL OR T40 IS NOT NULL OR T41 IS NOT NULL OR T42 IS NOT NULL OR T43 IS NOT NULL OR T44 IS NOT NULL OR T45 IS NOT NULL OR T46 IS NOT NULL OR T47 IS NOT NULL OR T48 IS NOT NULL OR T49 IS NOT NULL OR T50 IS NOT NULL OR T51 IS NOT NULL OR T52 IS NOT NULL OR T53 IS NOT NULL OR T54 IS NOT NULL OR T55 IS NOT NULL OR T56 IS NOT NULL OR T57 IS NOT NULL) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR1)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR1-1 Input record does not respect the Add Tumour record format. There are missing values. Core fatal error
TCOR1-2 Input record does not respect the Update Tumour record format. There are missing values. Core fatal error
TCOR1-3 Input record does not respect the Delete Tumour record format. There are missing or extra values. Core fatal error
Revision (TCOR1)
Year Description
2008 Business rules and Edit logic changed: Fields T53 to T57 have been added.
2007 Business rules and Edit logic changed: Field T52 has been added.
2006 Business rules and Edit logic changed: Census tract effective date range ended in 2005. For cases diagnosed in 2006 and onwards, T9 (Census tract) must not be reported.
2004 Edit renamed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.12.
Business rules changed: Handle new fields related to Collaborative staging and TNM data.

TCOR2

Purpose

This edit ensures that postal code and standard geographic code are coherent.

Referenced fields (TCOR2)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T7 6 Postal code TPOSTCOD
T7.FIRST 1 First digit of Postal code Not applicable
T8.PROV 2 First 2 digits of T8 (province code of Standard geographic code) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records, if Postal code is known then
  • it must start with ‘A' if in Newfoundland or Labrador;
  • it must start with ‘B' if in Nova Scotia;
  • it must start with ‘C' if in Prince Edward Island;
  • it must start with ‘E' if in New Brunswick;
  • it must start with ‘G', ‘H', ‘J' or ‘K' if in Quebec;
  • it must start with ‘K', ‘L', 'M', ‘N' or ‘P' if in Ontario;
  • it must start with ‘R' if in Manitoba;
  • it must start with ‘R' or ‘S' if in Saskatchewan;
  • it must start with ‘S' or ‘T' if in Alberta;
  • it must start with ‘V' if in British Columbia;
  • it must start with ‘Y' if in Yukon;
  • it must start with ‘X' if in Northwest Territories;
  • it must start with ‘X' if in Nunavut.
Edit logic (TCOR2)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR2-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T7 <> ‘999999' AND ((T8.PROV = ‘10' AND T7.FIRST <> ‘A') OR (T8.PROV = ‘11' AND T7.FIRST <> ‘C') OR (T8.PROV = ‘12' AND T7.FIRST <> ‘B') OR (T8.PROV = ‘13' AND T7.FIRST <> ‘E') OR (T8.PROV = ‘24' AND T7.FIRST NOT IN [‘G', ‘H', ‘J', ‘K']) OR (T8.PROV = ‘35' AND T7.FIRST NOT IN [‘K', ‘L', ‘M', ‘N', ‘P']) OR (T8.PROV = ‘46' AND T7.FIRST <> ‘R') OR (T8.PROV = ‘47' AND T7.FIRST NOT IN [‘R', ‘S']) OR (T8.PROV = ‘48' AND T7.FIRST NOT IN [‘S', ‘T']) OR (T8.PROV = ‘59' AND T7.FIRST <> ‘V') OR (T8.PROV = ‘60' AND T7.FIRST <> ‘Y') OR (T8.PROV = ‘61' AND T7.FIRST <> ‘X') OR (T8.PROV = ‘62' AND T7.FIRST <> ‘X')) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR2)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR2-1 Postal code and Standard geographic code indicate 2 different provinces/territories. Core error
Revision (TCOR2)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.14.

TCOR3

Purpose

This edit ensures that census tract and standard geographic code are coherent.

Referenced fields (TCOR3)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T8 7 Standard geographic code TCODPLAC
T9 9 Census tract TCENTRAC
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 characters of T12 (year of the Date of diagnosis) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Date of diagnosis is between year 1992 and 1995 inclusively, and both Census tract and Standard geographic code are fully known, then the reported Standard geographic code must match the Standard geographic code associated with the Census tract in Eligible Census tracts from 1992 to 199512 .
  • If Date of diagnosis is between year 1996 and 2000 inclusively, and both Census tract and Standard geographic code are fully known, then the reported Standard geographic code must match the Standard geographic code associated with the Census tract in Eligible Census tracts from 1996 to 200012.
  • If Date of diagnosis is between year 2001 and 2005 inclusively, and both Census tract and Standard geographic code are fully known, then the reported Standard geographic code must match the Standard geographic code associated with the Census tract in Eligible Census tracts from 2001 to 200512.
Edit logic (TCOR3)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR3-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T8 NOT LIKE ‘_ _ _ _ 999' AND T9 NOT LIKE ‘___999.99' AND T12.YEAR >= 1992 AND T12.YEAR < 1996 AND T8 NOT IN [SGC from Eligible Census tracts from 1992 to 1995 where Census tract = T9] Record rejected
TCOR3-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T8 NOT LIKE ‘_ _ _ _ 999' AND T9 NOT LIKE ‘___999.99' AND T12.YEAR >= 1996 AND T12.YEAR < 2001 AND T8 NOT IN [SGC from Eligible Census tracts from 1996 to 2000 where Census tract = T9] Record rejected
TCOR3-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T8 NOT LIKE ‘_ _ _ _ 999' AND T9 NOT LIKE ‘___999.99' AND T12.YEAR >= 2001 AND T12.YEAR < 2005 AND T8 NOT IN [SGC from Eligible Census tracts from 2001 to 2005 where Census tract = T9] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR3)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR3-1 Census tract and Standard geographic code combination not found in Census tract Data dictionary – 1991. Core error
TCOR3-2 Census tract and Standard geographic code combination not found in Census tract Data dictionary – 1996. Core error
TCOR3-3 Census tract and Standard geographic code combination not found in Census tract Data dictionary – 2001. Core error
Revision (TCOR3)
Year Description
2006 Business rules and Edit logic changed: Edit modified to include combinations where Census tract indicate an area outside a Census Metropolitan Area.
2004 Edit renamed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.15

TCOR4

Purpose

This edit rejects tumour data for patients living outside the reporting province/territory at time of diagnosis.

Referenced fields (TCOR4)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T8.PROV 2 First 2 characters from T8 (province code of Standard geographic code) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Tumour reporting province/territory must be equal to province code found in Standard geographic code.
Edit logic (TCOR4)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR4-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T1 <> T8.PROV Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR4)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR4-1 Reporting province/territory and Standard geographic code must indicate the same province/territory. Core error
Revision (TCOR4)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.16.

TCOR5

Purpose

This edit ensures that expected topography, histology and behaviour values are reported based on the Source classification flag.

Referenced fields (TCOR5)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T13 4 ICD-9 cancer code TICD_9
T14 1 Source classification flag TSCF
T16 4 ICD-O-2 Histology TICD_O2H
T17 1 ICD-O-2 Behaviour TICD_O2B

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Source classification Flag indicates that ICD-9 is the Source classification then ICD-9 cancer code, ICD-O-2/3 Topography40, ICD-O-2 Histology, ICD-O-2 Behaviour41, ICD-O-3 Histology42 and ICD-O-3 Behaviour41 must be reported.
  • If Source classification flag indicates that ICD-O-2 is the Source classification then ICD-O-2/3 Topography40, ICD–O–2 Histology, ICD-O-2 Behaviour41, ICD-O-3 Histology42 and ICD-O-3 Behaviour41 must be reported and ICD-9 Cancer code must not be reported.
  • If Source classification flag indicates that ICD-O-3 is the Source classification then ICD-O-2/3 Topography42, ICD-O-3 Histology40 and ICD-O-3 Behaviour41 must be reported and ICD-9 cancer code, ICD-O-2 Histology and ICD-O-2 Behaviour must not be reported.
Edit logic (TCOR5)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR5-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T14 = ‘1' AND (T13 = ‘0000' OR T16 = ‘0000') Record rejected
TCOR5-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T14 = ‘2' AND T16 = ‘0000' Record rejected
TCOR5-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T14 = ‘2' AND T13 <> ‘0000' Record rejected
TCOR5-4 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T14 = ‘4' AND (T13 <> '0000' OR T16 <> ‘0000' OR T17 <> ‘0') Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR5)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR5-1 Based on the Source classification flag, ICD-9 Cancer code and ICD-O-2 Histology must be reported. Core Error
TCOR5-2 Based on the Source classification flag, ICD-O-2 Histology must be reported. Core Error
TCOR5-3 Based on the Source classification flag, ICD-9 Cancer code must not be reported. Core Error
TCOR5-4 Based on the Source classification flag, ICD-9 cancer code, ICD-O-2 Histology and ICD-O-2 Behaviour must not be reported. Core Error
Revision (TCOR5)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.18.
Business rules deleted: ICD-10 related rules dropped.
Business rules changed: Ensure that topography and histology are reported in accordance with the Source classification flag.
Business rules added: Prevent the reporting of data using a classification older than the one indicated by the Source classification flag.

TCOR6

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between ICD-9 Cancer code and related ICD-O-2 values.

Referenced fields (TCOR6)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T13 4 ICD-9 cancer code TICD_9
T14 1 Source classification flag TSCF
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T16 4 ICD-O-2 Histology TICD_O2H
T17 1 ICD-O-2 Behaviour TICD_O2B

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records where the source classification is ICD-9
  • ICD-9 Cancer code and ICD-O-2/3 Topography must match based on ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table43.
  • If ICD-9 Cancer code is related to a specific histology code (different than 8000) based on ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table then reported ICD-O-2 Histology should not be generic (equal to 8000).
  • ICD-9 Cancer code and ICD-O-2 Behaviour must be coherent based on ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table.
Edit logic (TCOR6)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR6-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T14 = '1' AND T13 <> '0000' AND (T13 and T15 NOT IN [ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table]) Record Rejected
TCOR6-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T14 = '1' AND T13 <> '0000' AND T16 = '8000' AND (ICD-O-2 Histology <> '8000' IN [ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table where ICD-9 = T13]) Warning
TCOR6-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T14 = '1' AND T13 <> '0000' AND (T13 and T17 NOT IN [ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table]) Record Rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR6)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR6-1 ICD-9 Cancer code and ICD-O-2/3 Topography are not coherent. Core Error
TCOR6-2 ICD-O-2 Histology could have been more precise based on ICD-9 cancer code. Warning
TCOR6-3 ICD-9 Cancer code and ICD-O-2 Behaviour are not coherent. Core Error
Revision (TCOR6)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.20
Business rules deleted: ICD-10 related rules dropped.
Business rules added:
Coherence check between ICD-9 Cancer code and ICD-O2/3 Topography added.
Coherence check between ICD-9 Cancer code and ICD-O-2 Histology added.

TCOR7

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between related ICD-O-2 and ICD-O-3 values.

Referenced fields (TCOR7)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T14 1 Source classification flag TSCF
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T16 4 ICD-O-2 Histology TICD_O2H
T17 1 ICD-O-2 Behaviour TICD_O2B
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records where the source classification is either ICD-9 or ICD-O-2
  • ICD-O-3 Histology and ICD-O-3 Behaviour combination must be consistent with ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-2 Histology and ICD-O-2 Behaviour combination based on ICD-O-2 to ICD-O-3 conversion table44.
Edit logic (TCOR7)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR7-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T14 IN [‘1', '2'] AND T16 <> '0000' AND (T21 and T22 combination NOT IN [ICD-O-2 to ICD-O-3 conversion table for T15, T16 and T17 combination]) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR7)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR7-1 ICD-O-3 Histology and ICD-O-3 Behaviour combination is not coherent with ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-2 Histology and ICD-O-2 Behaviour combination. Core Error
Revision (TCOR7)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TCOR8

Purpose

Not applicable. (This empty correlation is kept as a placeholder for future requirement implementation.)

Referenced fields (TCOR8)
Field Length Description Acronym
Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable

Business rules

Not applicable

Edit logic (TCOR8)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Feedback report messages (TCOR8)
Sub–edit Text Type
Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Revision (TCOR8)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TCOR9

Purpose

This edit rejects tumour records that are outside the CCR core scope.

Referenced fields (TCOR9)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of Date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-3 Histology, ICD-O-3 Behaviour and year of Date of diagnosis combination must be within the CCR core scope45.
Edit logic (TCOR9)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR9-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (T12.YEAR, T15, T21 and T22 NOT IN [CCR core scope]) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR9)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR9-1 Based on ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-3 Histology and Behaviour and Date of diagnosis, the tumour is outside the CCR core scope. Core Error
Revision (TCOR9)
Year Description
2004 Edit consolidated: Edits formerly known as Correlation edit No.13 and Correlation edit No.21.
Business rules changed: Verification is now performed on ICD-O-3 values only, regardless of the source classification used.

TCOR10

Purpose

This edit ensures that invalid combinations of topography and histology are rejected.

Referenced fields (TCOR10)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of Date of diagnosis (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology and year of date of diagnosis combination must not be invalid based on Invalid site and Histology combinations table46.
Edit logic (TCOR10)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR10-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (T12.Year, T15 and T21 IN [Invalid site and Histology combinations]) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR10)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR10-1 ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-3 Histology and Date of diagnosis combination is either invalid or not eligible for CCR. Core error
Revision (TCOR10)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages changed: Verification now includes Date of diagnosis.
2004 Edit renamed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.23.
Business rules changed: Verification is now performed on ICD-O-3 values only, regardless of the source classification used.

TCOR11

Purpose

This edit ensures that invalid combinations of histology and behaviour codes are rejected.

Note: Invalid combinations are combinations that are invalid from a subject matter point of view. These are different from matrix combinations which are combinations not explicitly listed in ICD-O but possible from a subject matter point of view and allowed based on rules or coding guidelines for morphology, ICD-O-3 (page 29).

Referenced fields (TCOR11)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of Date of diagnosis (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • ICD-O-3 Histology, ICD-O-3 Behaviour and year of date of diagnosis combination must not be invalid based on Invalid Histology and Behaviour combination table47.
Edit logic (TCOR11)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR11-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (T12.YEAR, T21 and T22 IN [Invalid Histology and Behaviour combination]) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR11)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR11-1 ICD-O-3 Histology, ICD-O-3 Behaviour and Date of diagnosis combination is invalid. Core error
Revision (TCOR11)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages changed: Verification now includes Date of diagnosis.
2004 Edit renamed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.24.
Business rules changed: Verification is now performed on ICD-O-3 values only, regardless of the source classification used.

TCOR12

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between the topography and the laterality.

Referenced fields (TCOR12)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of Date of diagnosis (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T19 1 Laterality TLATERAL

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • ICD-O-2/3 Topography, Laterality and year of date of diagnosis combination must be valid based on Valid site and Laterality combinations table48.
Edit logic (TCOR12)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR12-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (T12.Year, T15 and T19 NOT IN [Valid site and Laterality combinations table]) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR12)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR12-1 ICD-O-2/3 Topography, Laterality and Date of diagnosis combination is invalid. Core error
Revision (TCOR12)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.22.
Business rules changed: Verification is now performed on ICD-O-3 values only, regardless of the source classification used.

TCOR13

Purpose

This edit ensures that invalid combinations of Method used to establish the date of diagnosis and Diagnostic confirmation codes are rejected.

Referenced fields (TCOR13)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of Date of Diagnosis (year of Date of Diagnosis) N/A
T24 1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis TMETHUSED
T25 1 Diagnostic confirmation TMETHCONF
T53 1 Ambiguous Terminology Diagnosis TAMBIGTERM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records where the Date of Diagnosis is in 2004 or after
  • Diagnostic confirmation cannot be less definitive than Method used to establish the date of diagnosis. Example: Diagnostic confirmation cannot be “positive cytology” if the Method used to establish the Date of Diagnosis is “positive histology”.
  • Method used to establish the date of diagnosis and Diagnostic confirmation must indicate the same value when either is "Autopsy Only" or "Death Certificate Only (DCO)" and the other one is reported.

For Add and Update Tumour records where the Date of Diagnosis is in 2008 or after

  • If Ambiguous Terminology Diagnosis is Ambiguous terminology only (1) then
    • Diagnostic Confirmation must be more definitive than Method used to establish date of diagnosis.
Edit logic (TCOR13)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR13-1 T5 IN ['1', '2'] AND (T12.YEAR>= '2008') AND T53 = ‘1' AND T24 IN ['1','2','4','5','6','7', ‘9'] AND T25 IN ['1','2','4','5','6','7', ‘9'] AND ((T24='2' AND T25='2') OR (T24<T25)) Record rejected
TCOR13-2 T5 IN ['1', '2'] AND (T12.YEAR>= '2004' ) AND T24 IN ['1','2','4','5','6','7', ‘9'] AND T25 IN ['1','2','4','5','6','7', ‘9'] AND ((T24='2' AND T25='2') OR (T24<T25 AND NOT (T24='1' and T25='2'))) Record rejected
TCOR13-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR>= '2004' AND ((T24 IN ['3', '8'] AND T25<>'0') OR (T25 IN ['3', '8'] AND T24<>'0')) AND T24 <> T25) Record rejected
Feedback report messasges (TCOR13)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR13-1 Diagnostic confirmation must be more definitive than Method used to establish the date of diagnosis when Ambiguous terminology is equal to 1. Core error
TCOR13-2 Diagnostic confirmation cannot be less definitive than Method used to establish the date of diagnosis. Core error
TCOR13-3 Method Used to Establish the Date of Diagnosis and Diagnostic Confirmation must indicate the same method when either is "Autopsy Only" or "Death Certificate Only (DCO)". Core error
Revision (TCOR13)
Year Description
2008 New Sub-edit added: To make Diagnostic confirmation more definitive than Method used to establish the date of diagnosis.
2007 New edit added.

TCOR14

Purpose

This edit ensures that method of diagnosis is only reported for tumours diagnosed prior to 2004.

Referenced fields (TCOR14)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T11 1 Method of diagnosis TMETHDIAG
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of Date of diagnosis (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Method of diagnosis must only be reported when Date of diagnosis is prior 2004.
Edit logic (TCOR14)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR14-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR < 2004 AND T11 = ‘0' Record rejected
TCOR14-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2004 AND T11 <> ‘0' Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR14)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR14-1 Method of diagnosis must be reported for tumours diagnosed before 2004. Core error
TCOR14-2 Method of diagnosis must be coded ‘Not reported' for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards. Core error
Revision (TCOR14)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR15

Purpose

This edit ensures that method used to establish the date of diagnosis is only reported for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards.

Referenced fields (TCOR15)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of Date of diagnosis (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T24 1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis TMETHUSED

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Method used to establish the date of diagnosis must only be reported when Date of diagnosis is in 2004 or after.
Edit logic (TCOR15)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR15-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR < 2004 AND T24<> ‘0' Record rejected
TCOR15-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2004 AND T24 = ‘0' Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR15)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR15-1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis must be coded 'Not reported' for tumours diagnosed before 2004. Core error
TCOR15-2 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis must be reported for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards. Core error
Revision (TCOR15)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR16

Purpose

This edit ensures that diagnostic confirmation is only reported for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards.

Referenced fields (TCOR16)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of Date of diagnosis (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T25 1 Diagnostic confirmation TMETHCONF

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Diagnostic confirmation must only be reported when Date of diagnosis is in 2004 or after.
Edit logic (TCOR16)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR16-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR < 2004 AND T25<> ‘0' Record rejected
TCOR16-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2004 AND T25 = ‘0' Record rejected
Feddback report messages (TCOR16)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR16-1 Diagnostic confirmation must be coded ‘Not reported' for tumours diagnosed before 2004. Core error
TCOR16-2 Diagnostic confirmation must be reported for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards. Core error
Revision (TCOR16)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR17

Purpose

This edit ensures that grade, differentiation or cell indicator is only reported for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards.

Referenced fields (TCOR17)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of Date of diagnosis (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T23 1 Grade, differentiation or cell indicator TGRADE

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Grade, differentiation or cell indicator must only be reported when Date of diagnosis is in 2004 or after.
Edit logic (TCOR17)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR17-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR < 2004 AND T23 <> ‘0' Record rejected
TCOR17-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2004 AND T23 = ‘0' Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR17)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR17-1 Grade, differentiation or cell indicator must be coded ‘Not reported' for tumours diagnosed before 2004. Core error
TCOR17-2 Grade, differentiation or cell indicator must be reported for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards. Core error
Revision (TCOR17)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR18

Purpose

This edit ensures that collaborative staging variables are reported for tumours within the CCR collaborative staging scope.

Referenced fields (TCOR18)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records outside the CCR collaborative staging scope48,
  • All Collaborative staging variables must be blank.
For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope,
  • All Collaborative staging variables must be reported.
Edit logic (TCOR18)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR18-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR < 2004 AND (T27 IS NOT NULL OR T28 IS NOT NULL OR T29 IS NOT NULL OR T30 IS NOT NULL OR T31 IS NOT NULL OR T32 IS NOT NULL OR T33 IS NOT NULL OR T34 IS NOT NULL OR T35 IS NOT NULL OR T36 IS NOT NULL OR T37 IS NOT NULL OR T38 IS NOT NULL OR T39 IS NOT NULL OR T40 IS NOT NULL OR T41 IS NOT NULL OR T52 IS NOT NULL) CS data items are not posted.
TCOR18-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2004 AND (T27 IS NULL OR T28 IS NULL OR T29 IS NULL OR T30 IS NULL OR T31 IS NULL OR T32 IS NULL OR T33 IS NULL OR T34 IS NULL OR T35 IS NULL OR T36 IS NULL OR T37 IS NULL OR T38 IS NULL OR T39 IS NULL OR T40 IS NULL OR T41 IS NULL OR T52 IS NULL) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TCOR18)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR18-1 Collaborative staging data must be left blank for tumours diagnosed prior to 2004. Reported data will not be loaded into CCR. CS fatal error
TCOR18-2 Eligible Collaborative staging site: all Collaborative staging variables must be reported. CS fatal error
Revision (TCOR18)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields and Edit logic updated: T52 added as a new CS variable
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR19

Purpose

This edit ensures that AJCC TNM staging variables are reported for tumours within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope.

Referenced fields (TCOR19)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T42 9 AJCC clinical T TAJCCCLINT
T43 3 AJCC clinical N TAJCCCLINN
T44 3 AJCC clinical M TAJCCCLINM
T45 9 AJCC pathologic T TAJCCPATHT
T46 3 AJCC pathologic N TAJCCPATHN
T47 3 AJCC pathologic M TAJCCPATHM
T48 4 AJCC clinical TNM stage group TAJCCCLINSG
T49 4 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group TAJCCPATHSG
T50 4 AJCC TNM stage group TAJCCSG
T51 2 AJCC edition number TAJCCEDNUM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • All AJCC TNM staging variables must be reported.
For Add and Update Tumour records outside the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope
  • All AJCC TNM staging variables must be blank.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TCOR19)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR19-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR < 2003 AND NOT (T42 IS NULL AND T43 IS NULL AND T44 IS NULL AND T45 IS NULL AND T46 IS NULL AND T47 IS NULL AND T48 IS NULL AND T49 IS NULL AND T50 IS NULL AND T51 IS NULL) AJCC TNM data items are not posted.
TCOR19-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND (T42 IS NULL OR T43 IS NULL OR T44 IS NULL OR T45 IS NULL OR T46 IS NULL OR T47 IS NULL OR T48 IS NULL OR T49 IS NULL OR T50 IS NULL OR T51 IS NULL) AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
TCOR19-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND NOT (T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X]) AND NOT (T42 IS NULL AND T43 IS NULL AND T44 IS NULL AND T45 IS NULL AND T46 IS NULL AND T47 IS NULL AND T48 IS NULL AND T49 IS NULL AND T50 IS NULL AND T51 IS NULL) AJCC TNM data items are not posted.
Feedback report messages (TCOR19)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR19-1 All AJCC TNM staging data must be blank for tumours diagnosed prior to 2003. Reported data will not be loaded into CCR. AJCC TNM fatal error
TCOR19-2 Eligible AJCC TNM staging site: all AJCC TNM staging variables must be reported. AJCC TNM fatal error
TCOR19-3 Non-eligible AJCC TNM staging site: all AJCC TNM staging variables must be blank. Reported data will not be loaded into CCR. AJCC TNM fatal error
Revision (TCOR19)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR20

Purpose

This edit ensures that TNM stage group is reported only when clinical and pathologic TNM stage group are not reported.

Referenced fields (TCOR20)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T48 4 AJCC clinical TNM stage group TAJCCCLINSG
T49 4 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group TAJCCPATHSG
T50 4 AJCC TNM stage group TAJCCSG

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC TNM stage group can only be reported when both AJCC clinical TNM stage group and AJCC pathologic TNM stage group are either unknown or not assessed.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the AJCC TNM Staging. Ex:Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TCOR20)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR20-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T50 <> ‘99' AND (T48 NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] OR T49 NOT IN [‘99', ‘X']) AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messasges (TCOR20)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR20-1 TNM stage group cannot be reported when clinical and/or pathologic TNM stage group is reported. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TCOR20)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR21

Purpose

This edit ensures that the combination of AJCC Clinical TNM stage group and the individual clinical T, N, M values combination is acceptable.

Referenced fields (TCOR21)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T42 9 AJCC clinical T TAJCCCLINT
T43 3 AJCC clinical N TAJCCCLINN
T44 3 AJCC clinical M TAJCCCLINM
T48 4 AJCC clinical TNM stage group TAJCCCLINSG

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • If AJCC clinical TNM stage group is known and assessed then AJCC clinical T, N, M and AJCC clinical TNM stage group combination must be valid for the site49.
  • If AJCC clinical TNM stage group is not assessed then AJCC clinical T, N and M combination must not lead to a stage group for the site
  • If AJCC clinical TNM stage group is unknown then all AJCC clinical T, N and M values must also be unknown and conversely.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TCOR21)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR21-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND NOT (T42 = ‘99' AND T43 = ‘99' AND T44 = ‘99') AND T48 NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND T42, T43, T44, T48 NOT IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
TCOR21-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T48 = ‘X' AND T42, T43, T44 IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
TCOR21-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T48 = ‘99' AND (T42 <> ‘99' OR T43 <> ‘99' OR T44 <> ‘99') AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
TCOR21-4 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T48 <> ‘99' AND T42 = ‘99' AND T43 = ‘99' AND T44 = ‘99' AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TCOR21)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR21-1 AJCC clinical TNM stage group is invalid for reported AJCC clinical T, N and M values and site. AJCC TNM error
TCOR21-2 AJCC clinical TNM stage group must be assessed for reported clinical T, N and M values and site. AJCC TNM error
TCOR21-3 All AJCC clinical T, N and M values must be set to ‘Unknown' when AJCC clinical TNM stage group is ‘Unknown'. AJCC TNM error
TCOR21-4 AJCC clinical TNM stage group must be set to ‘Unknown' when All AJCC clinical T, N and M values are set to ‘Unknown'. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TCOR21)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR22

Purpose

This edit ensures that the combination of AJCC pathologic TNM stage group and the individualpathologic T, N, M values is acceptable.

Referenced fields (TCOR22)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T45 9 AJCC pathologic T TAJCCPATHT
T46 3 AJCC pathologic N TAJCCPATHN
T47 3 AJCC pathologic M TAJCCPATHM
T49 4 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group TAJCCPATHSG

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29.
  • If AJCC pathologic TNM stage group is known and assessed then AJCC pathologic T, N, M and AJCC pathologic TNM stage group combination must be valid for the site49.
  • If AJCC pathologic TNM stage group is not assessed then AJCC pathologic T, N and M combination must not imply a stage group for the site49.
  • If AJCC pathologic TNM stage group is unknown then all AJCC pathologic T, N and M values must also be unknown and conversely.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TCOR22)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR22-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for SiteX] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND NOT (T45 = ‘99' AND T46 = ‘99' AND T47 = ‘99') AND T49 NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND T45, T46, T47, T49 NOT IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
TCOR22-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T49 = ‘X' AND T45, T46, T47 IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
TCOR22-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T49 = ‘99' AND (T45 <> ‘99' OR T46 <> ‘99' OR T47 <> ‘99') AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
TCOR22-4 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T49 <> ‘99' AND T45 = ‘99' AND T46 = ‘99' AND T47 = ‘99' AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TCOR22)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR22-1 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group is invalid for reported AJCC pathologic T, N and M values and site. AJCC TNM error
TCOR22-2 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group must be assessed for reported pathologic T, N and M values and site. AJCC TNM error
TCOR22-3 All AJCC pathologic T, N and M values must be set to ‘Unknown' when AJCC pathologic TNM stage group is ‘Unknown'. AJCC TNM error
TCOR22-4 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group must be set to ‘Unknown' when All AJCC pathologic T, N and M values are set to ‘Unknown'. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TCOR22)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR23

Purpose

This edit ensures that the combination of AJCC TNM stage group and the individual clinical/pathologic T, N, M values is acceptable.

Referenced fields(TCOR23)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T42 9 AJCC clinical T TAJCCCLINT
T43 3 AJCC clinical N TAJCCCLINN
T44 3 AJCC clinical M TAJCCCLINM
T45 9 AJCC pathologic T TAJCCPATHT
T46 3 AJCC pathologic N TAJCCPATHN
T47 3 AJCC pathologic M TAJCCPATHM
T50 4 AJCC TNM stage group TAJCCSG

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • If AJCC TNM stage group is known then the most “accurate” combination of known and assessed AJCC clinical/pathologic T, N, M values and AJCC TNM stage group must be valid49,50. For any staging element (T, N, M), pathologic values are always considered more “accurate” when both clinical and pathologic values are known and assessed.
  • Example If cT = ‘T2' and pT = ‘T1', the most accurate tumour stage is ‘T1' (pathologic data take precedence over clinical).
  • Example If cM = ‘M1' and pM = ‘MX', the most accurate metastases stage is ‘M1' (pathologic M is not assessed).

To simplify the edit logic, let:

  • BestT (clin, path), BestN (clin, path) and BestM (clin, path) be functions that return the most “accurate” tumour, node and metastases staging value based on the rules stated above. When both clinical and pathologic values are '99', 'TX', 'NX' or 'MX', these functions always return the pathologic value.
  • Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.
Edit logic (TCOR23)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR23-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T50 <> '99' AND ((BestT (T42, T45) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestN (T43, T46) IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestM (T44, T47) IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestT(T42, T45), T50 NOT IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X]) OR (BestT (T42, T45) IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestN (T43, T46) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestM (T44, T47) IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestN (T43, T46), T50 NOT IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X]) OR (BestT (T42, T45) IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestN (T43, T46) IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestM (T44, T47) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestM (T44, T47), T50 NOT IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X]) OR (BestT (T42, T45) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestN (T43, T46) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestM (T44, T47) IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestT (T42, T45), BestN (T43, T46), T50 NOT IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X]) OR (BestT (T42, T45) IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestN (T43, T46) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestM (T44, T47) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestN (T43, T46), BestM (T44, T47), T50 NOT IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X]) OR ((BestT (T42, T45) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestN (T43, T46) IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestM (T44, T47) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestT(T42, T45), BestM (T44, T47), T50 NOT IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X]) OR (BestT (T42, T45) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestN (T43, T46) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestM (T44, T47) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestT(T42, T45), BestN (T43, T46), BestM (T44, T47), T50 NOT IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X])) AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TCOR23)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR23-1 AJCC TNM stage group is invalid for reported clinical/pathologic T, N and M values and site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TCOR23)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR24

Purpose

This edit ensures that AJCC edition number is coherent with all remaining AJCC TNM staging variables.

Referenced fields (TCOR24)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T42 9 AJCC clinical T TAJCCCLINT
T43 3 AJCC clinical N TAJCCCLINN
T44 3 AJCC clinical M TAJCCCLINM
T45 9 AJCC pathologic T TAJCCPATHT
T46 3 AJCC pathologic N TAJCCPATHN
T47 3 AJCC pathologic M TAJCCPATHM
T48 4 AJCC clinical TNM stage group TAJCCCLINSG
T49 4 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group TAJCCPATHSG
T50 4 AJCC TNM stage group TAJCCSG
T51 2 AJCC edition number TAJCCEDNUM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records with the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29.
  • If AJCC edition number is set to ‘Not staged' then all other AJCC TNM staging variables must be set to ‘Unknown' and conversely.
Edit logic (TCOR24)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR24-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND ((T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for AJCC TNM Staging Colorectal sites] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for AJCC TNM Staging Colorectal sites] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for AJCC TNM Staging Colorectal sites]) OR (T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for AJCC TNM Staging Breast sites] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for AJCC TNM Staging Breast sites] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Behaviour codes for AJCC TNM Staging Breast sites]) OR (T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for AJCC TNM Staging Prostate sites] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for AJCC TNM Staging Prostate sites] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Behaviour codes for AJCC TNM Staging Prostate sites])) AND T42 = ‘99' AND T43 = ‘99' AND T44 = ‘99' AND T45 = ‘99' AND T46 = ‘99' AND T47 = ‘99' AND T48 = ‘99' AND T49 = ‘99' AND T50 = ‘99' AND T51 <> ‘00' AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
TCOR24-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND ((T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for AJCC TNM Staging Colorectal sites] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for AJCC TNM Staging Colorectal sites] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for AJCC TNM Staging Colorectal sites]) OR (T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for AJCC TNM Staging Breast sites] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for AJCC TNM Staging Breast sites] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Behaviour codes for AJCC TNM Staging Breast sites]) OR (T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for AJCC TNM Staging Prostate sites] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for AJCC TNM Staging Prostate sites] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Behaviour codes for AJCC TNM Staging Prostate sites])) AND T51 = ‘00' AND (T42 <> ‘99' OR T43 <> ‘99' OR T44 <> ‘99' OR T45 <> ‘99' OR T46 <> ‘99' OR T47 <> ‘99' OR T48 <> ‘99' OR T49 <> ‘99' OR T50 <> ‘99') All AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TCOR24)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR24-1 TNM edition number must be set to ‘Not Staged' when all other AJCC TNM staging variables are ‘Unknown'. AJCC TNM error
TCOR24-2 TNM edition number cannot be set to ‘Not Staged' when some AJCC TNM staging variables are reported. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TCOR24)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR26

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between Ambiguous terminology diagnosis and Date of conclusive diagnosis.

Referenced fields (TCOR26)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T53 1 Ambiguous terminology diagnosis TDATCONCLUSDIAG
T54 8 Date of conclusive diagnosis TMULTCOUNT

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Date of Diagnosis is before 2008 then Ambiguous terminology diagnosis and Date of conclusive diagnosis must both be blank.
  • If Date of Diagnosis is 2008 and onwards then Ambiguous terminology diagnosis and Date of conclusive diagnosis must be either both blank or both reported.
Edit logic (TCOR26)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR26-1 T5 IN [‘1','2'] AND T12.YEAR < 2008 AND (T53 IS NOT NULL OR T54 IS NOT NULL) Record rejected
TCOR26-2 T5 IN [‘1','2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2008 AND (T53 IS NOT NULL OR T54 IS NOT NULL) AND (T53 IS NULL OR T54 IS NULL) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR26)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR26-1 Ambiguous terminology diagnosis and Date of conclusive diagnosis must both be blank if Date of diagnosis is before 2008. Core error
TCOR26-2 If Date of diagnosis is 2008 and onwards, Ambiguous terminology diagnosis and Date of conclusive diagnosis must either both be reported or both be left blank. Core error
Revision (TCOR26)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TCOR27

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter.

Referenced fields (TCOR27)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 5 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T55 2 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary TMULTTUMONEPRIM
T56 8 Date of multiple tumours DDATMULT
T57 2 Multiplicity counter TMULTCOUNT

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Date of Diagnosis is before 2008 then Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter must all be blank.
  • If Date of Diagnosis is 2008 and onwards then Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours, and Multiplicity counter must be either all blank or all reported.
Edit logic (TCOR27)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR27-1 T5 IN [‘1','2'] AND T12.YEAR < 2008 AND (T55 IS NOT NULL OR T56 IS NOT NULL OR T57 IS NOT NULL) Record rejected
TCOR27-2 T5 IN [‘1','2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2008 AND (T55 IS NOT NULL OR T56 IS NOT NULL OR T57 IS NOT NULL) AND (T55 IS NULL OR T56 IS NULL OR T57 IS NULL) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR27)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR27-1 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter must all be blank if Date of diagnosis is before 2008. Core error
TCOR27-2 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter must either all be blank or all be reported if Date of diagnosis is 2008 and onwards. Core error
Revision (TCOR27)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TCOR29

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between Ambiguous terminology diagnosis and Date of conclusive diagnosis.

Referenced fields (TCOR29)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T53 1 Ambiguous terminology diagnosis TAMBIGTERM
T54 8 Date of multiple tumours DDATMULT

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Ambiguous terminology diagnosis is “Conclusive terminology within 60 days of original diagnosis” (0) then Date of conclusive diagnosis must be “Not applicable” (88888888).
  • If Ambiguous terminology diagnosis is “Ambiguous terminology only” (1) then Date of conclusive diagnosis must be ”Accessioned based on ambiguous terminology diagnosis only” (00000000).
  • If Ambiguous terminology diagnosis is “Ambiguous terminology followed by conclusive terminology” (2) then Date of conclusive diagnosis must NOT be “Not applicable” (88888888) or  “Accessioned based on ambiguous terminology diagnosis only” (00000000).
  • If Ambiguous terminology diagnosis is “Unknown terminology” (9) then Date of conclusive diagnosis must indicate that date is unknown (99999999).
  • If Ambiguous terminology diagnosis is “Ambiguous terminology followed by conclusive terminology” (2) then Date of conclusive diagnosis should NOT be unknown (99999999).
Edit logic (TCOR29)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR29-1 T5 IN [‘1','2'] AND (T53 = ‘0' AND T54 <> ‘88888888') OR (T53 = ‘1' AND T54 <> ‘00000000') OR (T53 = ‘2' AND T54 IN [‘00000000', ‘88888888']) OR (T53 = ‘9' AND T54 <> ‘99999999') Record rejected
TCOR29-2 T5 IN [‘1', '2'] AND T53 IN [‘2'] AND T54 IN [‘99999999'] Warning
Feedback report messages (TCOR29)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR29-1 Ambiguous terminology diagnosis and Date of conclusive diagnosis are inconsistent. Core error
TCOR29-2 Date of conclusive diagnosis should be a valid calendar date when case is identified as "Ambiguous terminology followed by conclusive terminology”. Warning
Revision (TCOR29)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TCOR30

Purpose

This edit ensures that date of diagnosis and date of conclusive diagnosis respect a chronological sequence and time frame.

Referenced fields (TCOR30)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12 8 Date of diagnosis TDATDIAG
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T12.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of T12 (month of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T12.DAY 2 Last 2 digits of T12 (day of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T54 8 Date of Conclusive Diagnosis TDATCONCLUSDIAG
T54.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T54 (year of date of conclusive diagnosis) Not applicable
T54.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of T54 (month of date of conclusive diagnosis) Not applicable
T54.DAY 2 Last 2 digits of T54 (day of date of conclusive diagnosis) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Date of conclusive diagnosis must be greater than two months (60 days) after the Date of diagnosis.
Edit logic (TCOR30)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR30-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T54 NOT IN [‘00000000','88888888', ‘99999999'] AND ((T12.DAY <> ‘99' AND T54.DAY <> ‘99' AND T54 < T12) OR (T12.MONTH <> ‘99' AND T54.MONTH <> ‘99' AND T54.YEAR || T54.MONTH < T12.YEAR || T12.MONTH) OR (T54.YEAR < T12.YEAR)) Record rejected
TCOR30-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T54 NOT IN [‘00000000','88888888', ‘99999999'] and DIFF_DAYS (Date1,Date2) <= 60. See Appendix J – Interval between 2 dates (complete or partial). Record rejected
TCOR30-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR = T54.YEAR AND T12.MONTH = ‘99' AND T54.MONTH = ‘99' Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR30)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR30-1 Date of conclusive diagnosis is before date of diagnosis. Core error
TCOR30-2 Date of conclusive diagnosis must be greater than 60 days after the date of diagnosis. Core error
TCOR30-3 If the year of Date of diagnosis is equal to the year of Date of conclusive diagnosis and both months are unknown, the Date of conclusive diagnosis must be unknown. Core error
Revision (TCOR30)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TCOR31

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between ICD-O-2/3 Topography and Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary.

Referenced fields (TCOR31)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T15 5 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_02T
T55 2 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary TMULTTUMONEPRIM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary is coded as “polyp and adenocarcinoma” (31) or “Familial Adenomatous Polyposis (FAP) with carcinoma” (32) Then ICD-O-2/3 Topography must be coded as “Colon” (C180-C189), “Rectosigmoid Junction” (C199) or “Rectum” (C209).
Edit logic (TCOR31)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR31-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T55 IN [31,32] and T15 NOT IN [C180-C189, C199 or C209] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR31)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR31-1 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary and ICD-O-2/3 combination is invalid. Core error
Revision (TCOR31)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TCOR32

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between ICD-O-3 Behaviour and Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary.

Referenced fields (TCOR32)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_03B
T55 2 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary TMULTTUMONEPRIM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary is coded as either “Multiple benign (intracranial and CNS sites only)” (10), “Multiple borderline” (11), or “Benign (intracranial and CNS sites only) and borderline” (12), then ICD-O-3 Behaviour must be coded as either “benign” (0) or “borderline” (1).
Edit logic (TCOR32)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR32-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T55 IN [‘10', '11', '12'] AND T22 NOT IN [‘0','1'] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR32)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR32-1 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary and ICD-O-3 behaviour combination is invalid. Core error
Revision (TCOR32)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TCOR33

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours, Multiplicity counter, ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology.

Referenced fields (TCOR33)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T15 4 ICD–O–2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T24 1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis TMETHUSED
T55 2 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary TMULTTUMONEPRIM
T56 8 Date of multiple tumours DDATMULT
T57 2 Multiplicity counter TMULTCOUNT

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records where method used to establish the date of diagnosis is not ‘death certificate only”
  • If ICD–O–2/3 topography is ‘unknown primary' (C809) or ICD–O– 3 Histology refers to lymphoma, leukemia or immunoproliferative disease62 [9590-9989] then Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter must be ‘Information on multiple tumours not applicable for this site'.
  • If ICD-O-2/3 topography is known (not C809) and ICD–O–3 Histology does NOT refer to lymphoma, leukemia or immunoproliferative disease [9590-9989] then Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter must not be ‘Information on multiple tumours not applicable for this site'.
Edit logic (TCOR33)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR33-1 T5 IN [‘1','2'] AND T24 <> 8 AND (T15 = ‘C809' OR T21 IN [9590-9989]) AND T55 <> 88 OR T56 <> ‘88888888'  OR T57 <> ‘88' Record rejected
TCOR33-2 T5 IN [‘1','2'] AND T24 <> 8 AND (T15 <>  ‘C809' OR T21 NOT IN [9590-9989]) AND T55 = ‘88' OR T56 = ‘88888888' OR T57 = ‘88' Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR33)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR33-1 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter must be reported as ‘Information on multiple tumours not applicable for this site'. Core error
TCOR33-2 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter must NOT be reported as ‘Information on multiple tumours not applicable for this site'. Core error
Revision (TCOR33)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TCOR34

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between Date of multiple tumours and Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary.

Referenced fields (TCOR34)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T55 2 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary TMULTTUMONEPRIM
T56 8 Date of multiple tumours DDATMULT
T57 2 Multiplicity counter TMULTCOUNT

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary is “single tumour” (00) then  Date of multiple tumours  must be “single tumour” (00000000) and Multiplicity counter must be ‘01'.
  • If Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary is “not applicable for this site” (88) then Date of multiple tumours  must be “information on multiple tumours not applicable for this site” (88888888) and Multiplicity counter must be ‘Information on multiple tumours not applicable for this site' (88).
  • If Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary indicates multiple tumours (codes 10 through 80) then Date of multiple tumours must be the date the patient is diagnosed with multiple tumours or unknown (99999999) and Multiplicity counter must be values 02 through 87.
  • If Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary is “Unknown” (99) then Date of multiple tumours must be unknown (99999999) and Multiplicity counter must be “Multiple tumours present, unknown how many; unknown if single or multiple tumours” (99).
Edit logic (TCOR34)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR34-1 T5 IN [‘1','2'] AND (T55 = ‘00' AND T56 <> ‘00000000' OR T57 <> ‘01') OR (T55 = ‘88' AND T56 <> ‘88888888' OR T57 <> 88' ) OR (T55 = ‘99' AND T56 <> ‘99999999' OR T57 <> ‘99') OR (T55 IN [‘10','11','12','20','30','31','32','40','80'] AND (T56 = ‘00000000' OR T56 = ‘88888888') OR (T57 = ‘01' OR T57 = ‘88'  OR T57 = ‘99') Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR34)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR34-1 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, date of multiple tumours and multiplicity counter combination is invalid. Core error
Revision (TCOR34)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TCOR35

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between Method used to establish the date of diagnosis, Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter..

Referenced fields (TCOR35)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T24 1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis TMETHUSED
T55 2 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary TMULTTUMONEPRIM
T56 8 Date of multiple tumours DDATMULT
T57 2 Multiplicity counter TMULTCOUNT

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary is “Unknown” (99) and Method used to establish date of diagnosis is “Death certificate only” (8), then Date of multiple tumours must be “Unknown” (99999999) and Multiplicity counter must be “Multiple tumours present, unknown how many/unknown if single or multiple tumours” (99).
Edit logic (TCOR35)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR35-1 T5 IN [‘1','2'] AND (T55 = ‘99' AND T24 = ‘8') AND (T56 <> ‘99999999' OR T57 <> ‘99') Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR35)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR35-1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis, Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter combination is invalid. Core error
Revision (TCOR35)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

3.6 Match edits

The purpose of the match edits is to enforce the business rules between fields on different records. For ease of use, match edits have been divided into four groups:

  • Key input match edits: Ensure that input patient and tumour records respect the submission rules in terms of matching keys.
  • Key base match edits: Ensure that input patient and tumour records respect the actual state of the CCR in terms of matching keys.
  • Data item match edits: Enforce the business rules between data items (other than keys) found on different records.
  • Pre-posting match edits: Identify core error-free input records that cannot be posted to the CCR4 because some other related Input records are either missing or have core errors.

3.6.1 Key input match edits

The purpose of the key input match edits is to ensure that input patient and tumour records respect the submission rules in terms of matching keys.

At this level, the following fields are used as key:

  • Patient record: Reporting province/territory and patient identification number.
  • Tumour record: Reporting province/territory, patient identification number and tumour reference number.

The following table summarizes the purpose of each individual edit of this category:

Table 28 Input match edits summary
Edit name Purpose
KIM1 Ensures that only one operation affecting a specific patient record is performed (that is, add, delete or update) within a data submission.
KIM2 Ensures that only one operation affecting a specific Tumour record is performed (that is, add, delete or update) within a data submission.
KIM3 Enforces the submission rules regarding the addition of a patient record.
KIM4 Enforces the submission rules regarding the deletion of a patient record.
KIM5 Enforces the submission rules regarding the addition of a Tumour record.

Important note:

When a key input match edit fails, all related Input records (all input patient and tumour records sharing the same reporting province/territory and patient identification number) are rejected. Related records are also called the family of records.

KIM1

Purpose

This edit ensures that only one operation affecting a specific patient record is performed
(add, delete or update) within a data submission.

Referenced fields (KIM1)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN

Business rules

For Input Patient records
  • There cannot be another Input patient record with identical Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number within the same data submission.
Edit logic (KIM1)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KIM1-1 Input patient record that matches another Input patient record where P1=P1 AND P2=P2. Family rejected51
Feedback report messages (KIM1)
Sub–edit Text Type
KIM1-1 Family rejected: more than one Input patient record with the same Patient reporting province/territory and Patient identification number. Core error
Revision (KIM1)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Input Match Edit No.1.

KIM2

Purpose

This edit ensures that only on

Referenced fields (KIM2)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN

Business rules

For Input Tumour records
  • There cannot be another Input Tumour record with identical Reporting province/territory, Patient identification number and Tumour reference number within the same data submission.
Edit logic (KIM2)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KIM2-1 Input tumour record that matches another Input tumour record where T1=T1 AND T2=T2 AND T3=T3. Family rejected52
Feedback report messages (KIM2)
Sub–edit Text Type
KIM2-1 Family rejected: more than one Input tumour record with the same Tumour reporting province/territory, Tumour patient identification number and Tumour reference number. Core error
Revision (KIM2)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Input Match Edit No.2.

KIM3

Purpose

This edit enforces the submission rules regarding the addition of a patient record.

Referenced fields (KIM3)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE

Business fields

For Add Patient records
  • There must be at least one Add Tumour record with identical Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number and a blank CCR identification number within the same data submission.
  • There cannot be any Add Tumour record with identical Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number and a reported CCR identification number within the same data submission.
  • There cannot be any Update or Delete Tumour record with identical Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number within the same data submission.
Edit logic KIM3)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KIM3-1 Input patient record where P4='1' that matches no Input tumour record where T5='1' AND T1=P1 AND T2=P2. Family rejected53
KIM3-2 Input patient record where P4='1' that matches an Input tumour record where T5='1' AND T1=P1 AND T2=P2 AND T4 IS NOT NULL. Family rejected53
KIM3-3 Input patient record where P4='1' that matches an Input tumour record where T5 IN ['2','3'] AND T1=P1 AND T2=P2. Family rejected53
Feedback report messages (KIM3)
Sub–edit Text Type
KIM3-1 Family rejected: Add Patient record does not match any Add Tumour record. Core error
KIM3-2 Family rejected: Add Patient record matches an Add Tumour record with CCR identification number. Core error
KIM3-3 Family rejected: Add Patient record matches an Update or Delete Tumour record. Core error
Revision (KIM3)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Input Match Edit No.3.

KIM4

Purpose

This edit enforces the submission rules regarding the deletion of a patient record.

referenced fields (KIM4)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE

Business rules

For Delete Patient records
  • There must be at least one Delete Tumour record with identical Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number within the same data submission.
  • There cannot be any Add or Update Tumour record with identical Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number within the same data submission.
Edit logic (KIM4)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KIM4-1 Input patient record where P4='3' that matches no Input tumour record where T5='3' AND P1=T1 AND P2=T2. Family rejected53
KIM4-2 Input patient record where P4='3' that matches Input tumour record where T5 IN ['1','2'] AND P1=T1 AND P2=T2. Family rejected53
Feedback report messages (KIM4)
Sub–edit Text Type
KIM4-1 Delete Patient record does not match any Delete Tumour record. Core error
KIM4-2 Family rejected: Delete Patient record matches an Add or Update Tumour record. Core error
Revision (KIM4)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Input Match Edit No.4.
Business rules changed: CCR identification number has been removed from the edit since it is equivalent to Reporting province/territory – Patient identification number combination.

KIM5

Purpose

This edit enforces the submission rules regarding the addition of a tumour record.

Referenced fields (KIM5)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T4 9 CCR Identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE

Business rules

For Add Tumour records without CCR identification number
  • There must be an Add Patient record with identical Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number within the same data submission.
  • There cannot be any Update54 Patient records with identical Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number within the same data submission.
Edit logic (KIM5)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KIM5-1 Input tumour record where T5='1' AND T4 IS NULL that matches no Input patient record where P4='1' AND P1=T1 AND P2=T2. Family rejected55
KIM5-2 Input tumour record where T5='1' AND T4 IS NULL that matches Input patient record where P4='2' AND P1=T1 AND P2=T2. Family rejected55
Feedback report messages (KIM5)
Sub–edit Text Type
KIM5-1 Family rejected: Add Tumour record without CCR_ID does not match an Add Patient record. Core error
KIM5-2 Family rejected: Add Tumour record without CCR_ID matches an Update Patient record. Core error
Revision (KIM5)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Input Match Edit No.6.

3.6.2 Key base match edits

The purpose of the key base match edits is to ensure that input patient and tumour records respect the actual state of the CCR in terms of matching keys.

At this level, the following fields are used as keys:

  • Patient record: CCR identification number, reporting province/territory and patient identification number.
  • Tumour record: CCR identification number, reporting province/territory, patient identification number and tumour reference number.

The following table summarizes the purpose of each individual edit of this category.

Table 29 Base match edits summary
Edit name Purpose
KBM1 Ensures that no duplicate Patient keys are posted to the CCR.
KBM2 Ensures that Update or Delete Patient record keys match a Base Patient record.
KBM3 Ensures that no duplicate Tumour keys are posted to the CCR.
KBM4 Ensures that an Add Tumour record with CCR identification number matches a Base patient record owned by the Reporting province/territory.
KBM5 Ensures that Update or Delete Tumour record keys match a Base tumour record.

Important note

When a key base match edit fails, the conflicting base record (if any), is included in the detailed feedback report for easier error correction.

Writing conventions throughout the following edit descriptions:

  • Expression "base patient/tumour record" means a patient/tumour record already in the CCR.
  • Expression "add/update/delete/input patient/tumour record" means a patient/tumour record within the data submission.
  • Unless specified otherwise, field numbers prefixed with "I" are input fields and field numbers prefixed with "B" are Base fields. 
    Example: IT5 is the Tumour record type field on an input tumour record.
    Example: IP1 is the Reporting province/territory field on an input patient record

KBM1

Purpose

This edit ensures that no duplicate patient keys are posted to the CCR.

Referenced fields (KBM1)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE

Business rules

For Add Patient records
  • There must not be a Base patient record with identical Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number.
Edit logic (KBM1)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KBM1-1 Input patient record where IP4='1' that matches a Base patient record where IP1=BP1 AND IP2=BP2. Record rejected
Feedback report messages (KBM1)
Sub–edit Text Type
KBM1-1 A Base patient record with identical reporting province/Territory and Patient identification number already exists. Core error
Revision (KBM1)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.25.

KBM2

Purpose

This edit ensures that update or delete patient record keys match a base patient record.

Referenced fields (KBM2)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE

Business rules

For Update or Delete Patient records
  • There must be a Base patient record with identical Reporting province/territory, Patient identification number and CCR identification number.
Edit logic (KBM2)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KBM2-1 Input patient record where IP4 IN ['2','3'] that matches a Base patient record where IP1=BP1 AND IP2<>BP2 AND IP3=BP3. Record rejected
KBM2-2 Input patient record where IP4 IN ['2','3'] that matches a Base patient record where IP1=BP1 AND IP2=BP2 AND IP3<>BP3. Record rejected
KBM2-3 Input patient record where IP4 IN ['2','3'] that matches a Base patient record where IP1<>BP1 AND IP3=BP3. Record rejected
KBM2-4 Input patient record where IP4 IN ['2','3'] that match no Base patient record where (IP1=BP1 AND IP2=BP2) OR IP3=BP3. Record rejected
Feedback report messages (KBM2)
Sub–edit Text Type
KBM2-1 Based on the CCR identification number, the Patient identification number is incorrect. Core error
KBM2-2 Based on the Reporting province/territory and the Patient identification number, the CCR identification number is incorrect. Core error
KBM2-3 Based on the CCR identification number, the Patient is owned by another province/territory. Core error
KBM2-4 No matching Patient record found in the CCR. Core error
Revision (KBM2)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.26.

KBM3

Purpose

This edit ensures that no duplicate tumour keys are posted to the CCR.

Referenced fields (KBM3)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/Territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE

Business rules

For Add Tumour records
  • There must not be a Base tumour record with an identical Reporting province/territory, Patient identification number and Tumour reference number.
Edit logic (KBM3)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KBM3-1 Input tumour record where IT5='1' that matches a Base tumour record where IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3. Record rejected
Feedback report messages (KBM3)
Sub–edit Text Type
KBM3-1 A Base tumour record with identical Reporting province/territory, Patient identification number and Tumour reference number already exists. Core error
Revision (KBM3)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.32 – Part 1.

KBM4

Purpose

This edit ensures that an add tumour record with CCR identification number matches a base patient record owned by the reporting province/territory.

Referenced fields (KBM4)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 9 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 9 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID

Business rules

For Add Tumour records with CCR identification number
  • There must be a Base patient record with the same Reporting province/territory, Patient identification number and CCR identification number.
Edit logic (KBM4)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KBM4-1 Input tumour record where IT5='1' AND IT4 IS NOT NULL that matches a Base patient record where IT1=BP1 AND IT2<>BP2 AND IT4=BP3. Record rejected
KBM4-2 Input tumour record where IT5='1' AND IT4 IS NOT NULL that matches a Base patient record where IT1=BP1 AND IT2=BP2 AND IT4<>BP3. Record rejected
KBM4-3 Input tumour record where IT5='1' AND IT4 IS NOT NULL that matches a Base patient record where IT1<>BP1 AND IT4=BP3. Record rejected
KBM4-4 Input tumour record where IT5='1' AND IT4 IS NOT NULL that matches no Base patient record where (IT1=BP1 AND IT2=BP2) OR IT4=BP3. Record rejected
Feedback report messages (KBM4)
Sub–edit Text Type
KBM4-1 Based on CCR identification number, Patient identification number is incorrect. Core error
KBM4-2 Based on Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number, CCR identification number is incorrect. Core error
KBM4-3 Based on CCR identification number, the Patient record belongs to another province/territory. Core error
KBM4-4 Matching Base patient record not found. Core error
Revision (KBM4)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.32 – Part 2 and Additional rules for updating the CCR #3.
Business rules changed: This aggregated edit is now using the Base Patient records.

KBM5

Purpose

This edit ensures that update or delete tumour record keys match a base tumour record.

Referenced fields (KBM5)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE

Business rules

For Update and Delete Tumour records
  • There must be a Base tumour record with identical Reporting province/territory, Patient identification number, Tumour reference number and CCR identification number.
Edit logic (KBM5)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KBM5-1 Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] that matches a Base tumour record where IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3 AND IT4<>BT4. Record rejected
KBM5-2 Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] that matches a Base tumour record where IT1=BT1 AND IT2<>BT2 AND IT4=BT4. Record rejected
KBM5-3 Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] that matches no Base tumour record where IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3 but matches a Base tumour record where IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3<>BT3 AND IT4=BT4. Record rejected
KBM5-4 Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] that matches no Base tumour record where (IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2) OR (IT1=BT1 AND IT4=BT4). Record rejected
Feedback report messages (KBM5)
Sub–edit Text Type
KBM5-1 Based on Reporting province/territory, Patient identification number and Tumour reference number, CCR identification number is incorrect. Core error
KBM5-2 Based on CCR identification number and Reporting province/territory, Patient identification number is incorrect. Core error
KBM5-3 Matching Base tumour record not found. Tumour reference number may be incorrect. Core error
KBM5-4 Matching Base tumour record not found. Core error
Revision (KBM5)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.33.

3.6.3 Data item match edits

The purpose of the data item match edits is to enforce the business rules between data items (other than keys) found on different records.

The following table summarizes the purpose of each individual edit of this category.

Table 30 Data item match edits summary
Edit name Purpose
DIM1 Ensures that Date of diagnosis and Date of birth are coherent and within time frame.
DIM2 Ensures that Date of diagnosis and Date of death are coherent.
DIM3 Ensures that Method of diagnosis accurately reflects the relationship between Date of diagnosis and Date of death.
DIM4 Ensures that Method used to establish the date of diagnosis accurately reflects the relationship between Date of diagnosis and Date of death.
DIM5 Ensures that patient Sex and tumour Topography are coherent.
DIM6 Ensures that no "duplicate" tumour records are created for any given Patient record.

Important notes:

Writing conventions throughout the following edit descriptions:

  • Expression "base patient/tumour record" means a patient/tumour record already in the CCR.
  • Expression "add/update/delete/input patient/tumour record" means a patient/tumour record within the data submission.
  • Unless specified otherwise, field numbers prefixed with "I" are input fields and field numbers prefixed with "B" are Base fields.
    Example: IT5 is the Tumour record type field on an input tumour record.
    Example: IP1 is the Reporting province/territory field on an input patient record

These edits only consider input records that have neither core fatal errors nor core errors. (See section 3.1.7 Message types for information about different types of errors.) Since DIM edits find core errors, an input record that fails a given DIM edit will automatically be excluded from all subsequent DIM edits.

These edits must be performed in a specific order (see below).

When a data item match edit fails, the conflicting base record (patient or tumour, if any) is included in the detailed feedback report for easier error correction.

3.6.3.1 Special order of execution

Data item match edits must be performed horizontally. That is, all sub-edits with the same number must be processed together. Example: instead of processing all sub-edits from DIM1 before processing all sub-edits from DIM2 (vertically), all sub-edits DIMX-1 must be processed before processing sub-edits DIMX-2 (horizontally). Although the sub-edits within a horizontal group can be processed in any order, these groups of sub-edits must be processed in a very specific order.

Step 1: All sub-edits that consider only input records (Sub-edits number 1 and 4).

Step 2: All sub-edits that consider base patient records that are not updated by input patient records (Sub-edits number 2 and 5).

Step 3: All sub-edits that consider base tumour records that are not updated nor deleted by input tumour records must be processed (Sub-edit number 3 and 6).

The ordering is essential to guarantee the effectiveness of these edits since each step builds the necessary conditions for the next one. The following table summarizes the special order of execution.

Table 31 Data item match edits special order of execution
Edit DIM1 DIM2 DIM3 DIM4 DIM5 DIM6
Sub-edit 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6
Step 1 x     x     x     x     x     x     x     x     x     x    
Step 2   x     x     x     x     x     x     x     x     -     -  
Step 3     x     x     x     x     x     x     x     x     x     x

DIM1

Purpose

This edit ensures that date of diagnosis and date of birth are coherent and within time frame.

Referenced fields (DIM1)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P11 8 Date of birth PDATBIR
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12 8 Date of diagnosis TDATDIAG

Business rules

Date of diagnosis must be on or after the Date of birth.
  • Year of Date of diagnosis and year of the Date of birth must not be more than 117 yearsapart.

Important notes:

  • These sub-edits must be processed in a specific order. See Section - 3.6.3.1 Special order of execution for more details.
  • Partially known dates must be compared using the highest common level of precision.

    Example: If Date1 = YYYYMMDD and Date2 = YYYYMM99 then dates must be compared using the year and month only. Thus, for the purpose of the following sub-edits, '20031002' and '20031099' are equal.
Edit logic (DIM1)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
DIM1-1 Core error-free56 Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] that matches a Core error-free Input patient record where IP4 IN ['1','2'] AND IP1=IT1 AND IP2=IT2 AND IP11<>'99999999' AND IT12<IP11 (see note above). Tumour record rejected
DIM1-2 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4 IS NOT NULL that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP3=IT4 but matches a Base patient record where BP3=IT4 AND BP11<>'99999999' AND IT12<BP11 (see note above). Tumour record rejected
DIM1-3 Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' that matches a Base tumour record where IP3=BT4 AND IP11<>'99999999' AND BT12<IP11 (see note above) that matches no Core error-free Input Tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] AND IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3. Patient record rejected
DIM1-4 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] that matches a Core error-free Input patient record where IP4 IN ['1','2'] AND IP1=IT1 AND IP2=IT2 AND IP11<>'99999999' AND IT12.YEAR>(IP11.YEAR+117). Tumour record rejected
DIM1-5 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4 IS NOT NULL that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP3=IT4 but matches a Base Patient record where BP3=IT4 AND BP11<>'99999999' AND IT12.YEAR>(BP11.YEAR+117). Tumour record rejected
DIM1-6 Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' that matches a Base tumour record where IP3=BT4 AND IP11<>'99999999' AND BT12.YEAR>(IP11.YEAR+117) that matches no Core error-free Input Tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] AND IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3. Patient record rejected
Feedback report messages (DIM1)
Sub–edit Text Type
DIM1-1 Date of diagnosis is before Date of birth on matching Input patient record. Core error
DIM1-2 Date of diagnosis is before Date of birth on matching Base patient record. Core error
DIM1-3 Date of birth is after Date of diagnosis on matching Base tumour record. Core error
DIM1-4 Date of diagnosis is more than 117 years after Date of birth on matching Input patient record. Core error
DIM1-5 Date of diagnosis is more than 117 years after Date of birth on matching Base patient record. Core error
DIM1-6 Date of birth is more than 117 years before Date of diagnosis on matching Base tumour record. Core error
Revision (DIM1)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.28.

DIM2

Purpose

This edit ensures that date of diagnosis and date of death are coherent.

Referenced fields (DIM2)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P14 8 Date of death PDATDEA
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12 8 Date of diagnosis TDATDIAG

Business rules

Tumour Date of diagnosis cannot be after the patient Date of death.

Important notes:

  • These sub-edits must be processed in a specific order. See Section 3.6.3.1 Special order of execution for more details.
  • Partially known dates must be compared using the highest common level of precision.

    Example: If Date1 = YYYYMMDD and Date2 = YYYYMM99 then dates must be compared using the year and month only. Thus, for the purpose of the following sub-edits, '20031002' and '20031099' are equal.
Edit logic (DIM2)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
DIM2-1 Core error-free56 Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] that matches a Core error-free Input patient record where IP4 IN ['1','2'] AND IP1=IT1 AND IP2=IT2 AND IP14 NOT IN ['99999999','00000000'] AND IP14<IT12 (see note above). Tumour record rejected
DIM2-2 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4 IS NOT NULL that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP3=IT4 but matches a Base Patient record where BP3=IT4 AND BP14 NOT IN ['99999999','00000000'] AND BP14<IT12 (see note above). Tumour record rejected
DIM2-3 Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP14 NOT IN ['99999999','00000000'] that matches a Base tumour record where IP3=BT4 AND BT12>IP14 (see note above) that matches no Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] AND IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3. Patient record rejected
Feedback report messages (DIM2)
Sub–edit Text Type
DIM2-1 Date of diagnosis is after Date of death on matching Input patient record. Core error
DIM2-2 Date of diagnosis is after Date of death on matching Base patient record. Core error
DIM2-3 Date of death is before Date of diagnosis on matching Base tumour record. Core error
Revision (DIM2)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.29.

DIM3

Purpose

This edit ensures that the method of diagnosis accurately reflects the relationship between the date of diagnosis and the date of death.

Referenced fields (DIM3)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P14 8 Date of death PDATDEA
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T11 1 Method of diagnosis TMETDIAG
T12 8 Date of diagnosis TDATDIAG
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable

Business rules

For tumours diagnosed between 1992 and 2003
  • Method of diagnosis cannot be 'Death certificate only (DCO)' or 'Autopsy' when the Date of death indicates that the 'Patient is not known to have died'.
  • Method of diagnosis can be anything when Date of death is unknown or equal to Date of diagnosis.
  • Method of diagnosis cannot be 'Death certificate only (DCO)' when Date of diagnosis is before Date of death.57

Important notes:

  • These sub-edits must be processed in a specific order. See Section 3.6.3.1 Special order of execution for more details.
  • Partially known dates must be compared using the highest common level of precision.

    Example: If Date1 = YYYYMMDD and Date2 = YYYYMM99 then dates must be compared using the year and month only. Thus, for the purpose of the following sub-edits, '20031002' and '20031099' are equal.
Edit logic (DIM3)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
DIM3-1 Core error-free56 Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT11 IN ['2','6'] AND IT12.YEAR>=1992 AND IT12.YEAR<=2003 that matches a Core error-free Input patient record where IP4 IN ['1','2'] AND IP1=IT1 AND IP2=IT2 AND IP14='00000000' Tumour record rejected
DIM3-2 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4 IS NOT NULL AND IT11 IN ['2','6'] AND IT12.YEAR>=1992 AND IT12.YEAR<=2003 that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP3=IT4 but matches a Base patient record where BP3=IT4 AND BP14='00000000' Tumour record rejected
DIM3-3 Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP14='00000000' that matches a Base tumour record where IP3=BT4 AND BT11 IN ['2','6'] AND BT12.YEAR>=1992 AND BT12.YEAR<=2003 that matches no Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] AND IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3. Patient record rejected
DIM3-4 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT11='6' AND IT12.YEAR>=1992 AND IT12.YEAR<=2003 that matches a Core error-free Input patient record where IP4 IN ['1','2'] AND IP1=IT1 AND IP2=IT2 AND IP14 NOT IN ['00000000', '99999999'] AND IP14>IT12 (see note above). Tumour record rejected
DIM3-5 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4 IS NOT NULL AND IT11='6' AND IT12.YEAR>=1992 AND IT12.YEAR<=2003 that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP3=IT4 but matches a Base patient record where BP3=IT4 AND BP14 NOT IN ['00000000', '99999999'] AND BP14>IT12 (see note above). Tumour record rejected
DIM3-6 Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP14 NOT IN ['00000000', '99999999'] that matches a Base tumour record where IP3=BT4 AND BT11='6' AND BT12.YEAR>=1992 AND BT12.YEAR<=2003 AND BT12<IP14 (see note above) that matches no Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] AND IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3. Patient record Rejected
Feedback report messages (DIM3)
Sub–edit Text Type
DIM3-1 Method of diagnosis cannot be 'Death certificate only (DCO)' or 'Autopsy' when the Date of death indicates that the 'Patient is not known to have died' on matching Input patient record. Core error
DIM3-2 Method of diagnosis cannot be 'Death certificate only (DCO)' or 'Autopsy' when the Date of death indicates that the 'Patient is not known to have died' on matching Base patient record. Core error
DIM3-3 Date of death cannot indicate that patient is alive when Method of diagnosis is 'Death certificate only (DCO)' or 'Autopsy' on a matching Base tumour record. Core error
DIM3-4 Method of Diagnosis cannot be 'Death certificate only (DCO)' when Date of diagnosis is before Date of death on matching Input patient record. Core error
DIM3-5 Method of diagnosis cannot be 'Death certificate only (DCO)' when the Date of diagnosis is before Date of death on matching Base patient record. Core error
DIM3-6 Date of death cannot be after Date of diagnosis on a matching Base tumour record where Method of diagnosis is 'Death certificate only (DCO)'. Core error
Revision (DIM3)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.30 – Part 1.

DIM4

Purpose

This edit ensures that the method used to establish the date of diagnosis accurately reflects the relationship between date of diagnosis and date of death.

Referenced fields (DIM4)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P14 8 Date of death PDATDEA
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T11 1 Method of diagnosis TMETDIAG
T12 8 Date of diagnosis TDATDIAG
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T24 1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis TMETHUSED

Business rules

For tumours diagnosed between 1992 and 2003
  • Method used to establish the date of diagnosis cannot be ‘Autopsy only' or ‘Death certificate only (DCO)' when Date of death indicates that the 'Patient is not known to have died' or when Date of diagnosis is before Date of death.
  • Method used to establish the date of diagnosis can be anything when Date of death is unknown or equal to Date of diagnosis.

Important notes:

  • These sub-edits must be processed in a specific order. See Section 3.6.3.1 Special order of execution for more details.
  • Partially known dates must be compared using the highest common level of precision.

    Example: If Date1 = YYYYMMDD and Date2 = YYYYMM99 then dates must be compared using the year and month only. Thus, for the purpose of the following sub-edits, '20031002' and '20031099' are equal.
Edit logic (DIM4)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
DIM4-1 Core error-free56 Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT12.YEAR>=2004 AND IT24 IN ['3','8'] that matches a Core error-free Input patient record where IP4 IN ['1','2'] AND IP1=IT1 AND IP2=IT2 AND IP14='00000000' Tumour record rejected
DIM4-2 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4 IS NOT NULL AND IT12.YEAR>=2004 AND IT24 IN ['3','8'] that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP3=IT4 but matches a Base patient record where BP3=IT4 AND BP14='00000000'. Tumour record rejected
DIM4-3 Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP14='00000000' that matches a Base tumour record where IP3=BT4 AND BT12.YEAR>=2004 AND BT24 IN ['3','8'] that matches no Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] AND IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3. Patient record rejected
DIM4-4 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT12.YEAR>=2004 AND IT24 IN ['3','8'] that matches a Core error-free Input patient record where IP4 IN ['1','2'] AND IP1=IT1 AND IP2=IT2 AND IP14 NOT IN ['00000000', '99999999'] AND IP14>IT12 (see note above). Tumour record rejected
DIM4-5 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4 IS NOT NULL AND IT12.YEAR>=2004 AND IT24 IN ['3','8'] that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP3=IT4 but matches a Base patient record where BP3=IT4 AND BP14 NOT IN ['00000000', '99999999'] AND BP14>IT12 (see note above). Tumour record rejected
DIM4-6 Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP14 NOT IN ['00000000', '99999999'] that matches a Base tumour record where IP3=BT4 AND BT12.YEAR>=2004 AND BT12<IP14 (see note above) AND BT24 IN ['3','8'] that matches no Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] AND IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3. Patient record rejected
Feedback report messages (DIM4)
Sub–edit Text Type
DIM4-1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis cannot be 'Autopsy Only' or 'Death certificate only (DCO)' when Date of death indicates that the 'Patient is not known to have died' on matching Input Patient record. Core error
DIM4-2 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis cannot be 'Autopsy Only' or 'Death certificate only (DCO)' when Date of death indicates that the 'Patient is not known to have died' on matching Base patient record. Core error
DIM4-3 Date of death cannot indicate that 'Patient is not known to have died' when Method used to establish the date of diagnosis is 'Autopsy Only' or 'Death certificate only (DCO)' on a matching Base tumour record. Core error
DIM4-4 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis cannot be 'Autopsy Only' or 'Death certificate only (DCO)' when Date of diagnosis is before Date of death on matching Input Patient record. Core error
DIM4-5 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis cannot be 'Autopsy Only' or 'Death certificate only (DCO)' when Date of diagnosis is before Date of death on matching Base patient record. Core error
DIM4-6 Date of death cannot be after Date of Diagnosis on matching Base tumour record where Method used to establish the date of diagnosis is 'Autopsy Only' or 'Death certificate only (DCO)' Core error
Revision (DIM4)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.30 – Part 2.

DIM5

Purpose

This edit ensures that patient sex and tumour topography are coherent.

Referenced fields (DIM5)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P10 1 Sex PSEX
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T

Business rules

  • Tumours diagnosed in female organ must be associated with female patient. Female organs are: ICD-O-2/3 Topography: C510-C589.
  • Tumours diagnosed in male organ must be associated with male patient. Male organs are: ICD-O-2/3 Topography: C600-C639.

Important notes

These sub-edits must be processed in a specific order. See Section – 3.6.3.1 Special order of execution.

DIM5

Edit logic (DIM5)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
DIM5-1 (Core error-free56 Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT15 IN [ICD-O-2/3 Topography codes associated to female organ] that matches a Core error-free Input patient record where IP4 IN ['1','2'] AND IP1=IT1 AND IP2=IT2 AND IP10 IN ['1','9'])
OR
(Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT15 IN [ICD-O-2/3 Topography codes associated to male organ] that matches a Core error-free Input patient record where IP4 IN ['1','2'] AND IP1=IT1 AND IP2=IT2 AND IP10 IN ['2','9'])
Tumour record rejected
DIM5-2 (Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4 IS NOT NULL AND IT15 IN [ICD-O-2/3 Topography codes associated to female organ] that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP3=IT4 but matches a Base patient record where BP3=IT4 AND BP10 IN ['1','9'])
OR
(Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4 IS NOT NULL AND IT15 IN [ICD-O-2/3 Topography codes associated to male organ] that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP3=IT4 but matches a Base patient record where BP3=IT4 AND BP10 IN ['2','9'])
Tumour record rejected
DIM5-3 (Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP10 IN ['1','9'] that matches a Base tumour record where IP3=BT4 AND BT15 IN [ICD-O-2/3 Topography codes associated to female organ] that matches no Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] AND IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3)
OR
(Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP10 IN ['2','9'] that matches a Base tumour record where IP3=BT4 AND BT15 IN [ICD-O-2/3 Topography codes associated to male organ] that matches no Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] AND IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3)
Patient record Rejected
Feedback report messages (DIM5)
Sub–edit Text Type
DIM5-1 ICD-O-2/3 Topography does not agree with Sex code on matching Input patient record. Core error
DIM5-2 ICD-O-2/3 Topography does not agree with Sex code on matching Base patient record. Core error
DIM5-3 Sex code does not agree with ICD-O-2/3 Topography on a matching Base tumour record. Core error
Revision (DIM5)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as COR31.
Business rules changed: Verification is now performed on ICD-O-3 values only.

DIM6

Purpose

This edit ensures that no "duplicate" tumour records are created for any given patient record (1992-2006 data years only). As of 2007 the CCR has adopted SEER rules. New edits will be implemented to adhere to these new rules.

Referenced fields (DIM6)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of Date of diagnosis (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T15.SITE 3 First 3 digits of T15 (ICD-O-2/3 Topography site) Not applicable
T15.SUBSITE 1 Last digit of T15 (ICD-O-2/3 Topography sub-site) Not applicable
T19 1 Laterality TLATERAL
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H

Business rules

Definitions
  • Tumours with "equivalent topographies" are tumours that have:
    • The same ICD-O-3 sites56 and sub-sites59or
    • The same ICD-O-3 sites but at least one sub-site is 'Overlapping' (8) or 'NOS' (9) or
    • Overlapping topographies based on Equivalent Topographies for Overlapping and Unspecified Sites63 concordance table.
  • Tumours with "equivalent histologies" are tumours that have:
    • The same ICD-O-3 Histology code or
    • The same histological group based on Equivalent Histologies56 concordance table.
  • A Patient may have multiple Hematopoietic tumours (tumours with ICD-O-3 Histology codes in range 9590-9989) only if they have non-equivalent histologies. (Thus, a patient may not have more than one Hematopoietic tumour in each equivalent histology group, regardless of their respective topography and laterality.)
  • A Patient may have multiple non-Hematopoietic tumours with equivalent topographies and equivalent histologies only if they are found on paired organs with specific (right, left one side involved, origin not specified and bilateral) and different laterality.
See Appendix D – Multiple primary tumours rules for CCR for more detail.

Important notes

These sub-edits must be processed in a specific order. See Section - 3.6.3.1 Special order of execution

Edit logic DIM6)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
DIM6–1 Core error-free56 Input tumour record (say A) where A.T5 IN ['1','2'] AND A.T21 IN ['9590'-'9989'] that matches a Core error-free Input tumour record (say B) where B.T5 IN ['1','2'] AND A.T1=B.T1 AND A.T2=B.T2 AND A.T3<>B.T3 AND B.T21 IN ['9590'-'9989'] AND (A.T21=B.T21 OR (A.T21 and B.T21 are equivalent based on reference table Equivalent Histologies)). Tumour records A and B rejected
DIM6-2 Not applicable61 Not applicable
DIM6-3 Core error-free Input tumour record (say A) where A.T5 IN ['1','2'] AND A.T4 IS NOT NULL AND A.T21 IN ['9590'-'9989'] that matches a Base Tumour record (say B) where A.T4=B.T4 AND (A.T1<>B.T1 OR A.T3<>B.T3) AND B.T21 IN ['9590'-'9989'] AND (A.T21=B.T21 OR (A.T21 and B.T21 are equivalent based on reference table Equivalent Histologies)) that matches no Core error-free Input tumour record (say C) where C.T5 IN ['2','3'] AND C.T1=B.T1 AND C.T2=B.T2 AND C.T3=B.T3. Tumour record A rejected
DIM6-4 Core error-free Input tumour record (say A) where A.T5 IN ['1','2'] that matches a Core error-free Input tumour record (say B) where B.T5 IN ['1','2'] AND A.T1=B.T1 AND A.T2=B.T2 AND A.T3<>B.T3 AND NOT (A.T21 IN ['9590'-'9989'] AND B.T21 IN ['9590'-'9989']) AND (A.T15=B.T15 OR (A.T15.SITE=B.T15.SITE AND (A.T15.SUBSITE IN ['8','9'] OR B.T15.SUBSITE IN ['8','9'])) OR (A.T15 and B.T15 are equivalent based on Equivalent Topographies for Overlapping and Unspecified Sites)) AND (A.T21=B.T21 OR (A.T21 and B.T21 are equivalent based on Equivalent Histologies)) AND (A.T19 IN ['9','0'] OR B.T19 IN ['9','0'] OR A.T19=B.T19) Tumour records A and B rejected
DIM6-5 Not applicable59 Not applicable
DIM6-6 Core error-free Input tumour record (say A) where A.T5 IN ['1','2'] AND A.T4 IS NOT NULL that matches a Base tumour record (say B) where A.T4=B.T4 AND (A.T1<>B.T1 OR A.T3<>B.T3) AND NOT (A.T21 IN ['9590'-'9989'] AND NOT B.T21 IN ['9590'-'9989']) AND (A.T15=B.T15 OR (A.T15.SITE=B.T15.SITE AND (A.T15.SUBSITE IN ['8','9'] OR B.T15.SUBSITE IN ['8','9'])) OR (A.T15 and B.T15 are equivalent based on Equivalent Topographies for Overlapping and Unspecified Sites)) AND (A.T21=B.T21 OR (A.T21 and B.T21 are equivalent based on Equivalent Histologies)) AND (A.T19 IN ['9','0'] OR B.T19 IN ['9','0'] OR A.T19=B.T19) that matches no Core error-free Input Tumour record (say C) where C.T5 IN ['2','3'] AND C.T1=B.T1 AND C.T2=B.T2 AND C.T3=B.T3. Tumour record A rejected
Feedback report messages (DIM6)
Sub–edit Text Type
DIM6-1 Duplicate Input tumour records of the Hematopoietic system based on ICD-O-3 Histology. Core error
DIM6-2 Not applicable61 Not applicable
DIM6-3 Duplicates an existing Base tumour record of the Hematopoietic system based on ICD-O-3 Histology. Core error
DIM6-4 Duplicate Input tumour records based on ICD-O-3 Topography, ICD-O-3 Histology and Laterality. Core error
DIM6-5 Not applicable59 Not applicable
DIM6-6 Duplicates an existing Base tumour record based on ICD-O-3 Topography, ICD-O-3 Histology and Laterality. Core error
Revision (DIM6)
Year Description
2006 Edit no longer used (only applied for data years 1992-2006). New multiple primary/histology rules adopted.
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.34A-F.
Business rule changed: Potential duplicate tumours with unknown laterality are now rejected.
Edit logic changed to allow the addition of a Tumour record that duplicates a Base tumour record that is about to be updated or deleted.

3.6.4 Pre-posting match edits

The purpose of the pre-posting match edits is to identify core error-free4 input records that cannot be posted to the CCR because some other related input records are either missing or have core errors.

The following table summarizes the purpose of each individual edit of this category.

Table 32 Pre-posting edits summary
Edit name Purpose
PPM1 Ensures that no orphan Patient record is created in the CCR.
PPM2 Ensures that no orphan Tumour record is created in the CCR.

PPM1

Purpose

This edit ensures that no orphan patient record is created in the CCR.

Referenced fields (PPM1)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 9 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 9 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE

Business rules

Every Base patient record must have at least one Base tumour record with the same Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number and CCR identification number.
Edit logic (PPM1)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PPM1-1 Core error-free56 Input patient record where P4='1' that matches no Core error-free Input tumour record where T5='1' AND P1=T1 AND P2=T2. Patient record rejected
PPM1-2 One or more Core error-free Input tumour records with the same IT4 where IT5='3' that match no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='3' AND IP3=IT4 and match no Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4=IT4 but match a Base Patient record where IT1=BP1 AND IT4=BP3 and match as many Base tumour records where BT1=IT1 AND BT4=IT4. Tumour records rejected
Feedback report messages (PPM1)
Sub–edit Text Type
PPM1-1 Patient record cannot be added because all associated Add Tumour records have been rejected. Core error
PPM1-2 Tumour records cannot be deleted because it would create an orphan Patient record. Core error
Revision (PPM1)
Year Description
2004 Renamed: Formerly known as Additional rules for updating the CCR #2.
Business rules added: Prevent the addition of a new Patient record without Tumour record.

PPM2

Purpose

This edit ensures that no orphan tumour record is created in the CCR.

Referenced fields (PPM2)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 9 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 9 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE

Business rules

Every Base tumour record must have one Base patient record with the same CCR identification number.
Edit logic (PPM2)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PPM2-1 Core error-free56 Input tumour record where T5='1' AND T4 IS NULL that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where P4='1' AND P1=T1 AND P2=T2. Tumour record rejected
PPM2-2 Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='3' that matches less Core error-free Input tumour records where IT5='3' AND IT4=IP3 than Base tumour Record where BT1=IP1 AND BT4=IP3 Patient record rejected
Feedback report messages (PPM2)
Sub–edit Text Type
PPM2-1 Tumour record cannot be added because associated Add Patient record has been rejected. Core error
PPM2-2 Patient record cannot be deleted because not all related Base tumour records with the same Reporting province/territory have been deleted. Core error
Revision (PPM2)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Additional rules for updating the CCR #1.
Business rules added: Prevent the addition of a new Tumour record without a Patient record.

3.7 Data posting

Description

The data posting phase is the actual registration of validated data on the CCR database. During this phase, successfully validated input records are added, updated or deleted from the CCR database in accordance with the operation specified by the PTCR on each record. Depending on the operation, a CCR identification number is generated and some derived variables are computed.

In addition to the data registration, the data posting phase also updates auxiliary tables used by other processes such as internal record linkage and death clearance. These tables are:

  • Deleted CCR ID,
  • Alternate surnames,
  • Internal Record Linkage – Don't Link Cross Reference table,
  • Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference.

The content and purpose of the above tables are described in Appendix F – Auxiliary tables

Organization

This section is organized as follow:

Data posting
Sub–section Description
3.7.1 Add Patient record processing
How Input records are processed based on the operation and the record type.
3.7.2 Add Tumour record processing
3.7.3 Update Patient record processing
3.7.4 Update Tumour record processing
3.7.5 Delete Patient record processing
3.7.6 Delete Tumour record processing
3.7.7 Patient Derived variable calculations
How patient and tumour derived variables are computed.
3.7.8 Tumour Derived variable calculations

Writing Conventions

Throughout the following pages, the prefixes "I" and "B" preceding field numbers indicate input or base fields respectively. These prefixes are used to indicate the origin of the corresponding variable in expressions.

Example: IP6 stands for P6 variable on an input record.
Example: BTD2 stands for TD2 variable on a base record

3.7.1 Add patient record processing

For each successfully validated add patient record, the following actions are conducted:

A new base patient record is created using:

  • CCR identification number (P3): A new CCR identification number (see below);
  • Core data items (P1 to -P19 except P4 – input record type): corresponding input record variables values;
  • Derived variables (PD1 to PD8): applicable patient derived variables values (see 3.7.7 patient derived variable calculations).

3.7.1.1 CCR identification number creation

The logic to create a new CCR identification number is the following:

LET
  • Today _Year4 be the year of today's date (4 digits).
  • Today_Year2 be the last two digits of the year of today's date (2 digits).
  • Last_CCRID_Year4 be the year the last CCR identification number was created (4 digits).
  • CCR_sequence_number be the numeric sequence used to create the CCR identification number (6 digits).
  • Check_Digit be a placeholder for the new CCR ID check digit (1 digit)
  • New_CCR_ID be a placeholder for the new CCR identification number (9 digits).
  • Check_Digit() be a function that returns a check digit based on the logic described in Appendix X – CCR_ID Check Digit Routine.
  • || be a string operator that concatenates two text strings together.
BEGIN
  • IF Last_CCRID_Year4 < Today_Year4THEN
  • CCR_Sequence_Number = '000000';
  • Last_CCRID_Year4 =Today _Year4;
  • End IF;
  • Check_Digit = Check_Digit (Today _Year2 || CCR_Sequence_Number)
  • New_CCR_ID = Today _Year2 || CCR_Sequence_Number ||Check_Digit
  • CCR_Sequence_Number =CCR_Sequence_Number + 1;/
  • RETURN New_CCR_ID;
END;

3.7.2 Add tumour record processing

For each add tumour record where the core data items (T1 to T26) are valid, the following actions are conducted:

A new base tumour record is created using:

  • Core data items (T1 to T26 except T5 – Input record type): corresponding input core data items;
  • CCR identification number (T4): reported CCR identification number or, if missing, the CCR identification number assigned to the corresponding new patient record (Patient record with the same reporting province/territory and patient identification number);
  • CS data items (T27 to T41 and T52):
    • If the tumour is within the CCR collaborative staging scope and the input CS data items are valid then the input CS data items are used.
    • If the tumour is within the CCR collaborative staging scope but the input CS data items are invalid then the corresponding base data items are "R" filled.
    • If the tumour is outside the CCR collaborative staging scope then NULL values are used.
  • AJCC TNM data items (T42 to T51):
    • If the tumour is within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope and the input AJCC TNM data items are valid then the input AJCC TNM data items are used.
    • If the tumour is within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope but input AJCC TNM data items are invalid then the corresponding base data items are "R" filled.
    • If the tumour is outside the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope then NULL values are used.
  • Derived data items (TD1 to TD20): applicable tumour derived variables values (see 3.7.8 Tumour derived variable calculations).

3.7.3 Update patient record processing

For each successfully validated Update patient record, the following actions are conducted:

  • Alternate surname table is updated (see below);
  • Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference table is updated (see below);
  • Corresponding base patient record is updated using:
    • Core data items (P1 to P19 except P4 – Input record type): all input record variable values,
    • Derived variables (PD1-PD8): applicable patient derived variables values (see 3.7.7 Patient derived variable calculations).

3.7.3.1 Alternate surname table update

Alternate surname table is updated as following:


Let P3 be the CCR identification number
Let P6 be the patient Current Surname
IF BP6 IS NOT NULL AND (IP6 IS NULL OR IP6 <> BP6) AND (BP3, BP6 combination NOT IN [Alternate Surname table]) THEN
BP3, BP6 combination is added to Alternate Surname table.
END IF

See Appendix F – Auxiliary Tables – Alternate surname for more details.

3.7.3.2 Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference Table Update

If a base Patient is Death-Cleared and the corresponding Input transaction resets all Death Information, the Death Confirmation is said to be Refused and the Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference Table is updated as follows;

Let P3 be the CCR Identification Number
Let P14 be the patient Date of Death
Let P15 be the patient Province/Territory or Country of Death
Let P16 be the patient Death Registration Number
Let P17 be the patient Underlying Cause of Death
Let P18 be the patient Autopsy Confirming Cause of Death
Let PD5 be the Death Clearance Status
IF (BPD5='2' AND IP14='00000000' AND IP15='000' AND IP16='000000' AND IP17='0000' AND IP18='0') THEN
BP3, BP14, BP15, BP16 combination is added to Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference table.
END IF

See Appendix F – Auxiliary Tables – Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference Table for more details.

3.7.4 Update tumour record processing

For each update tumour record where the core data items (T1 to T26) are valid, the following actions are conducted:

  • Corresponding base tumour record is updated using:

Core data items (T1 to T26 except T5 – Input record type): Corresponding input core data items;
CS data items (T27 to T41, and T52):

  • If the tumour is within the CCR collaborative staging scope and the input CS data items are valid then the input CS data items are used.
  • If the tumour is within the CCR collaborative staging scope but the input CS data items are invalid then the corresponding base data items are "R" filled.
  • If the tumour is outside the CCR collaborative staging scope then NULL values are used.

AJCC TNM data items (T42 to T51):

  • If the tumour is within the CCR AJCC TNM stagingscope and the input AJCC TNM data items are valid then the input AJCC TNM data items are used.
  • If the tumour is within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope but input AJCC TNM data items are invalid then the corresponding base data items are "R" filled.
  • If the tumour is outside the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope then NULL values are used.

Derived data items (TD1 to TD20): applicable tumour derived variables values (see 3.7.8 Tumour derived variable calculations)

3.7.5 Delete patient record processing

For each successfully validated delete patient record, the following actions are conducted:

  • Deletion or reversal of ownership of the corresponding base patient record (see below);
  • If reversal of ownership takes place, corresponding patient derived variables are updated (See3.7.7 Patient derived variable calculations).

If true patient record deletion takes place:

  • Deleted CCR_ID table is updated (see below);
  • Alternate surname table is updated (see below);
  • Internal Record Linkage – Don't Link Cross Reference table is updated (see below);
  • Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference table is updated (see below).

3.7.5.1 Patient record deletion or reversal of ownership

A reversal of ownership is needed when a PTCR deletes a patient record but does not own all related tumours records (that is, at least one related tumour record is owned by another jurisdiction). In such case, the Patient record cannot be deleted from the database because it would otherwise create orphan tumour records. In lieu, the ownership (express by P1 – Patient Reporting Province/Territory and P2 – Patient Identification Number values) of the existing base patient record is changed to the jurisdiction that owns Patient's Last Diagnosed Tumour among remaining tumour records.

The Patient's Last Diagnosed Tumour is based on Date of Diagnosis (TDATDIAG) sorted in chronological order and the following additional rules:

When sorting in chronological order tumours based on the Date of Diagnosis, less precise dates must come before more precise dates. For example, if one tumour has a Date of Diagnosis of ‘19951099' and another tumour has a Date of Diagnosis of ‘19959999', then the tumour with the Date of Diagnosis of ‘19951099' is considered the Latest Tumour.
When two or more tumours share the same Date of Diagnosis, tumours are sorted in ascending order by Tumour Reference Number (TTRN), Health Insurance Number (THIN) and Reporting Province Code (TREPPROV) using an alphabetic comparison method63.
For example, if two tumours have the same Date of Diagnosis but one tumour has TTRN='2' and the other has a TTRN='12345', then the latest tumour will be the one with TTRN='2'.

The following box shows the conditions that need to be assessed and the action that must be performed when processing a delete patient record.


Let P1 be Patient reporting province/territory.
Let P2 be Patient Identification Number.
Let P3 be Patient CCR identification number.
Let T1 be Tumour reporting province/territory.
Let T2 be Tumour Patient Identification Number.
Let T4 be Tumour CCR identification number.
Let T12 be Tumour Date of diagnosis.
Let Patient Last Diagnosed Tumour () be a function that returns the latest diagnosed tumour based on the rules specified above.
IF [Base tumour records where BT4 = IP3 AND BT1 <> IP1] IS NOT NULL THEN
-- Reversal of Ownership: BP1 – Base patient reporting province/territory is updated.
BP1 and BP2 = BT1 and BT2 from Patient Last Diagnosed Tumour ([Base tumour record
where BT4 = IP3 AND BT1 <> IP1 AND MAX(BT12)])
ELSE
-- True Patient Deletion must take place
The corresponding Base record is deleted.
END IF

Since the corresponding base patient record is not really deleted from the CCR when a reversal of ownership occurs, the applicable patient derived variables must be updated.

3.7.5.2 Deleted CCR_ID Table update

When a true patient record deletion takes place (contrary to a reversal of ownership), a new entry in Deleted CCR_ID table must be created as following:

Deleted CCR_ID Table update
Deleted CCR_ID table variable Values
CCR identification number IP3
Reporting province/territory IP1
Patient identification number IP2
Date of Deletion Today's date using YYYYMMDD format.
New CCR_ID [blank]
Process 1

See Appendix F – Auxiliary Tables – Deleted CCR_ID for more details.

3.7.5.3 Alternate surname table update

When a true patient record deletion takes place (contrary to a reversal of ownership), all corresponding entries in the alternate surname table (if any) must be deleted as well.

See Appendix F – Auxiliary tables – Alternate surname for more details.

3.7.5.4 Internal Record Linkage – Don't Link Cross Reference Table Update

When a true Patient record deletion takes place (contrary to a reversal of ownership), all corresponding entries in the Internal Record Linkage – Don't Link Cross Reference table (if any) must be deleted as well.

See Appendix F – Auxiliary tables – IRL DLCR for more details.

3.7.5.5 Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference Table Update

When a true Patient record deletion takes place (contrary to a reversal of ownership), all corresponding entries in the Death Clearance - Don't Link Cross Reference table (if any) must be deleted as well.

See Appendix F – Auxiliary tables – DC DLCR for more details.

3.7.6 Delete tumour record processing

For each successfully validated delete tumour record, the following actions are conducted:

Deletion of the corresponding base Tumour record.

3.7.7 Patient derived variable calculations

The following table depicts how patient derived variables are calculated depending on the operation that takes place. See corresponding variable description pages in Chapter 2 for code meaning.

Table 33 Patient derived variable calculations
Operation variable Add patient Update patient Reversal of ownership (Deletepatient)
PD1 - Processing date – Patient record
Each time a Patient record is written (created or updated), the date of the transaction is saved.

PD1 = Today's date using YYYYMMDD format.
PD2 - Vital status
Not applicable: These variables are only derived for Tabulation master files. See Chapter 4 Tabulation master files for more detail.
PD3 – Number of tumours
PD4 - Death clearance cut Off date Patient never underwent Death clearance

PD4 = '00000000'
PD4 stays the same.
PD5 - Death clearance Status Patient never underwent Death clearance

PD5 = '0'
If the Patient is Death-Cleared and Patient date of death and/or province/territory/country of death and/or Death registration number is changed, then the Patient record is no longer Death-Cleared (Death Clearance Reversal)

Let P14 be the patient Date of death
Let P15 be the patient province/territory or country of death
Let P16 be the patient Death registration number
Let PD5 be the Death Clearance Status
Let PD6 be the Death Clearance Method
Let PD7 be the Death clearance underlying cause of death
Let PD8 be Date of death (Un) Confirmation
IF BPD5 = '2' AND (IP14<>BP14 OR IP15<>BP15 OR IP16<>BP16) THEN
PD5 = '3'
PD6=‘0'
PD7='0000'
PD8=Today's date using YYYMMDD format
ELSE
PD5 stays the same.
PD6 stays the same.
PD7 stays the same.
PD8 stays the same.
END IF
PD5 stays the same.

3.7.8 Tumour derived variable calculations

The following table depicts how tumour derived variables are calculated depending on the operation that takes place. See corresponding variable description pages in Chapter 2 for code meaning.

Table 34 Tumour derived variable calculations
Operation variable Add tumour Update tumour
TD1 – Processing date – Tumour record Each time a Tumour record is written (created or updated), the date of the transaction is saved.

TD1 = Today's date using YYYYMMDD format.
TD2 – Sequence number Not applicable: these variables are only derived for Tabulation master files. See Chapter 4 Tabulation master files for more detail.
TD3 – Age at diagnosis
TD4 – Age group at diagnosis
TD5 – Survival interval
TD6 – Survival censor
TD7 – Derived AJCC T
TD8 – Derived AJCC N
TD9 – Derived AJCC M
TD10 – Derived AJCC T descriptor
TD11 – Derived AJCC N descriptor
TD12 – Derived AJCC M descriptor
TD13 – Derived AJCC stage group
TD14 – Derived AJCC flag
TD15 – Derived SS1977
TD16 – Derived SS1977 flag
TD17 – Derived SS2000
TD18 – Derived SS2000 flag
TD19 – CS version latest

Chapter 4 – Tabulation master files

  • Description
  • Scope
  • Content and layout
  • Derived variables calculations
  • Confidentiality

4.1 Description

The Tabulation master file (TMF) produced from the Canadian Cancer Registry (CCR) serves as a snapshot of the entire CCR database. The resulting flat file merges the patient and tumour records from the CCR, using the unique patient record identifier (CCR identification number) to produce a composite record containing both patient and tumour information, with one record for each tumour.

The TMF is used by researchers, academics, regional health unit personnel, health policy/program planners and decision-makers, epidemiologists and public health professionals. It is provided to representatives from organizations such as Health Canada, the Public Health Agency of Canada, the Canadian Institute for Health Information, and other health-related non-government organizations in accordance with applicable legal agreements and Statistics Canada's guidelines pertaining to release of confidential information. It is created on a yearly basis or, in some instances, as warranted by operational requirements.

See http://www.statcan.ca/english/about/privact.htm section 4.5 Confidentiality

4.2 Scope

There are 2 versions of the tabulation master file, the Canadian Cancer Registry tabulation master file (CCRTMF) and the International Agency for Research on Cancer tabulation master file (IARCTMF). These two versions differ in scope as different rules for determining multiple primary neoplasms are applied.

In addition, each of the TMF can either be national (based on patients from all PTCRs) or provincial/territorial (based on patients from only one PTCR). Provincial/territorial TMFs are based on the ownership of Patient records, i.e. tumours are selected based on the reporting province or territory of its related patient record regardless of the province or territory that actually owns the tumour record itself.

4.2.1 CCRTMF – Canadian Cancer Registry tabulation master file.

Variations exist between provincial/territorial Cancer Registries in the coding practices for multiple primaries. Many registries adhere to CCR rules while others use IARC (Québec), IARC/Berg (Ontario) and SEER (Alberta from 1994) for recording tumours in their registries. Given that all cancer records submitted to the CCR are subjected to specific CCR rules for determining multiple primary tumours (see Appendix D – Multiple primary tumours rules for CCR for more details), the resulting CCRTMF consists of a mixture of IARC and CCR rules for determining multiple tumours. As of 2007 the CCR has adopted SEER rules.

4.2.2 IARCTMF – International agency for research on cancer (IARC) tabulation master file

Important note: IARCTMF implementation has changed in 2004. See Revision box at the end of this section for details.

Since not all registries follow the CCR standards, the annual release of cancer incidence and survival statistics are disseminated from STC using the IARC rules for determining multiple primary tumours for the purpose of comparability between registries over time.

All tumour records on IARCTMF have been selected from the CCR according to IARC coding rules for determining multiple primary tumours as specified by the IARC/IACR's Working Groups' Recommendations for coding Multiple Primaries. The International Classification of Diseases for Oncology – Third Edition outlines the rules as follows:

A working party of IARC recommended definitions of multiple neoplasms for the purpose of incidence reporting for international comparison. Their recommendations are:
  1. Recognition of the existence of two or more primary cancers does not depend on time.
  2. A primary cancer is one that originates in a primary site or tissue and is neither an extension, nor a recurrence, nor a metastasis.
  3. Only one tumour shall be recognized as arising in an organ or pair of organs or tissue. For tumours where site is coded by the first edition of ICD-O (or by ICD-9), an organ or tissue is defined by the three-character category of the topography code.

    ICD-1O and the Second and Third editions of ICD-O have a more detailed set of topography codes. The sites covered by some groups of codes are considered to be a single organ for the purposes of defining multiple tumours. These topography code groups are shown in Table 24*.

    Multifocal tumours – that is, discrete masses apparently not in continuity with other primary cancers originating in the same primary site or tissue, for example bladder – are counted as a single cancer.

    Skin cancer presents a special problem as the same individual may have many such neoplasms over a lifetime. The IARC/IACR rules imply that only the first tumour of a defined histological type, anywhere on the skin, is counted as an incident cancer unless, for example, one primary was a malignant melanoma and the other a basal cell carcinoma.
  4. Rule 3 does not apply in two circumstances: 4.1. For systemic or multicentric cancers potentially involving many discrete organs, four histological groups – lymphomas, leukemias, Kaposi sarcoma, and mesothelioma (groups 7, 8, 9 and 10 in Table 25*) – are included. They are counted only once in any individual.
    4.2. Other specific histologies – groups 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, and 11 in Table 25 – are considered to be different for the purpose of defining multiple tumours. Thus, a tumour in the same organ with a ‘different' histology is counted as a new tumour. Groups 5 and 12 include tumours that have not been satisfactorily typed histologically and cannot therefore be distinguished from the other groups.
- Source International Classification of Diseases for Oncology – Third Edition, page 35

"* "Table 24" and "Table 25" are reproduced on the following pages.

Table 24 Groups of topography codes from ICD-O-2 and ICD-O-3 considered a single site in the definition of multiple cancers
ICD–O–2/3 Topography codes Description
C01 Base of tongue
C02 Other and unspecified parts of tongue
C05 Palate
C06 Other and unspecified parts of mouth
C07 Parotid gland
C08 Other and unspecified major salivary glands
C09 Tonsil
C10 Oropharynx
C12 Pyriform sinus
C13 Hypopharynx
C23 Gallbladder
C24 Other and unspecified parts of biliary tract
C30 Nasal cavity and middle ear
C31 Accessory sinus
C33 Trachea
C34 Bronchus and lung
C37 Thymus
C38.0 Heart
C38.1-.3 Mediastinum
C38.8 Overlapping lesion of heart, mediastinum and pleura
C38.4 Pleura (visceral, parietal, NOS)
C51 Vulva
C52 Vagina
C57.7 Other specified female genital organs
C57.8-.9 Unspecified female genital organs
C56 Ovary
C57.0 Fallopian tube
C57.1 Broad ligaments
C57.2 Round ligament
C57.3 Parametrium
C57.4 Uterine adnexa
C60 Penis
C63 Other and unspecified male genital organs
C64 Kidney
C65 Renal pelvis
C66 Ureter
C68 Other and unspecified urinary organs
C74 Adrenal gland
C75 Other endocrine glands and related structures
Source: THE SEER PROGRAM CODING AND STAGING MANUAL 2004, Fourth Edition, January 2004, page 9, Surveillance Research Program Division Of Cancer Control And Population Sciences, National Cancer Institute, U.S. Department Of Health And Human Services.
Table 25 Groups of malignant neoplasms considered to be histologically "different" for the purpose of defining multiple tumours (adapted from Berg, 1994)
Group Description ICD-O-3 Histology codes
1 Squamous carcinomas 805 to 808, 812, 813
2 Basal cell carcinomas 809 to 811
3 Adenocarcinomas 814, 816, 819 to 822, 826to 833, 835 to 855, 857, 894
4 Other specific carcinomas 803, 804, 815, 817 to 818, 823 to 825, 834, 856, 858 to 867
(5) Unspecified carcinomas (NOS) 801, 802
6 Sarcomas and soft tissue tumours 868 to 871, 880 to 892, 899, 904, 912 to 913, 915 to 925, 937, 954 to 958
7 Lymphomas 959 to 972
8 Leukemia 980 to 994, 995, 996, 998
9 Kaposi sarcoma 914
10 Mesothelioma 905
11 Other specified types ofcancer 872 to 879, 893, 895 to 898, 900 to 903, 906 to 911, 926 to 936, 938 to 953, 973 to 975, 976
(12) Unspecified types of cancer 800, 997
Source: INTERNATIONAL CLASSIFICATION OF DISEASES FOR ONCOLOGY, Third Edition, 2000, page 37, World Health Organization.

Based on the above rules and tables, the following algorithm is used to eliminate duplicate tumours from the IARC tabulation master files.

Table 35 Algorithm used to eliminate duplicate tumours from IARC TMF

Definitions
Site: Identified by the 3 first digits of the ICD-O-2 Topography code.
Topography Group: See Table 24.
Histology Group: See Table 25.
Systemic and Multicentric groups: 7, 8, 9, 10
Non-Systemic and Non-Multicentric groups: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 11, 12
Specific Histology groups: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 11
Non-Specific Histology groups: 5, 12
Rule 1: When there is more than one tumour in a subset, keep the tumour with the earliest Date of Diagnosis. If more than one tumour has the same Date of Diagnosis, then the tumour with the lowest TTRN, TPIN and TREPPROV is kept.
Logic
For a given patient with more than one tumour:
For Systemic and Multicentric Tumours:
Eliminate duplicate tumours in each Systemic and Multicentric Group using Rule1(regardless of the Site).
For Non-Systemic and Non-Multicentric Tumours:
Eliminate duplicate tumours within the same Site and same Specific Histology group using Rule1;
Eliminate duplicate tumours within the same Site and any Non-Specific Histology group using Rule1;
Eliminate all tumours within Non-Specific Histology groups when there is at least one tumour within Specific Histology groups for the same Site;
Eliminate duplicate tumours within the same Topography group and same Specific Histology group using Rule 1;
Eliminate duplicate tumours within the same Topography group and any Non-Specific Histology group using Rule 1;
Eliminate all tumours within Non-Specific Histology groups when there is at least one tumour within Specific Histology groups for the same Topography group

When a patient has only two tumours, it may be easier to use the following decision tree instead of the above algorithm to assess if tumours are duplicates. When a patient has more than two tumours, the above algorithm must always be used to eliminate duplicate tumours since the decision tree does not indicate the order in which to process tumours pairs which in turn may lead to incorrect results.

Figure 1 Decision tree to assess if two tumours are duplicates based on IARC rules

Figure 1 Decision tree to assess if two tumours are duplicates based on IARC rules
Revision (Description)
Year Description
2007 Table 24 changed:Topography group added: C38.4
2004 Table 24 changed: The latest SEER "Table 24" definition has been implemented.

Topography groups removed: C19, C20; C40, C41;

Topography groups added: C37, C38.0-3 and C38.8; C51, C52, C57.7 and C57.8-9; C56 and C57.0-4;

Algorithm changed:

Systemic and Multicentric tumours: IARC criteria are applied regardless of the CCR Multiple Primary rules.

Duplicate tumours within the same Histology group and with the same Date of Diagnosis: In this case, only the tumour with the lowest Tumour Reference Number, Patient identification number and Reporting Province/Territory Code is kept. This was needed to guarantee that the tumour selected is always the same when the Date of Diagnosis is the same for all tumours.

Histology group 5 vs 12: These two groups are now considered the same for the purpose of finding duplicate tumours.

Specific Histology groups vs Non-Specific Histology groups: A condition has been added to deal with duplicate tumours from different Histology groups where specific and non-specific histologies have been reported. In this case, only tumours with specific histology are kept, regardless of the Date of Diagnosis.

4.3 Content and layout

The TMF includes all variables on the patient and tumour records as provided by PTCRs (except for Fields P4 and T5, the patient and tumour record types) plus additional variables that are derived from the input variables or brought in from other sources by the CCR. (See Chapter 2 Data dictionary for more information about each variable.)

The record layout for both CCR and IARC tabulation master files is as follows.

Table 36 TMF record layout
Field Length Position Description Acronym
P1 2 1 - 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 3 - 14 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 15 - 23 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P5 1 24 - 24 Type of Current surname PTYP_CUR
P6 25 25 - 49 Current surname PCURSNAM
P7 15 50 - 64 First given name PGNAME_1
P8 15 65 - 79 Second given name PGNAME_2
P9 7 80 - 86 Third given name PGNAME_3
P10 1 87 - 87 Sex PSEX
P11 8 88 - 95 Date of birth PDATBIR
P12 3 96 - 98 Province/territory or country of birth PPROVBIR
P13 25 99 - 123 Birth surname PBIRNAM
P14 8 124 - 131 Date of death PDATDEA
P15 3 132 - 134 Province/territory or country of death PPROVDEA
P16 6 135 - 140 Death registration number PDEAREG
P17 4 141 - 144 Underlying cause of death PCAUSDEA
P18 1 145 - 145 Autopsy confirming cause of death PAUTOPSY
P19 8 146 - 153 Patient date of transmission PDATTRAN
PD1 8 154 - 161 Processing date – patient record PDCCRDATPROC
PD2 1 162 - 162 Vital status PDCCRVITALST
PD3 2 163 - 164 Number of tumours PDCCRNBRTMRS
PD4 8 165 - 172 Death clearance cut off date PDDCDATCO
PD5 1 173 - 173 Death clearance status PDDCSTAT
PD6 1 174 - 174 Death clearance method PDDCMETH
PD7 4 175 - 178 Death clearance underlying cause of death PDDCUCD
PD8 8 179 - 186 Date of death (Un) confirmation PDDCDATCN
T1 2 187 - 188 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 189 - 200 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 201 - 209 Tumour reference number TTRN
T6 25 210 - 234 Name of place of residence TPLACRES
T7 6 235 - 240 Postal code TPOSTCOD
T8 7 241 - 247 Standard geographic code TCODPLAC
T9 9 248 - 256 Census tract TCENTRAC
T10 15 257 - 271 Health insurance number THIN
T11 1 272 - 272 Method of diagnosis TMETHDIAG
T12 8 273 - 280 Date of diagnosis TDATDIAG
T13 4 281 - 284 ICD-9 cancer code TICD_9
T14 1 285 - 285 Source classification flag TSCF
T15 4 286 - 289 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T16 4 290 - 293 ICD-O-2 Histology TICD_O2H
T17 1 294 - 294 ICD-O-2 Behaviour TICD_O2B
T19 1 295 - 295 Laterality TLATERAL
T21 4 296 - 299 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 300 - 300 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T23 1 301 - 301 Grade, differentiation or cell indicator TGRADE
T24 1 302 - 302 Method used to establish date of diagnosis TMETHUSED
T25 1 303 - 303 Diagnostic confirmation TMETHCONF
T26 8 304 - 311 Tumour date of transmission TDATTRAN
T27 3 312 - 314 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 315 - 316 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 317 - 317 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 318 - 319 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 320 - 320 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVAL
T32 2 321 - 322 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 323 - 324 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 325 - 326 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 327 - 327 CS mets Eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 328 - 330 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 331 - 333 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 334 - 336 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 337 - 339 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 340 - 342 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 343 - 345 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T42 9 346 - 354 AJCC clinical T TAJCCCLINT
T43 3 355 - 357 AJCC clinical N TAJCCCLINN
T44 3 358 - 360 AJCC clinical M TAJCCCLINM
T45 9 361 - 369 AJCC pathologic T TAJCCPATHT
T46 6 370 - 375 AJCC pathologic N TAJCCPATHN
T47 3 376 - 378 AJCC pathologic M TAJCCPATHM
T48 4 379 - 382 AJCC clinical TNM stage group TAJCCCLINSG
T49 4 383 - 386 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group TAJCCPATHSG
T50 4 387 - 390 AJCC TNM stage group TAJCCSG
T51 2 391 - 392 AJCC TNM edition number TAJCCEDNUM
TD1 8 393 - 400 Processing date – tumour record TDCCRDATPROC
TD2 2 401 - 402 Sequence number TDCCRSEQNUM
TD3 3 403 - 405 Age at diagnosis TDCCRAGEDIAG
TD4 2 406 - 407 Age group at diagnosis TDCCRAGEGRP
TD5 5 408 - 412 Survival interval TDDCSURVINT
TD6 1 413 - 413 Survival censor TDDCCENSOR
TD7 2 414 - 415 Derived AJCC T TDCSAJCCT
TD8 2 416 - 417 Derived AJCC N TDCSAJCCN
TD9 2 418 - 419 Derived AJCC M TDCSAJCCM
TD10 1 420 - 420 Derived AJCC T descriptor TDCSAJCCTDESC
TD11 1 421 - 421 Derived AJCC N descriptor TDCSAJCCNDESC
TD12 1 422 - 422 Derived AJCC M descriptor TDCSAJCCMDESC
TD13 2 423 - 424 Derived AJCC stage group TDCSAJCCSG
TD14 1 425 - 425 Derived AJCC flag TDCSAJCCF
TD15 1 426 - 426 Derived SS1977 TDCSSS1977
TD16 1 427 - 427 Derived SS1977 flag TDCSSS1977F
TD17 1 428 - 428 Derived SS2000 TDCSSS2000
TD18 1 429 - 429 Derived SS2000 flag TDCSSS2000F
T52 6 430 - 435 CS version 1st TCSFVER
TD19 6 436 - 441 CS version latest TDCSLVER
T53 1 442 - 442 Ambiguous Terminology Diagnosis TAMBIGTERM
T54 8 443 - 450 Date of conclusive diagnosis TDATCONCLUSDIAG
T55 2 451 - 452 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary TMULTTUMONEPRIM
T56 8 453 - 460 Date of multiple tumours TDATMULT
T57 2 461 - 462 Multiplicity counter TMULTCOUNT
Revision (Content and layout)
Year Description
2008 Addition of T53 to T57
2007 Addition of T52, deletion of TD20

4.4 Derived variable calculations

Most of the derived variables found on the tabulation master file are used and updated by the CCR System main processes (namely data loading, internal record linkage and death clearance process). Thus, these variables are already available at tabulation master file (TMF) creation time and do not need to be recalculated. Variables that are not used by the CCR System main processes must be derived at TMF creation time. The following table shows which variables are derived at TMF creation time and their respective calculation specification.

Table 37 Derived variable calculations at TMF time
Variable Value
PD2 – Vital status  Let P14 be the patient Date of death

IF P14 = ‘00000000' THEN
PD2 = ‘1'
ELSE
PD2 = ‘2'
End IF
PD3 – Number of tumours PD3 = Patient's total number of tumours within the applicable TMF scope.
TD2 – Sequence number For a given CCR identification number and TNM scope, tumours are numbered from 1 to N in chronologic order based on the Date of diagnosis. If two or more tumours share the same Date of diagnosis, then tumours are ordered by Reporting province/territory and Tumour reference number in ascending order.

TD2 = Sequence number based on the above definition.
TD3 – Age at diagnosis If the Patient date of birth is unknown, then Age at diagnosis cannot be calculated. Otherwise, Age at diagnosis is calculated using Patient date of birth and the tumour Date of diagnosis.

Let INTERVAL_YEARS (Date1, Date2) be a function that returns the number of complete years between Date1 and Date2 as described in Appendix E – Interval and Mean Time Between Dates.
Let P11 be the corresponding Patient date of birth.
Let T12 be the Tumour date of diagnosis.

IF P11 = '99999999' THEN
TD3 = 999
ELSE
TD3 = INTERVAL_YEARS (P11, T12)
END IF
TD4 – Age group at diagnosis TD4 = Corresponding age group based on TD3 value. (See TD4 – Specified values and meaning.)
TD5 – Survival interval
TD6 – Survival censor
If the Patient never underwent Death clearance process; or the Date of diagnosis is after Death clearance cut-off date; or the Method of diagnosis is Death certificate only; or the Method of diagnosis is Autopsy and there is no clear evidence of a positive survival; or the Method used to establish the date of diagnosis is Autopsy or Death certificate only, then the Survival interval is not applicable.
If Survival interval is applicable but Date of death is unknown, then the Survival interval cannot be calculated.
If Survival interval is applicable but the Patient is not known to have died or died after the Death clearance cut-off date, then the Survival interval is calculated using Death clearance cut off date.
If the Survival interval is applicable and the patient died before or on the Death clearance cut-off date, then the Survival interval is calculated using Date of death.

Let INTERVAL_DAYS (Date1, Date2) be a function that returns the number of days between Date1 and Date2 as described in Appendix E – Interval and Mean Time Between Dates.
Let T11 be the Tumour method of diagnosis.
Let T12 be the Tumour date of diagnosis.
Let T24 be the Tumour method used to establish the date of diagnosis.
Let PD4 be the corresponding Patient death clearance cut-off date.
Let P14 be the corresponding Patient Date of death.

IF PD4 = '00000000'
OR T12.YEAR > PD4.YEAR
OR T11 = '6'
OR (T11 = '2' AND P14 = '99999999')
OR (T11 = '2' AND T12.YEAR = P14.YEAR AND (T12.MONTH = '99' OR P14.MONTH = '99'))
OR (T11 = '2' AND T12.YEAR = P14.YEAR AND T12.MONTH = P14.MONTH AND (T12.DAY = '99' OR P14.DAY = '99'))
OR T24 IN ['3', '8'] THEN
TD5 = 99998
TD6 = '0'
ELSE IF P14 = '99999999' THEN
TD5 = 99999
TD6 = '0'
ELSE IF P14 = '00000000' OR P14.YEAR > PD4.YEAR THEN
TD5 = INTERVAL_DAYS (T12, PD4)
TD6 = '2'
ELSE
TD5 = INTERVAL_DAYS (T12, P14)
TD6 = '1'
END IF
TD7 – Derived AJCC T Values returned by the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm based on CS Input variables and tumour ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology.
TD8 – Derived AJCC N
TD9 – Derived AJCC M
TD10 – Derived AJCC T descriptor
TD11 – Derived AJCC N descriptor
TD12 – Derived AJCC M descriptor
TD13 – Derived AJCC stage group
TD14 – Derived AJCC flag
TD15 – Derived SS1977
TD16 – Derived SS1977 flag
TD17 – Derived SS2000
TD18 – Derived SS2000 flag
TD19 – CS version latest
Revision (Derived variable calculations)
Year Description
2007 PD2 – Vital Status is now derived at TMF time

4.5 Confidentiality

In order to respect confidentiality agreements, three different filtering options may be applied to the tabulation master files.

  • No filtering: No fields are hidden. This TMF is used to return data to reporting PTCR and for authorized record linkage activities.
  • No name: All names and Health insurance number fields are hidden. This TMF is used for NAACCR submission.
  • No name, No key: All names, Health insurance number and patient identification number fields are hidden. This TMF is used for dissemination.

The following table explicitly lists which fields are hidden by the different confidentiality filters.

Table 38 Hidden fields on filtered tabulation master files
Sensitive Field Filtering Option
No Filtering No Name No Name, No Key
P2 – Patient Identification Number - - Hidden
P6 – Current Surname - Hidden Hidden
P7 – First Given Name - Hidden Hidden
P8 – Second Given Name - Hidden Hidden
P9 – Third Given Name - Hidden Hidden
P13 – Birth Surname - Hidden Hidden
T2 – Tumour Patient Identification Number - - Hidden
T10 – Health Insurance Number - Hidden Hidden

In order to keep the same record layout for all Tabulation Master Files, hidden fields are simply filled with 'X'.

Appendices

Appendix C – AJCC TNM reference tables
Appendix D – Multiple primary tumours rules for CCR
Appendix E – Interval and mean time between dates
Appendix F – Auxiliary tables
Appendix G – Grade, differentiation or cell indicator guidelines (for T23)
Appendix H – CCR Ambiguous Terms (for T12 and T53)
Appendix I – Guidelines for Abstracting and Determining Death Certificate Only (DCO) Cases for
Provincial/Territorial Cancer Registries (PTCRs) in Canada (for T12 and P18)
Appendix J – Internal between two dates (complete or partial)
Appendix T – Residency guidelines in Canada (for T1, T6, P1)
Appendix X – CCR_ID check digit routine
Appendix Z – References

Appendix C – AJCC TNM reference tables

This appendix describes all AJCC TNM reference tables, namely:

  • Valid AJCC clinical T by site;
  • Valid AJCC clinical N by site;
  • Valid AJCC clinical M by site;
  • Valid AJCC pathologic T by site;
  • Valid AJCC pathologic N by site;
  • Valid AJCC pathologic M by site;
  • Valid AJCC clinical TNM stage group by site;
  • Valid AJCC pathologic TNM stage group by site;
  • Valid AJCC TNM stage group by site;
  • Valid AJCC T, N, M and stage group combination by site

Valid AJCC clinical T by site

Table usage notes:

See Chapter 1 for a complete description of each eligible site in terms of topography, histology and behaviour.

Table 39 Valid AJCC clinical T by stageable site
Breast Prostate Colorectal
TX TX TX
T0 T0 T0
Tis -- Tis
TisDCIS -- --
TisLCIS -- --
TisPagets -- --
T1 T1 T1
T1mic -- --
T1a T1a --
T1b T1b --
T1c T1c --
T2 T2 T2
-- T2a --
-- T2b --
-- T2c --
T3 T3 T3
-- T3a --
-- T3b --
T4 T4 T4
T4a -- --
T4b -- --
T4c -- --
T4d -- --
99 99 99

Valid AJCC clinical N by site

Table usage notes:

See Chapter 1 for a complete description of each stageable site in terms of topography, histology and behaviour.

Table 40 Valid AJCC clinical N by stageable site
Breast Prostate Colorectal
NX NX NX
N0 N0 N0
N1 N1 N1
N2 -- N2
N2a -- --
N2b -- --
N3 -- --
N3a -- --
N3b -- --
N3c -- --
99 99 99

Valid AJCC clinical M by site

Table usage notes:

See Chapter 1 for a complete description of each stageable site in terms of topography, histology and behaviour.

Table 41 Valid AJCC clinical M by stageable site
Breast Prostate Colorectal
MX MX MX
M0 M0 M0
M1 M1 M1
-- M1a --
-- M1b --
-- M1c --
99 99 99

Valid AJCC pathologic T by site

Table usage notes:

See Chapter 1 for a complete description of each stageable site in terms of topography, histology and behaviour.

Table 42 Valid AJCC pathologic T by stageable site
Breast Prostate Colorectal
TX TX TX
T0 -- T0
Tis -- Tis
TisDCIS -- --
TisLCIS -- --
TisPagets -- --
T1 -- T1
T1mic -- --
T1a -- --
T1b -- --
T1c -- --
T2 T2 T2
-- T2a --
-- T2b --
-- T2c --
T3 T3 T3
-- T3a --
-- T3b --
T4 T4 T4
T4a -- --
T4b -- --
T4c -- --
T4d -- --
99 99 99

Valid AJCC pathologic N by site

See Chapter 1 for a complete description of each stageable site in terms of topography, histology and behaviour.

Table 43 Valid AJCC pathologic N by stageable site
Breast Prostate Colorectal
NX NX NX
N0 N0 N0
N0i- -- --
N0i+ -- --
N0mol- -- --
N0mol+ -- --
N1 N1 N1
N1mi -- --
N1a -- --
N1b -- --
N1c -- --
N2 -- N2
N2a -- --
N2b -- --
N3 -- --
N3a -- --
N3b -- --
N3c -- --
99 99 99

Valid AJCC pathologic M by site

Table usage notes:

See Chapter 1 for a complete description of each stageable site in terms of topography, histology and behaviour.

Table 44 Valid AJCC pathologic M by stageable site
Breast Prostate Colorectal
MX MX MX
M0 M0 M0
M1 M1 M1
-- M1a --
-- M1b --
-- M1c --
99 99 99

Valid AJCC clinical TNM stage group by site

Table usage notes:

See Chapter 1 for a complete description of each stageable site in terms of topography, histology and behaviour.

Table 45 Valid AJCC TNM clinical stage group by stageable site
Breast Prostate Colorectal
X X X
0 -- 0
I I I
-- II --
IIA -- IIA
IIB -- IIB
-- III --
IIIA -- IIIA
IIIB -- IIIB
IIIC -- IIIC
IV IV IV
99 99 99

Valid AJCC pathologic TNM stage group by site

Table usage notes:

See Chapter 1 for a complete description of each stageable site in terms of topography, histology and behaviour.

Table 46 Valid AJCC TNM pathologic stage group by stageable site
Breast Prostate Colorectal
X X X
0 -- 0
I I I
-- II --
IIA -- IIA
IIB -- IIB
-- III --
IIIA -- IIIA
IIIB -- IIIB
IIIC -- IIIC
IV IV IV
99 99 99

Valid AJCC TNM stage group by site

Table usage notes:

See Chapter 1 for a complete description of each stageable site in terms of topography, histology and behaviour.

Table 47 Valid AJCC TNM stage group by stageable site
Breast Prostate Colorectal
0 -- 0
I I I
II61 II II61
IIA -- IIA
IIB -- IIB
III61 III III61
IIIA -- IIIA
IIIB -- IIIB
IIIC -- IIIC
IV IV IV
99 99 99

Valid AJCC T, N, M and stage group combination by site

Table usage notes

  • The following tables assess the validity of the T, N, M and stage group values combination. They can be used to assess either clinical or pathologicvalues.
  • TNM values in the tables include all their sub-values. Thus, the expression ‘T1' includes {T1, T1a, T1b, T1is...}. The actual list of included values depends on the site.
  • In the context of the CCR System, the expression ‘Any T' or ‘Any N' include all their respective sub-values and the value ‘99'. Thus, the expression ‘Any N' includes {99, NX, N0, N1, N1a...}
Table 48 Valid AJCC T, N, M and stage group combination for colorectal sites
Stage Group T N M
0 Tis N0 M0
I T1 N0 M0
I T2 N0 M0
IIA T3 N0 M0
IIB T4 N0 M0
IIIA T1 N1 M0
IIIA T2 N1 M0
IIIB T3 N1 M0
IIIB T4 N1 M0
IIIC Any T N2 M0
IV Any T Any N M1
Table 49 Valid AJCC T, N, M and stage group combination for breast sites
Stage group T N M
0 Tis N0 M0
I T1 N0 M0
IIA T0 N1 M0
IIA T1 N1 M0
IIA T2 N0 M0
IIB T2 N1 M0
IIB T3 N0 M0
IIIA T0 N2 M0
IIIA T1 N2 M0
IIIA T2 N2 M0
IIIA T3 N1 M0
IIIA T3 N2 M0
IIIB T4 N0 M0
IIIB T4 N1 M0
IIIB T4 N2 M0
IIIC Any T N3 M0
IV Any T Any N M1
Table 50 Valid AJCC T, N, M and stage group combination for prostate sites
Stage group T N M
I T1a N0 M0
II T1a N0 M0
II T1b N0 M0
II T1c N0 M0
II T2 N0 M0
III T3 N0 M0
IV T4 N0 M0
IV Any T N1 M0
IV Any T Any N M1

This table has been slightly modified from the AJCC cancer staging manual, 6,th Edition since the CCR system does not consider the grade when validating the stage group and T, N, M values combination

Revision (Valid AJCC T, N, M and stage group combination by site)
Year Description
2008 Table 50: updated Stage group II with T1a, T1b and T1c

Appendix D – Multiple primary tumours rules for CCR

As of 2007 the CCR has adopted SEER rules. New edits will be implemented to adhere to these new rules.

Figure 2 Decision tree to assess CCR Multiple primary tumours

Figure 2 Decision tree to assess CCR Multiple primary tumours

Appendix E – Interval and mean time between dates

The following algorithm can be used to assess the number of days or complete years between two dates. When both dates are complete, the algorithm returns the exact number of days or complete years between the two dates. When one or both dates are partial, the mean number of days or complete years between the two dates is returned. This algorithm cannot be used if one or both dates are totally unknown, i.e. equal to '99999999'. The returned value is always a positive whole number (including zero).

Definitions

Let Date1 and Date2 be the two dates from which the interval must be calculated and where Date1 <= Date2.

Let Y1, M1 and D1 be the year, month and day of date1.
Let Y2, M2 and D2 be the year, month and day of date2.
Let MOD (X, Y) be a function that returns the remainder of X divided by Y.
Let MIDDLE_DAY (Month) be a function that returns the middle day of month using the following logic:

If Month='02' Then
Return '15'
Otherwise
Return '16'

Let LAST_DAY (Year, Month) be a function that returns the last day of the month for the specified year using the following logic:

If Month='02' Then
If (MOD(Y2,4)=0 AND MOD(Y2,100)<>0) OR (MOD(Y2,4)=0 AND MOD(Y2,400)=0) Then
Return '29'
Else
Return '28'
Else If Month in ('04','06','09','11') Then
Return '30'
Else
Return '31'

Let MONTH_BETWEEN (Date1, Date2) be a function that returns the number of months between date1 and date2. If date1 is later than date2, then the result is positive. If date1 is earlier than date2, then the result is negative. If date1 and date2 are either the same days of the month or both last days of months, then the result is always a whole number. Otherwise a fractional portion of the result based on a 31-day month is also added.

Algorithm (Appendix E – Interval and mean time between dates)
Number of days between Date1 and Date2 Number of years between Date1 and Date2
Based on unknown date components and existing conditions between Date1 and Date2, found the right expression to compute the number of days between Date1 and Date2 using the following table.
Evaluate the expression.
Return rounded result.
Based on unknown date components and existing conditions between Date1 and Date2, found the right expression to compute the number complete years between Date1 and Date2 using the following table.
Evaluate the expression.
Return truncated result.
Table 51 Interval and mean time between dates calculation
Unknown date components Conditions Number of days between Date1 and Date2 Number of years between Date1 and Date2
None None Y2/M2/D2 - Y1/M1/D1 MONTH_BETWEEN (Y2/M2/D2, Y1/M1/D1) / 12
D1 Y1=Y2 AND M1=M2 ½ * (Y2/M2/D2 - Y1/M1/01) 0
Otherwise Y2/M2/D2 - Y1/M1/MIDDLE_DAY(M1) MONTH_BETWEEN (Y2/M2/D2, Y1/M1/MIDDLE_DAY(M1)) / 12
D2 Y1=Y2 AND M1=M2 ½ * (Y2/M2/LAST_DAY(Y2,M2) - Y1/M1/D1) 0
Otherwise Y2/M2/MIDDLE_DAY(M2) - Y1/M1/D1 MONTH_BETWEEN (Y2/M2/MIDDLE_DAY(M2), Y1/M1/D1) / 12
D1, D2 Y1=Y2 AND M1=M2 ½ * (Y2/M2/LAST_DAY(Y2,M2) - Y1/M1/MIDDLE_DAY(M1)) [~ 7]
Note: Given the small difference between all possible cases, 7 can be used for all cases.
Case 1: there are 31 days in M1: (31-16)/2=7,5
Case 2: there are 30 days in M1: (30-16)/2=7
Case 3: there are 29 days in M1: (29-15)/2=7
Case 4: there are 28 days in M1: (28-15)/2=6,5
0
Otherwise Y2/M2/MIDDLE_DAY(M2) - Y1/M1/MIDDLE_DAY(M1) MONTH_BETWEEN (Y2/M2/MIDDLE_DAY(M2), Y1/M1/MIDDLE_DAY(M1)) / 12
M1, D1 Y1=Y2 ½ * (Y2/M2/D2 - Y1/01/01) 0
Y1<Y2 Y2/M2/D2 - Y1/07/02 MONTH_BETWEEN (Y2/M2/D2, Y1/07/02) / 12
M2, D2 Y1=Y2 ½ * (Y2/12/31 - Y1/M1/D1) 0
Y1<Y2 Y2/07/02 - Y1/M1/D1 MONTH_BETWEEN (Y2/07/02, Y1/M1/D1) / 12
D1, M2, D2 Y1=Y2 ½ * (Y2/12/31 - Y1/M1/MIDDLE_DAY(M1)) 0
Y1<Y2 Y2/07/02 - Y1/M1/MIDDLE_DAY(M1) MONTH_BETWEEN (Y2/07/02, Y1/M1/MIDDLE_DAY(M1)) / 12
M1, D1, D2 Y1=Y2 ½ * (Y2/M2/MIDDLE_DAY(M2) - Y1/01/01) 0
Y1<Y2 Y2/M2/MIDDLE_DAY(M2) - Y1/07/02 MONTH_BETWEEN (Y2/M2/MIDDLE_DAY(M2), Y1/07/02) / 12
M1, D1, M2, D2 Y1=Y2 ½ * (Y2/12/31 - Y1/07/02) [= 91]
Note: Since the outcome is constant, 91 can be used directly.
0
Y1<Y2 Y2/07/02 - Y1/07/02 MONTH_BETWEEN (Y2/07/02, Y1/07/02) / 12

Used by

  • Data loading – posting.
  • Tabulation master file

Appendix F – Auxiliary tables

This section describes all auxiliary tables used by several processes, namely:

  • Delete CCR ID;
  • Alternate surname;
  • Internal Record Linkage – Don't Link Cross Reference;
  • Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference.

Appendix E – Interval and mean time between dates

Description

This table keeps a log of patient record deletions.

Content

  • CCR identification number: The CCR identification number of the deleted patient record.
  • Reporting province/territory: The reporting province/territory of the deleted patient record.
  • Patient identification number: The patient identification number of the deleted patient record.
  • Date of deletion: The date of the day the patient record was deleted or merged with another.
  • New CCR_ID: The CCR identification number of the remaining patient record when two patient records are merged through internal record linkage resolution.
  • Process: Code indicating which process has deleted the patient record. Possible values are:
    1. Data loading process through posting step.
    2. Internal record linkage through resolution step.

Usage

This table can be used to know how and when a patient record has been deleted. This is especially useful when providing feedback to PTCR about an input patient record that is rejected because the corresponding base patient record is not found on the CCR.

Used By

  • Data loading – posting
  • Internal record linkage
Revision (Appendix E – Interval and mean time between dates)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

Alternate surname

Description

This table keeps a copy of other patient surnames used since a patient enters the CCR.

Content

  • CCR identification number: The CCR identification number of the patient.
  • Surname: Former surname used by the patient.

Usage

This table is used during record linkage activities to augment the chances of a link between two records. This is useful when a patient surname changed overtime. Generally speaking, an additional patient record is created for every alternate patient surname. Doing so will allow a better link between a jurisdiction that uses the former patient surname and another jurisdiction that uses the latter patient surname.

Used By

  • Data loading – posting;
  • Internal record linkage – Record explosion;
  • Death clearance process – Record explosion.
Revision (Alternate surname)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

Internal Record Linkage – Don't Link Cross Reference

Description

This table keeps a log of potential duplicate patient record pairs that have been reviewed and rejected by PTCR through the Internal Record Linkage process.

Content

  • CCR Identification Number 1: The CCR Identification Number of the first patient.
  • CCR Identification Number 2: The CCR Identification Number of the second patient.
  • Resolution Date: The date when the Resolution step of the Internal Record Linkage process has run and has created the entry. (Format: YYYYMMDD)

Usage

This table is used during Internal Record Linkage process to avoid resending for review potential duplicate patient records that have been already reviewed and rejected by PTCR.

Used By

  • Data Loading – Posting;
Internal Record Linkage – Don't Link Cross Reference
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference

Description

This table keeps a log of Death Confirmation refused by PTCR through the Death Confirmation Refusal Process.

Content

  • CCR Identification Number: The CCR Identification Number of the patient.
  • Date of Death: The Date of Death as specified on the rejected Death Event (format: YYYYMMDD);
  • Place of Death: The Place of Death as specified on the rejected Death Event;
  • Death Registration Number: The Death Registration Numner as specified on the rejected Death Event
  • Refusal Date: The date when the Death Confirmation Refusal has been processed (Format: YYYYMMDD)

The Year of Death, the Place of Death and the Death Registration Number altogether create a key that uniquely identifies a Death Event.

Usage

This table is used during Death Clearance process to avoid resending for review Death Clearance Confirmation that have been already reviewed and rejected by PTCR.

Used By

  • Data Loading – Posting (Death Confirmation Refusal);
  • Internal Record Linkage – Resolution;
  • Death Clearance – Probabilistic Linkage.
Revision (Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference)
Year Description
2004 Reporting Province and Patient Identification Number have been removed from this table since they are not part of the Patient Primary Key and were not maintained upon Patient Reversal of Ownership.

Appendix G – Guidelines for reporting grade, differentiation or cell indicator

Note: The CCR captures Grade for “invasive” tumours only beginning with January 1, 2004 data to accommodate grade collection in the CS Algorithm. These guidelines apply to January 1, 2006 data.

The CCR does not collect Grade for “in situ” tumours.

All CCR codes are based on the SEER codes as defined in the SEER Program Coding and Staging Manual 2004. The intent is to collect histopathologic grade however there are recognized anatomical site exceptions (for example, kidney) that apply other grading schemes.

Site Specific Grade Guidelines (page 4) take precedence over the General Coding RULES (page 2); use the General Coding Rules only when there are no Site Specific Grade Guidelines.

Grade, Differentiation (Codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 9)

Pathologic testing determines the grade, or degree of differentiation, of the tumour. For cancers, the grade is a measurement of how closely the tumour cells resemble the parent tissue (organ of origin). Well differentiated tumour cells closely resemble the tissue from the organ of origin. Poorly differentiated and undifferentiated tumour cells are disorganized and abnormal looking; they bear little or no resemblance to the tissue from the organ of origin.

Pathologists describe the tumour grade by levels of similarity. Pathologists may define the tumour by describing two levels of similarity (two-grade system); by describing three levels of similarity (three-grade system); or by describing four levels of similarity (four-grade system). The four-grade system describes the tumour as grade I, grade II, grade III, and grade IV (also called well differentiated, moderately differentiated, poorly differentiated, and undifferentiated/anaplastic). These similarities/differences may be based on pattern (architecture), cytology, or nuclear features or a combination of these elements depending upon the grading system that is used. The information from this data item is useful for determining prognosis.

Cell Indicator (Codes 5, 6, 7, 8, 9)

Describes the lineage or phenotype of the cell that became malignant. Cell indicator codes apply to hematopoietic malignancies (ICD-O-3 range 9590-9989) and for these diagnoses cell indicator takes precedence over grade/differentiation. Note: See the ICD-O-3 chapter Morphology (page 67)for further instructions on coding grade.

CCR Codes:

1 Grade I; grade i; grade 1; well differentiated; differentiated, NOS
2 Grade II; grade ii; grade 2; moderately differentiated; moderately well differentiated; intermediate differentiation
3 Grade III; grade iii, grade 3; poorly differentiated; dedifferentiated
4 Grade IV; grade iv; grade 4; undifferentiated; anaplastic
5 T-cell; T-precursor
6 B-Cell; Pre-B; B-precursor
7 Null cell; Non T-non B
8 NK cell (natural killer cell) (effective beginning with diagnosis 1/1/1995)
9 Grade/differentiations unknown, not stated, or not applicable

GENERAL CODING RULES

  1. If there is any confusion relating to grade, we strongly recommend consulting the pathologist for confirmation.

    Example: To determine grade when there are multiple pathology consults.
  2. The site-specific coding guidelines (pages 4-9) include rules for coding grade for the following primary sites: breast, kidney, prostate, CNS, lymphoma, leukemia and sarcoma.
  3. Code the grade from the final diagnosis in the pathology report. If there is more than one pathology report, and the grades in the final diagnoses differ, code the highest grade for the primary site from any pathology report.
  4. If grade is not stated in the final pathology diagnosis, use the information in the microscopic section, addendum, or comment to code grade.
  5. If there is no tissue diagnosis (pathology or cytology report), code the grade from the Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) or Positron Emission Tomography (PET).
  6. If more than one grade is recorded for a single tumour, code the highest grade, even if it is a focus.

    Example: Pathology report reads: Grade II adenocarcinoma with a focus of undifferentiated adenocarcinoma. Code the tumour grade as grade 4, CCR Code 4.
  7. Code the grade information from the consultation or tumour board round if the specimen is sent to a specialty pathology department for a consult.
  8. Code the grade from the primary tumour only, never from a recurrence or metastatic site (distant and/or regional) even if this is theonly reference to grade that you have.
  9. Code the grade for all unknown primaries to 9 (unknown grade) unless grade is implied by histology (i.e. anaplastic carcinoma (grade = 4).
  10. Some terms in ICD-O-3 carry an implied statement of grade. These histologies must be reported with the correct grade as stated below even if the primary site is unknown:
    8020/34 Carcinoma, undifferentiated
    8021/34 Carcinoma, anaplastic
    8331/31 Follicular adenocarcinoma, well differentiated
    9082/34 Malignant teratoma, undifferentiated
    9083/32 Malignant teratoma, intermediate type
    9401/34 Astrocytoma, anaplastic
    9451/34 Oligodendroglioma, anaplastic
    9511/31 Retinoblastoma, differentiated
    9512/34 Retinoblastoma, undifferentiated
  11. Code the grade of the invasive component when the tumour has both in situ and invasive portions. If the invasive component grade is unknown and in situ is graded, code the grade as unknown (9). Note: The CCR does not capture grade for in situ (high dysplasia) cases.
  12. If a patient receives pre-operative systemic treatment for example, chemotherapy, radiotherapy, hormonal etc), code grade:
    – from a pre-treatment pathology report, if available.
    –after pre-operative systemic treatment if this is the only grade information available.

SITE SPECIFIC GRADE GUIDELINES

If the site specific guidelines do not apply or only limited information is available, then refer to the Common Grading Systems tables (page 10) and the Terminology (Four Grade) Conversion Table (page 11).

Exception: Cell indicator takes precedence over grade/differentiation for lymphomas and leukemias.

Breast Cancer

Priority Order for Coding Breast Cancer Grade Code grade in the following priority order (See following table):

  1. Bloom-Richardson (BR) scores 3-9 converted to grade
  2. Bloom Richardson (BR) grade (low, intermediate, high)
  3. Terminology
    a. Differentiation (well differentiated, moderately differentiated, etc)
  4. Histologic grade (Breast Grade NOS, invasive cancer, histologic grade is implied).
    a. Grade 1/I/i, grade 2/II/ii, grade 3/III/iii, grade 4/IV/iv

Note: The conversion of low, intermediate, and high grade for breast is different from the conversion used for all other tumours. Do not use three-grade conversion for breast primaries (see page 10).

Breast Grading Conversion Table
BR Scores BR Grade Terminology Histologic Grade CCR Code
3, 4, 5 Low Well differentiated I/III; 1/3 1
6, 7 Intermediate Moderately differentiated II/III; 2/3 2
8, 9 High Poorly differentiated III/III; 3/3 3

Bloom-Richardson (BR)

  1. BR may also be called: modified Bloom-Richardson, Scarff-Bloom-Richardson, SBR grading, BR grading, Elston-Ellis modification of Bloom Richardson score, the Nottingham modification of Bloom Richardson score, Nottingham-Tenovus, or Nottingham grade
  2. BR may be expressed in scores (range 3-9)The score is based on three morphologic features of “invasive no-special-type” breast cancers (degree of tubule formation/histologic grade, mitotic activity, nuclear pleomorphism of tumour cells)
  3. BR may be expressed as a grade (low, intermediate, high)
  4. BR grade is derived from the BR score
  5. Use the Breast Grading Conversion Table above to convert the score, grade or terminology into the CCR code

Kidney Cancer

Fuhrman grade describes the nucleus of the cell. If Fuhrman grade is not specified, nuclear grade has second priority.For kidney, nuclear grade is more important (priority) than looking at the overall histologic grade of the tumor.

Note: Use the general coding rules for coding grade for Wilms tumour (8960) as these prioritization rules do not apply.

Priority Order for Coding Kidney Cancer Grade

Code grade in the following priority order:

  1. Fuhrman grade (grade 1, 2 ,3 ,4)
  2. Nuclear grade (grade 1, 2, 3, 4)
  3. Terminology (well diff, mod diff)
  4. Histologic grade (grade 1, grade 2)
Fuhrman Conversion Table
Grade Differentiation or Descriptor CCR Code
Grade i Well differentiated 1
Grade ii Moderately differentiated 2
Grade iii Poorly differentiated 3
Grade iv Undifferentiated 4

Prostate

Nuclear grade is not equivalent to any part of the Gleason grading process (cannot be converted from Gleason's Score or Pattern).

Priority Rules for Coding Prostate Cancer Grade

Code grade in the following priority order:

  1. Gleason's Grade (score or pattern)
  2. Terminology
    a. Differentiation (well differentiated, moderately differentiated, etc.)
  3. Histologic grade
    a. Grade 1/I/i, grade 2/II/ii, grade 3/III/iii, grade 4/IV/iv

Use the following table to convert Gleason's pattern or score into CCR codes:

Gleason Conversion Table
Gleason's Score (Gleason's Grade) Gleason's Pattern Terminology Histologic Grade CCR Code
2, 3, 4 1, 2 Well differentiated I 1
5, 6 3 Moderately differentiated II 2
7, 8, 9, 10 4, 5 Poorly differentiated III 3

Note: if Gleason's score or pattern is not specified, see examples below:

Gleason's Pattern

Prostate cancers are commonly graded using Gleason's score or pattern. Gleason's grading is based on a 5-level system, meaning it is based on 5 histologic patterns. The pathologist will evaluate the primary (majority) and secondary patterns for the tumour. The pattern is usually written as a sum, with the majority pattern appearing first and the secondary pattern as the second number.

Example: A Gleason pattern of 2 + 4 means that the primary pattern is 2 and the secondary pattern is 4.

Gleason's Score

The patterns are added together to create a score.

Example: If the pattern is 2 + 4, the score is 6 (the sum of 2 and 4).

When reviewing prostate grading terminology and attempting to determine whether it represents a grade or a score, consider the following results:

  • less than or equal to 5 are coded as a pattern and
  • more than 5 are coded as a score.
  1. If the pathology report contains only one number, and that number is less than or equal to 5, it is a pattern. Please see General Coding Rule 1.
  2. If the pathology report contains only one number, and that number is greater than 5, it is a score. Please see General Coding Rule #1.
  3. If the pathology report specifies a specific number out of a total of 10, the first number given is the score.

    Example: The pathology report says “Gleason's 3/10”. The Gleason's score would be 3.
  4. If there are two numbers less than 6, assume they refer to two patterns. The first number is the primary pattern and the second is the secondary pattern.

    Example: If the pathology report says “Gleason's 3 + 5,” the Gleason's score would be 8, the sum of 3 and 5.

Central Nervous System

  1. WHO grading forbrain is used to estimate prognosis and can refer to both benign and malignant lesions. It is never coded in the 6th digit of the histology code.
    a. WHO grade is captured in Collaborative Stage Site Specific Factor 1.
  2. Pathologists do not always describe ICD-O-3 grade or differentiation of CNS tumors.a. If no grade is given, code the 6th digit histology code to ‘9' unknown.
    b. Some histologies include/imply grade in the terms; in these cases the grade can be coded (for example, anaplastic astrocytoma 9401/34). SeeGeneral Coding Rule 10.
  3. Do not automatically code glioblastoma multiforme as grade IV, if no grade is given, code to ‘9' unknown. (9440/39).
  4. All glioma's with histology 938-946 with the exception of those with an implied grade are ‘9' not applicable.
  5. Grade astrocytomas according to ICD-O-3 rules. Do not use the WHO grade to code this field.

Lymphoma and Leukemia 9590-9989

  1. The designation of T-cell, B-cell, null cell, or NK cell has precedence over any statement of differentiation.
    a. Code ANY statement of T-cell, B-cell, null cell, or NK cell including:
    T-cell (code 5)
    Cortical T
    Mature T
    Pre-T
    Pro-T
    T-cell phenotype
    T-precursor
    B-Cell (code 6)
    B-cell phenotype
    B-precursor
    Pre-B
    Pre-pre-B
    Pro-B
    Null-Cell; Non-T-non-B (code 7)
    Null-cell
    Non T-non-B
    Common cell
    NK (Natural Killer) cell (code 8)
    NK/T cell
    Cell type not determined, not stated or not applicable (code 9)
    Combined B cell and T cell

    Note: The ‘code to the higher code' rule usually does not apply to phenotypes.

    b. Code information on cell type from any source, whether or not marker studies are documented in the patient record.

    Example: The history portion of the medical record documents that the patient has a T-cell lymphoma. There are no marker studies on the chart. Code the grade as T-cell.
  2. Do not use the terms “high grade,” “low grade,” and “intermediate grade” to code differentiation or Cell Indicator field. These terms refer to prognosis, not grade.
    a. In some instances, the term ‘grade' does not imply differentiation and should not be used to code the 6th digit of the morphology code. It is important to recognize when the term “grade” refers to category and when it refers to biologic activity. When describing some diseases, pathologists use the term “grade” as a synonym for “type” or “category.” Registrars recognize the term “grade” as an indicator of cell differentiation that is coded in the 6th digit of the ICD-O morphology code.
    i. The grade descriptors for nodular sclerosing Hodgkin lymphoma and follicular lymphoma are actually types or categories of these diseases. The 6th digit should not be coded as grade 1, 2 or 3 for these cases.
    ii. Poorly differentiated lymphocytic lymphoma or a B-cell or T-cell lymphoma should be coded in the 6th digit of the morphology code.
    iii. Other terms described as high grade or low grade as part of the diagnostic term may be used to code the 6th digit of the morphology code.
  3. Do not code the descriptions “Grade 1,” “Grade 2,” or “Grade 3” in the Grade, Differentiation or Cell Indicator field.
  4. Codes 9950-9989 rarely have a grade associated with them and are generally coded as a ‘9'.
  5. Grade codes 5-8 are T-cell, B-cell, or NK cell indicators used for leukemias and lymphomas only. Therefore, codes 5-8 may only be used with morphologies in the range of 9590-9989.

Sarcoma

Several grading systems exist and may be used to grade sarcomas. The following table incorporates two, three and four-tier grading systems. If a sarcoma is graded using terminology, refer to the Terminology Conversion Table on page 11.

Gleason Conversion Table
Grade Differentiation or Descriptor CCR Code
Low Grade 1/2 1/3 1/4 2/4 2
Intermediate Grade 2/3 3
High Grade 2/2 3/3 3/4 4/4 4

Common Grading Systems

Two-Grade System

There are some cancers for which a two-grade system is used (i.e. colon cancer, papillary transitional cell carcinoma, bladder, endometrial stromal sarcoma). The patterns of cell growth are measured on a scale of 1 or 2 (also referred to as low and high grade). The expected outcome is more favorable for lower grades.

  • If the grade is listed as 1/2 or as low grade, assign code 2.
  • If the grade is listed as 2/2 or as high grade, assign code 4.
Two-Grade Conversion Table
Grade Differentiation /
Description
CCR Code
1/2, I/II Low grade 2
2/2, II/II High grade 4

Three-Grade System

There are several cancers for which a three-grade system is used (for example peritoneum, endometrium, fallopian tube, prostate, bladder and soft tissue sarcoma). The patterns of cell growth are measured on a scale of 1, 2, and 3 (also referred to as low, medium/intermediate, and high grade). This system measures the proportion of cancer cells that are growing and making new cells and how closely they resemble the cells of the host tissue. Thus, it is similar to a four-grade system (see Terminology Conversion Table on page 10), but simply divides the spectrum into 3 rather than 4 categories (see Three-Grade Conversion Table below). The expected outcome is more favorable for lower grades.

  • If the grade is listed as1/3 or as low grade, assign code 2.
  • If the grade is listed as 2/3 or as medium/intermediate grade, assign code 3.
  • If the grade is listed as 3/3 or as high grade, assign code 4.

Use the following table to convert the grade to CCR codes:

Three-Grade Conversion Table*
Grade Differentiation /
Description
CCR Code
1/3, I/III Low grade 2
2/3, II/III Medium/Intermediate grade 3
3/3, III/III High grade 4

*Do not use for breast primaries

Terminology Conversion Table
This system measures the proportion of cancer cells that are growing and making new cells and how closely they resemble the cells of the host tissue. The expected outcome is more favorable for lower grades.

Terminology Conversion Table
Description Grade CCR Code
Differentiated, NOS I 1
Well differentiated I 1
Fairly well differentiated II 2
Intermediate differentiation II 2
Low grade I-II 2
Mid differentiated II 2
Moderately differentiated II 2
Moderately well differentiated II 2
Partially differentiated II 2
Partially well differentiated I-II 2
Relatively or generally well differentiated II 2
Medium grade, intermediate grade II-III 3
Moderately poorly differentiated III 3
Moderately undifferentiated III 3
Poorly differentiated III 3
Relatively poorly differentiated III 3
Relatively undifferentiated III 3
Slightly differentiated III 3
Dedifferentiated III 3
High grade III-IV 4
Undifferentiated, anaplastic, not differentiated IV 4
Non-high grade 9

References:

  1. SEER Program Coding and Staging Manual (2004) Published by the U. S. Department of Health & Human Services (Bethesda, MD), 2004. NIH Publication Number 04-5581.
  2. International Classification of Diseases for Oncology, Third Edition. WHO.
  3. NAACCR Edit Logic Report for Metafile NAACR10E.EMF
  4. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Data collection of primary central nervous system tumors. National Program of Cancer Registries Training Materials. Atlanta, Georgia: Department of Health and Human Services, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, 2004.
Revision (Terminology Conversion Table)
Year Description
2006 New appendix

Appendix H – CCR Ambiguous Terms

Effective for January 1, 2001 data and forward

The Data Quality Management Committee, with the approval of the CCCR, recommends that the SEER Program list4 of ambiguous terms be adopted as the Canadian list when identifying cancer cases5. Where possible, it is best to obtain additional information or consult with a pathologist for clarification. If neither is possible, use the following list for determining whether to register/report a cancer case to the CCR.

Appendix H – CCR Ambiguous Terms
Consider as diagnostic of cancer NOT considered diagnostic of cancer*
apparent(ly) cannot be ruled out
appears to equivocal
comparable with possible
compatible with potentially malignant
consistent with questionable
favor(s) rule out
malignant appearing suggests
most likely worrisome
presumed
probable
suspect(ed)
suspicious (for)
typical of * without additional information
Exception:
If cytology is reported as “suspicious”, do not
interpret this as a diagnosis of cancer.
Abstract the case only if a positive biopsy
or a physician's clinical impression of cancer supports the cytology findings.
Do not include patients who have a diagnosis consisting only of these terms.
Revision (Appendix H – CCR Ambiguous Terms)
Year Description
2006 New appendix

Appendix I – Guidelines for Abstracting and Determining Death Certificate Only (DCO) Cases for Provincial/Territorial Cancer Registries (PTCRs) in Canada (for T12 and P18)

Cancer registries have identified access to death information as a critical component for operating a high quality program. There are two main reasons for acquiring this particular data, including:

  1. Determination of Death Status for Currently Enrolled Cases: Once a registry has enrolled a case of cancer the addition of death information can provide a more complete picture of how cancer has impacted this individual. Death information on a specific case can remove it from active follow up routines and allow registries to perform more accurate and complete survival calculations.
  2. Case Completeness: To ensure a high level of case completeness a registry typically relies on a variety of methods to ascertain newly diagnosed cancers. One common method is to complete a linkage to vital statistics information regarding cause(s) of death. If an individual is reported with a cancer cause of death and is not found in the registry the case should be followed back to determine if it meets the criteria for cancer registration.

Therefore it is important that PTCRs enter into agreements with Vital Statistics registrars to receive at a minimum all cases for which cancer is listed on any part of the medical certificate of death. In Canada death registration is subject to provincial mandates and includes the completion of a Statement of Death and/or a Medical Certificate of Death. Cancer registries receive death notifications in various formats i.e., hardcopy, electronically, or computer files and at varying intervals for example, monthly, quarterly or annually.

The ideal is to receive notification of all deaths including all causes of death occurring within the province, enabling the registry to perform a comprehensive death clearance. When linked with the registry database this information will result in both matched and non-matched cancer incidence. A death certificate with a reportable tumour listed that does not link to other records in the cancer registry is called a Death Certificate Notification (DCN) and requires further investigation. DCNs include cases in which the underlying cause of death is cancer as well as cases in which cancer is simply mentioned on the death certificate. When additional information is obtained the case should be registered with that year's incidence data. If additional information cannot be obtained, the case is a true Death Certificate Only (DCO) and can be reported as such to the Canadian Cancer Registry (CCR).

Death certificate information is a critical component in the registry certification process operated by the North American Association of Central Cancer Registries (NAACCR). To be eligible for NAACCR certification a PTCR must participate in the NAACCR Call for Data. The data criteria reviewed during this process include: Completeness, passing EDITS, DCO, Interval for Criteria, Timeliness, Duplicate Reports and Missing Data Fields in Sex, Age, County and Race. The DCO certification requirement is less than 5% silver and less than 3% gold.

The CCR and NAACCR accepted formula for calculating the DCO rate is:

The CCR and NAACCR accepted formula for calculating the DCO rate is:

Differences exist in the denominator as CCR does not include in situ bladder cancers and NAACCR does.Where cancer cases = all unduplicated invasive cancers + in situ bladder cancers within the diagnosis year for state (provincial) residents. These include all cases identified and abstracted from the death clearance project and all true DCOs. This information is included in the NAACCR Call for Data.

(Source: NAACCR Series II: Calculating the DCO Rate)

1. Definitions

Cause of Death

The causes of death to be entered on the medical certificate of cause of death are all those diseases; morbid conditions or injuries which either resulted in or contributed to death and the circumstances of the accident or violence which produced any such injuries.

(Source: World Health Assembly, Article 23 of the Constitution of the World Health Organization. ICD-9 pg. 763)

Death Certificate Notification (DCN)

Death certificate notification is a cancer death identified from any source including a Vital Statistics Death Registration that could not be linked (electronically or manually) to an existing cancer record.

Death Certificate Only (DCO)

“Death certificate only” means that the only source of information about the case was a death certificate. This category includes deaths where either the Underlying Cause of Death is cancer, or there is any mention of cancer on the death certificate.
(Source: CCR – Report No. 3.2.2. – Input Data Dictionary, page 79. Revised on: 17/06/94.)As of January 1, 2000 mortality information in Canada was captured by Vital Statistics using the ICD-10 classification system.

Follow Back (FB)

Followback is the process of actively searching for additional information on DCNs at the patient and disease level and updating the cancer database as a complete abstract when possible. If additional information cannot be found the case is a true DCO.

Underlying Cause of Death

The underlying cause of death is (a) the disease or injury which initiated the train of events leading directly to death, or (b) the circumstances of the accident or violence which produced the fatal injury.

(Source: World Health Assembly, Article 23 of the Constitution of the World Health Organization. ICD-9 pg. 763)

2. Process

The process for determining a DCO case will vary and should be modified to meet the requirements of the individual PTCRs. PTCRs should match DCNs to their database; those cancer deaths that do not match require further investigation. Processing is required when the decedent was a resident of your province at the time of death, and a reportable cancer is mentioned on the DCN and no record is found in the PTCR database. No further processing is required when the only tumour mentioned on the DCN is a non-reportable tumour, the decedent was a non-resident of your province (forward to province of ownership if agreements are in place) or when a non-cancer death is identified.

The underlying cause of death field is intended to capture a patient's official cause of death. As this variable is important for record linkage purposes and has legal implications, the death information coded and provided to cancer registries from provincial and territorial Vital Statistics offices should not be altered even when cancer registries have more complete or detailed diagnostic information. The only PTCR reported data that may be changed on the CCR patient record because of a confirmation of death are: Date of Death, Province/Country of Death and Death Registration Number.
(Source, CCR – Report No. 3.2.1 – Coding and Reporting Guidelines – December 18, 1995)

A. DCN Match to Provincial/Territorial cancer registry database. (Example: positive match on four variables for example, HIN, Surname, Sex and DOB).

  • Determine same primary versus new primary.
  • Identify discrepancies between cancer on certificate of death and registry diagnosis codes.
  • Update missing or incomplete fields.

An inconclusive Match shows some discrepancies between identifiers in the incidence and death data but the records may belong to the same person. (Example: positive or close match on the four variables for example, HIN positive match, mismatch with surname, sex or DOB.

  • Visual verification to determine if it's “close enough” to be judged a match or non-match.
  • FB to make a valid determination.

Followback (FB) for new primaries or abstract for additional DCO primaries. Edit and review cases in registry database not microscopically confirmed.

B. DCO. DCN cancer death, Non-match to Provincial/Territorial cancer registry database.
Nonmatched cancer deaths are cleared in a variety of ways, depending on the PTCR's ability to staff a DCO clearance program. Each non-match cancer death must be manually reviewed for reportability and to ascertain where to follow back. Followback sources include facility (chronic care, hospital/nursing home), coroner and attending physician where the death occurred.

Based upon the information received from follow back, the case may be abstracted as:

  • FollowBack is recommended by form letter to the institution (Appendix A) where the patient expired and secondly to the informant (Appendix B) who signed the death certificate to obtain additional information.
  • Cases that are identified after followback should be added to the appropriate diagnosis year as actual incident records (not DCOs).
  • Cases where no additional information is obtained should be reported to the CCR as a DCO.

C. Standard conventions for abstracting DCO cases:

  1. If FB is not returned from facility/physician, the information from the DCN may be used and the case considered a DCO.
  2. If a date of diagnosis or an approximate date cannot be established, the case is a DCO and the date of death is used as the date of diagnosis.
  3. Follow standard coding conventions for site/histology.
  4. There may be more than one primary noted on the Death Certificate. More than one DCO abstract may be required.
  5. Code the histology from the Death Certificate, i.e., squamous cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, etc., if available. If “carcinoma” is recorded, code as 8010/3. If “cancer” is recorded, code as 8000/3.
  6. Code the Primary Site recorded on the Death Certificate, i.e., lung, prostate, breast.
  7. Melanoma, unknown primary site code to Malignant melanoma of skin, site unspecified (ICD-9 172.9, ICD-10 C43.9).
  8. Lymphoma, unknown primary site code to Lymph Nodes, NOS (ICD-9 202.8, ICD-10 C85.9).
  9. Leukemia is always coded to Bone Marrow (1CD-9 208.9, ICD-10 C95.9).
  10. Watch for primary sites where metastases are common (Lung, Liver, Brain and Bone).
  11. The death certificate may state “metastatic liver cancer” or “metastatic bone cancer”. If it is unclear if the site recorded is the primary or a metastatic site, code to Unknown Primary Site (ICD-9 199.0, ICD-10 C80.9).
  12. Stage is always “unknown”.
  13. Diagnostic confirmation is always “unknown”.
  14. No treatment is recorded, even if noted on the DCN.
  15. Include DCO cases in edits.

(Cover letter to Institution)

PTCR

Inside address

To Whom It May Concern

The Registry Name is presently completing the Death Certificate Only (DCO) follow back process for year/s. DCO means that the only source of information about the case was a death certificate. The death certificate identified the decedent as having expired in your facility however the cancer registry has no prior information on this case through its routine data collection. Data collection is legislated by act/privacy act. Enclosed you will find a Registry Form letter for completion, it is important that we collect the initial date and address at time of diagnosis. If, your records do not identify this patient as having cancer please indicate and we will adjust our records accordingly.

By completing the enclosed Registry Form letter we can finalize the information on this patient. Complete information permits the calculation of survival rates on patients diagnosed with cancer, facilitates epidemiological studies and improves the completeness and quality of reported death and other demographic information. Your continued support in improving the quality of data allows us to participate in provincial and national studies and to provide accurate statistics on an ongoing basis to our stakeholders.

If there are any questions or concerns, please do not hesitate to contact me, contact name at facility name and phone number.

Sincerely yours,

Signature

Enclosure

(Cover letter to Informant)

PTCR

Inside address

Dear Insert name here,

The Registry Name is presently completing the Death Certificate Only (DCO) follow back process for year/s. DCO means that the only source of information about the case was a death certificate. The death certificate stated the decedent had cancer, however the cancer registry has no prior information on this case through its routine data collection. Data collection is legislated by act/privacy act. The death certificate identifies you as the last attending physician at time of death for patient name. Enclosed you will find a Registry Form letter for completion, it is important that we collect the initial date and address at time of diagnosis. If, your records do not identify this patient as having cancer please indicate and we will adjust our records accordingly.

By completing the enclosed Registry Form letter we can finalize the information on this patient. Complete information permits the calculation of survival rates on patients diagnosed with cancer, facilitates epidemiological studies and improves the completeness and quality of reported death and other demographic information. Your continued support in improving the quality of data allows us to participate in provincial and national studies and to provide accurate statistics on an ongoing basis to our stakeholders.

If there are any questions or concerns, please do not hesitate to contact me, contact name at facility name and phone number.

Sincerely yours,

Signature

Enclosure

Death Certificate Notification (DCN)
Year Description
2007 New appendix

Appendix J – Interval between two dates (complete or partial)

The following algorithm can be used to assess the number of days between two dates. When both dates are complete, the algorithm returns the exact number of days. When one or both dates are partial, the missing parts of the dates are “derived” and the number of days returned, based on the derived dates.  This algorithm cannot be used if one or more dates is totally unknown, i.e. equal to '99999999'. The returned value is always a positive whole number (including zero).

Definitions

Let Date1 and Date2 be the two dates for which the interval must be calculated and where Date1 <= Date2.

Let Y1, M1 and D1 be the year, month and day of date1.
Let Y2, M2 and D2 be the year, month and day of date2.

Let DIFF_DAYS (Date1, Date2) be a function that returns the number of days between date1 and date2.

Assumptions if there are partial dates
Date1 is a partial date Date2 is a partial date
If MONTH is not reported then MONTH is assumed to be '01'.
If DAY is not reported then DAY is assumed to be '01'.
If MONTH is not reported then MONTH is assumed to be '12'.
If DAY is not reported then DAY is assumed to be the last day of the reported MONTH (28, 29, 30 or 31).

Examples

Date1 = 20060627.
Date2 = 20060930.

DIFF_DAYS (20060627, 20060930)

Date1 = 20060699
Date2 = 20070999.

DIFF_DAYS = (20060601, 20070930)

Date1 = 20069999
Date2 = 20079999

DIFF_DAYS = (200601, 20071231)

Appendix J – Interval between two dates (complete or partial)
Year Description
2008 New appendix

Appendix T – Residency guidelines in Canada

To ensure comparability of definitions of cases and the population at risk (numerator and denominator), the Canadian Cancer Registry (CCR) rules for determining residency at time of diagnosis are to be identical or comparable to rules used by the Canadian Census Bureau, whenever possible.

The residence at diagnosis is generally the place of usual residence, as stated by the patient or, as stated by the Census Bureau, ‘the dwelling in Canada where a person lives most of the time'. Residency is their usual place of residence, regardless of where they are when diagnosed. For patients with multiple tumours, the address may be different for each primary tumour.

There are a number of situations for which the process of determining residency is not intuitive, and special guidelines have been created in order to define an individual's usual place of residence. The Data Quality Committee (DQC) for the Canadian Council of Cancer Registries (CCCR) recognizes that some Provincial/Territorial Cancer Registries (PTCRs) are removed from the direct patient contact relationship, and may not have access to the patient or the information to confirm residency. Using the provincial health insurance number (HIN) as a determining factor of residency during initial case abstraction is appropriate. When permanently relocating, the HIN from the previous province of residence is valid for three months. However, if the case is identified as a potential duplicate during a Record Linkage cycle, additional information should be obtained before confirming residency, as it may not be appropriate to default to using province of HIN, as the primary residence.

PTCRs are encouraged to use these guidelines to determine residency for categories of persons for whom residence is not immediately apparent.

  1. Residence (one residence). The dwelling in Canada where a person lives most of the time.
  2. Persons with more than one residence. Usual residence rule applies; however, if the time spent at each residence is equal or the abstractor is not sure which one to choose, the residence where the patient was staying on the day cancer was diagnosed should be considered the usual place of residence (see examples below). a) Exception: Consider the residence shared with their family as their usual place of residence, even if they spend most of the year elsewhere.
    Commuter workers living away part of the week while working: Consider the residence shared with their family as the usual place of residence, even if they spend most of the year elsewhere. (for example, parents, husbands, wives or common-law partners)
    b) Snowbirds: People who live at another residence (city, province or country) with a warmer climate. Residence should be documented as where they live most of the time.
    c) Children in joint custody: Residence should be documented as where they live most of the time. If time is equally divided, their residence is documented as where they were staying on the day cancer was diagnosed.
  3. Patients with rural addresses. If the information provides a rural address only, which may be the post office box, record the address as stated, but make every attempt, within your resources, to identify the actual physical place of residence at time of diagnosis.
  4. Patients with no usual place of residence (i.e. homeless, transient people). Residents who do not have a usual place of residence should be documented as where they were staying on the day cancer was diagnosed.
  5. Institutional collective dwellings (Collective dwellings that provide care or assistance services). Persons in institutions with no other usual place of residence elsewhere in Canada, or persons who have been in one or more institutions for a continuous period of six months or longer, are to be considered as usual residents of the institution.
    Institutional collective dwellings include:
    a) Residents of a long-term care facility, a hospital, or a home for the aged.
    b) In homes, schools, hospitals, or wards for the physically disabled, mentally challenged, or mentally ill or in drug/alcohol treatment facilities.
    c) Inmates of correctional institutions, including prisons, jails, detention centers, or halfway houses.
    d) Children in juvenile institutions, such as residential care facilities for neglected or abused children or orphanages.
    e) For abused women, or for runaway or neglected youth please see section 6 - Non-institutional collective dwellings.
  6. Non-institutional collective dwellings (Collective dwellings that do not provide care or assistance services). Residence should be documented as their usual residence, if they report one (the place where they live most of the time) or otherwise at the inn, hotel, etc.
    Non-institutional collective dwellings include:
    a) Inns, hotels, motels and hostels.
    b) YMCAs/YWCAs, or public or commercial campgrounds.
    c) Military bases.
    d) Migrant workers (lumber / mining camps & farms).
    e) Members of religious orders in monasteries or convents.
    f) Shelters with sleeping facilities for people without housing, for abused women, or for runaway or neglected youth. Residence should be documented as the shelter.
  7. Students. Students who live away from home while attending school, but who return to live with their parents part of the year should consider their place of residence as their parents' home, even if they spend most of the year elsewhere.
  8. Live-ins:
    a) Live-in nannies. Residence should be documented as where they live most of the week.
    b) Foster children, boarders or housemates. Residence should be documented as where they are living at time of diagnosis.
  9. Merchant and coast guard vessels. Merchant vessels, coast guard vessels and oil rigs at sea should be documented as their usual onshore residence, if they report one (the place where they live most of the time when they are onshore) or otherwise, at their vessel's homeport.
  10. Naval vessels. Canadian Forces Naval Vessel residence should be documented as their usual onshore residence, if they report one (the place where they live most of the time when they are onshore) or otherwise, at their vessel's homeport.
  11. Armed forces. Canadian Armed Forces residence should be documented as their usual place of residence, if they report one, or otherwise, where they are stationed at time of diagnosis.
  12. Non-permanent residents (foreign citizens). Persons who hold a student or employment authorization, Minister's permit or who were refugee claimants at time of diagnosis, for a continuous period of six months or more.
    a) Citizens of foreign countries who have established a household or are part of an established household in Canada while working or studying, including family members with them. Residence should be documented as their household in Canada.
    b) Citizens of foreign countries who are living in Canadian embassies, ministries, legations or consulates. Residence should be documented as the embassy.
    c) Citizens of foreign countries temporarily traveling or visiting Canada. These cases are not reportable to the Canadian Cancer Registry.

Appendix X – CCR_ID check digit routine

The last digit of the CCR_ID is a check digit, for example, digit calculated from the other CCR_ID digits. The purpose of using a check digit is twofold: it allows the detection of some data corruption and prevents one from creating new IDs too easily. The next routine returns a check digit for a given CCR_ID.

Pseudo code


Let N1 be the first digit of CCR_ID (starting from the left)
Let N2 be the second digit of CCR_ID (starting from the left)
Let N8 be the eighth digit of CCR_ID (starting from the left)

Change the values of N2, N4, N6, N8 according to the following pattern
 
Initial value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
New value 0 2 4 6 8 1 3 5 7 9


Let REMAINDER be the remainder of ((N1 + N2 + N3 + N4 + N5 + N6 + N7 + N8) / 10)
If REMAINDER = 0 then
RETURN 0
Else
RETURN (10 – REMAINDER)

Used by

  • Data loading – Edit
  • Data loading – posting

Appendix Z – References

Collaborative Staging Task Force of the American Joint Committee on Cancer. Collaborative Staging Manual and Coding Instructions, Version 01.04.01. Jointly published by American Joint Committee on Cancer (Chicago, IL) and U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (Bethesda, MD), 2004. NIH Publication Number 04-5496.
http://www.cancerstaging.org/cstage/index.html

Fritz A, Percy C, Jack A, et al (eds): ICD-O: International Classification of Diseases for Oncology, Third Edition. Geneva, World Health Organization, 2000.

SEER Program Coding and Staging Manual 2004, Surveillance, Epidemiology and End Results (SEER) Program, National Cancer Institute, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD. NIH Publication Number 04-5581.

SEER Program Coding and Staging Manual 2007, Surveillance, Epidemiology and End Results (SEER) Program, National Cancer Institute, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD. NIH Publication Number 07-5581.

Johnson CH, Peace S, Adamo P, Fritz A, Percy-Laurry A, Edwards BK. The 2007 Multiple Primary and Histology Coding Rules. National Cancer Institute, Surveillance, Epidemiology and End Results Program. Bethesda, MD, 2007. Revised April 30, 2008

NAACCR Standards for Cancer Registries, Volume II Version 11.3 - Data Standards and Data Dictionary, Thirteenth Edition.

National Cancer Institute Surveillance Epidemiology and End Results training website, American Joint Committee on Cancer. http://www.training.seer.cancer.gov/
module_staging_cancer/unit03_sec03_part00_ajcc.html

CCCR Committee on Data and Quality Management - Clinical Core Data Set - March 2001 version

AJCC Cancer Staging Manual, 6th Edition, American Joint Committee on Cancer (AJCC), 2002

Facility Oncology Registry Data Standards (FORDS), revised for 2007. Published by the American College of Surgeons (ACoS) and the Commission on Cancer (COC), 2007.

Facility Oncology Registry Data Standards (FORDS) manual, revised for 2009. Published by the American College of Surgeons (ACoS) and the Commission on Cancer (COC), 2009.

Footnotes

1.The original set of ISO codes has been expanded to include individual Canadian provinces and territories and other Statistics Canada specific codes.

2. Available upon request.

3.The only source of information about the case was a death certificate. This category includes deaths where either the underlying cause of death (patient record, Field No.17) is cancer, or there is any mention of cancer on the death certificate.

4. Input records that passed successfully through all validation edits, correlation edits and other match edits.

5. Because CS and AJCC TNM data items are fairly new to CCR, it has been temporarily decided that CS and AJCC TNM errors (including fatal errors)will not prevent valid core data items from being loaded on the CCR database

6. See Appendix A – Core reference tables - ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table for details.

7. See P1 Specific values & meaning.

8. See Appendix X - CCR_ID check digit routine.

9. See P4 Specific values & meaning.

10. See P5 Specific values & meaning.

11. See P10 Specific values & meaning.

12. See Appendix A – Core reference tables.

13. See Appendix – Core reference tables.

14. See P18 Specific values & meaning.

15. See T1 Specific values & meaning.

16. See Appendix X – CCR_ID check digit routine.

17. See T5 Specific values & meaning.

18. See T11 Specific values & meaning.

19. See T13 Specific values & meaning.

20. See T14 Specific values & meaning.

21. See T17 Specific values & meaning.

22. See T19 Specific values & meaning.

23. Eligible ICD-O-3 histology codes do not include ‘0000' since this value should have been converted to a more meaningful value during the Pre-edit processing.

24. See T22 Specific values & meaning.

25. See T23 Specific values & meaning.

26. See T24 Specific values & meaning.

27.See T25 Specific values & meaning.

28. See section 1.1.2.2 – CCR collaborative staging scope.

29. See section 1.1.2.3 – CCR AJCC TNM staging scope.

30. See Appendix C – AJCC TNM concordance tables - Valid AJCC clinical T by site.

31. See Appendix C – AJCC TNM concordance tables - Valid AJCC clinical N by site.

32. See Appendix C – AJCC TNM concordance tables – Valid AJCC clinical M by site.

33. See Appendix C – AJCC TNM concordance tables – Valid AJCC pathologic T by site.

34. See Appendix C – AJCC TNM concordance tables – Valid AJCC pathologic N by site.

35. See Appendix C – AJCC TNM concordance tables – Valid AJCC pathologic M by site.

36. See Appendix C – AJCC TNM concordance tables – Valid AJCC TNM clinical stage group by site.

37. See Appendix C – AJCC TNM concordance tables – Valid AJCC TNM staging group by site.

38. See T51 Specific values & meaning.

39. Collaborative staging data items (T27-T41) and AJCC TNM staging data items (T42-T51) may or may not be reported. See TCOR-18 and TCOR-19 respectively for more details.

40. Already enforced by TVAL15.

41. Impossible to enforce since the code that stands for 'Not Reported' also stands for 'Benign behaviour'.

42. Already enforced by TVAL21.

43. See Appendix A – Core reference tables – ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table.

44.See Appendix A – Core reference tables – ICD-O-2 to ICD-O-3 conversion table.

45. See Appendix A – Core reference tables – CCR core scope.

46. See Appendix A – Core reference tables – Invalid site and histology combinations.

47. See Appendix A – Core reference tables – Invalid histology and behaviour combinations.

48. See collaborative staging scope in Chapter 1.

49.See Appendix C – AJCC TNM concordance tables – Valid AJCC T, N, M and stage group combination bysite.

50. Thus, unknown or not assessed AJCC clinical/pathologic T, N, M values are excluded.

51. All related patient and tumour records are rejected, but corresponding message is only attached to each conflicting patient record of the family.

52. All related patient and tumour records are rejected, but corresponding message is only attached to each conflicting tumour record of the family.

53. All related patient and tumour records are rejected, but corresponding message is only attached to each erroneous or conflicting patient record of the family.

54. The match with a delete patient transaction is covered by KIM4.

55. All related patient and tumour records are rejected, but corresponding message is only attached to each erroneous or conflicting tumour record of the family.

56. Input record that has neither core fatal errors nor core errors from all previous edits.

57. Method of diagnosis can be 'Autopsy' even when date of diagnosis is before date of death. This is possible since method of diagnosis is not linked to date of diagnosis. See corresponding definitions for more detail.

58. According to cancer staging manual, 6th edition, this value is not a valid stage group for the site.

59. Place holder to keep sub-edit numbering in accordance with the required processing order. See Data Item match edits introduction for more information.

60. Based on the underlying cause of death coding rules, these 2 codes cannot be used.

61. According to cancer staging manual, 6th edition, this value is not a valid stage group for the site. On the other hand, since AJCC TNM stage group is likely to be assigned by a physician rather than derived from any T, N and M values, this value must be accepted.

62. Lymphoma, leukemia or immunoproliferative disease is identified by the following ICD-0-3 codes: 9590-9989 excluding 9731, 9734, 9740, 9750, 9755-9758, 9930.

63. Alphabetic comparison as opposed to numeric comparison is used because TTRN and Health Insurance Number may contain letters.

Canadian Cancer Registry System Guide – 2009 Edition

Part II – Data Loading and Tabulation Master Files

Introduction
0.1 Canadian Cancer Registry Overview
0.2 CCR System Guide Document Organization
0.3 Part II Document Organization – Data Loading and TMF
0.4 Changes to the CCR Data Loading and TMF for the 2007 and 2008 Reference Years
0.5 Contacts in Statistics Canada

Chapter 3 – Data Loading
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Data Importing
3.3 Data Conditioning
3.4 Validation Edits
3.5 Correlation Edits
3.6 Match Edits
3.7 Data Posting

Chapter 4 – Tabulation Master Files
4.1 Description
4.2 Scope
4.3 Content and layout
4.4 Derived variable calculations
4.5 Confidentiality

Appendices
Appendix C – AJCC TNM reference tables
Appendix D – Multiple primary tumour rules for CCR
Appendix E – Interval and mean times between dates
Appendix F – Auxiliary tables
Appendix G – Guidelines for reporting grade, differentiation or cell indicator
Appendix H – CCR ambiguous Terms
Appendix I – Guidelines for abstracting and determining Death Certificate Only (DCO) Cases for Provincial/Territorial Cancer Registries (PTCRS) in Canada (for T12 and P18)
Appendix J – Interval between two dates (complete or partial)
Appendix T – Residency guidelines in Canada
Appendix X – CCR_ID Check digit routine
Appendix Z – Reference
Footnotes

Introduction

  • Canadian Cancer Registry Overview
  • CCR System Guide Document Organization
  • Part II Document organization – Data Loading and TMF
  • Changes to the CCR Data Loading and TMF for the 2007 and 2008 Reference Years
  • Statistics Canada Contacts

0.1 Canadian Cancer Registry Overview

The patient-oriented Canadian Cancer Registry (CCR) evolved from the event-oriented National Cancer Incidence Reporting System (NCIRS). Beginning with cases diagnosed in 1992, incidence figures collected by Provincial and Territorial Cancer Registries (PTCRs) have been reported to the CCR, which is maintained by Statistics Canada. Established as a person-oriented database, the CCR includes mechanisms for updating and clearing death records and is linked to provincial and territorial databases to help track patients across Canada who have been diagnosed with tumours.

0.2 CCR System Guide Document Organization

The CCR System Guide has been separated into three parts to improve access and navigation. Although the three parts are separate, the three documents should be used in conjunction with each other. The different sections of the three-part CCR System Guide often refer to each other. The CCR System Guide is now composed of:

Part I: CCR Data Dictionary provides explanation on the reporting of data, including the scope and detailed information on the input and derived variables.

Part II: CCR Data Loading and Tabulation Master Files provides information on the data loading process, including in-depth descriptions of the various edits performed on the data. Part II also provides information on the Tabulation Master Files, including the scope, content and layout. Part II is followed by several appendices that contain supporting information such as explicit code set tables, guidelines to assist coders and other supportive information.

Part III: CCR Core Reference Tables provides detailed information on the CCR Core Reference Tables such as descriptions of the tables, their usage and any revisions made. Part III is an accompanying document to the Core Reference Tables 2009.xls.

0.3 Part II Document organization – Data Loading and TMF

Chapter 3 – Data loading describes in great detail all the verification performed against reported data prior to their loading into the CCR System. Related business rules, Edit logic and feedback report messages are described for all edits. It also describes the data conditioning and the data posting phase.

Chapter 4 – Tabulation master file describes the main output of the system.

Appendices contain supporting information such as explicit code set tables, guidelines to assist coders, lists of changes from previous versions of the system, etc.

0.4 Changes to the CCR Data Loading and TMF for the 2007 and 2008 Reference Years

Please refer to the relevant section in the System Guide – Data Loading and TMF for more details related to these changes.

Changes to the CCR Data Loading and TMF for the 2007 and 2008 Reference Years
Section Item(s) Description of change Effective (reference year)
3.1.5 Step 2: Core data items validation New validation edits added, TVAL53-57 2008
3.1.5 Step 7: CS data items validation New validation edit TVAL52 added in to step 2007
3.1.7 CS fatal error CS data item T52 added 2007
3.1.7 CS error CS data item T52 added 2007
3.3.1 Data formatting – Table 22 Impact of data formatting step on tumour data items New variables added: T53, T54, T55, T56, T57 2008
New variable added – T52 2007
3.4 Validation Edits –
PVAL6
PVAL7
PVAL8
PVAL9
PVAL13
Business rules changed – acceptable accented characters specified 2007
3.4.2 Tumour validation edits – Table 25 New Tumour validation edits – TVAL53, TVAL54, TVAL55, TVAL56, TVAL57 2008
New Tumour validation edit – TVAL52 2007
3.4.2 Tumour validation edits –
TVAL6
Business rules changed – acceptable accented characters and special characters specified
Edit logic – New edit logic added
Feedback report messages – New messages added
2007
3.4.2 Tumour validation edits –TVAL8 Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages added – SGC 2006 2006
3.4.2 Tumour validation edits –
TVAL9
Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages added – Census tract effective date range ended in 2005. For 2006 onwards T9 must be blank 2006
3.4.2 Tumour validation edits –
TVAL27
TVAL28
TVAL29
TVAL30
TVAL31
TVAL32
TVAL33
TVAL34
TVAL35
TVAL36
TVAL37
TVAL38
TVAL39
TVAL40
TVAL41
Referenced fields, Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: now using recommended version of AJCC CS algorithm 2007
3.4.2 Tumour validation edits –
TVAL52
New validation edit added 2007
3.4.2 Tumour validation edits –
TVAL53
TVAL54
TVAL55
TVAL56
TVAL57
New validation edits added 2008
3.5.2 Tumour correlation edits – Table 27 New correlation edits – TCOR26, TCOR27 2008
3.5.2 Tumour correlation edits – Table 27 New correlation edits – TCOR13 2007
3.5.2 Tumour correlation edits – TCOR1 Referenced fields, Business rules, edit logic changed – new data items added T53, T54, T55, T56, T57 2008
Referenced fields, Business rules, edit logic changed – new data items added T52 2007
3.5.2 Tumour correlation edits – TCOR3 Business rules and Edit logic changed: includes combinations where census tract indicates area outside CMA 2006
3.5.2 Tumour correlation edits – TCOR10
TCOR11
Referenced fields, Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages changed: Verification now includes Date of diagnosis. 2007
3.5.2 Tumour correlation edits – TCOR13 New correlation edit added 2007
3.5.2 Tumour correlation edits – TCOR18 Referenced fields and Edit logic updated: T52 added as a new CS variable 2007
3.5.2 Tumour correlation edits – TCOR26, TCOR27, TCOR29 – TCOR35 New correlation edits 2008
3.6.3 Data item match edits –
DIM6
Revision – Edit no longer used after 2006 2006
3.7.2 Add tumour record processing – CS data items Added new data item T52 2007
3.7.7 Patient derived variable calculation PD7 – Name of variable changed 2007
4.2 Table 24 – Scope - topography codes from ICD-O-2 and ICD-O-3 considered a single site in the definition of multiple cancers Topography group added: C38.4 2007
4.3 Table 36 TMF record layout Addition/deletion of variable – T52 CS version 1st added TD20 deleted 2007
PD7 – Variable acronym changed
New variables added – T53 to T57
2008
4.3 Table 37 – Derived variable calculations at TMF time PD2 – Vital status now derived at TMF time 2007
Appendices Appendices – Appendix A moved to Part III of system guide. Appendix A now included in Part III of system guide 2008
Additions to Appendices Appendix H now includes T53
Appendix I now includes P18
2008
Table 50 – updated table Updated stage group II with T1a, T1b and T1c 2008
New Appendices added to system guide New Appendices
Appendix G – Grade, differentiation or cell indicator guidelines
Appendix H - CCR Ambiguous Terms
Appendix I – Guidelines for abstracting and determining death certificate only (DCO) cases for PTCRs in Canada
2007
Appendix J – Interval between two dates (complete or partial) 2008
Appendices deleted from system guide Appendix Y - Removed and replaced with Section 0.4 Changes to the CCR Data Loading and TMF for the 2007 and 2008 reference years 2008
Appendix Z - References Updates to several references 2007
  • Additional updates have been made; however, only the changes that require action on the part of the PTCRs have been included in this table.
  • Note that changes effective in the 2006 reference year have also been included here.

0.5 Statistics Canada Contacts

PTCRs employees are encouraged to bring forward any questions by contacting one of the following:

For additional information regarding the processing of CCR data, please contact:

Colette Brassard
Section Chief
Operations and Integration Division
Statistics Canada
Tel: (613) 951-7282
Fax: (613) 951-0709
For any subject matter related questions/queries, please contact:

Kim Boyuk
Chief, Cancer Statistics
Health Statistics Division
Statistics Canada
Tel: (613) 951-2510
Fax: (613) 951-0792

Hollie Anderson
Manager, Canadian Cancer Registry
Health Statistics Division
Statistics Canada
Tel: (613) 951-0757
Fax: (613) 951-0792

Chapter 3 – Data loading

  • Data importing
  • Data conditioning
  • Data editing
  • Data posting

3.1 Introduction

The data loading process is done in 4 distinct phases:

1. Data importing: Reads in input patient and tumour record files and breaks them down into separate data items using the proper record layout.
2. Data conditioning: Formats the data, filters the old classification data, computes some missing input variables and adjusts the laterality code. This phase alters the reported data.
3. Data editing: Identifies errors in input records and provides sufficient feedback to correct them. This phase does not alter the data. The documentation about this phase has been divided into 3 sections:

  • Validations edits,
  • Correlation edits,
  • Match edits.

4. Data posting: Computes some derived variables, transfers valid data in the CCR database and generates additional reports.

Since the data editing is the most complex phase of the overall process, the remaining pages of the introduction present its key components. An overview of the overall data loading process is also presented at the end of the introduction.

3.1.1 Business rules

The main purpose of the edit process is to enforce a given number of rules on the CCR Data items. Some rules are related to the subject matter (subject matter rules) whereas some others are related to the transmission of data between the PTCR and Statistics Canada (transactional rules). The expression "Business rules" has been retained to express both subject matter and transactional rules that apply to the CCR System.

3.1.2 Edits and sub-edits

Each individual edit in the CCR system enforces a set of related business rules. For the purpose of reporting, an edit may be divided into sub-edits in order to provide more detailed feedback. Thus, each Sub-edit has its own logic and message.

3.1.3 Edit logic

Edit logic are logical expressions that can be evaluated to true or false. They are built from data item names, operators and functions. The principal language elements are described in the following tables.

Table 14 Logical operators
Operator Syntax and meaning
AND expr1 AND expr2
The expression is true if and only if both expr1 and expr2 are true, otherwise the expression is false.
OR expr1 OR expr2
The expression is true whenever expr1 or expr2 is true, otherwise the expression is false.
NOT NOT expr1
The expression is true only if it does not equal expr1, otherwise the expression is false.
Table 15 Comparison operators
Operator Syntax and meaning
<> Expr1 <> expr2
Assesses whether expr1 is different from expr2.
= Expr1 = expr2
Assesses whether expr1 is equal to expr2.
> Expr1 > expr2
Assesses whether expr1 is greater than expr2.
>= Expr1 >= expr2
Assesses whether expr1 is greater than or equal to expr2.
< Expr1 < expr2
Assesses whether expr1 is less than expr2.
<= Expr1 <= expr2
Assesses whether expr1 is less than or equal to expr2.
BETWEEN Expr1 BETWEEN (expr2, expr3)
Assesses whether expr1 is greater than or equal to expr2 and less than or equal to expr3.
LIKE Expr1 LIKE expr2
Assesses whether expr1 complies with expr2 pattern. Expr2 may contain Underscore (_) and percent (%) characters which stand respectively for any single character and any number (including 0) of characters.
Ex: ‘951-5555' LIKE ‘951-_ _ _ _' is true.
EX: ‘951-5555' LIKE ‘653-_ _ _ _' is false.
Table 16 Functions
Function Syntax and meaning
AVERAGE AVERAGE (X1, X2, ..., Xn)
Returns the arithmetic mean of X: X1+X2+...+Xn / n. This function ignores NULL values.
BLANK BLANK(x1)
Returns x1 blank character(s).
CALCULATE_CCR_CHECK_DIGIT CALCULATE_CCR_CHECK_DIGIT (str1)
Returns a CCR_ID check digit based on str1.
CONTAINS_WORD CONTAINS_WORD (str1, str2, x1)
Assesses whether str1 contains a word of at least x1 character(s) from str2.
IS_COMPOSED_OF IS_COMPOSED_OF (str1, str2)
Assesses whether str1 is only composed of characters from str2.
IS_VALID_DATE IS_VALID_DATE (str1)
Assesses whether str1 is a calendar date.
LENGTH LENGTH (str1)
Returns the length of str1 including trailing blanks.
UPPER UPPER (str1)
Returns str1 where letters and accented characters are converted to their uppercase equivalent. Special characters and numbers remain the same.
Table 17 String operator
Operator Syntax and meaning
|| str1 || str2
Returns a unique string containing str1 and str2 concatenated (juxtaposed).
Table 18 Set operators and symbols
Operator and symbol Syntax and meaning
[] [Expr1,...]
[A-Z]
[A]
Indicates an explicit list of values, a range of values or set of values known as Set A.
IN expr1 IN [A]
Assesses whether expr1 is included in Set A.

3.1.4 Edit families and groups

For ease of use, edits have been grouped into families and groups depending on the scope of the business rules they enforce. There are 3 families:

  1. Validation edits: Enforce business rules on each individual field.
  2. Correlation edits: Enforce business rules between valid fields on the same input record.
  3. Match edits: Enforce business rules between valid fields on different records.

The following table describes the scope of each edit group.

Table 19 Edit scope by family and group
Family Group Scope
Validation Patient validation (PVAL)  Enforce business rules on Patient fields.
Tumour validation (TVAL)  Enforce business rules on Tumour fields.
Correlation Patient correlation (PCOR)  Enforce business rules between valid Patient fields.
Tumour correlation (TCOR)  Enforcebusiness rules between valid Tumour fields.
Match Key input match (KIM) Ensure that Input patient and Tumour records respect the submission rules in terms of matching keys.
Hey base match (KBM) Ensure that Input patient and Tumour records respect the actual state of the CCR in terms of matching keys.
Data item match (DIM) Enforce the business rules between data items (other than keys) found on different records.
Pre–posting match (PPM) Identify error–free4 Input records that cannot be posted to CCR because some other related Input records are either missing or in error.

3.1.5 Edits order of execution and edit control

Because of the dependencies between the edits, edit processing must respect a given order of execution. Since CS and AJCC TNM data item edits depend on core data items, core data item edits must be done first. For each of the following steps, the number of eligible input records will depend on the outcome of preceding steps.

Step 1: Core data items minimum requirements assessment

The core data items minimum requirements consist of an Input record with a valid record type and date of transmission and no missing core data items (P1-P19 or T1-T26). The following edits must be successful in order to respect the minimum requirements:

  • Patient records: PCOR1, PVAL4 and PVAL19.
  • Tumour records: TCOR1, TVAL5 and TVAL26.

Step 2: Core data items validation

Remaining core data items validation edits (PVAL1-19, TVAL1-26 and TVAL53-57) can be performed on the Input records that respect the core data items minimum requirements. The following order must be respected:

  • PVAL11 before PVAL12;
  • PVAL14 before PVAL15 and PVAL17;
  • TVAL12 before TVAL8 and TVAL9;

Step 3: Core data items correlation, key input match and key base match edits

These edits are run based on the outcome of the core data item validation edits. That is, for a given edit, only the Input records where all referenced fields have been successfully validated are eligible. (This implies that Input records that do not respect the minimum requirements or that fail a required field validation edit are not eligible.) These edits can be run in any order.

Step 4: Core data item match edits

Those edits can only be performed on Input records that have no core data items errors. A special processing order must be respected. See Section 3.6.3 Data Item Match Edits for details.

Step 5: Core data items pre-posting match edits

Those edits can only be performed on Input records that have no core data items errors. These edits can be run in any order.

Step 6: CS data items minimum requirements assessment

CS data items minimum requirements consist of an input tumour record with valid date of diagnosis and no missing CS data items. The following edit must be successful in order to respect the minimum requirements:

Tumour records: TCOR18.

Step 7: CS data items validation

CS Validation edits (TVAL27 to 41 and TVAL52) can be performed on the input tumour records that respect the CS minimum requirements and where all core referenced fields are valid. These edits can be run in any order.

Step 8: AJCC TNM data items minimum requirements assessment

AJCC TNM data items minimum requirements consist of an input tumour record with valid date of diagnosis, ICD-O-2/3 topography, ICD-O-3 histology and ICD-O-3 behaviour and no missing AJCC TNM data items. The following edit must be successful in order to respect the minimum requirements SITE-SPECIFIC MEANING: Tumour records: TCOR19.

Step 9: AJCC TNM data items validation

AJCC TNM validation edits (TVAL42 to 51) can be performed on the input tumour records that respect the AJCC TNM minimum requirements and where all core referenced fields are valid. These edits can be run in any order.

Step 10: AJCC TNM data items correlation

These edits are run based on the outcome of previous validation edits. That is, for a given edit, only the Input records where all referenced fields (core and AJCC TNM) have been successfully validated are eligible. These edits can be run in any order.

See section 3.1.9 flowchart of the data loading process for an illustration of the edits dependencies.

3.1.6 Sub-edits order of execution

Except for data item match Sub-edits; all sub-edits from a given edit may be performed in any order. See Section 3.6.3.1 Special order of execution for more details about data item match Sub-edits special order of execution.

3.1.7 Message types

The severity of an error is expressed by its corresponding message's type. The following list describes each possible message type and gives an indication of when they are issued and how they change the editing process flow.

Fatal error: When a group of data items does not respect the minimum requirements. Related editing is stopped.

Core fatal error: Core data items (P1 to P19 and T1 to T26) do not respect the minimum requirements. The input record will not undergo any other edits and will be rejected.

CS fatal error: CS data items (T27 to T41 and T52) do not respect the minimum requirements. CS data items will not undergo any other related edits and will not be loaded on the CCR database. CS Fatal error does not prevent valid core and AJCC TNM data items from being loaded on the CCR database.1

AJCC TNM Fatal error: AJCC TNM data items (T42 to T51) do not respect the minimum requirements. AJCC TNM data items will not undergo any other related edits and will not be loaded on the CCR database. AJCC TNM fatal error does not prevent valid core and CS data items from being loaded on the CCR database.5

Error: Normal edits failure. Editing is not stopped. Unless specified otherwise, the input record can be edited by other edits based on the validity of their corresponding referenced fields.

Core error: Error found in core patient (P1 to P19) or Tumour (T1 to T26) data items. Core error causes the Input record to be rejected.

CS error: Error found in CS data items (T27 to T41 and T52). CS data items will not be loaded on the CCR database.CS error does not prevent valid core and AJCC TNM data items from being loaded on the CCR database.5

AJCC TNM error: Error found in AJCC TNM data items (T42 to T51). AJCC TNM data items will not be loaded on the CCR database. AJCC TNM error does not prevent valid core and CS data items from being loaded on the CCR database.5

Warning: Informative message to PTCR. Warnings do not prevent Inputrecords from being loaded on the CCR.

3.1.8 Edit description pages

For ease of use, each edit is described using a standard format: name, purpose, referenced fields, business rules, edit logic and feedback report messages. When needed, other parameters, revisions and notes are also added to give more detail. The following table describes each possible section.

Table 20 Edit presentation breakdown
Section Description
Name A unique name for the edit.
Purpose Edit main purpose.
Referenced fields List of all input file fields (or part of fields) involved in the edit.
Other parameters List of additional parameters needed to perform the edit.
Business rules Rules that describe the eligible field value or relationship between many field values. These rules are written in plain English.
Edit logic Each Sub-edit condition that identifies invalid records. These conditions are usually written using logical expressions.
Feedback report messages List of all possible edit messages.
Revision List of all changes that have been applied to the edit over time.
Notes Any remarks.

3.1.9 Flowchart of the data loading process

3.1.9 Flowchart of the data loading process

Notes:
*See 3.1.5 Edits Order of Execution and Edit Control for exact sequencing.
**DIM Edits have a special processing order. See specific section for more details.

3.2 Data importing

During the data importing phase, the input patient record file and/or input tumour record file is read in by the system. Every record is then cut into separate data items using the proper record layout.

3.2 Data Importing

3.3 Data conditioning

The purpose of the data conditioning phase is threefold. Its intent is to:

  • Reduce PTCR response burden by automatically correcting small errors such as the use of lowercase characters in code fields or improper alignment of values.
  • Eliminate older classification data (ICD-9 and ICD-O-2) when not reported as the source classification data. This eliminates the risk of incoherence between the source classification and any former classification data.
  • Bring all reported data up to a uniform classification (ICD-O-3). This facilitates a comparison of all tumours reported to the CCR.

To achieve these objectives, the following steps are performed on the data:

  1. Data formatting;
  2. Old classification filtering;
  3. ICD-O-2/3 topography calculation;
  4. ICD-O-3 histology and behaviour calculation; and,
  5. Laterality adjustment.

The steps listed above must be executed in sequential order. Each step may alter the reported data. Refer to the corresponding section below for a description of how these reported data are altered.

3.3.1 Data formatting

Description

Data formatting is composed of three operations:

Left justified: Removes blank character preceding the data item value.

Uppercase: Converts all lower case alphabetic characters to uppercase letters.
Converts lower case French accents (é, è, ê, ë, ç…) to corresponding uppercase letters (é à É). Special characters and digits remain unchanged.

Removal of trailing blanks: Removes any blank characters trailing the data item value. Data items containing only blank characters will be converted to NULL. This is an important assumption used in the data editing phase.

Purpose

Data formatting reduces PTCR response burden by fixing small formatting errors that would otherwise cause an input record to be rejected. It also converts blank data items to NULL values in order to be compliant with the data editing specification.

Logic

  • Left justification is applied on any fields longer than 1 character.
  • Uppercase is applied on any fields that may contain letters.
  • Removal of trailing blanks is applied on all fields.

The following two tables summarize the impact of the data formatting step on patient and tumour data items. X and – indicate whether the corresponding transformation is applicable or not.

Table 21 Impact of data formatting step on patient data items
Variable Name Variable Left justify Uppercase Removal of trailing blanks
P1 Patient reporting province/territory X - X
P2 Patient identification number X X X
P3 CCR identification number X - X
P4 Patient record type - - X
P5 Type of current surname - - X
P6 Current surname X X X
P7 First given name X X X
P8 Second given name X X X
P9 Third given name X X X
P10 Sex - - X
P11 Date of birth X - X
P12 Province/territory or country of birth X - X
P13 Birth surname X X X
P14 Date of death X - X
P15 Province/territory or country of death X - X
P16 Death registration number X - X
P17 Underlying cause of death X X X
P18 Autopsy confirming cause of death - - X
P19 Patient date of transmission X - X
Table 22 Impact of data formatting step on tumour data items
Variable Name Variable Left justify Uppercase Remove trailing blank
T1 Tumour reporting province/territory X - X
T2 Tumour patient identification number X X X
T3 Tumour reference number X X X
T4 CCR identification number X - X
T5 Tumour record type - - X
T6 Name of place of residence X X X
T7 Postal code X X X
T8 Standard geographic code X - X
T9 Census tract X - X
T10 Health insurance number X X X
T11 Method of diagnosis - - X
T12 Date of diagnosis X - X
T13 ICD–9 cancer code X - X
T14 Source classification flag - - X
T15 ICD–O–2/3 Topography X X X
T16 ICD–O–2 Histology X - X
T17 ICD–O–2 Behaviour X - X
T18 Filler - - -
T19 Laterality - - X
T20 Filler - - -
T21 ICD–O–3 Histology X - X
T22 ICD–O–3 Behaviour - - X
T23 Grade, differentiation or cell indicator - - X
T24 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis - - X
T25 Diagnostic confirmation - - X
T26 Date of transmission X - X
T27 CS tumour size X - X
T28 CS extension X - X
T29 CS tumour size/ext eval - - X
T30 CS lymph nodes X - X
T31 CS reg nodes eval - - X
T32 Regional nodes examined X - X
T33 Regional nodes positive X - X
T34 CS mets at dx X - X
T35 CS mets eval - - X
T36 CS site-specific factor 1 X - X
T37 CS site-specific factor 2 X - X
T38 CS site-specific factor 3 X - X
T39 CS site-specific factor 4 X - X
T40 CS site-specific factor 5 X - X
T41 CS site-specific factor 6 X - X
T42 AJCC clinical T X X X
T43 AJCC clinical N X X X
T44 AJCC clinical M X X X
T45 AJCC pathologic T X X X
T46 AJCC pathologic N X X X
T47 AJCC pathologic M X X X
T48 AJCC clinical TNM stage group X X X
T49 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group X X X
T50 AJCC TNM stage group X X X
T51 AJCC TNM edition number X - X
T52 CS Version 1st X - X
T53 Ambiguous Terminology Diagnosis - - X
T54 Date of Conclusive Diagnosis X - X
T55 Type of Multiple Tumours Reported as One Primary X - X
T56 Date of Multiple Tumours X - X
T57 Multiplicity Counter X - X

Revision

Year Description
2008 Tumour input variables T53 to T57 have been added to the record layout. Different formatting processes are done to each new variable.
2007 T52 – CS Version 1st – tumour input variable added to record layout. It is left justified and trailing blanks are removed.
2004 In order to reduce response burden, some data items will automatically be uppercased, left justified and right truncated (removal of trailing blanks) by the CCR system.
T3 – Tumour reference number: Values will not be zero left filled anymore.

3.3.2 Old classification filtering

Description

This step deletes disease classification information reported by PTCRs older than that indicated by the source classification flag.

Purpose

This step eliminates the possibility of incoherence between source classification data (as identified by the source classification flag) and any former classification data.

Logic

  • If the Source classification flag indicates that ICD-9 is the source classification, then all reported data are kept as is.
  • If the Source classification flag indicates that ICD-O-2 is the source classification, then reported ICD-9 Cancer Code is replaced by '0000'.
  • If the Source classification flag indicates that ICD-O-3 is the source classification, then reported ICD-9 Cancer Code and ICD-O-2 Histology are replaced by '0000' and reported ICD-O-2 Behaviour is replaced by '0'.
  • In any other case, all reported data are kept as is.

This step will not create a feedback message. The following examples and table illustrate possible scenarios.

Example 1: If source classification flag indicates ICD-9, then no change.
Example 2: If source classification flag indicates ICD-O-2, then ICD-9 is not loaded.
Example 3: If source classification flag indicates ICD-O-3, then ICD-9 and ICD-O-2H/B are not loaded. ICD-O-2/3T is kept since it also belongs to ICD-O-3.

Table 23 Old classification filtering
Example TSCF ICD-9 ICD-O-2/3T ICD-O-2H ICD-O-2B ICD-O-3H ICD-O-3B
1 Before 1 175 C509 8521 3 8521 3
After 1 175 C509 8521 3 8521 3
2 Before 2 175 C509 8521 3 8521 3
After 2 0000 C509 8521 3 8521 3
3 Before 4 175 C509 8521 3 8521  
After 4 0000 C509 0000 0 8521 3

3.3.3 ICD-O-2/3 Topography calculation

Background

For cases diagnosed from 1992 to 2000, the Canadian Council of Cancer Registries adopted the International Classification of Diseases for Oncology, Second Edition (ICD-O-2) as the standard for reporting diagnostic information to the Canadian Cancer Registry (CCR). This classification was chosen because it provides detailed information on the site (topography), the histology and the behaviour of the neoplasm. The site codes are based on the malignant neoplasms section (C00-C80) of the International Statistical Classification of Diseases and Related Health Problems, Tenth revision (ICD-10). The morphology codes are revised and expanded from its predecessor, the ICD-O-1. The International Classification of Diseases is a classification system which covers the broad range of diseases and other health problems for which health care services may be rendered. The ICD has been in use in Canada for many decades for morbidity (hospitalization) and mortality (death) reporting. The Ninth revision (ICD-9), in use since 1979, has been replaced by the ICD-10 for morbidity and mortality. Chapter 2 of the ICD-9 (Neoplasms) provides a classification of tumours, primarily by site and includes behaviour. The ICD-O-2 supplements site information with tumour morphology detail. This greater level of specificity makes ICD-O more suitable for cancer registration purposes.

By 1992, the data year for which the CCR became operational, all provincial/territorial cancer registries except Ontario and Québec had implemented the ICD-O-2 for reporting tumour site and morphology. Ontario and Québec had adopted the ICD-O-2 for reporting tumour morphology information, but continued to report the site of tumours using the ICD-9, for administrative reasons. In order to bring all data to a common basis, the ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion was created, cooperatively by Statistics Canada, the Ontario Cancer Treatment and Research Foundation and the Fichier des tumeurs du Québec.

Description

This step computes ICD-O-2/3 Topography code from the reported ICD-9 Cancer code when needed.

Purpose

This step ensures that, for each reported tumour, the site is described using the ICD-O-3 classification. This facilitates the comparison between all tumours reported to the CCR.

Logic

If ICD-O-2/3 Topography = '0000' and Source classification flag = '1' then
If ICD-9 Cancer code is found in ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table6 then
ICD-O-2/3 Topography = ICD-O-2/3 Topography code associated to ICD-9 Cancer code in ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table.
Else (ICD-9 Cancer code is NULL or NOT found in ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table)
Warning saying "ICD-O-2/3 Topography calculation: Conversion failed." is sent to the reporting PTCR.
End If
End If

Directions

The process of converting coded information from one disease classification system to another can result in a distortion or loss of original diagnostic detail. Whenever possible, it is recommended that the original descriptive diagnosis be coded directly, using the preferred, most recent classification system.

Registries using both the ICD-O-2/3 topography and the ICD-9 to code tumour sites are requested to report only ICD-O-2/3 topography codes to the CCR. ICD-9 codes should only be reported to the CCR if ICD-O-2/3 topography codes are not available.

3.3.4 ICD-O-3 Histology and behaviour calculation

Background

For cases diagnosed from 2001 onwards, the Canadian Council of Cancer Registries adopted the International Classification of Diseases for Oncology, Third edition (ICD-O-3) as the standard for reporting diagnostic information to the Canadian Cancer Registry (CCR). The topography section of the Third edition remains the same as the Second edition; however it includes revised morphologies and new classifications especially for lymphomas and leukemias. This classification was adopted because it represents the most current classification of diseases for oncology.

Description

This step computes the ICD-O-3 Histology and the ICD-O-3 behaviour from reported ICD-O-2 histology and ICD-O-2 behaviour when needed.

Purpose

This step ensures that, for each reported tumour, the histology and behaviour are described using the ICD-O-3 classification. This facilitates the comparison between all tumours reported to the CCR.

If ICD-O-3 Histology = '0000' and ICD-O-3 Behaviour = '0' and Source Classification Flag = '1' or '2' 'then
If ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-2 Histology and ICD-O-2 Behaviour combination is found in ICD-O-2 to ICD-O-3 conversion table6 then
ICD-O-3 Histology = ICD-O-3 Histology code associated to ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-2 Histology and ICD-O-2 Behaviour combination in ICD-O-2 to ICD-O-3 conversion table
ICD-O-3 Behaviour = ICD-O-3 Behaviour code associated to ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-2 Histology and ICD-O-2 Behaviour combination in ICD-O-2 to ICD-O-3 conversion table
If the Review Flag associated to ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-2 Histology and ICD-O-2 Behaviour combination in ICD-O-2 to ICD-O-3 conversion table = '1' then
Warning saying "ICD-O-3 Histology and Behaviour calculation: Values must be manually reviewed." is sent to the reporting PTCR.
Else (ICD-O-2/3 Topography is NULL or ICD-O-2 Histology is NULL or ICD-O-2 Behaviour is NULL or the combination is NOT found in ICD-O-2 to ICD-O-3 conversion table)
Warning saying "ICD-O-3 Histology and Behaviour calculation: Conversion failed." is sent to the reporting PTCR.
End If
End If

This step ensures that, for each reported tumour, the histology and behaviour are described using the ICD-O-3 classification. This facilitates the comparison between all tumours reported to the CCR

3.3.5 Laterality adjustment

Background

Although the ICD-9 and the ICD-O-3 may be used for similar purposes, they are not totally compatible. Since the ICD-9 and the ICD-O-3 use different topographic groupings, there are cases where the laterality code may be coherent with a given ICD-9 Cancer code but may be incoherent with the closest corresponding ICD-O-2/3 topography code. Thus, for these exceptional cases, the laterality code must be altered to be compliant with the ICD-O-3 classification.

Description

This step alters the laterality code when specific ICD-9 Cancer codes are reported as source classification data and corresponding ICD-O-2/3 topography codes conflict with the reported laterality code due to classification incompatibility.

Purpose

This step reduces PTCR response burden by fixing classification incompatibility issues that would otherwise cause an input record to be rejected.

Logic

If Source Classification Flag = '1' and ICD-9 Cancer Code in ['1460','2021','2022','2382'] and Laterality = '0' then
Laterality = '9'
Warning saying "Laterality Adjustment: Laterality code has been changed from '0' to '9' in order to be compliant with ICD-O-3 classification." is sent to the reporting PTCR.
End if

3.4 Validation Edits

The purpose of the Validation edits is to enforce the business rules on each individual field. For ease of use, validation edits have been divided into two groups:

  • Patient validation edits: enforce business rules on patient fields;
  • Tumour validation edits: enforce business rules on tumour fields.

3.4.1 Patient validation edits

The following table summarizes the purpose of each individual edit of this category.

Table 24 Patient validation edits summary
Edit name Purpose
PVAL1 Validates the Patient reporting province/territory code.
PVAL2 Validates the Patient identification number.
PVAL3 Validates the CCR identification number.
PVAL4 Validates the Patient record type code.
PVAL5 Validates the Type of current surname code.
PVAL6 Validates the Current surname.
PVAL7 Validates the First given name.
PVAL8 Validates the Second given name.
PVAL9 Validates the Third given name.
PVAL10 Validates the Sex code.
PVAL11 Validates the Date of birth.
PVAL12 Validates the Province/territory or country of birth code.
PVAL13 Validates Birth surname.
PVAL14 Validates Date of death.
PVAL15 Validates the Province/territory or country of death code.
PVAL16 Validates Death registration number.
PVAL17 Validates the Underlying cause of death code.
PVAL18 Validates Autopsy confirming cause of death code.
PVAL19 Validates Patient record date of transmission.

PVAL1

This edit validates the patient reporting province/territory code.

Referenced fields (PVAL1)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
Other parameters (PVAL1)
Parameters Length Description
PTCR_CODE 2 Province/territory code of the PTCR that is submitting the data.

Business rules

For Input patient records
  • Patient reporting province/territory must be equal to province/territory code of the PTCR submitting the data7.
Edit logic (PVAL1)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL1-1 P1 <> PTCR_CODE Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL1)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL1-1 Patient reporting province/territory code does not match PTCR province/territory code. Core error
Revision (PVAL1)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

PVAL2

Purpose

This edit validates the patient identification number.

Referenced fields (PVAL2)
Field Length Description Acronym
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN

Business rules

On any type of Input patient record, Patient identification number
  • Must be exclusively composed of any of the following:
    • Uppercase letters: A to Z
    • Numbers: 0 to 9
  • Cannot be exclusively composed of zeros.
Edit logic (PVAL2)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL2-1 IS_COMPOSED_OF (P2, ‘0') Record rejected
PVAL2-2 NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (P2, ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789') Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL2)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL2-1 Patient identification number cannot be exclusively composed of zeros. Core error
PVAL2-2 Patient identification number is not exclusively composed of uppercase letters and/or numbers. Core error
Revision (PVAL2)
Year Description
2004 Business rule changed: Apostrophes, hyphens, periods and inner spaces are not accepted anymore.

PVAL3

Purpose

This edit validates the CCR identification number.

Referenced fields (PVAL3)
Field Length Description Acronym
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P3.ID 8 First 8 digits of P3 (CCR ID sequence number) Not applicable
P3.CHECK_DIGIT 1 9th digit of P3 (CCR ID check digit) Not applicable
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE

Business rules

For Update and Delete Patient records, CCR identification number
  • Must be exclusively composed of numbers: 0 to 9
  • Must be 9 digits long.
  • Cannot be all zeros.
  • Must have a valid check digit8.
Edit logic (PVAL3)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL3-1 P4 IN [‘2', ‘3'] AND (LENGTH (P3) <> 9 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (P3, ‘0123456789')) Record rejected
PVAL3-2 P4 IN [‘2', ‘3'] AND P3 = ‘000000000' Record rejected
PVAL3-3 P4 IN [‘2', ‘3'] AND P3 <> ‘000000000' AND LENGTH (P3) = 9 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P3, ‘0123456789') AND P3.CHECK_DIGIT <> CALCULATE_CCR_CHECK_DIGIT (P3.ID) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL3)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL3-1 CCR identification number is not 9 digits long. Core error
PVAL3-2 CCR identification number cannot be all zeros. Core error
PVAL3-3 CCR identification number is invalid. Core error
Revision (PVAL3)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

PVAL4

Purpose

This edit validates the patient record type code.

Referenced fields (PVAL4)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE

Business rules

For Input Patient records, Patient record type
  • Cannot be blank.
  • Must be one of the Eligible patient record type codes9.
Edit logic (PVAL4)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL4-1 P4 IS NULL OR P4 NOT IN [Eligible Patient record type codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages(PVAL4)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL4-1 Patient record type code is missing or invalid. Core fatal error
Revision (PVAL4)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

PVAL5

Purpose

This edit validates the type of current surname code.

Referenced fieldds (PVAL5)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P5 1 Type of current surname PTYP_CUR

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • Type of Current Surname must be one of the Eligible type of current surname codes10.
Edit logic (PVAL5)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL5-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P5 NOT IN [Eligible type of current surname codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL5)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL5-1 Type of current surname code is invalid. Core error
Revision (PVAL5)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

PVAL6

Purpose

This edit validates the current surname.

Referenced fields (PVAL6)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P6 25 Current surname PCURSNAM

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • Current surname can be blank.
  • If Current surname is not blank then
    • It must be exclusively composed of any of the following:
      • Letters: A to Z (upper or lowercase)
      • Accented characters: Â À Ç É Ê Ë È Î Ï Ô Û Ü (upper or lowercase)
      • Special characters: space ( ), period (.), apostrophe ('), hyphen (-)
    • It must contain at least one letter.
Edit logic (PVAL6)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL6-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P6 IS NOT NULL AND NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P6), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') Record rejected
PVAL6-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P6 IS NOT NULL AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P6), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') AND NOT CONTAINS_WORD (UPPER (P6), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ', 1) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL6)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL6-1 Current surname is not exclusively composed of acceptable letters, accented characters or special characters. Core error
PVAL6-2 Current surname does not contain at least one letter. Core error
Revision (PVAL6)
Year Description
2007 Business rules changed: Acceptable accented characters are specified.
2004 Business rules changed: Titles are now allowed in current surname.

PVAL7

Purpose

This edit validates the first given name.

Referenced fields (PVAL7)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P7 15 First given name PGNAME_1

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • First given name can be blank.
  • If First given name is not blank then
    • It must be exclusively composed of any of the following:
      • Letters: A to Z (upper or lowercase)
      • Accented characters: Â À Ç É Ê Ë È Î Ï Ô Û Ü (upper or lowercase)
      • Special characters: space ( ), period (.), apostrophe ('), hyphen (-)
    • It must contain at least one letter.
Edit logic (PVAL7)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL7-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P7 IS NOT NULL AND NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P7), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') Record rejected
PVAL7-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P7 IS NOT NULL AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P7), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') AND NOT CONTAINS_WORD (UPPER (P7), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ', 1) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL7)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL7-1 First given name is not exclusively composed of acceptable letters, accented characters or special characters. Core error
PVAL7-2 First given name does not contain at least one letter. Core error
Revision (PVAL7)
Year Description
2007 Business rules changed: Acceptable accented characters are specified.

PVAL8

Purpose

This edit validates the second given name.

Referenced fields (PVAL8)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P8 15 Second given name PGNAME_2

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • Second given name can be blank.
  • If Second given name is not blank then
    • It must be exclusively composed of any of the following:
      • Letters: A to Z (upper or lowercase)
      • Accented characters: Â À Ç É Ê Ë È Î Ï Ô Û Ü (upper or lowercase)
      • Special characters: space ( ), period (.), apostrophe ('), hyphen (-)
    • It must contain at least one letter
Edit logic(PVAL8)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL8-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P8 IS NOT NULL AND NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P8), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') Record rejected
PVAL8-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P8 IS NOT NULL AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P8), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') AND NOT CONTAINS_WORD (UPPER (P8), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ', 1) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL8)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL8-1 Second given name is not exclusively composed of acceptable letters, accented characters or special characters. Core error
PVAL8-2 Second given name does not contain at least one letter. Core error
Revision (PVAL8)
Year Description
2007 Business rules changed: Acceptable accented characters are specified.

PVAL9

Purpose

This edit validates the third given name.

Referenced fields (PVAL9)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P9 7 Third given name PGNAME_3

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • Third given name can be blank.
  • If Third given name is not blank then
    • It must be exclusively composed of any of the following:
      • Letters: A to Z (upper or lowercase)
      • Accented characters: Â À Ç É Ê Ë È Î Ï Ô Û Ü (upper or lowercase)
      • Special characters: space ( ), period (.), apostrophe ('), hyphen (-)
    • It must contain at least one letter.
Edit logic (PVAL9)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL9-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P9 IS NOT NULL AND NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P9), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') Record rejected
PVAL9-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P9 IS NOT NULL AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P9), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') AND NOT CONTAINS_WORD (UPPER (P9), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ', 1) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL9)
Sub edit Text Type
PVAL9-1 Third given name is not exclusively composed of acceptable letters, accented characters or special characters. Core error
PVAL9-2 Third given name does not contain at least one letter. Core error
Revision (PVAL9)
Year Description
2007 Business rules changed: Acceptable accented characters are specified.

PVAL10

Purpose

This edit validates the sex code.

Referenced fields (PVAL10)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P10 1 Sex PSEX

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • Sex must be one of the Eligible sex codes11.
Edit logic (PVAL10)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL10-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P10 NOT IN [Eligible sex codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL10)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL10-1 Sex code is invalid. Core error
Revision (PVAL10)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

PVAL11

Purpose

This edit validates the date of birth.

Referenced fields (PVAL11)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P11 8 Date of birth PDATBIR
P11.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of P11 (year of date of birth) Not applicable
P11.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of P11 (month of date of birth) Not applicable
P11.DAY 2 7th and 8th digits of P11 (day of date of birth) Not applicable
Other parameters (PVAL11)
Parameters Length Description
CYCLE_YEAR 2 Reference year

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records, Date of birth
  • Must be 8 digits long.
  • Must be between January 1st, 1875 and December 31st of Reference year inclusively.
  • If Year is unknown then Month must be unknown.
  • If Month is unknown then Day must be unknown.
  • If Year, Month and Day are known then it must be a valid calendar date.
  • If Year and Month are known and Day is unknown then month must be a valid month.
Edit logic (PVAL11)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL11-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (LENGTH (P11) <> 8 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (P11, ‘0123456789')) Record rejected
PVAL11-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (P11) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P11, ‘0123456789') AND ((P11.YEAR = ‘9999' AND P11.MONTH <> ‘99') OR (P11.MONTH = ‘99' AND P11.DAY <> ‘99')) Record rejected
PVAL11-3 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (P11) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P11, ‘0123456789') AND P11.YEAR <> ‘9999' AND (P11.YEAR < 1875 OR P11.YEAR > CYCLE_YEAR) Record rejected
PVAL11-4 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (P11) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P11, ‘0123456789') AND P11.YEAR <> ‘9999' AND P11.MONTH <> ‘99' AND P11.DAY <> ‘99' AND IS_VALID_DATE (P11) Record rejected
PVAL11-5 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (P11) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P11, ‘0123456789') AND P11.YEAR <> ‘9999' AND P11.MONTH NOT IN [‘01'-'12', ‘99'] AND P11.DAY = ‘99' Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL11)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL11-1 Date of birth is not 8 digits long. Core error
PVAL11-2 Date of birth: Improper use of the ‘Unknown' code. Core error
PVAL11-3 Date of birth must be between the year 1875 and the current reference year inclusively. Core error
PVAL11-4 Date of birth is not a valid calendar date. Core error
PVAL11-5 Date of birth is not a valid partial date: month is invalid. Core error
Revision (PVAL11)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

PVAL12

Purpose

This edit validates the province/territory or country of birth code.

Referenced fields (PVAL12)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P11.YEAR 4 First 4 characters of P11 (year of date of birth) Not applicable
P12 3 Province/territory or country of birth PPROVBIR

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If Date of birth is before 1996 then Province/territory or country of birth must be one of the Eligible Province/territory and country codes prior to 199612.
  • If Date of birth is on or after 1996 then Province/territory or country of birth must be one of the Eligible Province/territory and country codes in and after 199612
  • If Date of birth is unknown then Province/territory or country of birth must be either one of the Eligible Province/territory and country codes prior to 199612 or Eligible Province/territory and country codes in and after 199612.
Edit logic (PVAL12)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL12-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P11.YEAR <> ‘9999' AND P11.YEAR < 1996 AND P12 NOT IN [Eligible Province/territory and country code prior to 1996] Record rejected
PVAL12-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P11.YEAR <> ‘9999' AND P11.YEAR >= 1996 AND P12 NOT IN [Eligible Province/territory and country code in and after 1996] Record rejected
PVAL12-3 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P11.YEAR = ‘9999' AND P12 NOT IN [Eligible Province/territory and country code prior to 1996] AND P12 NOT IN [Eligible Province/territory and country code in and after 1996] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL12)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL12-1 Province/territory or country of birth code is invalid for Date of birth prior to 1996. Core error
PVAL12-2 Province/territory or country of birth code is invalid for Date of birth in and after 1996. Core error
PVAL12-3 Province/territory or country of birth code is invalid. Core error
Revision PVAL12)
Year Description
2004 Business rules changed: Province/territory or country of birth code is now validated against Province/territory or country codes valid at time of birth.

PVAL13

Purpose

This edit validates birth surname.

Referenced fields (PVAL13)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P13 25 Birth surname PBIRNAM

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • Birth surname can be blank.
  • If Birth surname is not blank then
    • It must be exclusively composed of any of the following:
      • Letters: A to Z (upper or lowercase)
      • Accented characters: Â À Ç É Ê Ë È Î Ï Ô Û Ü (upper or lowercase)
      • Special characters: space ( ), period (.), apostrophe ('), hyphen (-)
    • It must contain at least one letter.
Edit logic (PVAL13)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL13-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P13 IS NOT NULL AND NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P13), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') Record rejected
PVAL13-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P13 IS NOT NULL AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (P13), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-') AND NOT CONTAINS_WORD (UPPER (P13), ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ', 1) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL13)
Sub edit Text Type
PVAL13-1 Birth surname is not exclusively composed of acceptable letters, accented characters or special characters. Core error
PVAL13-2 Birth surname does not contain at least one letter. Core error
Revision Feedback report messages (PVAL13)
Year Description
2007 Business rules changed: Acceptable accented characters are specified.

PVAL14

Purpose

This edit validates date of death.

Referenced fields (PVAL14)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P14 8 Date of death PDATDEA
P14.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of P14 (year of date of death) Not applicable
P14.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of P14 (month of date of death) Not applicable
P14.DAY 2 7th and 8th digits of P14 (day of date of death) Not applicable
P19.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of P19 (year of date of transmission) Not applicable
P19.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of P19 (Month of date of transmission) Not applicable
P19.DAY 2 7th and 8th digits of P19 (Day of date of transmission) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records, Date of death
  • Must be 8 digits long.
  • Can be all zeros (when patient is not known to have died).
  • Must be between January 1st, 1992 and Date of transmission inclusively.
  • If Year is unknown then Month must be unknown.
  • If Month is unknown then Day must be unknown.
  • If Year, Month and Day are known then it must be a valid calendar date.
  • If Year and Month are known and Day is unknown then Month must be a valid month.
Edit logic (PVAL14)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL14-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (LENGTH (P14) <> 8 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (P14, ‘0123456789')) Record rejected
PVAL14-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (P14.YEAR = ‘0000' OR P14.MONTH = ‘00' OR P14.DAY = ‘00') AND NOT (P14.YEAR = ‘0000' AND P14.MONTH = ‘00' AND P14.DAY = ‘00') Record rejected
PVAL14-3 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (P14) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P14, ‘0123456789') AND P14.YEAR NOT IN [‘0000', ‘9999'] AND ((P14.MONTH = ‘99' AND P14.DAY = ‘99' AND (P14.YEAR < 1992 OR P14.YEAR > P19.YEAR)) OR (P14.MONTH IN [‘01'-'12'] AND P14.DAY = ‘99' AND (P14.YEAR < 1992 OR P14.YEAR||P14.MONTH > P19.YEAR||P19.MONTH)) OR (P14.MONTH IN [‘01'-'12'] AND P14.DAY IN [‘01', ‘31'] AND IS_VALID_DATE (P14) AND (P14.YEAR < 1992 OR P14 > P19)) Record rejected
PVAL14-4 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (P14) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P14, ‘0123456789') AND ((P14.YEAR = ‘9999' AND P14.MONTH <> ‘99') or (P14.MONTH = ‘99' AND P14.DAY <> ‘99')) Record rejected
PVAL14-5 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (P14) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P14, ‘0123456789') AND P14.YEAR NOT IN [‘0000', ‘9999'] AND P14.MONTH NOT IN [‘00', ‘99'] AND P14.DAY NOT IN [‘00', ‘99'] AND NOT IS_VALID_DATE (P14) Record rejected
PVAL14-6 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (P14) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P14, ‘0123456789') AND P14.YEAR NOT IN [‘0000', ‘9999'] AND P14.MONTH NOT IN [‘00', ‘01'-'12', ‘99'] AND P14.DAY = ‘99' Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL14)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL14-1 Date of death is not 8 digits long. Core error
PVAL14-2 Date of death: Improper use of ‘Patient is not known to have died' code. Core error
PVAL14-3 Date of death must be between January 1st, 1992 and the Date of Transmission inclusively. Core error
PVAL14-4 Date of death: Improper use of ‘Unknown' code. Core error
PVAL14-5 Date of death is not a valid calendar date. Core error
PVAL14-6 Date of death is not a valid partial date: month is invalid. Core error
Revision (PVAL14)
Year Description
2004 Business rules changed: Date of death cannot be beyond Date of transmission.

PVAL15

Purpose

This edit validates the province/territory or country of death code.

Referenced fields (PVAL15)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P14.YEAR 4 First 4 characters of P14 (year of date of death) Not applicable
P15 3 Province/territory or country of death PPROVDEA

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If Date of death is before 1996 then Province/territory or country of death must be one of the Eligible province/territory and country codes prior to 199612.
  • If Date of death is on or after 1996 then Province/territory or country of death must be one of the Eligible province/territory and country codes in and after 199612.
  • If Date of death is unknown then Province/territory or country of death must be either one of the Eligible province/territory and country codes prior to 199612 or Eligible province/territory and country codes in and after 199612.
Edit Logic (PVAL15)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL15-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P14.YEAR NOT IN [‘0000', ‘9999'] AND P14.YEAR < 1996 AND P15 NOT IN [Eligible province/territory or country codes prior to 1996] Record rejected
PVAL15-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P14.YEAR NOT IN [‘0000', ‘9999'] AND P14.YEAR >= 1996 AND P15 NOT IN [Eligible province/territory or country codes in and after 1996] Record rejected
PVAL15-3 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P14.YEAR = ‘9999' AND P15 NOT IN [Eligible Province/Territory or Country of Death codes in and after 1996] AND P15 NOT IN [Eligible province/territory or country codes prior to 1996] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL15)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL15-1 Province/territory or country of death code is invalid for Date of death prior to 1996. Core error
PVAL15-2 Province/territory or country of death code is invalid for Date of death in and after 1996. Core error
PVAL15-3 Province/territory or country of death code is invalid. Core error
Revision (PVAL15)
Year Description
2004 Business rules changed: Province/territory or country of death code is now validated against Province/territory or country codes valid at time of death.

PVAL16

Purpose

This edit validates the death registration number.

Referenced fields (PVAL16)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P16 6 Death registration number PDEAREG

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records, Death registration number
  • Must be exclusively composed of numbers: 0 to 9
  • Must be 6 digits long
Edit logic (PVAL16)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL16-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (LENGTH (P16) <> 6 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (P16, ‘0123456789')) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL16
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL16-1 Death registration number is not 6 digits long. Core error
Revision (PVAL16)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

PVAL17

Purpose

This edit validates the underlying cause of death code.

Referenced fields (PVAL17)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P14.YEAR 4 First 4 characters of P14 (year of date of death) Not applicable
P17 3 Underlying cause of death PCAUSDEA

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • IF Date of death is unknown then Underlying cause of death must be coded as ‘Unknown/unavailable Underlying cause of death'.
  • IF Date of death is before 2000 then Underlying cause of death must be one of the Eligible ICD-9 underlying cause of death codes12.
  • IF Date of death is between 2000 and 2002 inclusively then Underlying cause of death must be one of the Eligible ICD-10 underlying cause of death codes in 2000-200212
  • IF Date of death is in or after 2003 then Underlying cause of death must be one of the Eligible ICD-10 underlying cause of death codes in 2003 and after13.
Edit logic (PVAL17)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL17-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P14.YEAR = ‘9999' AND P17 <> ‘0009' Record rejected
PVAL17-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P14.YEAR NOT IN [‘0000', ‘9999'] AND P14.YEAR < 2000 AND P17 NOT IN [ICD-9 – Cause of death] Record rejected
PVAL17-3 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P14.YEAR NOT IN [‘0000', ‘9999'] AND P14.YEAR >= 2000 AND P14.YEAR <= 2002 AND P17 NOT IN [ICD-10 – Cause of death in 2000-2002] Record rejected
PVAL17-4 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P14.YEAR NOT IN [‘0000', ‘9999'] AND P14.YEAR >= 2003 AND P17 NOT IN [ICD-10 – Cause of death in 2003 and after] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL17)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL17-1 Underlying cause of death must be set to unknown when the Date of death is unknown. Core error
PVAL17-2 Underlying cause of death code is either invalid or not eligible for Date of death prior to 2000. Core error
PVAL17-3 Underlying cause of death code is either invalid or not eligible for Date of death between 2000 and 2002 inclusively. Core error
PVAL17-4 Underlying cause of death code is either invalid or not eligible for Date of death in or after 2003. Core error
Revision (PVAL17)
Year Description
2004 Business rules added:
If Date of death is unknown then Underlying cause of death must be coded as ‘Unknown/unavailable Underlying cause of death'.
If Date of death is in 2003 or after then Underlying cause of death must be coded using the latest revision of ICD-10 Underlying cause of death (2003 and after).

PVAL18

Purpose

This edit validates autopsy confirming cause of death code.

Referenced fields (PVAL18)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P18 1 Autopsy confirming cause of death PAUTOPSY

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • Autopsy confirming cause of death must be one of the eligible autopsy confirming cause of death codes14.
Edit logic (PVAL18)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL18-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P18 NOT IN [Eligible Autopsy confirming cause of death codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL18)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL18-1 Autopsy confirming cause of death code is invalid. Core error
Revision (PVAL18)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

PVAL19

Purpose

This edit validates the patient record date of transmission.

Referenced fields (PVAL19)
Field Length Description Acronym
P19 8 Patient Date of transmission PDATTRAN
P19.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of P19 (year of date of transmission) Not applicable
P19.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of P19 (month of date of transmission) Not applicable
P19.DAY 2 7th and 8th digits of P19 (day of date of transmission) Not applicable
Other parameters (PVAL19)
Parameters Length Description
LOAD_DATE 8 Statistics Canada loading date: date on the Statistics Canada computer clock when the data are loaded on the CCR database.

Business rules

For Input Patient records, Patient Date of transmission
  • Cannot be blank
  • Must be exclusively composed of numbers: 0 to 9
  • Must be 8 digits long
  • Must be a valid calendar date
  • Must be within the previous 10 months from Statistics Canada loading date
Edit logic (PVAL19)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PVAL19-1 P19 IS NULL Record rejected
PVAL19-2 P19 IS NOT NULL AND (LENGTH (P19) <> 8 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (P19, ‘0123456789')) Record rejected
PVAL19-3 P19 IS NOT NULL AND LENGTH (P19) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P19, ‘0123456789') AND NOT IS_VALID_DATE (P19) Record rejected
PVAL19-4 P19 IS NOT NULL AND LENGTH (P19) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P19, ‘0123456789') AND IS_VALID_DATE (P19) AND P19 > LOAD_DATE () Record rejected
PVAL19-5 P19 IS NOT NULL AND LENGTH (P19) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P19, ‘0123456789') AND IS_VALID_DATE (P19) AND P19 < (LOAD_DATE – 10 months) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PVAL19)
Sub–edit Text Type
PVAL19-1 Patient Date of transmission is missing. Core fatal error
PVAL19-2 Patient Date of transmission is not 8 digits long. Core fatal error
PVAL19-3 Patient Date of transmission is not a valid calendar date. Core fatal error
PVAL19-4 Patient Date of transmission is after Statistics Canada loading date. Core fatal error
PVAL19-5 Patient Date of transmission is more than 10 months before Statistics Canada loading date. Core fatal error
Revision (PVAL19)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

3.4.2 Tumour validation edits

The following table summarizes the purpose of each individual edit of this category.

Table 25 Tumour validation edits summary

Table 25 Tumour validation edits summary
Edit name Purpose
TVAL1 Validates the Tumour reporting province/territory code.
TVAL2 Validates the Tumour patient identification number.
TVAL3 Validates the Tumour reference number.
TVAL4 Validates the CCR identification number.
TVAL5 Validates the Tumour record type code.
TVAL6 Validates the Name of place of residence.
TVAL7 Validates the Postal code.
TVAL8 Validates the Standard geographic code.
TVAL9 Validates the Census tract.
TVAL10 Validates the Health insurance number (HIN).
TVAL11 Validates the Method of diagnosis code.
TVAL12 Validates the Date of diagnosis.
TVAL13 Validates the ICD-9 cancer code.
TVAL14 Validates the Source classification flag.
TVAL15 Validates the ICD-O-2/3 Topography code.
TVAL16 Validates the ICD-O-2 Histology code.
TVAL17 Validates the ICD-O-2 Behaviour code.
TVAL18 Not applicable
TVAL19 Validates the Laterality code.
TVAL20 Not applicable
TVAL21 Validates the ICD-O-3 Histology code.
TVAL22 Validates the ICD-O-3 Behaviour code.
TVAL23 Validates the grade, differentiation or cell indicator code.
TVAL24 Validates the Method used to establish the date of diagnosis code.
TVAL25 Validates the Diagnostic confirmation code.
TVAL26 Validates the Date of transmission.
TVAL27 Validates CS tumour size.
TVAL28 Validates CS extension.
TVAL29 Validates CS tumour size/ext eval.
TVAL30 Validates CS lymph nodes.
TVAL31 Validates CS reg nodes eval.
TVAL32 Validates Regional nodes examined.
TVAL33 Validates Regional nodes positive.
TVAL34 Validates CS mets at dx.
TVAL35 Validates CS mets eval.
TVAL36 Validates CS site-specific factor 1.
TVAL37 Validates CS site-specific factor 2.
TVAL38 Validates CS site-specific factor 3.
TVAL39 Validates CS site-specific factor 4.
TVAL40 Validates CS site-specific factor 5.
TVAL41 Validates CS site-specific factor 6.
TVAL42 Validates AJCC clinical T.
TVAL43 Validates AJCC clinical N.
TVAL44 Validates AJCC clinical M.
TVAL45 Validates AJCC pathologic T.
TVAL46 Validates AJCC pathologic N.
TVAL47 Validates AJCC pathologic M.
TVAL48 Validates AJCC clinical TNM stage group.
TVAL49 Validates AJCC pathologic TNM stage group.
TVAL50 Validates AJCC TNM stage group.
TVAL51 Validates AJCC edition number code.
TVAL52 Validates CS Version 1st.
TVAL53 Validates Ambiguous Terminology Diagnosis.
TVAL54 Validates Date of Conclusive Diagnosis.
TVAL55 Validates Type of Multiple Tumours Reported as One Primary.
TVAL56 Validates Date of Multiple Tumours.
TVAL57 Validates Multiplicity Counter.

TVAL1

Purpose

This edit validates the Tumour reporting province/territory code.

Referenced Fields (TVAL1)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
Other parameters (TVAL1)
Parameters Length Description
PTCR_CODE 2 Province/territory code of the PTCR that is submitting the data.

Business rules

For Input Tumour records
  • Tumour reporting province/territory must be equal to province/territory code of the PTCR that is submitting the data15.
Edit logic (TVAL1)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL1-1 T1 <> PTCR_CODE Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL1)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL1-1 Tumour reporting province/territory code does not match PTCR province/territory code. Core error
Revision (TVAL1)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL2

Purpose

This edit validates the tumour patient identification number.

Referenced fields (TVAL2)
Field Length Description Acronym
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN

Business rules

For Input Tumour records, Patient identification number
  • Must be exclusively composed of any of the following:
    • Uppercase letters: A to Z
    • Numbers: 0 to 9
  • Cannot be exclusively composed of zeros.
Edit logic (TVAL2)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL2-1 IS_COMPOSED_OF (T2, ‘0') Record rejected
TVAL2-2 NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (T2, ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789') Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL2)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL2-1 Patient identification number cannot be exclusively composed of zeros. Core error
TVAL2-2 Patient identification number is not exclusively composed of uppercase letters and/or numbers. Core error
Revision (TVAL2)
Year Description
2004 Business rule changed: Apostrophes, hyphens, periods and inner spaces are not accepted anymore.

TVAL3

Purpose

This edit validates the tumour reference number.

Referenced fields (TVAL3)
Field Length Description Acronym
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN

Business rules

For Input Tumour records, Tumour reference number
  • Must be exclusively composed of any of the following:
    • Numbers: 0 to 9
    • Uppercase letters: A to Z
    • Special characters: space ( ), period (.), apostrophe (‘), hyphens (-)
  • Cannot be exclusively composed of zeros.
Edit logic (TVAL3)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL3-1 IS_COMPOSED_OF (T3, ‘0') Record rejected
TVAL3-2 NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (T3, ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789 -‘.') Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL3)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL3-1 Tumour reference number cannot be exclusively composed of zeros. Core error
TVAL3-2 Tumour reference number is not exclusively composed of acceptable letters, numbers or special characters. Core error
Revision (TVAL3)
Year Description
2004 Business rule added: Tumour reference number cannot be exclusively composed of zeros.

TVAL4

Purpose

This edit validates the CCR identification number.

Referenced fields (TVAL4)
Field Length Description Acronym
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T4.ID 8 First 8 digits of T4 (CCR ID sequence number) Not applicable
T4.CHECK_DIGIT 1 9th digit of T4 (CCR ID check digit) Not applicable

Business rules

For Input Tumour records
  • If CCR identification number is reported then
    • Must be exclusively composed of numbers: 0 to 9
    • Must be 9 digits long;
    • Cannot be all zeros;
    • Must have a valid check digit16.
Edit logic (TVAL4)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL4-1 T4 IS NOT NULL AND (LENGTH (T4) <> 9 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (T4, ‘0123456789')) Record rejected
TVAL4-2 T4 = ‘000000000' Record rejected
TVAL4-3 T4 IS NOT NULL AND T4 <> ‘000000000' AND LENGTH (T4) = 9 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T4, ‘0123456789') AND T4.CHECK_DIGIT <> CALCULATE_CCR_CHECK_DIGIT (T4.ID) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL4)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL4-1 CCR identification number is not 9 digits long. Core error
TVAL4-2 CCR identification number cannot be all zeros. Core error
TVAL4-3 CCR identification number is invalid. Core error
Revision (TVAL4)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL5

Purpose

This edit validates the tumour record type code.

Referenced fields (TVAL5)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE

Business rules

For Input Tumour records, Tumour record type
  • Cannot be blank.
  • Must be one of the Eligible tumour record type codes17 .
Edit logic (TVAL5)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL5-1 T5 IS NULL OR T5 NOT IN [Eligible tumour record type codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL5)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL5-1 Tumour record type code is missing or invalid. Core fatal error
Revision (TVAL5)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL6

Purpose

This edit validates the name of place of residence.

Referenced fileds (TVAL6)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T6 25 Name of place of residence TPLACRES

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Name of place of residence can be blank.
  • If Name of place of residence is not blank then it can be any combination of the following:
    • Letters: A to Z (upper or lowercase)
      • Accented characters: Â À Ç É Ê Ë È Î Ï Ô Û Ü (upper or lowercase)
      • Special characters: space ( ), period (.), apostrophe ('), hyphen (-), exclamation mark (!), ampersand (&), forward slash (/), parenthese ["("and")"], number sign (#), comma (,)
  • It must contain a word of at least 2 letters.
Edit logic TVAL6)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL6-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T6 IS NOT NULL AND IS NOT COMPOSED OF (UPPER (T6), ‘ABCDEFGHILKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ.'-!&/()#,') Record rejected
TVAL6-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T6 IS NOT NULL AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (UPPER (T6), ‘ABCDEFGHILKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ .'-!&/()#,') AND NOT CONTAINS_WORD (UPPER (T6), ‘ABCDEFGHILKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZÂÀÇÉÊËÈÎÏÔÛÜ', 2) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL6)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL6-1 Name of place of residence is not exclusively composed of acceptable letters, accented characters or special characters. Core error
TVAL6-2 Name of place of residence does not contain a word of at least 2 letters. Core error
Revision (TVAL6)
Year Description
2007 Business rules changed: Acceptable accented characters and special characters are specified.
Edit logic: New edit logic added.
Feedback report messages: New message added.

TVAL7

Purpose

This edit validates the postal code.

Referenced fields (TVAL7)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T7 6 Postal code TPOSTCOD
T7.FIRST 1 1st character of T7 Not applicable
T7.SECOND 1 2nd character of T7 Not applicable
T7.THIRD 1 3rd character of T7 Not applicable
T7.FOURTH 1 4th character of T7 Not applicable
T7.FIFTH 1 5th character of T7 Not applicable
T7.SIXTH 1 6th character of T7 Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records, Postal code
  • Must be 6 characters long.
  • Can be unknown.
  • If not unknown then
    • 1st, 3rd and 5th characters must be uppercase letters: A-Z
    • 2nd, 4th and 6th characters must be numbers: 0-9
Edit logic (TVAL7)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL7-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (LENGTH(T7) <> 6 OR (T7 <> ‘999999' AND (T7.FIRST NOT IN [A-Z] OR T7.SECOND NOT IN [0-9] OR T7.THIRD NOT IN [A-Z] OR T7.FOURTH NOT IN [0-9] OR T7.FIFTH NOT IN [A-Z] OR T7.SIXTH NOT IN [0-9]))) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL7)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL7-1 Postal code has an invalid format. Core error
Revision (TVAL7)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL8

Purpose

This edit validates the Standard geographic code.

Referenced fields (TVAL8)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T8 7 Standard geographic code TCODPLAC
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Date of diagnosis is between 1992 and 1995 then Standard geographic code must be one of the Eligible Standard geographic classification codes from 1992 to 199512.
  • If Date of diagnosis is between 1996 and 2000 then Standard geographic code must be one of the Eligible Standard geographic classification codes from 1996 to 200012.
  • If Date of diagnosis is between 2001 and 2005 then Standard geographic code must be one of the Eligible Standard geographic classification codes from 2001 to 200512.
  • If Date of Diagnosis is between 2006 and 2010 then Standard geographic code must be one of the Eligible Standard geographic classification codes from 2006 and 2010.
Edit logic (TVAL8)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL8-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR BETWEEN (‘1992', ‘1995') AND T8 NOT IN [Eligible Standard geographic classification codes from 1992 to 1995] Record rejected
TVAL8-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR BETWEEN (‘1996', ‘2000') AND T8 NOT IN [Eligible Standard geographic classification codes from 1996 to 2000] Record rejected
TVAL8-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR BETWEEN (‘2001', ‘2005') AND T8 NOT IN [Eligible Standard geographic classification codes from 2001 to 2005] Record rejected
TVAL8-4 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR BETWEEN (‘2006', ‘2010') AND T8 NOT IN [Eligible Standard Geographic Classification codes from 2006 to 2010] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL8)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL8-1 Standard geographic code is invalid according to the Standard geographic classification – 1991. Core error
TVAL8-2 Standard geographic code is invalid according to the Standard geographic classification – 1996. Core error
TVAL8-3 Standard geographic code is invalid according to the Standard geographic classification – 2001. Core error
TVAL8-4 Standard geographic code is invalid according to the Standard geographic classification – 2006. Core error
Revision (TVAL8)
Year Description
2006 Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages added: SGC – 2006 added
2001 Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages added: SGC – 2001 added
1996 Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages added: SGC – 1996 added

TVAL9

Purpose

This edit validates the census tract.

Referenced fields (TVAL9)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T9 9 Census tract TCENTRAC
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Date of diagnosis is between 1992 and 1995 then Census tract must be reported and must be one of the Eligible Census tracts from 1992 to 199512.
  • If Date of diagnosis is between 1996 and 2000 then Census tract must be reported and must be one of the Eligible Census tracts from 1996 to 200012.
  • If Date of diagnosis is between 2001 and 2005 then Census tract must be reported and must be one of the Eligible Census tracts from 2001 to 200512
  • If Date of Diagnosis is 2006 and onwards then Census Tract must not be reported (field should be left blank).
Edit logic (TVAL9)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL9-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR BETWEEN (‘1992', ‘1995') AND (T9 IS NULL OR T9 NOT IN [Eligible Census tracts from 1992 to 1995]) Record rejected
TVAL9-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR BETWEEN (‘1996', ‘2000') AND (T9 IS NULL OR T9 NOT IN [Eligible Census tracts from 1996 to 2000]) Record rejected
TVAL9-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR BETWEEN (‘2001', ‘2005') AND (T9 IS NULL OR T9 NOT IN [Eligible Census tracts from 2001 to 2005]) Record rejected
TVAL9-4 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= (‘2006') AND T9 <> NULL Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL9)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL9-1 Census tract is invalid according to the Census tract Data Dictionary – 1991. Core error
TVAL9-2 Census tract is invalid according to the Census tract Data Dictionary – 1996. Core error
TVAL9-3 Census tract is invalid according to the Census tract Data Dictionary – 2001. Core error
TVAL9-4 Census tract must not be reported for cases diagnosed in 2006 and onwards. Core error
Revision (TVAL9)
Year Description
2006 Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages added: Census tract effective date range ended in 2005. For cases diagnosed in 2006 and onwards, T9 (Census Tract) must be reported as blank (null)
2001 Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages added: Eligible Census tracts – 2001 added
1996 Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages added: Eligible Census tracts – 1996 added

TVAL10

Purpose

This edit validates the health insurance number (HIN).

Referenced fields (TVAL10)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T10 15 Health insurance number THIN

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records,
  • If Health insurance number is reported then
  • It must be at least 6 characters long.
  • It must be exclusively composed of any of the following:
    • Uppercase letters: A to Z
    • Numbers: 0 to 9
Edit logic (TVAL10)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL10-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T10 IS NOT NULL AND LENGTH (T10) < 6 Record rejected
TVAL10-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T10 IS NOT NULL AND NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (T10, ‘ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789') Record rejected
Feddback report messages (TVAL10)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL10-1 Health insurance number is less than 6 characters long. Core error
TVAL10-2 Health insurance number is not exclusively composed of uppercase letters and/or numbers. Core error
Revision (TVAL10)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL11

Purpose

This edit validates the method of diagnosis code.

Referenced fields (TVAL11)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T11 1 Method of diagnosis TMETHDIAG

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Method of diagnosis must be one of the Eligible method of diagnosis codes18.
Edit logic (TVAL11)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL11-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T11 NOT IN [Eligible method of diagnosis codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL11)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL11-1 Method of diagnosis code is invalid. Core error
Revision (TVAL11)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL12

Purpose

This edit validates the date of diagnosis.

Referenced fields (TVAL12)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12 8 Date of diagnosis TDATDIAG
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T12.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of T12 (month of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T12.DAY 2 Last 2 digits of T12 (day of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
Other parameters (TVAL12)
Parameters Length Description
CYCLE_YEAR 4 Reference year

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records, Date of Diagnosis
  • Must be exclusively composed of numbers: 0 to 9.
  • Must be 8 digits long.
  • Must be between January 1st, 1992 and December 31st of Reference year inclusively.
  • Year cannot be unknown.
  • If Month is unknown then Day must be unknown.
  • If Year, Month and Day are known then it must be a valid calendar date.
  • If Year and Month are known and Day is unknown then Month must be a valid month.
Edit logic (TVAL12)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL12-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (LENGTH (T12) <> 8 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (T12, ‘0123456789')) Record rejected
TVAL12-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T12) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T12, ‘0123456789') AND T12.MONTH = ‘99' AND T12.DAY <> ‘99' Record rejected
TVAL12-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T12) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T12, ‘0123456789'' AND (T12.YEAR < 1992 OR T12.YEAR > CYCLE_YEAR) Record rejected
TVAL12-4 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T12) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T12, ‘0123456789') AND T12.MONTH <> ‘99' AND T12.DAY <> ‘99' AND NOT IS_VALID_DATE (T12) Record rejected
TVAL12-5 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T12) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T12, ‘0123456789') AND T12.MONTH NOT IN [‘01'-'12', ‘99'] AND T12.DAY = ‘99' Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL12)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL12-1 Date of diagnosis is not composed of 8 numbers. Core error
TVAL12-2 Date of diagnosis: Improper use of ‘Unknown' code. Core error
TVAL12-3 Date of diagnosis must be between January 1st, 1992 and December 31st of Reference year inclusively. Core error
TVAL12-4 Date of diagnosis is not a valid calendar date. Core error
TVAL12-5 Date of diagnosis is not a valid partial date: month is invalid. Core error
Revision (TVAL12)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL13

Purpose

This edit validates the ICD-9 cancer code.

Referenced fields (TVAL13)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T13 4 ICD-9 cancer code TICD_9

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If ICD-9 Cancer code is reported then it must be one of the Eligible ICD-9 Cancer codes19.
Edit logic (TVAL13)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL13-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T13 <> ‘0000' AND T13 NOT IN [Eligible ICD-9 Cancer codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL13)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL13-1 ICD-9 Cancer code is either invalid or not eligible for the CCR system. Core error
Revision (TVAL13)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL14

Purpose

This edit validates the source classification flag.

Referenced fields (TVAL14)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T14 1 Source classification flag TSCF

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Source classification flag must be one of the Eligible source classification flags20.
Edit logic (TVAL14)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL14-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T14 NOT IN [Eligible source classification flags] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL14)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL14-1 Source classification flag is invalid. Core error
Revision (TVAL14)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL15

Purpose

This edit validates the ICD-O-2/3 topography code.

Referenced fields (TVAL15)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • ICD-O-2/3 Topography must be one of the Eligible ICD-O-2/3 Topography codes12.
Edit logic (TVAL15)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL15-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T15 NOT IN [Eligible ICD-O-2/3 Topography codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL15)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL15-1 ICD-O-2/3 Topography code is either invalid or not eligible for the CCR System. Core error
Revision (TVAL15)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL16

Purpose

This edit validates the ICD-O-2 histology code.

Referenced fields (TVAL16)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T16 4 ICD-O-2 Histology TICD_O2H

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If ICD-O-2 Histology is reported then it must be one of the Eligible ICD–O–2 Histology codes12.
Edit logic (TVAL16)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL16-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T15 <> ‘0000' AND T16 NOT IN [Eligible ICD-O-2 Histology codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL16)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL16-1 ICD-O-2 Histology code is either invalid or not eligible for the CCR System. Core error
Revision (TVAL16)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL17

Purpose

This edit validates the ICD-O-2 Behaviour code.

Referenced fields (TVAL17)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T17 1 ICD-O-2 Behaviour TICD_O2B

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If ICD-O-2 Behaviour is reported then it must be one of the Eligible ICD–O–2 Behaviour codes21.
Edit logic (TVAL17)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL17-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T17 NOT IN [Eligible ICD–O–;2 Behaviour codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL17)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL17-1 ICD-O-2 Behaviour code is either invalid or not eligible for the CCR system. Core error
Revision (TVAL17)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL18

Purpose

Not applicable

Referenced fields (TVAL18)
Field Length Description Acronym
T18 4 Filler Not applicable

Business rules

For Input Tumour records
  • Filler can be anything, including blank.
Edit logic (TVAL18)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Feedback report messages (TVAL18)
Sub–edit Text Type
Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Revision (TVAL18)
Year Description
2004 Edit removed: Filler can be anything, including blank.

Note
This empty validation is kept as a placeholder for future requirement implementation.

TVAL19

Purpose

This edit validates the laterality code.

Referenced fields (TVAL19)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T19 1 Laterality TLATERAL

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Laterality must be one of the Eligible laterality codes22.
Edit logic (TVAL19)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL19-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T19 NOT IN [Eligible laterality codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL19)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL19-1 Laterality code is invalid. Core error
Revision (TVAL19)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TVAL20

Purpose

Not applicable

Referenced fields (TVAL20)
Field Length Description Acronym
T20 1 Filler Not applicable

Business rules

For Input Tumour records
  • Filler can be anything, including blank.
Edit logic TVAL20)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Feedback report messages (TVAL20)
Sub–edit Text Type
Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Revision (TVAL20)
Year Description
2004 Edit removed: Filler can be anything, including blank.

Note:
This empty validation is kept as a placeholder for future requirement implementation.

TVAL21

Purpose

This edit validates the ICD-O-3 Histology code.

Referenced fields (TVAL21)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • ICD-O-3 Histology must be one of the Eligible ICD–O–3 Histology codes12,23.
Edit logic (TVAL21)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL21-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T21 NOT IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Histology codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL21)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL21-1 ICD-O-3 Histology code is either invalid or not eligible for the CCR System. Core error
Revision (TVAL21)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Validation edit No.21M.

TVAL22

Purpose

This edit validates the ICD-O-3 Behaviour code.

Referenced fields TVAL22)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • ICD-O-3 Behaviour must be one of the Eligible ICD–O–3 Behaviour codes24.
Edit logic (TVAL22)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL22-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T22 NOT IN [Eligible ICD–O–3 Behaviour codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages TVAL22)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL22-1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour code is either invalid or not eligible for the CCR system. Core error
Revision (TVAL22)
Year Description
2004 Edit reorganized: Edit formerly known as Validation edit No.22 moved to TVAL26.
Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Validation edit No.21B.

TVAL23

Purpose

This edit validates the grade, differentiation or cell indicator code.

Referenced fields (TVAL23)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T23 1 Grade, differentiation or cell indicator TGRADE

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Grade, differentiation or cell indicator must be one of the Eligible grade, differentiation or cell indicator codes25.
Edit logic (TVAL23)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL23-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T23 NOT IN [Eligible grade, differentiation or cell indicator codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL23)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL23-1 Grade, differentiation or cell indicator code is invalid. Core error
Revision (TVAL23)
Year Description
2004 Edit reorganized: Edit formerly known as Validation edit No.23 moved to TVAL24.
Edit added: New edit.

TVAL24

Purpose

This edit validates the method used to establish the date of diagnosis code.

Referenced fields (TVAL24)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T24 1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis TMETHUSED

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Method used to establish the date of diagnosis must be one of the Eligible method used to establish the date of diagnosis codes26.
Edit logic (TVAL24)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL24-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T24 NOT IN [Eligible method used to establish the date of diagnosis codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL24)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL24-1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis code is invalid. Core error
Revision(TVAL24)
Year Description
2004 Edit reorganized: Edit formerly known as Validation edit No.24 moved to TVAL25.
Edit renamed: Current edit formerly known as Validation edit No.23.

TVAL25

Purpose

This edit validates the diagnostic confirmation code.

Referenced fields (TVAL25)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T25 1 Diagnostic Confirmation TMETHCONF

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Diagnostic confirmation must be one of the Eligible diagnostic confirmation codes27.
Edit logic (TVAL25)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL25-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T25 NOT IN [Eligible diagnostic confirmation codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL25)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL25-1 Diagnostic confirmation code is invalid. Core error
Revision (TVAL25)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Current edit formerly known as Validation edit No.24.

TVAL26

Purpose

This edit validates the tumour date of transmission.

Referenced fields (TVAL26)
Field Length Description Acronym
T26 8 Tumour date of transmission TDATTRAN
T26.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T26 (year of date of transmission) Not applicable
T26.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of T26 (month of date of transmission) Not applicable
T26.DAY 2 7th and 8th digits of T26 (day of date of transmission) Not applicable
Other parameters (TVAL26)
Parameters Length Description
LOAD_DATE 8 Statistics Canada loading date: Date on the Statistics Canada computer clock when the data are loaded on the CCR database.

Business rules

For Input Tumour records, Tumour date of transmission
  • Cannot be blank.
  • Must be exclusively composed of numbers: 0 to 9.
  • Must be 8 digits long.
  • Must be a valid calendar date.
  • Must be within the previous 10 months from Statistics Canada loading date.
Edit logic (TVAL26)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL26-1 T26 IS NULL Record rejected
TVAL26-2 T26 IS NOT NULL AND (LENGTH (T26) <> 8 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (T26, ‘0123456789')) Record rejected
TVAL26-3 T26 IS NOT NULL AND LENGTH (T26) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T26, ‘0123456789') AND NOT IS_VALID_DATE (T26) Record rejected
TVAL26-4 T26 IS NOT NULL AND LENGTH (T26) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (P26, ‘0123456789') AND IS_VALID_DATE (T26) AND T26 > LOAD_DATE Record rejected
TVAL26-5 T26 IS NOT NULL AND LENGTH (T26) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T26, ‘0123456789') AND IS_VALID_DATE (T26) AND T26 < (LOAD_DATE – 10 months) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL26)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL26-1 Tumour date of transmission is missing. Core fatal error
TVAL26-2 Tumour date of transmission is not 8 digits long. Core fatal error
TVAL26-3 Tumour date of transmission is not a valid calendar date. Core fatal error
TVAL26-4 Tumour date of transmission is after Statistics Canada loading date. Core fatal error
TVAL26-5 Tumour date of transmission is more than 10 months before Statistics Canada loading date. Core fatal error
Revision (TVAL26)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Current edit formerly known as Validation edit No.22.

TVAL27

Purpose

This edit validates CS tumour size.

Referenced fields (TVAL27)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS tumour size must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL27)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL27-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <>'999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_TUMOUR_SIZE(T15, T21, T27) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL27)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL27-1 CS tumour size is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL27)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL28

Purpose

This edit validates CS extension.

Referenced fields (TVAL28)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD—O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR Collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable,
  • CS extension must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL28)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL28-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_EXTENSION(T15, T21, T28) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL28)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL28-1 CS extension is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL28)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL29

Purpose

This edit validates CS tumour size/ext eval.

Referenced fields (TVAL29)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS tumour size/ext eval must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL29)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL29-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID _CS_TUMOUR_SIZE/EXT_EVAL(T15, T21, T29) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL29)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL29-1 CS tumour size/ext eval is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL29)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL30

Purpose

This edit validates CS lymph nodes.

Referenced fields (TVAL30)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS lymph nodes must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL30)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL30-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID CS_LYMPH_NODES(T15, T21, T30) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL30)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL30-1 CS lymph nodes is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL30)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL31

Purpose

This edit validates CS reg nodes eval.

Referenced fields (TVAL31)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS reg nodes eval must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL31)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL31-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_REG_NODES_EVAL(T15, T21, T31) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL31)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL31-1 CS reg nodes eval is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL31)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL32

Purpose

This edit validates regional nodes examined.

Referenced fields (TVAL32)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • Regional nodes examined must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL32)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL32-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_REGIONAL_NODES_EXAMINED(T15, T21, T32) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL32)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL32-1 Regional nodes examined is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL32)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL33

Purpose

This edit validates regional nodes positive.

Referenced fields (TVAL33)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • Regional nodes positive must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL33)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL33-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_REGIONAL_NODES_POSITIVE(T15, T21, T33) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages TVAL33)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL33-1 Regional nodes positive is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL33)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL34

Purpose

This edit validates CS mets at dx.

Referenced fields (TVAL34)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS mets at dx must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL34)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL34-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38 <>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_METS_AT_DX(T15, T21, T34) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL34)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL34-1 CS mets at dx is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL34)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL35

Purpose

This edit validates CS mets eval.

Referenced fields (TVAL35)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS mets eval must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL35)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL35-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2']AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_METS_EVAL(T15, T21, T35) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL35)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL35-1 CS mets eval is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL35)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL36

Purpose

This edit validates CS site-specific factor 1.

Referenced fields (TVAL36)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS site-specific factor 1 must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL36)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL36-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_SITE-SPECIFIC_FACTOR_1(T15, T21, T36) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL36)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL36-1 CS site-specific factor 1 is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL36)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm.
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL37

Purpose

This edit validates CS site-specific factor 2.

Referenced fields (TVAL37)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS site-specific factor 2 must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL37)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL37-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_SITE-SPECIFIC_FACTOR_2(T15, T21, T37) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL37)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL37-1 CS site-specific factor 2 is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL37)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm.
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL38

Purpose

This edit validates CS site-specific factor 3.

Referenced fields (TVAL38)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS site-specific factor 3 must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL38)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL38-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_SITE-SPECIFIC_FACTOR_3(T15, T21, T38) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL38)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL38-1 CS site-specific factor 3 is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL38)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm.
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL39

Purpose

This edit validates CS site-specific factor 4.

Referenced fields (TVAL39)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS site-specific factor 4 must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL39)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL39-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_SITE-SPECIFIC_FACTOR_4(T15, T21, T39) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL39)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL39-1 CS site-specific factor 4 is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL39)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm.
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL40

Purpose

This edit validates CS site-specific factor 5.

Referenced fields (TVAL40)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS site-specific factor 5 must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL40)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL40-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_SITE-SPECIFIC_FACTOR_5(T15, T21, T40) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL40)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL40-1 CS site-specific factor 5 is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL40)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL41

Purpose

This edit validates CS site-specific factor 6.

Referenced fields (TVAL41)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD–O–2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope28 and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS site-specific factor 6 must be valid according to the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm with respect to the CS schema (derived from ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology).
Edit logic (TVAL41)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL41-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2004' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' OR T52 <> ‘999999') AND NOT VALID_CS_SITE-SPECIFIC_FACTOR_6(T15, T21, T41) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL41)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL41-1 CS site-specific factor 6 is invalid for the corresponding CS Schema, based on the recommended version of the AJCC CS Algorithm. CS error
Revision (TVAL41)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business Rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages updated: Validation is now done using the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL42

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC clinical T

Referenced fields (TVAL42)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T42 9 AJCC clinical T TAJCCCLINT

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC clinical T must be one of the Eligible AJCC clinical T values for the corresponding site30.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TVAL42)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL42-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T42 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC clinical T for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL42)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL42-1 AJCC clinical T is invalid for reported site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL42)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL43

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC clinical N.

Referenced fields (TVAL43)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T43 3 AJCC clinical N TAJCCCLINN

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC clinical N must be one of the Eligible AJCC clinical N values for the corresponding site31.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example : Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TVAL43)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL43-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T43 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC clinical N for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL43)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL43-1 AJCC clinical N is invalid for reported site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL43)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL44

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC clinical M.

Referenced fields (TVAL44)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T44 3 AJCC clinical M TAJCCCLINM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC clinical M must be one of the Eligible AJCC clinical M values for the corresponding site32.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Ex: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TVAL44)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL44-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T44 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC clinical M for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL44)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL44-1 AJCC clinical M is invalid for reported site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL44)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL45

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC pathologic T.

Referenced fields (TVAL45)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T45 9 AJCC pathologic T TAJCCPATHT

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC pathologic T must be one of the Eligible AJCC pathologic T values for the corresponding site33.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TVAL45)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL45-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T45 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC pathologic T for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL45)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL45-1 AJCC pathologic T is invalid for reported site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL45)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL46

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC pathologic N.

Referenced fields (TVAL46)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T46 3 AJCC pathologic N TAJCCPATHN

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC pathologic N must be one of the Eligible AJCC pathologic N values for the corresponding site34.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TVAL46)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL46-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T46 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC pathologic N for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL46)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL46-1 AJCC pathologic N is invalid for reported site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL46)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL47

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC pathologic M.

Referenced fields (TVAL47)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T47 3 AJCC pathologic M TAJCCPATHM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC pathologic M must be one of the Eligible pathologic M values for the corresponding site35.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TVAL47)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL47-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T47 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC pathologic M for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL47)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL47-1 AJCC pathologic M is invalid for reported site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL47)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL48

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC clinical TNM stage group.

Referenced fields (TVAL48)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T48 4 AJCC clinical TNM stage group TAJCCCLINSG

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC clinical TNM stage group must be one of the Eligible AJCC clinical TNM stage group values for the corresponding site38.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TVAL48)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL48-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T48 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC clinical TNM stage group for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL48)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL48-1 AJCC clinical TNM stage group is invalid for reported site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL48)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL49

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC pathologic TNM stage group.

Referenced fields (TVAL49)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T49 4 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group TAJCCPATHSG

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC pathologic TNM stage group must be one of the Eligible AJCC pathologic TNM stage group values for the corresponding site37.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast orprostate.

Edit logic (TVAL49)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL49-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T49 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC pathologic TNM stage group for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL49)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL49-1 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group is invalid for reported site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL49)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL50

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC TNM stage group.

Referenced fields (TVAL50)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T50 4 AJCC TNM stage group TAJCCSG

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC TNM stage group must be one of the Eligible AJCC TNM stage group values for the corresponding site37.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TVAL50)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL50-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T50 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC TNM stage group for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL50)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL50-1 AJCC TNM stage group is invalid for reported site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL50)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL51

Purpose

This edit validates AJCC edition number code.

Referenced fields (TVAL51)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T51 2 AJCC edition number TAJCCEDNUM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC edition number must be one of the Eligible AJCC edition number codes38.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TVAL51)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL51-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T51 NOT IN [Eligible AJCC edition number codes] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL51)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL51-1 AJCC edition number code is either invalid or not eligible for the CCR system. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TVAL51)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL52

Purpose

This edit validates CS Version 1st.

Referenced fields (TVAL52)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope and with at least one known CS variable
  • CS version 1st must be one of the Eligible CS Version 1st codes.
Edit logic (TVAL52)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL52-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= ‘2006' AND (T27<>'999' OR T28<>'99' OR T29<>'9' OR T30<>'99' OR T31<>'9' OR T32<>'99' OR T33<>'99' OR T34<>'99' OR T35<>'9' OR T36<>'999' OR T37<>'999' OR T38<>'999' OR T39<>'999' OR T40<>'999' OR T41<>'999' or T52 <> ‘999999') AND T52 NOT IN [Eligible CS Version 1st codes] CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TVAL52)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL52-1 CS Version 1st is not a valid version number CS error
Revision (TVAL52)
Year Description
2007 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL53

Purpose

This edit validates the Ambiguous terminology diagnosis code.

Referenced fields (TVAL53)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T53 1 Ambiguous Terminology Diagnosis TAMBIGTERM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Ambiguous terminology diagnosis must be one of the Eligible Ambiguous terminology diagnosis codes.
Edit logic (TVAL53)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL53-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T53 IS NOT NULL AND NOT IN [Eligible Ambiguous terminology diagnosis codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL53)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL53-1 Ambiguous terminology diagnosis code is invalid. Core error
Revision (TVAL53)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL54

Purpose

This edit validates the Date of conclusive diagnosis.

Referenced fields (TVAL54)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T54 8 Date of conclusive diagnosis TDATCONCLUSDIAG
T54.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T54 (year of date of conclusive diagnosis) Not applicable
T54.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of T54 (month of date of conclusive diagnosis) Not applicable
T54.DAY 2 Last 2 digits of T56 (day of date of conclusive diagnosis) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records, Date of conclusive diagnosis
  • Must be exclusively composed of numbers: 0 to 9.
  • Must be 8 digits long.
  • If Year or Month or Day is accessioned then the Date of conclusive diagnosis must be accessioned.
  • If Year or Month or Day is not applicable then the Date of conclusive diagnosis must be not applicable.
  • If Year is unknown then Month and Day must be unknown.
  • If Month is unknown then Day must be unknown.
  • If Year and Month are known and Day is unknown then Month must be a valid month.
  • If Year, Month and Day are known then it must be a valid calendar date.
  • Must be between January 1st, 2008 and December 31st of Reference year inclusively.
Edit logic (TVAL54)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL54-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T54) <> 8 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (T54, ‘0123456789') Record Rejected
TVAL54-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T54) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T54, ‘0123456789') AND (T54.YEAR = ‘0000' OR T54.MONTH='00' OR T54.DAY='00') AND (T54.YEAR <> ‘0000' OR T54.MONTH <> ‘00' OR T54.DAY <> ‘00') Record Rejected
TVAL54-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T54) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T54, ‘0123456789') AND (T54.YEAR = ‘8888' OR T54.MONTH='88' OR T54.DAY='88') AND (T54.YEAR <> ‘8888' OR T54.MONTH <> ‘88' OR T54.DAY <> ‘88') Record Rejected
TVAL54-4 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T54) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T54, ‘0123456789') AND T54.YEAR = ‘9999' AND (T54.MONTH <> ‘99' OR T54.DAY <> ‘99') Record Rejected
TVAL54-5 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T54) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T54, ‘0123456789') AND T54.MONTH = ‘99' AND T54.DAY <> ‘99' Record Rejected
TVAL54-6 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T54) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T54, ‘0123456789') AND T54.MONTH NOT IN [‘01'-'12', ‘99'] AND T54.DAY = ‘99' Record Rejected
TVAL54-7 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T54) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T54, ‘0123456789') AND T54 NOT IN [‘00000000', ‘88888888', ‘99999999'] AND T54.MONTH <> ‘99' AND T54.DAY <> ‘99' AND NOT IS_VALID_DATE Record Rejected
TVAL54-8 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T54 NOT IN [‘00000000', ‘88888888', ‘99999999'] AND (T54.YEAR < 2008 OR T54.YEAR > CYCLE_YEAR) Record Rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL54)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL54-1 Date of conclusive diagnosis is not composed of 8 numbers. Core Error
TVAL54-2 Year, month and day must be ‘accessioned'. Core Error
TVAL54-3 Year, month and day must be ‘not applicable'. Core Error
TVAL54-4 Year, month and day must be ‘unknown'. Core Error
TVAL54-5 Date of conclusive diagnosis: month and day must be ‘unknown'. Core Error
TVAL54-6 Date of conclusive diagnosis is not a valid partial date: month is invalid. Core Error
TVAL54-7 Date of conclusive diagnosis is not a valid calendar date. Core Error
TVAL54-8 Date of conclusive diagnosis is out of scope. Core Error
Revision (TVAL54)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL55

Purpose

This edit validates the Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary code.

Referenced fields (TVAL55)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T55 2 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary TMULTTUMONEPRIM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records, Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary code
  • Must contain a valid code.
Edit logic (TVAL55)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL55-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T55 IS NOT NULL AND T55 NOT IN [Eligible Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary codes] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL55)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL55-1 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary code is invalid. Core error
Revision (TVAL55)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL56

Purpose

This edit validates the Date of multiple tumours.

Referenced fields (TVAL56)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T56 8 Date of multiple tumours TDATMULT
T56.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T56 (year of date of multiple tumours) Not applicable
T56.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of T56 (month of date of multiple tumours) Not applicable
T56.DAY 2 Last 2 digits of T56 (day of date of multiple tumours) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records, Date of multiple tumours
  • Must be exclusively composed of numbers: 0 to 9.
  • Must be 8 digits long.
  • If Year or Month or Day relates to a single tumour then the Date of multiple tumours must contain all zeros.
  • If Year or Month or Day is not applicable then the Date of multiple tumours must be not applicable.
  • If Year is unknown then Month and Day must be unknown.
  • If Month is unknown then Day must be unknown.
  • If Year and Month are known and Day is unknown then Month must be a valid month.
  • If Year, Month and Day are known then it must be a valid calendar date.
  • Must be between January 1st, 2008 and December 31st of Reference year inclusively.
Edit logic (TVAL56)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL56-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T56) <> 8 OR NOT IS_COMPOSED_OF (T56, ‘0123456789') Record Rejected
TVAL56-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T56) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T56, ‘0123456789') AND (T56.YEAR = ‘0000' OR T56.MONTH = ‘00' OR T56.DAY = ‘00') AND (T56.YEAR <> ‘0000' OR T56.MONTH <> ‘00' OR T56.DAY <> ‘00') Record Rejected
TVAL56-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T56) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T56, ‘0123456789') AND (T56.YEAR = ‘8888' OR T56.MONTH = ‘88' OR T56.DAY = ‘88') AND (T56.YEAR <> ‘8888' OR T56.MONTH <> ‘88' OR T56.DAY <> ‘88') Record Rejected
TVAL56-4 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T56) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T56, ‘0123456789') AND T56.YEAR = ‘9999' AND (T56.MONTH <> ‘99' OR T56.DAY <> ‘99') Record Rejected
TVAL56-5 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T56) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T56, ‘0123456789') AND T56.MONTH = ‘99' AND T56.DAY <> ‘99' Record Rejected
TVAL56-6 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T56) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T56, ‘0123456789') AND T56.MONTH NOT IN [‘01'-'12', ‘99'] AND T56.DAY = ‘99' Record Rejected
TVAL56-7 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND LENGTH (T56) = 8 AND IS_COMPOSED_OF (T56, ‘0123456789') AND T56 NOT IN [‘00000000', ‘88888888', ‘99999999'] AND T56.MONTH <> ‘99' AND T56.DAY <> ‘99' AND NOT IS_VALID_DATE Record Rejected
TVAL56-8 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T56 NOT IN [‘00000000', ‘88888888', ‘99999999'] AND (T56.YEAR < 2008 OR T56.YEAR > CYCLE_YEAR) Record Rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL56)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL56-1 Date of multiple tumours is not composed of 8 numbers. Core Error
TVAL56-2 Year, month and day must relate to a single tumour (all zeros). Core Error
TVAL56-3 Year, month and day must be ‘not applicable'. Core Error
TVAL56-4 Year, month and day must be ‘unknown'. Core Error
TVAL56-5 Date of multiple tumours: month and day must be ‘unknown'. Core Error
TVAL56-6 Date of multiple tumours is not a valid partial date: month is invalid. Core Error
TVAL56-7 Date of multiple tumours is not a valid calendar date. Core Error
TVAL56-8 Date of multiple tumours is out of scope. Core Error
Revision (TVAL56)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TVAL57

Purpose

This edit validates the Multiplicity counter.

Referenced fields (TVAL57)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T57 2 Multiplicity counter TMULTCOUNT

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records, Multiplicity counter
  • Must be a numeric value between ‘01' and ‘87', or ‘88' or ‘99'
Edit logic (TVAL57)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TVAL57-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T57 IS NOT NULL AND T57 NOT IN [Eligible Multiplicity counter codes] Record Rejected
Feedback report messages (TVAL57)
Sub–edit Text Type
TVAL57-1 Multiplicity counter is invalid Core error
Revision (TVAL57)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

3.5 Correlation edits

The purpose of the correlation edits is to enforce the business rules between fields on the same Input record. For ease of use, correlation edits have been divided into two groups:

  • Patient correlation edits: enforce business rules between valid patient fields;
  • Tumour correlation edits: enforce business rules between valid tumour fields.

Correlation edits are only performed on Input records where all referenced fields are valid.

3.5.1 Patient correlation edits

The following table summarizes the purpose of each individual edit of this category.

Table 26 Patient correlation edits summary
Edit name Purpose
PCOR1 Ensures that the content of the patient record is consistent with the action described in the Patient record type.
PCOR2 Verifies the likelihood of given names and gender.
PCOR3 Ensures that first given name, second given name and third given name are used coherently.
PCOR4 Ensures that type of current surname code accurately reflects the content of the current surname field.
PCOR5 Ensures that birth surname and current surname are consistent with type of current surname.
PCOR6 Ensures that at least one surname is reported, either the current surname or the birth surname.
PCOR7 Ensures that date of birth and date of death respect a chronological sequence and time frame.
PCOR8 Ensures that death-related variables present a consistent reporting of the patient's vital status.
PCOR9 Ensures that Death registration number and province/territory or country of death are consistent.
PCOR10 Ensures Death registration number and date of death are consistent.
PCOR11 Ensures Death registration number and Underlying cause of death are consistent.

PCOR1

Purpose

This edit ensures that the content of the patient record is consistent with the action described in the patient record type.

Referenced fields (PCOR1)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P5 1 Type of current surname PTYP_CUR
P6 25 Current surname PCURSNAM
P7 15 First given name PGNAME_1
P8 15 Second given name PGNAME_2
P9 7 Third given name PGNAME_3
P10 1 Sex PSEX
P11 8 Date of birth PDATBIR
P12 3 Province/territory or country of birth PPROVBIR
P13 25 Birth surname PBIRNAM
P14 8 Date of death PDATDEA
P15 3 Province/territory or country of death PPROVDEA
P16 6 Death registration number PDEAREG
P17 4 Underlying cause of death PCAUSDEA
P18 1 Autopsy confirming cause of death PAUTOPSY

Business rules

For Add Patient records
  • Patient reporting province/territory, Patient identification number, Type of Current surname, Sex, Date of birth,Province/territory or country of birth, Date of death, Province/territory or country of death, Death registration number, Underlying cause of death and Autopsy confirming cause of death must be provided.
  • CCR identification number must be blank.

For Update Patient records
  • Patient reporting province/territory, Patient identification number, CCR identification number, Type of Current surname, Sex, Date of birth, Province/territory or country of birth, Date of death, Province/territory or country of death, Death registration number, Underlying cause of death and Autopsy confirming cause of death must be provided.

For Delete Patient records

  • Patient reporting Province/territory, Patient identification number, CCR identification number must be provided.
  • Type of Current surname, Current surname, First given name, Second given name, Third given name, Sex, Date of birth, Province/territory or country of birth, Birth surname, Date of death, Province/territory or country of death, Death registration number, Underlying cause of death and Autopsy confirming cause of death must be blank.
Edit logic (PCOR1)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR1-1 P4 = ‘1' AND (P1 IS NULL OR P2 IS NULL OR P3 IS NOT NULL OR P5 IS NULL OR P10 IS NULL OR P11 IS NULL OR P12 IS NULL OR P14 IS NULL OR P15 IS NULL OR P16 IS NULL OR P17 IS NULL OR P18 IS NULL) Record rejected
PCOR1-2 P4 = ‘2' AND (P1 IS NULL OR P2 IS NULL OR P3 IS NULL OR P5 IS NULL OR P10 IS NULL OR P11 IS NULL OR P12 IS NULL OR P14 IS NULL OR P15 IS NULL OR P16 IS NULL OR P17 IS NULL OR P18 IS NULL) Record rejected
PCOR1-3 P4 = ‘3' AND (P1 IS NULL OR P2 IS NULL OR P3 IS NULL OR P5 IS NOT NULL OR P6 IS NOT NULL OR P7 IS NOT NULL OR P8 IS NOT NULL OR P9 IS NOT NULL OR P10 IS NOT NULL OR P11 IS NOT NULL OR P12 IS NOT NULL OR P13 IS NOT NULL OR P14 IS NOT NULL OR P15 IS NOT NULL OR P16 IS NOT NULL OR P17 IS NOT NULL OR P18 IS NOT NULL) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PCOR1)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR1-1 Input record does not respect the Add Patient record format. There are missing or extra values. Core fatal error
PCOR1-2 Input record does not respect the Update Patient record format. There are missing values. Core fatal error
PCOR1-3 Input record does not respect the Delete Patient record format. There are missing or extra values. Core fatal error
Revision (PCOR1)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Correlation Edit No.1.

PCOR2

Purpose

This edit verifies the likelihood of given names and sex.

Referenced fields (PCOR2)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P7 15 First given name PGNAME_1
P8 15 Second given name PGNAME_2
P9 7 Third given name PGNAME_3
P10 1 Sex PSEX
Other parameters (PCOR2)
Parameters Length Description
NAME_SEX_THRESHOLD 3 Tolerated average likelihood of First given name, Second given name and Third given name to be associated to the opposite gender according to given name and Sex registry2. Value must be between 0 and 100. Default value is 95.

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If the average likelihood of First given name, Second given name and Third given name to be associated to the opposite gender according to given name and Sex registry is greater than NAME_SEX_THRESHOLD, then a warning must be sent.
Edit logic (PCOR2)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR2-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P10 IN ['1', '2'] AND AVERAGE ([Probability of P7 to be associated to opposite gender], [Probability of P8 to be associated to opposite gender], [Probability of P9 to be associated to opposite gender]) > NAME_SEX_THRESHOLD Warning
Feedback report messages (PCOR2)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR2-1 Reported given names are not likely for reported Sex. Warning
Revision (PCOR2)
Year Description
2004 Edit removed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.2 has been removed.
Edit added: Current edit was not documented before.

PCOR3

Purpose

This edit ensures that first given name, second given name and third given name are used coherently.

Referenced fields (PCOR3)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P7 15 First given name PGNAME_1
P8 15 Second given name PGNAME_2
P9 7 Third given name PGNAME_3

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If First given name is blank then Second given name and Third given name must be blank.
  • If Second given name is blank then Third given name must be blank.
Edit logic (PCOR3)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR3-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P7 IS NULL AND (P8 IS NOT NULL OR P9 IS NOT NULL) Record rejected
PCOR3-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P8 IS NULL AND P9 IS NOT NULL Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PCOR3)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR3-1 First given name is missing. Core error
PCOR3-2 Second given name is missing. Core error
Revision (PCOR3)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Correlation Edit No.3.

PCOR4

Purpose

This edit ensures that type of current surname code accurately reflects the content of the current surname field.

Referenced fields (PCOR4)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P5 1 Type of current surname PTYP_CUR
P6 25 Current surname PCURSNAM

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If Type of Current surname is ‘Current Surname unknown' (0) then Current surname must be blank.
  • If Current surname is blank then Type of Current surname must be ‘Current surname unknown' (0).
Edit logic (PCOR4)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR4-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND ((P5 = ‘0' AND P6 IS NOT NULL) OR (P6 IS NULL AND P5 <> ‘0')) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PCOR4)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR4-1 Type of current surname and Current surname do not agree. Core error
Revision (PCOR4)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Correlation Edit No.4.

PCOR5

Purpose

This edit ensures that birth surname and current surname are consistent with type of current surname.

Referenced fields (PCOR5)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P5 1 Type of Current surname PTYP_CUR
P6 25 Current surname PCURSNAM
P13 25 Birth surname PBIRNAM

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If Type of Current surname is ‘Birth surname' then Current surname and Birth surname must be the same.
Edit logic (PCOR5)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR5-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P5 = ‘1' AND P6 <> P13 Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PCOR5)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR5-1 Current surname and Birth surname are different while Type of current surname indicates that they should be the same. Core error
Revision (PCOR5)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Correlation Edit No.5.

PCOR6

Purpose

This edit ensures that at least one surname is reported, either the current surname or the birth surname.

Referenced fields (PCOR6)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P6 25 Current surname PCURSNAM
P13 25 Birth surname PBIRNAM

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • Current surname and Birth surname cannot both be blank.
Edit logic (PCOR6)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR6-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P6 IS NULL AND P13 IS NULL Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PCOR6)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR6-1 Current surname and Birth surname cannot both be blank. Core error
Revision (PCOR6)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Correlation Edit No.6.

PCOR7

Purpose

This edit ensures that date of birth and date of death respect a chronological sequence and time frame.

Referenced fields (PCOR7)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P11 8 Date of birth PDATBIR
P11.YEAR 4 First 4 characters of P11 (year of date of birth) Not applicable
P11.MONTH 2 5th and 6th characters of P11 (month of date of birth) Not applicable
P11.DAY 2 7th and 8th characters of P11 (day of date of birth) Not applicable
P14 8 Date of death PDATDEA
P14.YEAR 4 First 4 characters of P14 (year of date of death) Not applicable
P14.MONTH 2 5th and 6th characters of P14 (month of date of death) Not applicable
P14.DAY 2 7th and 8th characters of P14 (day of date of death) Not applicable
P19 8 Date of transmission PDATTRAN

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If Date of birth and Date of death are at least partially known then
    • Date of death must be on or after Date of birth;
    • Year of Date of death and year of Date of birth should not be more than 110 years apart.
  • If Date of birth is at least partially known and the patient is not known to have died then
    • Year of Date of birth and year of Date of transmission should not be more than 110 years apart.
Edit logic (PCOR7)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR7-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P11 <> ‘99999999' AND P14 NOT IN [‘00000000', ‘99999999'] AND ((P11.DAY <> ‘99' AND P14.DAY <> ‘99' AND P14 < P11) OR (P11.MONTH <> ‘99' AND P14.MONTH <> ‘99' AND P14.YEAR || P14.MONTH < P11.YEAR || P11.MONTH) OR (P14.YEAR < P11.YEAR)) Record rejected
PCOR7-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P11 <> ‘99999999' AND ((P14 NOT IN [‘00000000', ‘99999999'] AND P14.YEAR – P11.YEAR > 110) OR (P14 = ‘00000000' AND P19.YEAR – P11.YEAR > 110)) Warning
Feedback report messages (PCOR7)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR7-1 Date of death is before Date of birth. Core error
PCOR7-2 The patient is more than 110 years old. Warning
Revision (PCOR7)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Correlation Edit No.7.
Business rules added: Special handling for patients over 110 years old.

PCOR8

Purpose

This edit ensures that death-related variables present a consistent reporting of the patient's vital status.

Referenced fields (PCOR8)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P14 8 Date of death PDATDEA
P15 3 Province/territory or country of death PPROVDEA
P16 6 Death registration number PDEAREG
P17 4 Underlying cause of death PCAUSDEA
P18 1 Autopsy confirming cause of death PAUTOPSY

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If any of the death-related variables (Date of death, Province/territory or country of death, Death registration number, Underlying cause of death and Autopsy confirming cause of death) indicate that the patient is deceased then no variables should indicate that the patient is not known to have died.
Edit logic (PCOR8)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR8-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (P14 <> ‘00000000' OR P15 <> ‘000' OR P16 <> ‘000000' OR P17 <> ‘0000' OR P18 <> ‘0') AND (P14 = ‘00000000' OR P15 = ‘000' OR P16 = ‘000000' OR P17 = ‘0000' OR P18 = ‘0') Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PCOR8)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR8-1 Some death-related variables indicate that the patient is deceased whereas at least another indicates that the patient is not known to have died. Core error
Revision (PCOR8)
Year Description
2004 Edit removed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.8 was redundant with PVAL11.
Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Correlation Edit No.10.

PCOR9

Purpose

This edit ensures that death registration number and province/territory or country of death are consistent.

Referenced fields (PCOR9)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P15 3 Province/territory or country of death PPROVDEA
P16 6 Death registration number PDEAREG

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If Death registration number is known then Province/territory or country of death must indicate a specific location in Canada or United States of America.
  • If Death registration number indicated that the Patient died outside Canada then Province/territory or country of death must indicate a foreign country or unknown place.
  • If Death registration number is unknown then Province/territory or country of death must be either a location in Canada or an unknown place.
Edit logic (PCOR9)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR9-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P16 IN [000001-999997] AND P15 NOT IN [840, 910, 911, 912, 913, 924, 935, 946, 947, 948, 959, 960, 961, 962] Record rejected
PCOR9-2 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P16 = ‘999998' AND P15 IN [909, 910, 911, 912, 913, 924, 935, 946, 947, 948, 959, 960, 961, 962] Record rejected
PCOR9-3 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P16 = ‘999999' AND P15 NOT IN [909, 910, 911, 912, 913, 924, 935, 946, 947, 948, 959, 960, 961, 962, 999] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PCOR9)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR9-1 If Death registration number is known then province/territory or country of death must indicate a specific location in Canada or United States of America. Core error
PCOR9-2 If Death registration number indicated that the patient died outside Canada then province/territory or country of death must indicate a foreign country or unknown place. Core error
PCOR9-3 If Death registration number is unknown then province/territory or country of death must be either a location in Canada or an unknown place. Core error
Revision (PCOR9)
Year Description
2004 Edit reorganized: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.9 merged with PVAL14.
Edit renamed: Current edit was formerly known as Correlation Edit No.11.
Business rules changed: If Death registration number is known then province/territory or country of death must indicate a specific location in Canada or United States of America; If Death registration number is unknown then province/territory or country of death must be either a location in Canada or an unknown place.
Business rules added: If Death registration number indicated that the patient died outside Canada then province/territory or country of death must indicate a foreign country or unknown place.

PCOR10

Purpose

This edit ensures death registration number and date of death are consistent.

Referenced fields (PCOR10)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P14 8 Date of death PDATDEA
P16 6 Death registration number PDEAREG

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If Death registration number is known then Date of death must be at least partially known.
Edit logic (PCOR10)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR10-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P16 IN [000001-999997] AND P14.YEAR = ‘9999' Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PCOR10)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR10-1 Date of death cannot be unknown if Death registration number is known. Core error
Revision (PCOR10)
Year Description
2004 Edit reorganized: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.10 moved to PCOR8.
Edit added: New edit.

PCOR11

Purpose

This edit ensures death registration number and underlying cause of death are consistent.

Referenced fields (PCOR11)
Field Length Description Acronym
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P16 6 Death registration number PDEAREG
P17 3 Underlying cause of death PCAUSDEA

Business rules

For Add and Update Patient records
  • If Death registration number is unknown then Underlying cause of death cannot be ‘Officially unknown'.
Edit logic (PCOR11)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PCOR11-1 P4 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND P16 = ‘999999' AND P17 IN = [‘R99', ‘7999'] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (PCOR11)
Sub–edit Text Type
PCOR11-1 Underlying cause of death cannot be ‘Officially unknown' when Death registration is unknown. Core error
Revision (PCOR11)
Year Description
2004 Edit reorganized: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.11 moved to PCOR9.
Edit added: New edit.

3.5.2 Tumour correlation edits

The following table summarizes the purpose of each individual edit of this category.

Table 27 Tumour correlation edits summary
Edit name Purpose
TCOR1 Ensures that the content of the core tumour fields is consistent with the operation described in the Tumour record type.
TCOR2 Ensures that Postal code and Standard geographic code are coherent.
TCOR3 Ensures that Census tract and Standard geographic code are coherent.
TCOR4 Rejects tumour data for patients living outside the reporting province/territory at time of diagnosis.
TCOR5 Ensures that expected topography, histology and behaviour values are reported based on the Source classification flag.
TCOR6 Ensures the consistency between ICD-9 Cancer code and related ICD-O-2 values.
TCOR7 Ensures the consistency between related ICD-O-2 and ICD-O-3 values.
TCOR8 Not applicable. (Placeholder for future requirement implementation.)
TCOR9 Rejects tumour records that are outside the CCR core scope.
TCOR10 Ensures that invalid combinations of topography and histology are rejected.
TCOR11 Ensures that invalid combinations of histology and behaviour codes are rejected.
TCOR12 Ensures the consistency between the topography and the laterality.
TCOR13 Ensures that invalid combinations of Method used to establish the date of diagnosis and Diagnostic confirmation codes are rejected.
TCOR14 Ensures that Method of diagnosis is only reported for tumours diagnosed prior to 2004.
TCOR15 Ensures that Method used to establish the date of diagnosis is only reported for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards.
TCOR16 Ensures that Diagnostic confirmation is only reported for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards.
TCOR17 Ensures that Grade, differentiation or cell indicator is only reported for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards.
TCOR18 This edit ensures that Collaborative Staging variables are reported for tumours within the CCR collaborative staging scope.
TCOR19 This edit ensures that AJCC TNM staging variables are reported for tumours within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope.
TCOR20 Ensures that TNM stage group is reported only when clinical and pathologic TNM stage group are not reported.
TCOR21 Ensures that the combination of AJCC clinical TNM stage group and individual clinical T, N, M values is acceptable.
TCOR22 Ensures that the combination of AJCC pathologic TNM stage group and the individual pathologic T, N, M values is acceptable.
TCOR23 Ensures that the combination of AJCC TNM stage group and the individual clinical/pathologic T, N, M values is acceptable.
TCOR24 Ensures that AJCC edition number is coherent with all remaining AJCC TNM staging variables.
TCOR26 Ensures the consistency between Ambiguous terminology diagnosis and Date of conclusive diagnosis.
TCOR27 Ensures the consistency between Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter.
TCOR29 Ensures the consistency between Ambiguous terminology diagnosis and Date of Conclusive Diagnosis.
TCOR30 Ensures that date of diagnosis and date of conclusive diagnosis respect a chronological sequence and time frame.
TCOR31 Ensures the consistency between ICD-O-2/3 Topography and Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary.
TCOR32 Ensures the consistency between ICD-O-3 Behaviour and Multiple tumours reported as one primary.
TCOR33 Ensures the consistency between Type of Multiple Tumours Reported as One Primary, ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology.
TCOR34 Ensures the consistency between Date of multiple tumours and Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary.
TCOR35 Ensures the consistency between Method Used to Establish the Date of Diagnosis, Type of Multiple Tumours Reported as One Primary, Date of Multiple Tumours and Multiplicity Counter.

TCOR1

Purpose

This edit ensures that the content of the core tumour fields is consistent with the operation described in the tumour record type.

Referenced fields (TCOR1)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T6 25 Name of place of residence TPLACRES
T7 6 Postal code TPOSTCOD
T8 7 Standard geographic code TCODPLAC
T9 9 Census tract TCENTRAC
T10 15 Health insurance number THIN
T11 1 Method of diagnosis TMETHDIAG
T12 8 Date of diagnosis TDATDIAG
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T13 4 ICD-9 cancer code TICD_9
T14 1 Source classification flag TSCF
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T16 4 ICD-O-2 Histology TICD_O2H
T17 1 ICD-O-2 Behaviour TICD_O2B
T19 1 Laterality TLATERAL
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T23 1 Grade, differentiation or cell indicator TGRADE
T24 1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis TMETHUSED
T25 1 Diagnostic confirmation TMETHCONF
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T42 9 AJCC clinical T TAJCCCLINT
T43 3 AJCC clinical N TAJCCCLINN
T44 3 AJCC clinical M TAJCCCLINM
T45 9 AJCC pathologic T TAJCCPATHT
T46 3 AJCC pathologic N TAJCCPATHN
T47 3 AJCC pathologic M TAJCCPATHM
T48 4 AJCC clinical TNM stage group TAJCCCLINSG
T49 4 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group TAJCCPATHSG
T50 4 AJCC TNM stage group TAJCCSG
T51 2 AJCC edition number TAJCCEDNUM
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER
T53 1 Ambiguous Terminology Diagnosis TAMBIGTERM
T54 8 Date of Conclusive Diagnosis TDATCONCLUSDIAG
T55 2 Type of Multiple Tumours Reported as One Primary TMULTTUMONEPRIM
T56 8 Date of Multiple Tumours TDATMULT
T57 2 Multiplicity Counter TMULTCOUNT

Business rules

For Add Tumour records
  • Tumour reporting province/territory, Tumour patient identification number, Tumour reference number, Postal code, Standard geographic code, Method of diagnosis, Date of diagnosis, ICD-9 cancer code, Source classification flag, ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-2 Histology, ICD-O-2 Behaviour, Laterality, ICD-O-3 Histology, ICD-O-3 Behaviour, Grade, differentiation or cell indicator, Method used to establish the date of diagnosis, Diagnostic confirmation must be provided39.
  • Fillers (T18 and T20) are ignored.
For Update Tumour records
  • Tumour reporting province/territory, Tumour patient identification number, Tumour reference number, CCR identification number, Postal code, Standard geographic code, Method of diagnosis, Date of diagnosis, ICD-9 cancer code, Source classification flag, ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-2 Histology, ICD-O-2 Behaviour, Laterality, ICD-O-3 Histology, ICD-O-3 Behaviour, Grade, differentiation or cell indicator, Method used to establish the date of diagnosis, Diagnostic confirmation must be provided39.
  • Fillers (T18 and T20) are ignored.
For Delete Tumour records
  • Tumour reporting province/territory, Tumour patient identification number, Tumour reference number and CCR identification number must be provided.
  • Name of place of residence, Postal code, Standard geographic code, Census tract, Health insurance number, Method of diagnosis, Date of diagnosis, ICD-9 cancer code, Source classification flag, ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-2 Histology, ICD-O-2 Behaviour, Laterality, ICD-O-3 Histology, ICD-O-3 Behaviour, Grade, differentiation or cell indicator, Method used to establish the date of diagnosis, Diagnostic confirmation, CS tumour size, CS extension, CS tumour size/ext eval, CS lymph nodes, CS reg nodes eval, Regional nodes examined, Regional nodes positive, CS mets at dx, CS mets eval, CS site-specific factor 1, CS site-specific factor 2, CS site-specific factor 3, CS site-specific factor 4, CS site-specific factor 5, CS site-specific factor 6, AJCC clinical T, AJCC clinical N, AJCC clinical M, AJCC pathologic T, AJCC pathologic N, AJCC pathologic M, AJCC clinical TNM stage group, AJCC pathologic TNM stage group, AJCC TNM stage group, AJCC edition number, CS Version 1st, Ambiguous Terminology Diagnosis, Date of conclusive diagnosis, Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours, and Multiplicity Counter must be blank.
  • Fillers (T18 and T20) are ignored.
Edit logic (TCOR1)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR1-1 T5 = ‘1' AND (T1 IS NULL OR T2 IS NULL OR T3 IS NULL OR T7 IS NULL OR T8 IS NULL OR T11 IS NULL OR T12 IS NULL OR T13 IS NULL OR T14 IS NULL OR T15 IS NULL OR T16 IS NULL OR T17 IS NULL OR T19 IS NULL OR T21 IS NULL OR T22 IS NULL OR T23 IS NULL OR T24 IS NULL OR T25 IS NULL) OR (T12 IS NOT NULL AND T12.YEAR < 2006 AND T9 IS NULL)) Record rejected
TCOR1-2 T5 = ‘2' AND (T1 IS NULL OR T2 IS NULL OR T3 IS NULL OR T4 IS NULL OR T7 IS NULL OR T8 IS NULL OR T11 IS NULL OR T12 IS NULL OR T13 IS NULL OR T14 IS NULL OR T15 IS NULL OR T16 IS NULL OR T17 IS NULL OR T19 IS NULL OR T21 IS NULL OR T22 IS NULL OR T23 IS NULL OR T24 IS NULL OR T25 IS NULL) OR (T12 IS NOT NULL AND T12.YEAR < 2006 AND T9 IS NULL) Record rejected
TCOR1-3 T5 = ‘3' AND (T1 IS NULL OR T2 IS NULL OR T3 IS NULL OR T4 IS NULL OR T6 IS NOT NULL OR T7 IS NOT NULL OR T8 IS NOT NULL OR T9 IS NOT NULL OR T10 IS NOT NULL OR T11 IS NOT NULL OR T12 IS NOT NULL OR T13 IS NOT NULL OR T14 IS NOT NULL OR T15 IS NOT NULL OR T16 IS NOT NULL OR T17 IS NOT NULL OR T19 IS NOT NULL OR T21 IS NOT NULL OR T22 IS NOT NULL OR T23 IS NOT NULL OR T24 IS NOT NULL OR T25 IS NOT NULL OR T27 IS NOT NULL OR T28 IS NOT NULL OR T29 IS NOT NULL OR T30 IS NOT NULL OR T31 IS NOT NULL OR T32 IS NOT NULL OR T33 IS NOT NULL OR T34 IS NOT NULL OR T35 IS NOT NULL OR T36 IS NOT NULL OR T37 IS NOT NULL OR T38 IS NOT NULL OR T39 IS NOT NULL OR T40 IS NOT NULL OR T41 IS NOT NULL OR T42 IS NOT NULL OR T43 IS NOT NULL OR T44 IS NOT NULL OR T45 IS NOT NULL OR T46 IS NOT NULL OR T47 IS NOT NULL OR T48 IS NOT NULL OR T49 IS NOT NULL OR T50 IS NOT NULL OR T51 IS NOT NULL OR T52 IS NOT NULL OR T53 IS NOT NULL OR T54 IS NOT NULL OR T55 IS NOT NULL OR T56 IS NOT NULL OR T57 IS NOT NULL) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR1)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR1-1 Input record does not respect the Add Tumour record format. There are missing values. Core fatal error
TCOR1-2 Input record does not respect the Update Tumour record format. There are missing values. Core fatal error
TCOR1-3 Input record does not respect the Delete Tumour record format. There are missing or extra values. Core fatal error
Revision (TCOR1)
Year Description
2008 Business rules and Edit logic changed: Fields T53 to T57 have been added.
2007 Business rules and Edit logic changed: Field T52 has been added.
2006 Business rules and Edit logic changed: Census tract effective date range ended in 2005. For cases diagnosed in 2006 and onwards, T9 (Census tract) must not be reported.
2004 Edit renamed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.12.
Business rules changed: Handle new fields related to Collaborative staging and TNM data.

TCOR2

Purpose

This edit ensures that postal code and standard geographic code are coherent.

Referenced fields (TCOR2)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T7 6 Postal code TPOSTCOD
T7.FIRST 1 First digit of Postal code Not applicable
T8.PROV 2 First 2 digits of T8 (province code of Standard geographic code) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records, if Postal code is known then
  • it must start with ‘A' if in Newfoundland or Labrador;
  • it must start with ‘B' if in Nova Scotia;
  • it must start with ‘C' if in Prince Edward Island;
  • it must start with ‘E' if in New Brunswick;
  • it must start with ‘G', ‘H', ‘J' or ‘K' if in Quebec;
  • it must start with ‘K', ‘L', 'M', ‘N' or ‘P' if in Ontario;
  • it must start with ‘R' if in Manitoba;
  • it must start with ‘R' or ‘S' if in Saskatchewan;
  • it must start with ‘S' or ‘T' if in Alberta;
  • it must start with ‘V' if in British Columbia;
  • it must start with ‘Y' if in Yukon;
  • it must start with ‘X' if in Northwest Territories;
  • it must start with ‘X' if in Nunavut.
Edit logic (TCOR2)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR2-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T7 <> ‘999999' AND ((T8.PROV = ‘10' AND T7.FIRST <> ‘A') OR (T8.PROV = ‘11' AND T7.FIRST <> ‘C') OR (T8.PROV = ‘12' AND T7.FIRST <> ‘B') OR (T8.PROV = ‘13' AND T7.FIRST <> ‘E') OR (T8.PROV = ‘24' AND T7.FIRST NOT IN [‘G', ‘H', ‘J', ‘K']) OR (T8.PROV = ‘35' AND T7.FIRST NOT IN [‘K', ‘L', ‘M', ‘N', ‘P']) OR (T8.PROV = ‘46' AND T7.FIRST <> ‘R') OR (T8.PROV = ‘47' AND T7.FIRST NOT IN [‘R', ‘S']) OR (T8.PROV = ‘48' AND T7.FIRST NOT IN [‘S', ‘T']) OR (T8.PROV = ‘59' AND T7.FIRST <> ‘V') OR (T8.PROV = ‘60' AND T7.FIRST <> ‘Y') OR (T8.PROV = ‘61' AND T7.FIRST <> ‘X') OR (T8.PROV = ‘62' AND T7.FIRST <> ‘X')) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR2)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR2-1 Postal code and Standard geographic code indicate 2 different provinces/territories. Core error
Revision (TCOR2)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.14.

TCOR3

Purpose

This edit ensures that census tract and standard geographic code are coherent.

Referenced fields (TCOR3)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T8 7 Standard geographic code TCODPLAC
T9 9 Census tract TCENTRAC
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 characters of T12 (year of the Date of diagnosis) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Date of diagnosis is between year 1992 and 1995 inclusively, and both Census tract and Standard geographic code are fully known, then the reported Standard geographic code must match the Standard geographic code associated with the Census tract in Eligible Census tracts from 1992 to 199512 .
  • If Date of diagnosis is between year 1996 and 2000 inclusively, and both Census tract and Standard geographic code are fully known, then the reported Standard geographic code must match the Standard geographic code associated with the Census tract in Eligible Census tracts from 1996 to 200012.
  • If Date of diagnosis is between year 2001 and 2005 inclusively, and both Census tract and Standard geographic code are fully known, then the reported Standard geographic code must match the Standard geographic code associated with the Census tract in Eligible Census tracts from 2001 to 200512.
Edit logic (TCOR3)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR3-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T8 NOT LIKE ‘_ _ _ _ 999' AND T9 NOT LIKE ‘___999.99' AND T12.YEAR >= 1992 AND T12.YEAR < 1996 AND T8 NOT IN [SGC from Eligible Census tracts from 1992 to 1995 where Census tract = T9] Record rejected
TCOR3-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T8 NOT LIKE ‘_ _ _ _ 999' AND T9 NOT LIKE ‘___999.99' AND T12.YEAR >= 1996 AND T12.YEAR < 2001 AND T8 NOT IN [SGC from Eligible Census tracts from 1996 to 2000 where Census tract = T9] Record rejected
TCOR3-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T8 NOT LIKE ‘_ _ _ _ 999' AND T9 NOT LIKE ‘___999.99' AND T12.YEAR >= 2001 AND T12.YEAR < 2005 AND T8 NOT IN [SGC from Eligible Census tracts from 2001 to 2005 where Census tract = T9] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR3)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR3-1 Census tract and Standard geographic code combination not found in Census tract Data dictionary – 1991. Core error
TCOR3-2 Census tract and Standard geographic code combination not found in Census tract Data dictionary – 1996. Core error
TCOR3-3 Census tract and Standard geographic code combination not found in Census tract Data dictionary – 2001. Core error
Revision (TCOR3)
Year Description
2006 Business rules and Edit logic changed: Edit modified to include combinations where Census tract indicate an area outside a Census Metropolitan Area.
2004 Edit renamed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.15

TCOR4

Purpose

This edit rejects tumour data for patients living outside the reporting province/territory at time of diagnosis.

Referenced fields (TCOR4)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T8.PROV 2 First 2 characters from T8 (province code of Standard geographic code) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Tumour reporting province/territory must be equal to province code found in Standard geographic code.
Edit logic (TCOR4)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR4-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T1 <> T8.PROV Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR4)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR4-1 Reporting province/territory and Standard geographic code must indicate the same province/territory. Core error
Revision (TCOR4)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.16.

TCOR5

Purpose

This edit ensures that expected topography, histology and behaviour values are reported based on the Source classification flag.

Referenced fields (TCOR5)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T13 4 ICD-9 cancer code TICD_9
T14 1 Source classification flag TSCF
T16 4 ICD-O-2 Histology TICD_O2H
T17 1 ICD-O-2 Behaviour TICD_O2B

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Source classification Flag indicates that ICD-9 is the Source classification then ICD-9 cancer code, ICD-O-2/3 Topography40, ICD-O-2 Histology, ICD-O-2 Behaviour41, ICD-O-3 Histology42 and ICD-O-3 Behaviour41 must be reported.
  • If Source classification flag indicates that ICD-O-2 is the Source classification then ICD-O-2/3 Topography40, ICD–O–2 Histology, ICD-O-2 Behaviour41, ICD-O-3 Histology42 and ICD-O-3 Behaviour41 must be reported and ICD-9 Cancer code must not be reported.
  • If Source classification flag indicates that ICD-O-3 is the Source classification then ICD-O-2/3 Topography42, ICD-O-3 Histology40 and ICD-O-3 Behaviour41 must be reported and ICD-9 cancer code, ICD-O-2 Histology and ICD-O-2 Behaviour must not be reported.
Edit logic (TCOR5)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR5-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T14 = ‘1' AND (T13 = ‘0000' OR T16 = ‘0000') Record rejected
TCOR5-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T14 = ‘2' AND T16 = ‘0000' Record rejected
TCOR5-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T14 = ‘2' AND T13 <> ‘0000' Record rejected
TCOR5-4 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T14 = ‘4' AND (T13 <> '0000' OR T16 <> ‘0000' OR T17 <> ‘0') Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR5)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR5-1 Based on the Source classification flag, ICD-9 Cancer code and ICD-O-2 Histology must be reported. Core Error
TCOR5-2 Based on the Source classification flag, ICD-O-2 Histology must be reported. Core Error
TCOR5-3 Based on the Source classification flag, ICD-9 Cancer code must not be reported. Core Error
TCOR5-4 Based on the Source classification flag, ICD-9 cancer code, ICD-O-2 Histology and ICD-O-2 Behaviour must not be reported. Core Error
Revision (TCOR5)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.18.
Business rules deleted: ICD-10 related rules dropped.
Business rules changed: Ensure that topography and histology are reported in accordance with the Source classification flag.
Business rules added: Prevent the reporting of data using a classification older than the one indicated by the Source classification flag.

TCOR6

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between ICD-9 Cancer code and related ICD-O-2 values.

Referenced fields (TCOR6)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T13 4 ICD-9 cancer code TICD_9
T14 1 Source classification flag TSCF
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T16 4 ICD-O-2 Histology TICD_O2H
T17 1 ICD-O-2 Behaviour TICD_O2B

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records where the source classification is ICD-9
  • ICD-9 Cancer code and ICD-O-2/3 Topography must match based on ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table43.
  • If ICD-9 Cancer code is related to a specific histology code (different than 8000) based on ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table then reported ICD-O-2 Histology should not be generic (equal to 8000).
  • ICD-9 Cancer code and ICD-O-2 Behaviour must be coherent based on ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table.
Edit logic (TCOR6)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR6-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T14 = '1' AND T13 <> '0000' AND (T13 and T15 NOT IN [ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table]) Record Rejected
TCOR6-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T14 = '1' AND T13 <> '0000' AND T16 = '8000' AND (ICD-O-2 Histology <> '8000' IN [ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table where ICD-9 = T13]) Warning
TCOR6-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T14 = '1' AND T13 <> '0000' AND (T13 and T17 NOT IN [ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table]) Record Rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR6)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR6-1 ICD-9 Cancer code and ICD-O-2/3 Topography are not coherent. Core Error
TCOR6-2 ICD-O-2 Histology could have been more precise based on ICD-9 cancer code. Warning
TCOR6-3 ICD-9 Cancer code and ICD-O-2 Behaviour are not coherent. Core Error
Revision (TCOR6)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.20
Business rules deleted: ICD-10 related rules dropped.
Business rules added:
Coherence check between ICD-9 Cancer code and ICD-O2/3 Topography added.
Coherence check between ICD-9 Cancer code and ICD-O-2 Histology added.

TCOR7

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between related ICD-O-2 and ICD-O-3 values.

Referenced fields (TCOR7)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T14 1 Source classification flag TSCF
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T16 4 ICD-O-2 Histology TICD_O2H
T17 1 ICD-O-2 Behaviour TICD_O2B
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records where the source classification is either ICD-9 or ICD-O-2
  • ICD-O-3 Histology and ICD-O-3 Behaviour combination must be consistent with ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-2 Histology and ICD-O-2 Behaviour combination based on ICD-O-2 to ICD-O-3 conversion table44.
Edit logic (TCOR7)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR7-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T14 IN [‘1', '2'] AND T16 <> '0000' AND (T21 and T22 combination NOT IN [ICD-O-2 to ICD-O-3 conversion table for T15, T16 and T17 combination]) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR7)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR7-1 ICD-O-3 Histology and ICD-O-3 Behaviour combination is not coherent with ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-2 Histology and ICD-O-2 Behaviour combination. Core Error
Revision (TCOR7)
Year Description
2004 Edit added: New edit.

TCOR8

Purpose

Not applicable. (This empty correlation is kept as a placeholder for future requirement implementation.)

Referenced fields (TCOR8)
Field Length Description Acronym
Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable

Business rules

Not applicable

Edit logic (TCOR8)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Feedback report messages (TCOR8)
Sub–edit Text Type
Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Revision (TCOR8)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

TCOR9

Purpose

This edit rejects tumour records that are outside the CCR core scope.

Referenced fields (TCOR9)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of Date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-3 Histology, ICD-O-3 Behaviour and year of Date of diagnosis combination must be within the CCR core scope45.
Edit logic (TCOR9)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR9-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (T12.YEAR, T15, T21 and T22 NOT IN [CCR core scope]) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR9)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR9-1 Based on ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-3 Histology and Behaviour and Date of diagnosis, the tumour is outside the CCR core scope. Core Error
Revision (TCOR9)
Year Description
2004 Edit consolidated: Edits formerly known as Correlation edit No.13 and Correlation edit No.21.
Business rules changed: Verification is now performed on ICD-O-3 values only, regardless of the source classification used.

TCOR10

Purpose

This edit ensures that invalid combinations of topography and histology are rejected.

Referenced fields (TCOR10)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of Date of diagnosis (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology and year of date of diagnosis combination must not be invalid based on Invalid site and Histology combinations table46.
Edit logic (TCOR10)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR10-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (T12.Year, T15 and T21 IN [Invalid site and Histology combinations]) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR10)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR10-1 ICD-O-2/3 Topography, ICD-O-3 Histology and Date of diagnosis combination is either invalid or not eligible for CCR. Core error
Revision (TCOR10)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages changed: Verification now includes Date of diagnosis.
2004 Edit renamed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.23.
Business rules changed: Verification is now performed on ICD-O-3 values only, regardless of the source classification used.

TCOR11

Purpose

This edit ensures that invalid combinations of histology and behaviour codes are rejected.

Note: Invalid combinations are combinations that are invalid from a subject matter point of view. These are different from matrix combinations which are combinations not explicitly listed in ICD-O but possible from a subject matter point of view and allowed based on rules or coding guidelines for morphology, ICD-O-3 (page 29).

Referenced fields (TCOR11)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of Date of diagnosis (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • ICD-O-3 Histology, ICD-O-3 Behaviour and year of date of diagnosis combination must not be invalid based on Invalid Histology and Behaviour combination table47.
Edit logic (TCOR11)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR11-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (T12.YEAR, T21 and T22 IN [Invalid Histology and Behaviour combination]) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR11)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR11-1 ICD-O-3 Histology, ICD-O-3 Behaviour and Date of diagnosis combination is invalid. Core error
Revision (TCOR11)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields, Business rules, Edit logic and Feedback report messages changed: Verification now includes Date of diagnosis.
2004 Edit renamed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.24.
Business rules changed: Verification is now performed on ICD-O-3 values only, regardless of the source classification used.

TCOR12

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between the topography and the laterality.

Referenced fields (TCOR12)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of Date of diagnosis (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T19 1 Laterality TLATERAL

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • ICD-O-2/3 Topography, Laterality and year of date of diagnosis combination must be valid based on Valid site and Laterality combinations table48.
Edit logic (TCOR12)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR12-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND (T12.Year, T15 and T19 NOT IN [Valid site and Laterality combinations table]) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR12)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR12-1 ICD-O-2/3 Topography, Laterality and Date of diagnosis combination is invalid. Core error
Revision (TCOR12)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Edit formerly known as Correlation Edit No.22.
Business rules changed: Verification is now performed on ICD-O-3 values only, regardless of the source classification used.

TCOR13

Purpose

This edit ensures that invalid combinations of Method used to establish the date of diagnosis and Diagnostic confirmation codes are rejected.

Referenced fields (TCOR13)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of Date of Diagnosis (year of Date of Diagnosis) N/A
T24 1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis TMETHUSED
T25 1 Diagnostic confirmation TMETHCONF
T53 1 Ambiguous Terminology Diagnosis TAMBIGTERM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records where the Date of Diagnosis is in 2004 or after
  • Diagnostic confirmation cannot be less definitive than Method used to establish the date of diagnosis. Example: Diagnostic confirmation cannot be "positive cytology" if the Method used to establish the Date of Diagnosis is "positive histology".
  • Method used to establish the date of diagnosis and Diagnostic confirmation must indicate the same value when either is "Autopsy Only" or "Death Certificate Only (DCO)" and the other one is reported.

For Add and Update Tumour records where the Date of Diagnosis is in 2008 or after

  • If Ambiguous Terminology Diagnosis is Ambiguous terminology only (1) then
    • Diagnostic Confirmation must be more definitive than Method used to establish date of diagnosis.
Edit logic (TCOR13)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR13-1 T5 IN ['1', '2'] AND (T12.YEAR>= '2008') AND T53 = ‘1' AND T24 IN ['1','2','4','5','6','7', ‘9'] AND T25 IN ['1','2','4','5','6','7', ‘9'] AND ((T24='2' AND T25='2') OR (T24<T25)) Record rejected
TCOR13-2 T5 IN ['1', '2'] AND (T12.YEAR>= '2004' ) AND T24 IN ['1','2','4','5','6','7', ‘9'] AND T25 IN ['1','2','4','5','6','7', ‘9'] AND ((T24='2' AND T25='2') OR (T24<T25 AND NOT (T24='1' and T25='2'))) Record rejected
TCOR13-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR>= '2004' AND ((T24 IN ['3', '8'] AND T25<>'0') OR (T25 IN ['3', '8'] AND T24<>'0')) AND T24 <> T25) Record rejected
Feedback report messasges (TCOR13)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR13-1 Diagnostic confirmation must be more definitive than Method used to establish the date of diagnosis when Ambiguous terminology is equal to 1. Core error
TCOR13-2 Diagnostic confirmation cannot be less definitive than Method used to establish the date of diagnosis. Core error
TCOR13-3 Method Used to Establish the Date of Diagnosis and Diagnostic Confirmation must indicate the same method when either is "Autopsy Only" or "Death Certificate Only (DCO)". Core error
Revision (TCOR13)
Year Description
2008 New Sub-edit added: To make Diagnostic confirmation more definitive than Method used to establish the date of diagnosis.
2007 New edit added.

TCOR14

Purpose

This edit ensures that method of diagnosis is only reported for tumours diagnosed prior to 2004.

Referenced fields (TCOR14)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T11 1 Method of diagnosis TMETHDIAG
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of Date of diagnosis (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Method of diagnosis must only be reported when Date of diagnosis is prior 2004.
Edit logic (TCOR14)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR14-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR < 2004 AND T11 = ‘0' Record rejected
TCOR14-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2004 AND T11 <> ‘0' Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR14)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR14-1 Method of diagnosis must be reported for tumours diagnosed before 2004. Core error
TCOR14-2 Method of diagnosis must be coded ‘Not reported' for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards. Core error
Revision (TCOR14)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR15

Purpose

This edit ensures that method used to establish the date of diagnosis is only reported for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards.

Referenced fields (TCOR15)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of Date of diagnosis (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T24 1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis TMETHUSED

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Method used to establish the date of diagnosis must only be reported when Date of diagnosis is in 2004 or after.
Edit logic (TCOR15)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR15-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR < 2004 AND T24<> ‘0' Record rejected
TCOR15-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2004 AND T24 = ‘0' Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR15)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR15-1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis must be coded 'Not reported' for tumours diagnosed before 2004. Core error
TCOR15-2 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis must be reported for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards. Core error
Revision (TCOR15)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR16

Purpose

This edit ensures that diagnostic confirmation is only reported for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards.

Referenced fields (TCOR16)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of Date of diagnosis (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T25 1 Diagnostic confirmation TMETHCONF

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Diagnostic confirmation must only be reported when Date of diagnosis is in 2004 or after.
Edit logic (TCOR16)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR16-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR < 2004 AND T25<> ‘0' Record rejected
TCOR16-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2004 AND T25 = ‘0' Record rejected
Feddback report messages (TCOR16)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR16-1 Diagnostic confirmation must be coded ‘Not reported' for tumours diagnosed before 2004. Core error
TCOR16-2 Diagnostic confirmation must be reported for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards. Core error
Revision (TCOR16)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR17

Purpose

This edit ensures that grade, differentiation or cell indicator is only reported for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards.

Referenced fields (TCOR17)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of Date of diagnosis (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T23 1 Grade, differentiation or cell indicator TGRADE

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Grade, differentiation or cell indicator must only be reported when Date of diagnosis is in 2004 or after.
Edit logic (TCOR17)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR17-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR < 2004 AND T23 <> ‘0' Record rejected
TCOR17-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2004 AND T23 = ‘0' Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR17)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR17-1 Grade, differentiation or cell indicator must be coded ‘Not reported' for tumours diagnosed before 2004. Core error
TCOR17-2 Grade, differentiation or cell indicator must be reported for tumours diagnosed in 2004 and onwards. Core error
Revision (TCOR17)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR18

Purpose

This edit ensures that collaborative staging variables are reported for tumours within the CCR collaborative staging scope.

Referenced fields (TCOR18)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T27 3 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVL
T32 2 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 CS mets eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T52 6 CS Version 1st TCSFVER

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records outside the CCR collaborative staging scope48,
  • All Collaborative staging variables must be blank.
For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR collaborative staging scope,
  • All Collaborative staging variables must be reported.
Edit logic (TCOR18)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR18-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR < 2004 AND (T27 IS NOT NULL OR T28 IS NOT NULL OR T29 IS NOT NULL OR T30 IS NOT NULL OR T31 IS NOT NULL OR T32 IS NOT NULL OR T33 IS NOT NULL OR T34 IS NOT NULL OR T35 IS NOT NULL OR T36 IS NOT NULL OR T37 IS NOT NULL OR T38 IS NOT NULL OR T39 IS NOT NULL OR T40 IS NOT NULL OR T41 IS NOT NULL OR T52 IS NOT NULL) CS data items are not posted.
TCOR18-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2004 AND (T27 IS NULL OR T28 IS NULL OR T29 IS NULL OR T30 IS NULL OR T31 IS NULL OR T32 IS NULL OR T33 IS NULL OR T34 IS NULL OR T35 IS NULL OR T36 IS NULL OR T37 IS NULL OR T38 IS NULL OR T39 IS NULL OR T40 IS NULL OR T41 IS NULL OR T52 IS NULL) CS data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TCOR18)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR18-1 Collaborative staging data must be left blank for tumours diagnosed prior to 2004. Reported data will not be loaded into CCR. CS fatal error
TCOR18-2 Eligible Collaborative staging site: all Collaborative staging variables must be reported. CS fatal error
Revision (TCOR18)
Year Description
2007 Referenced fields and Edit logic updated: T52 added as a new CS variable
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR19

Purpose

This edit ensures that AJCC TNM staging variables are reported for tumours within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope.

Referenced fields (TCOR19)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T42 9 AJCC clinical T TAJCCCLINT
T43 3 AJCC clinical N TAJCCCLINN
T44 3 AJCC clinical M TAJCCCLINM
T45 9 AJCC pathologic T TAJCCPATHT
T46 3 AJCC pathologic N TAJCCPATHN
T47 3 AJCC pathologic M TAJCCPATHM
T48 4 AJCC clinical TNM stage group TAJCCCLINSG
T49 4 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group TAJCCPATHSG
T50 4 AJCC TNM stage group TAJCCSG
T51 2 AJCC edition number TAJCCEDNUM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • All AJCC TNM staging variables must be reported.
For Add and Update Tumour records outside the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope
  • All AJCC TNM staging variables must be blank.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TCOR19)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR19-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR < 2003 AND NOT (T42 IS NULL AND T43 IS NULL AND T44 IS NULL AND T45 IS NULL AND T46 IS NULL AND T47 IS NULL AND T48 IS NULL AND T49 IS NULL AND T50 IS NULL AND T51 IS NULL) AJCC TNM data items are not posted.
TCOR19-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND (T42 IS NULL OR T43 IS NULL OR T44 IS NULL OR T45 IS NULL OR T46 IS NULL OR T47 IS NULL OR T48 IS NULL OR T49 IS NULL OR T50 IS NULL OR T51 IS NULL) AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
TCOR19-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND NOT (T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X]) AND NOT (T42 IS NULL AND T43 IS NULL AND T44 IS NULL AND T45 IS NULL AND T46 IS NULL AND T47 IS NULL AND T48 IS NULL AND T49 IS NULL AND T50 IS NULL AND T51 IS NULL) AJCC TNM data items are not posted.
Feedback report messages (TCOR19)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR19-1 All AJCC TNM staging data must be blank for tumours diagnosed prior to 2003. Reported data will not be loaded into CCR. AJCC TNM fatal error
TCOR19-2 Eligible AJCC TNM staging site: all AJCC TNM staging variables must be reported. AJCC TNM fatal error
TCOR19-3 Non-eligible AJCC TNM staging site: all AJCC TNM staging variables must be blank. Reported data will not be loaded into CCR. AJCC TNM fatal error
Revision (TCOR19)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR20

Purpose

This edit ensures that TNM stage group is reported only when clinical and pathologic TNM stage group are not reported.

Referenced fields (TCOR20)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T48 4 AJCC clinical TNM stage group TAJCCCLINSG
T49 4 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group TAJCCPATHSG
T50 4 AJCC TNM stage group TAJCCSG

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • AJCC TNM stage group can only be reported when both AJCC clinical TNM stage group and AJCC pathologic TNM stage group are either unknown or not assessed.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the AJCC TNM Staging. Ex:Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TCOR20)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR20-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T50 <> ‘99' AND (T48 NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] OR T49 NOT IN [‘99', ‘X']) AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messasges (TCOR20)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR20-1 TNM stage group cannot be reported when clinical and/or pathologic TNM stage group is reported. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TCOR20)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR21

Purpose

This edit ensures that the combination of AJCC Clinical TNM stage group and the individual clinical T, N, M values combination is acceptable.

Referenced fields (TCOR21)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T42 9 AJCC clinical T TAJCCCLINT
T43 3 AJCC clinical N TAJCCCLINN
T44 3 AJCC clinical M TAJCCCLINM
T48 4 AJCC clinical TNM stage group TAJCCCLINSG

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • If AJCC clinical TNM stage group is known and assessed then AJCC clinical T, N, M and AJCC clinical TNM stage group combination must be valid for the site49.
  • If AJCC clinical TNM stage group is not assessed then AJCC clinical T, N and M combination must not lead to a stage group for the site
  • If AJCC clinical TNM stage group is unknown then all AJCC clinical T, N and M values must also be unknown and conversely.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TCOR21)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR21-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND NOT (T42 = ‘99' AND T43 = ‘99' AND T44 = ‘99') AND T48 NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND T42, T43, T44, T48 NOT IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
TCOR21-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T48 = ‘X' AND T42, T43, T44 IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
TCOR21-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T48 = ‘99' AND (T42 <> ‘99' OR T43 <> ‘99' OR T44 <> ‘99') AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
TCOR21-4 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T48 <> ‘99' AND T42 = ‘99' AND T43 = ‘99' AND T44 = ‘99' AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TCOR21)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR21-1 AJCC clinical TNM stage group is invalid for reported AJCC clinical T, N and M values and site. AJCC TNM error
TCOR21-2 AJCC clinical TNM stage group must be assessed for reported clinical T, N and M values and site. AJCC TNM error
TCOR21-3 All AJCC clinical T, N and M values must be set to ‘Unknown' when AJCC clinical TNM stage group is ‘Unknown'. AJCC TNM error
TCOR21-4 AJCC clinical TNM stage group must be set to ‘Unknown' when All AJCC clinical T, N and M values are set to ‘Unknown'. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TCOR21)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR22

Purpose

This edit ensures that the combination of AJCC pathologic TNM stage group and the individualpathologic T, N, M values is acceptable.

Referenced fields (TCOR22)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T45 9 AJCC pathologic T TAJCCPATHT
T46 3 AJCC pathologic N TAJCCPATHN
T47 3 AJCC pathologic M TAJCCPATHM
T49 4 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group TAJCCPATHSG

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29.
  • If AJCC pathologic TNM stage group is known and assessed then AJCC pathologic T, N, M and AJCC pathologic TNM stage group combination must be valid for the site49.
  • If AJCC pathologic TNM stage group is not assessed then AJCC pathologic T, N and M combination must not imply a stage group for the site49.
  • If AJCC pathologic TNM stage group is unknown then all AJCC pathologic T, N and M values must also be unknown and conversely.

To simplify the edit logic, let Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.

Edit logic (TCOR22)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR22-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for SiteX] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND NOT (T45 = ‘99' AND T46 = ‘99' AND T47 = ‘99') AND T49 NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND T45, T46, T47, T49 NOT IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
TCOR22-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T49 = ‘X' AND T45, T46, T47 IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X] AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
TCOR22-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T49 = ‘99' AND (T45 <> ‘99' OR T46 <> ‘99' OR T47 <> ‘99') AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
TCOR22-4 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T49 <> ‘99' AND T45 = ‘99' AND T46 = ‘99' AND T47 = ‘99' AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TCOR22)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR22-1 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group is invalid for reported AJCC pathologic T, N and M values and site. AJCC TNM error
TCOR22-2 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group must be assessed for reported pathologic T, N and M values and site. AJCC TNM error
TCOR22-3 All AJCC pathologic T, N and M values must be set to ‘Unknown' when AJCC pathologic TNM stage group is ‘Unknown'. AJCC TNM error
TCOR22-4 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group must be set to ‘Unknown' when All AJCC pathologic T, N and M values are set to ‘Unknown'. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TCOR22)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR23

Purpose

This edit ensures that the combination of AJCC TNM stage group and the individual clinical/pathologic T, N, M values is acceptable.

Referenced fields(TCOR23)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T42 9 AJCC clinical T TAJCCCLINT
T43 3 AJCC clinical N TAJCCCLINN
T44 3 AJCC clinical M TAJCCCLINM
T45 9 AJCC pathologic T TAJCCPATHT
T46 3 AJCC pathologic N TAJCCPATHN
T47 3 AJCC pathologic M TAJCCPATHM
T50 4 AJCC TNM stage group TAJCCSG

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29,
  • If AJCC TNM stage group is known then the most "accurate" combination of known and assessed AJCC clinical/pathologic T, N, M values and AJCC TNM stage group must be valid49,50. For any staging element (T, N, M), pathologic values are always considered more "accurate" when both clinical and pathologic values are known and assessed.
  • Example If cT = ‘T2' and pT = ‘T1', the most accurate tumour stage is ‘T1' (pathologic data take precedence over clinical).
  • Example If cM = ‘M1' and pM = ‘MX', the most accurate metastases stage is ‘M1' (pathologic M is not assessed).

To simplify the edit logic, let:

  • BestT (clin, path), BestN (clin, path) and BestM (clin, path) be functions that return the most "accurate" tumour, node and metastases staging value based on the rules stated above. When both clinical and pathologic values are '99', 'TX', 'NX' or 'MX', these functions always return the pathologic value.
  • Site X be a given site within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope. Example: Colorectal, breast or prostate.
Edit logic (TCOR23)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR23-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for Site X] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for Site X] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for Site X] AND T50 <> '99' AND ((BestT (T42, T45) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestN (T43, T46) IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestM (T44, T47) IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestT(T42, T45), T50 NOT IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X]) OR (BestT (T42, T45) IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestN (T43, T46) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestM (T44, T47) IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestN (T43, T46), T50 NOT IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X]) OR (BestT (T42, T45) IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestN (T43, T46) IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestM (T44, T47) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestM (T44, T47), T50 NOT IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X]) OR (BestT (T42, T45) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestN (T43, T46) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestM (T44, T47) IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestT (T42, T45), BestN (T43, T46), T50 NOT IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X]) OR (BestT (T42, T45) IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestN (T43, T46) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestM (T44, T47) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestN (T43, T46), BestM (T44, T47), T50 NOT IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X]) OR ((BestT (T42, T45) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestN (T43, T46) IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestM (T44, T47) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestT(T42, T45), BestM (T44, T47), T50 NOT IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X]) OR (BestT (T42, T45) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestN (T43, T46) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestM (T44, T47) NOT IN [‘99', ‘X'] AND BestT(T42, T45), BestN (T43, T46), BestM (T44, T47), T50 NOT IN [valid AJCC TNM and stage group combination for Site X])) AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TCOR23)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR23-1 AJCC TNM stage group is invalid for reported clinical/pathologic T, N and M values and site. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TCOR23)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR24

Purpose

This edit ensures that AJCC edition number is coherent with all remaining AJCC TNM staging variables.

Referenced fields (TCOR24)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T42 9 AJCC clinical T TAJCCCLINT
T43 3 AJCC clinical N TAJCCCLINN
T44 3 AJCC clinical M TAJCCCLINM
T45 9 AJCC pathologic T TAJCCPATHT
T46 3 AJCC pathologic N TAJCCPATHN
T47 3 AJCC pathologic M TAJCCPATHM
T48 4 AJCC clinical TNM stage group TAJCCCLINSG
T49 4 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group TAJCCPATHSG
T50 4 AJCC TNM stage group TAJCCSG
T51 2 AJCC edition number TAJCCEDNUM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records with the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope29.
  • If AJCC edition number is set to ‘Not staged' then all other AJCC TNM staging variables must be set to ‘Unknown' and conversely.
Edit logic (TCOR24)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR24-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND ((T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for AJCC TNM Staging Colorectal sites] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for AJCC TNM Staging Colorectal sites] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for AJCC TNM Staging Colorectal sites]) OR (T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for AJCC TNM Staging Breast sites] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for AJCC TNM Staging Breast sites] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Behaviour codes for AJCC TNM Staging Breast sites]) OR (T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for AJCC TNM Staging Prostate sites] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for AJCC TNM Staging Prostate sites] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Behaviour codes for AJCC TNM Staging Prostate sites])) AND T42 = ‘99' AND T43 = ‘99' AND T44 = ‘99' AND T45 = ‘99' AND T46 = ‘99' AND T47 = ‘99' AND T48 = ‘99' AND T49 = ‘99' AND T50 = ‘99' AND T51 <> ‘00' AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
TCOR24-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2003 AND ((T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for AJCC TNM Staging Colorectal sites] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for AJCC TNM Staging Colorectal sites] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 Behaviour codes for AJCC TNM Staging Colorectal sites]) OR (T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for AJCC TNM Staging Breast sites] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for AJCC TNM Staging Breast sites] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Behaviour codes for AJCC TNM Staging Breast sites]) OR (T15 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Topography codes for AJCC TNM Staging Prostate sites] AND T21 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Histology codes for AJCC TNM Staging Prostate sites] AND T22 IN [Eligible ICD-O-3 – Behaviour codes for AJCC TNM Staging Prostate sites])) AND T51 = ‘00' AND (T42 <> ‘99' OR T43 <> ‘99' OR T44 <> ‘99' OR T45 <> ‘99' OR T46 <> ‘99' OR T47 <> ‘99' OR T48 <> ‘99' OR T49 <> ‘99' OR T50 <> ‘99') All AJCC TNM data items filled with 'R' at posting.
Feedback report messages (TCOR24)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR24-1 TNM edition number must be set to ‘Not Staged' when all other AJCC TNM staging variables are ‘Unknown'. AJCC TNM error
TCOR24-2 TNM edition number cannot be set to ‘Not Staged' when some AJCC TNM staging variables are reported. AJCC TNM error
Revision (TCOR24)
Year Description
2004 Edit Added: New edit.

TCOR26

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between Ambiguous terminology diagnosis and Date of conclusive diagnosis.

Referenced fields (TCOR26)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T53 1 Ambiguous terminology diagnosis TDATCONCLUSDIAG
T54 8 Date of conclusive diagnosis TMULTCOUNT

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Date of Diagnosis is before 2008 then Ambiguous terminology diagnosis and Date of conclusive diagnosis must both be blank.
  • If Date of Diagnosis is 2008 and onwards then Ambiguous terminology diagnosis and Date of conclusive diagnosis must be either both blank or both reported.
Edit logic (TCOR26)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR26-1 T5 IN [‘1','2'] AND T12.YEAR < 2008 AND (T53 IS NOT NULL OR T54 IS NOT NULL) Record rejected
TCOR26-2 T5 IN [‘1','2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2008 AND (T53 IS NOT NULL OR T54 IS NOT NULL) AND (T53 IS NULL OR T54 IS NULL) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR26)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR26-1 Ambiguous terminology diagnosis and Date of conclusive diagnosis must both be blank if Date of diagnosis is before 2008. Core error
TCOR26-2 If Date of diagnosis is 2008 and onwards, Ambiguous terminology diagnosis and Date of conclusive diagnosis must either both be reported or both be left blank. Core error
Revision (TCOR26)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TCOR27

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter.

Referenced fields (TCOR27)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12.YEAR 5 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T55 2 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary TMULTTUMONEPRIM
T56 8 Date of multiple tumours DDATMULT
T57 2 Multiplicity counter TMULTCOUNT

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Date of Diagnosis is before 2008 then Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter must all be blank.
  • If Date of Diagnosis is 2008 and onwards then Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours, and Multiplicity counter must be either all blank or all reported.
Edit logic (TCOR27)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR27-1 T5 IN [‘1','2'] AND T12.YEAR < 2008 AND (T55 IS NOT NULL OR T56 IS NOT NULL OR T57 IS NOT NULL) Record rejected
TCOR27-2 T5 IN [‘1','2'] AND T12.YEAR >= 2008 AND (T55 IS NOT NULL OR T56 IS NOT NULL OR T57 IS NOT NULL) AND (T55 IS NULL OR T56 IS NULL OR T57 IS NULL) Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR27)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR27-1 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter must all be blank if Date of diagnosis is before 2008. Core error
TCOR27-2 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter must either all be blank or all be reported if Date of diagnosis is 2008 and onwards. Core error
Revision (TCOR27)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TCOR29

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between Ambiguous terminology diagnosis and Date of conclusive diagnosis.

Referenced fields (TCOR29)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T53 1 Ambiguous terminology diagnosis TAMBIGTERM
T54 8 Date of multiple tumours DDATMULT

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Ambiguous terminology diagnosis is "Conclusive terminology within 60 days of original diagnosis" (0) then Date of conclusive diagnosis must be "Not applicable" (88888888).
  • If Ambiguous terminology diagnosis is "Ambiguous terminology only" (1) then Date of conclusive diagnosis must be "Accessioned based on ambiguous terminology diagnosis only" (00000000).
  • If Ambiguous terminology diagnosis is "Ambiguous terminology followed by conclusive terminology" (2) then Date of conclusive diagnosis must NOT be "Not applicable" (88888888) or "Accessioned based on ambiguous terminology diagnosis only" (00000000).
  • If Ambiguous terminology diagnosis is "Unknown terminology" (9) then Date of conclusive diagnosis must indicate that date is unknown (99999999).
  • If Ambiguous terminology diagnosis is "Ambiguous terminology followed by conclusive terminology" (2) then Date of conclusive diagnosis should NOT be unknown (99999999).
Edit logic (TCOR29)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR29-1 T5 IN [‘1','2'] AND (T53 = ‘0' AND T54 <> ‘88888888') OR (T53 = ‘1' AND T54 <> ‘00000000') OR (T53 = ‘2' AND T54 IN [‘00000000', ‘88888888']) OR (T53 = ‘9' AND T54 <> ‘99999999') Record rejected
TCOR29-2 T5 IN [‘1', '2'] AND T53 IN [‘2'] AND T54 IN [‘99999999'] Warning
Feedback report messages (TCOR29)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR29-1 Ambiguous terminology diagnosis and Date of conclusive diagnosis are inconsistent. Core error
TCOR29-2 Date of conclusive diagnosis should be a valid calendar date when case is identified as "Ambiguous terminology followed by conclusive terminology". Warning
Revision (TCOR29)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TCOR30

Purpose

This edit ensures that date of diagnosis and date of conclusive diagnosis respect a chronological sequence and time frame.

Referenced fields (TCOR30)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12 8 Date of diagnosis TDATDIAG
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T12.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of T12 (month of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T12.DAY 2 Last 2 digits of T12 (day of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T54 8 Date of Conclusive Diagnosis TDATCONCLUSDIAG
T54.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T54 (year of date of conclusive diagnosis) Not applicable
T54.MONTH 2 5th and 6th digits of T54 (month of date of conclusive diagnosis) Not applicable
T54.DAY 2 Last 2 digits of T54 (day of date of conclusive diagnosis) Not applicable

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • Date of conclusive diagnosis must be greater than two months (60 days) after the Date of diagnosis.
Edit logic (TCOR30)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR30-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T54 NOT IN [‘00000000','88888888', ‘99999999'] AND ((T12.DAY <> ‘99' AND T54.DAY <> ‘99' AND T54 < T12) OR (T12.MONTH <> ‘99' AND T54.MONTH <> ‘99' AND T54.YEAR || T54.MONTH < T12.YEAR || T12.MONTH) OR (T54.YEAR < T12.YEAR)) Record rejected
TCOR30-2 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T54 NOT IN [‘00000000','88888888', ‘99999999'] and DIFF_DAYS (Date1,Date2) <= 60. See Appendix J – Interval between 2 dates (complete or partial). Record rejected
TCOR30-3 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T12.YEAR = T54.YEAR AND T12.MONTH = ‘99' AND T54.MONTH = ‘99' Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR30)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR30-1 Date of conclusive diagnosis is before date of diagnosis. Core error
TCOR30-2 Date of conclusive diagnosis must be greater than 60 days after the date of diagnosis. Core error
TCOR30-3 If the year of Date of diagnosis is equal to the year of Date of conclusive diagnosis and both months are unknown, the Date of conclusive diagnosis must be unknown. Core error
Revision (TCOR30)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TCOR31

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between ICD-O-2/3 Topography and Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary.

Referenced fields (TCOR31)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T15 5 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_02T
T55 2 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary TMULTTUMONEPRIM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary is coded as "polyp and adenocarcinoma" (31) or "Familial Adenomatous Polyposis (FAP) with carcinoma" (32) Then ICD-O-2/3 Topography must be coded as "Colon" (C180-C189), "Rectosigmoid Junction" (C199) or "Rectum" (C209).
Edit logic (TCOR31)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR31-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T55 IN [31,32] and T15 NOT IN [C180-C189, C199 or C209] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR31)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR31-1 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary and ICD-O-2/3 combination is invalid. Core error
Revision (TCOR31)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TCOR32

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between ICD-O-3 Behaviour and Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary.

Referenced fields (TCOR32)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T22 1 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_03B
T55 2 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary TMULTTUMONEPRIM

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary is coded as either "Multiple benign (intracranial and CNS sites only)" (10), "Multiple borderline" (11), or "Benign (intracranial and CNS sites only) and borderline" (12), then ICD-O-3 Behaviour must be coded as either "benign" (0) or "borderline" (1).
Edit logic (TCOR32)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR32-1 T5 IN [‘1', ‘2'] AND T55 IN [‘10', '11', '12'] AND T22 NOT IN [‘0','1'] Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR32)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR32-1 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary and ICD-O-3 behaviour combination is invalid. Core error
Revision (TCOR32)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TCOR33

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours, Multiplicity counter, ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology.

Referenced fields (TCOR33)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T15 4 ICD–O–2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T21 4 ICD–O–3 Histology TICD_O3H
T24 1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis TMETHUSED
T55 2 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary TMULTTUMONEPRIM
T56 8 Date of multiple tumours DDATMULT
T57 2 Multiplicity counter TMULTCOUNT

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records where method used to establish the date of diagnosis is not ‘death certificate only"
  • If ICD–O–2/3 topography is ‘unknown primary' (C809) or ICD–O– 3 Histology refers to lymphoma, leukemia or immunoproliferative disease62 [9590-9989] then Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter must be ‘Information on multiple tumours not applicable for this site'.
  • If ICD-O-2/3 topography is known (not C809) and ICD–O–3 Histology does NOT refer to lymphoma, leukemia or immunoproliferative disease [9590-9989] then Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter must not be ‘Information on multiple tumours not applicable for this site'.
Edit logic (TCOR33)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR33-1 T5 IN [‘1','2'] AND T24 <> 8 AND (T15 = ‘C809' OR T21 IN [9590-9989]) AND T55 <> 88 OR T56 <> ‘88888888' OR T57 <> ‘88' Record rejected
TCOR33-2 T5 IN [‘1','2'] AND T24 <> 8 AND (T15 <> ‘C809' OR T21 NOT IN [9590-9989]) AND T55 = ‘88' OR T56 = ‘88888888' OR T57 = ‘88' Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR33)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR33-1 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter must be reported as ‘Information on multiple tumours not applicable for this site'. Core error
TCOR33-2 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter must NOT be reported as ‘Information on multiple tumours not applicable for this site'. Core error
Revision (TCOR33)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TCOR34

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between Date of multiple tumours and Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary.

Referenced fields (TCOR34)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T55 2 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary TMULTTUMONEPRIM
T56 8 Date of multiple tumours DDATMULT
T57 2 Multiplicity counter TMULTCOUNT

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary is "single tumour" (00) then  Date of multiple tumours  must be "single tumour" (00000000) and Multiplicity counter must be ‘01'.
  • If Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary is "not applicable for this site" (88) then Date of multiple tumours must be "information on multiple tumours not applicable for this site" (88888888) and Multiplicity counter must be ‘Information on multiple tumours not applicable for this site' (88).
  • If Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary indicates multiple tumours (codes 10 through 80) then Date of multiple tumours must be the date the patient is diagnosed with multiple tumours or unknown (99999999) and Multiplicity counter must be values 02 through 87.
  • If Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary is "Unknown" (99) then Date of multiple tumours must be unknown (99999999) and Multiplicity counter must be "Multiple tumours present, unknown how many; unknown if single or multiple tumours" (99).
Edit logic (TCOR34)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR34-1 T5 IN [‘1','2'] AND (T55 = ‘00' AND T56 <> ‘00000000' OR T57 <> ‘01') OR (T55 = ‘88' AND T56 <> ‘88888888' OR T57 <> 88' ) OR (T55 = ‘99' AND T56 <> ‘99999999' OR T57 <> ‘99') OR (T55 IN [‘10','11','12','20','30','31','32','40','80'] AND (T56 = ‘00000000' OR T56 = ‘88888888') OR (T57 = ‘01' OR T57 = ‘88' OR T57 = ‘99') Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR34)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR34-1 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, date of multiple tumours and multiplicity counter combination is invalid. Core error
Revision (TCOR34)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

TCOR35

Purpose

This edit ensures the consistency between Method used to establish the date of diagnosis, Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter..

Referenced fields (TCOR35)
Field Length Description Acronym
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T24 1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis TMETHUSED
T55 2 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary TMULTTUMONEPRIM
T56 8 Date of multiple tumours DDATMULT
T57 2 Multiplicity counter TMULTCOUNT

Business rules

For Add and Update Tumour records
  • If Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary is "Unknown" (99) and Method used to establish date of diagnosis is "Death certificate only" (8), then Date of multiple tumours must be "Unknown" (99999999) and Multiplicity counter must be "Multiple tumours present, unknown how many/unknown if single or multiple tumours" (99).
Edit logic (TCOR35)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
TCOR35-1 T5 IN [‘1','2'] AND (T55 = ‘99' AND T24 = ‘8') AND (T56 <> ‘99999999' OR T57 <> ‘99') Record rejected
Feedback report messages (TCOR35)
Sub–edit Text Type
TCOR35-1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis, Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary, Date of multiple tumours and Multiplicity counter combination is invalid. Core error
Revision (TCOR35)
Year Description
2008 Edit added: New edit.

3.6 Match edits

The purpose of the match edits is to enforce the business rules between fields on different records. For ease of use, match edits have been divided into four groups:

  • Key input match edits: Ensure that input patient and tumour records respect the submission rules in terms of matching keys.
  • Key base match edits: Ensure that input patient and tumour records respect the actual state of the CCR in terms of matching keys.
  • Data item match edits: Enforce the business rules between data items (other than keys) found on different records.
  • Pre-posting match edits: Identify core error-free input records that cannot be posted to the CCR4 because some other related Input records are either missing or have core errors.

3.6.1 Key input match edits

The purpose of the key input match edits is to ensure that input patient and tumour records respect the submission rules in terms of matching keys.

At this level, the following fields are used as key:

  • Patient record: Reporting province/territory and patient identification number.
  • Tumour record: Reporting province/territory, patient identification number and tumour reference number.

The following table summarizes the purpose of each individual edit of this category:

Table 28 Input match edits summary
Edit name Purpose
KIM1 Ensures that only one operation affecting a specific patient record is performed (that is, add, delete or update) within a data submission.
KIM2 Ensures that only one operation affecting a specific Tumour record is performed (that is, add, delete or update) within a data submission.
KIM3 Enforces the submission rules regarding the addition of a patient record.
KIM4 Enforces the submission rules regarding the deletion of a patient record.
KIM5 Enforces the submission rules regarding the addition of a Tumour record.

Important note:

When a key input match edit fails, all related Input records (all input patient and tumour records sharing the same reporting province/territory and patient identification number) are rejected. Related records are also called the family of records.

KIM1

Purpose

This edit ensures that only one operation affecting a specific patient record is performed
(add, delete or update) within a data submission.

Referenced fields (KIM1)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN

Business rules

For Input Patient records
  • There cannot be another Input patient record with identical Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number within the same data submission.
Edit logic (KIM1)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KIM1-1 Input patient record that matches another Input patient record where P1=P1 AND P2=P2. Family rejected51
Feedback report messages (KIM1)
Sub–edit Text Type
KIM1-1 Family rejected: more than one Input patient record with the same Patient reporting province/territory and Patient identification number. Core error
Revision (KIM1)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Input Match Edit No.1.

KIM2

Purpose

This edit ensures that only on

Referenced fields (KIM2)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN

Business rules

For Input Tumour records
  • There cannot be another Input Tumour record with identical Reporting province/territory, Patient identification number and Tumour reference number within the same data submission.
Edit logic (KIM2)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KIM2-1 Input tumour record that matches another Input tumour record where T1=T1 AND T2=T2 AND T3=T3. Family rejected52
Feedback report messages (KIM2)
Sub–edit Text Type
KIM2-1 Family rejected: more than one Input tumour record with the same Tumour reporting province/territory, Tumour patient identification number and Tumour reference number. Core error
Revision (KIM2)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Input Match Edit No.2.

KIM3

Purpose

This edit enforces the submission rules regarding the addition of a patient record.

Referenced fields (KIM3)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE

Business fields

For Add Patient records
  • There must be at least one Add Tumour record with identical Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number and a blank CCR identification number within the same data submission.
  • There cannot be any Add Tumour record with identical Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number and a reported CCR identification number within the same data submission.
  • There cannot be any Update or Delete Tumour record with identical Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number within the same data submission.
Edit logic KIM3)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KIM3-1 Input patient record where P4='1' that matches no Input tumour record where T5='1' AND T1=P1 AND T2=P2. Family rejected53
KIM3-2 Input patient record where P4='1' that matches an Input tumour record where T5='1' AND T1=P1 AND T2=P2 AND T4 IS NOT NULL. Family rejected53
KIM3-3 Input patient record where P4='1' that matches an Input tumour record where T5 IN ['2','3'] AND T1=P1 AND T2=P2. Family rejected53
Feedback report messages (KIM3)
Sub–edit Text Type
KIM3-1 Family rejected: Add Patient record does not match any Add Tumour record. Core error
KIM3-2 Family rejected: Add Patient record matches an Add Tumour record with CCR identification number. Core error
KIM3-3 Family rejected: Add Patient record matches an Update or Delete Tumour record. Core error
Revision (KIM3)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Input Match Edit No.3.

KIM4

Purpose

This edit enforces the submission rules regarding the deletion of a patient record.

referenced fields (KIM4)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE

Business rules

For Delete Patient records
  • There must be at least one Delete Tumour record with identical Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number within the same data submission.
  • There cannot be any Add or Update Tumour record with identical Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number within the same data submission.
Edit logic (KIM4)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KIM4-1 Input patient record where P4='3' that matches no Input tumour record where T5='3' AND P1=T1 AND P2=T2. Family rejected53
KIM4-2 Input patient record where P4='3' that matches Input tumour record where T5 IN ['1','2'] AND P1=T1 AND P2=T2. Family rejected53
Feedback report messages (KIM4)
Sub–edit Text Type
KIM4-1 Delete Patient record does not match any Delete Tumour record. Core error
KIM4-2 Family rejected: Delete Patient record matches an Add or Update Tumour record. Core error
Revision (KIM4)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Input Match Edit No.4.
Business rules changed: CCR identification number has been removed from the edit since it is equivalent to Reporting province/territory – Patient identification number combination.

KIM5

Purpose

This edit enforces the submission rules regarding the addition of a tumour record.

Referenced fields (KIM5)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T4 9 CCR Identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE

Business rules

For Add Tumour records without CCR identification number
  • There must be an Add Patient record with identical Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number within the same data submission.
  • There cannot be any Update54 Patient records with identical Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number within the same data submission.
Edit logic (KIM5)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KIM5-1 Input tumour record where T5='1' AND T4 IS NULL that matches no Input patient record where P4='1' AND P1=T1 AND P2=T2. Family rejected55
KIM5-2 Input tumour record where T5='1' AND T4 IS NULL that matches Input patient record where P4='2' AND P1=T1 AND P2=T2. Family rejected55
Feedback report messages (KIM5)
Sub–edit Text Type
KIM5-1 Family rejected: Add Tumour record without CCR_ID does not match an Add Patient record. Core error
KIM5-2 Family rejected: Add Tumour record without CCR_ID matches an Update Patient record. Core error
Revision (KIM5)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Input Match Edit No.6.

3.6.2 Key base match edits

The purpose of the key base match edits is to ensure that input patient and tumour records respect the actual state of the CCR in terms of matching keys.

At this level, the following fields are used as keys:

  • Patient record: CCR identification number, reporting province/territory and patient identification number.
  • Tumour record: CCR identification number, reporting province/territory, patient identification number and tumour reference number.

The following table summarizes the purpose of each individual edit of this category.

Table 29 Base match edits summary
Edit name Purpose
KBM1 Ensures that no duplicate Patient keys are posted to the CCR.
KBM2 Ensures that Update or Delete Patient record keys match a Base Patient record.
KBM3 Ensures that no duplicate Tumour keys are posted to the CCR.
KBM4 Ensures that an Add Tumour record with CCR identification number matches a Base patient record owned by the Reporting province/territory.
KBM5 Ensures that Update or Delete Tumour record keys match a Base tumour record.

Important note

When a key base match edit fails, the conflicting base record (if any), is included in the detailed feedback report for easier error correction.

Writing conventions throughout the following edit descriptions:

  • Expression "base patient/tumour record" means a patient/tumour record already in the CCR.
  • Expression "add/update/delete/input patient/tumour record" means a patient/tumour record within the data submission.
  • Unless specified otherwise, field numbers prefixed with "I" are input fields and field numbers prefixed with "B" are Base fields. 
    Example: IT5 is the Tumour record type field on an input tumour record.
    Example: IP1 is the Reporting province/territory field on an input patient record

KBM1

Purpose

This edit ensures that no duplicate patient keys are posted to the CCR.

Referenced fields (KBM1)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE

Business rules

For Add Patient records
  • There must not be a Base patient record with identical Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number.
Edit logic (KBM1)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KBM1-1 Input patient record where IP4='1' that matches a Base patient record where IP1=BP1 AND IP2=BP2. Record rejected
Feedback report messages (KBM1)
Sub–edit Text Type
KBM1-1 A Base patient record with identical reporting province/Territory and Patient identification number already exists. Core error
Revision (KBM1)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.25.

KBM2

Purpose

This edit ensures that update or delete patient record keys match a base patient record.

Referenced fields (KBM2)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE

Business rules

For Update or Delete Patient records
  • There must be a Base patient record with identical Reporting province/territory, Patient identification number and CCR identification number.
Edit logic (KBM2)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KBM2-1 Input patient record where IP4 IN ['2','3'] that matches a Base patient record where IP1=BP1 AND IP2<>BP2 AND IP3=BP3. Record rejected
KBM2-2 Input patient record where IP4 IN ['2','3'] that matches a Base patient record where IP1=BP1 AND IP2=BP2 AND IP3<>BP3. Record rejected
KBM2-3 Input patient record where IP4 IN ['2','3'] that matches a Base patient record where IP1<>BP1 AND IP3=BP3. Record rejected
KBM2-4 Input patient record where IP4 IN ['2','3'] that match no Base patient record where (IP1=BP1 AND IP2=BP2) OR IP3=BP3. Record rejected
Feedback report messages (KBM2)
Sub–edit Text Type
KBM2-1 Based on the CCR identification number, the Patient identification number is incorrect. Core error
KBM2-2 Based on the Reporting province/territory and the Patient identification number, the CCR identification number is incorrect. Core error
KBM2-3 Based on the CCR identification number, the Patient is owned by another province/territory. Core error
KBM2-4 No matching Patient record found in the CCR. Core error
Revision (KBM2)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.26.

KBM3

Purpose

This edit ensures that no duplicate tumour keys are posted to the CCR.

Referenced fields (KBM3)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/Territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE

Business rules

For Add Tumour records
  • There must not be a Base tumour record with an identical Reporting province/territory, Patient identification number and Tumour reference number.
Edit logic (KBM3)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KBM3-1 Input tumour record where IT5='1' that matches a Base tumour record where IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3. Record rejected
Feedback report messages (KBM3)
Sub–edit Text Type
KBM3-1 A Base tumour record with identical Reporting province/territory, Patient identification number and Tumour reference number already exists. Core error
Revision (KBM3)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.32 – Part 1.

KBM4

Purpose

This edit ensures that an add tumour record with CCR identification number matches a base patient record owned by the reporting province/territory.

Referenced fields (KBM4)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 9 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 9 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID

Business rules

For Add Tumour records with CCR identification number
  • There must be a Base patient record with the same Reporting province/territory, Patient identification number and CCR identification number.
Edit logic (KBM4)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KBM4-1 Input tumour record where IT5='1' AND IT4 IS NOT NULL that matches a Base patient record where IT1=BP1 AND IT2<>BP2 AND IT4=BP3. Record rejected
KBM4-2 Input tumour record where IT5='1' AND IT4 IS NOT NULL that matches a Base patient record where IT1=BP1 AND IT2=BP2 AND IT4<>BP3. Record rejected
KBM4-3 Input tumour record where IT5='1' AND IT4 IS NOT NULL that matches a Base patient record where IT1<>BP1 AND IT4=BP3. Record rejected
KBM4-4 Input tumour record where IT5='1' AND IT4 IS NOT NULL that matches no Base patient record where (IT1=BP1 AND IT2=BP2) OR IT4=BP3. Record rejected
Feedback report messages (KBM4)
Sub–edit Text Type
KBM4-1 Based on CCR identification number, Patient identification number is incorrect. Core error
KBM4-2 Based on Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number, CCR identification number is incorrect. Core error
KBM4-3 Based on CCR identification number, the Patient record belongs to another province/territory. Core error
KBM4-4 Matching Base patient record not found. Core error
Revision (KBM4)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.32 – Part 2 and Additional rules for updating the CCR #3.
Business rules changed: This aggregated edit is now using the Base Patient records.

KBM5

Purpose

This edit ensures that update or delete tumour record keys match a base tumour record.

Referenced fields (KBM5)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE

Business rules

For Update and Delete Tumour records
  • There must be a Base tumour record with identical Reporting province/territory, Patient identification number, Tumour reference number and CCR identification number.
Edit logic (KBM5)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
KBM5-1 Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] that matches a Base tumour record where IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3 AND IT4<>BT4. Record rejected
KBM5-2 Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] that matches a Base tumour record where IT1=BT1 AND IT2<>BT2 AND IT4=BT4. Record rejected
KBM5-3 Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] that matches no Base tumour record where IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3 but matches a Base tumour record where IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3<>BT3 AND IT4=BT4. Record rejected
KBM5-4 Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] that matches no Base tumour record where (IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2) OR (IT1=BT1 AND IT4=BT4). Record rejected
Feedback report messages (KBM5)
Sub–edit Text Type
KBM5-1 Based on Reporting province/territory, Patient identification number and Tumour reference number, CCR identification number is incorrect. Core error
KBM5-2 Based on CCR identification number and Reporting province/territory, Patient identification number is incorrect. Core error
KBM5-3 Matching Base tumour record not found. Tumour reference number may be incorrect. Core error
KBM5-4 Matching Base tumour record not found. Core error
Revision (KBM5)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.33.

3.6.3 Data item match edits

The purpose of the data item match edits is to enforce the business rules between data items (other than keys) found on different records.

The following table summarizes the purpose of each individual edit of this category.

Table 30 Data item match edits summary
Edit name Purpose
DIM1 Ensures that Date of diagnosis and Date of birth are coherent and within time frame.
DIM2 Ensures that Date of diagnosis and Date of death are coherent.
DIM3 Ensures that Method of diagnosis accurately reflects the relationship between Date of diagnosis and Date of death.
DIM4 Ensures that Method used to establish the date of diagnosis accurately reflects the relationship between Date of diagnosis and Date of death.
DIM5 Ensures that patient Sex and tumour Topography are coherent.
DIM6 Ensures that no "duplicate" tumour records are created for any given Patient record.

Important notes:

Writing conventions throughout the following edit descriptions:

  • Expression "base patient/tumour record" means a patient/tumour record already in the CCR.
  • Expression "add/update/delete/input patient/tumour record" means a patient/tumour record within the data submission.
  • Unless specified otherwise, field numbers prefixed with "I" are input fields and field numbers prefixed with "B" are Base fields.
    Example: IT5 is the Tumour record type field on an input tumour record.
    Example: IP1 is the Reporting province/territory field on an input patient record

These edits only consider input records that have neither core fatal errors nor core errors. (See section 3.1.7 Message types for information about different types of errors.) Since DIM edits find core errors, an input record that fails a given DIM edit will automatically be excluded from all subsequent DIM edits.

These edits must be performed in a specific order (see below).

When a data item match edit fails, the conflicting base record (patient or tumour, if any) is included in the detailed feedback report for easier error correction.

3.6.3.1 Special order of execution

Data item match edits must be performed horizontally. That is, all sub-edits with the same number must be processed together. Example: instead of processing all sub-edits from DIM1 before processing all sub-edits from DIM2 (vertically), all sub-edits DIMX-1 must be processed before processing sub-edits DIMX-2 (horizontally). Although the sub-edits within a horizontal group can be processed in any order, these groups of sub-edits must be processed in a very specific order.

Step 1: All sub-edits that consider only input records (Sub-edits number 1 and 4).

Step 2: All sub-edits that consider base patient records that are not updated by input patient records (Sub-edits number 2 and 5).

Step 3: All sub-edits that consider base tumour records that are not updated nor deleted by input tumour records must be processed (Sub-edit number 3 and 6).

The ordering is essential to guarantee the effectiveness of these edits since each step builds the necessary conditions for the next one. The following table summarizes the special order of execution.

Table 31 Data item match edits special order of execution
Edit DIM1 DIM2 DIM3 DIM4 DIM5 DIM6
Sub-edit 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6
Step 1 x     x     x     x     x     x     x     x     x     x    
Step 2   x     x     x     x     x     x     x     x     -     -  
Step 3     x     x     x     x     x     x     x     x     x     x

DIM1

Purpose

This edit ensures that date of diagnosis and date of birth are coherent and within time frame.

Referenced fields (DIM1)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P11 8 Date of birth PDATBIR
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12 8 Date of diagnosis TDATDIAG

Business rules

Date of diagnosis must be on or after the Date of birth.
  • Year of Date of diagnosis and year of the Date of birth must not be more than 117 yearsapart.

Important notes:

  • These sub-edits must be processed in a specific order. See Section - 3.6.3.1 Special order of execution for more details.
  • Partially known dates must be compared using the highest common level of precision.

    Example: If Date1 = YYYYMMDD and Date2 = YYYYMM99 then dates must be compared using the year and month only. Thus, for the purpose of the following sub-edits, '20031002' and '20031099' are equal.
Edit logic (DIM1)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
DIM1-1 Core error-free56 Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] that matches a Core error-free Input patient record where IP4 IN ['1','2'] AND IP1=IT1 AND IP2=IT2 AND IP11<>'99999999' AND IT12<IP11 (see note above). Tumour record rejected
DIM1-2 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4 IS NOT NULL that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP3=IT4 but matches a Base patient record where BP3=IT4 AND BP11<>'99999999' AND IT12<BP11 (see note above). Tumour record rejected
DIM1-3 Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' that matches a Base tumour record where IP3=BT4 AND IP11<>'99999999' AND BT12<IP11 (see note above) that matches no Core error-free Input Tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] AND IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3. Patient record rejected
DIM1-4 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] that matches a Core error-free Input patient record where IP4 IN ['1','2'] AND IP1=IT1 AND IP2=IT2 AND IP11<>'99999999' AND IT12.YEAR>(IP11.YEAR+117). Tumour record rejected
DIM1-5 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4 IS NOT NULL that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP3=IT4 but matches a Base Patient record where BP3=IT4 AND BP11<>'99999999' AND IT12.YEAR>(BP11.YEAR+117). Tumour record rejected
DIM1-6 Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' that matches a Base tumour record where IP3=BT4 AND IP11<>'99999999' AND BT12.YEAR>(IP11.YEAR+117) that matches no Core error-free Input Tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] AND IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3. Patient record rejected
Feedback report messages (DIM1)
Sub–edit Text Type
DIM1-1 Date of diagnosis is before Date of birth on matching Input patient record. Core error
DIM1-2 Date of diagnosis is before Date of birth on matching Base patient record. Core error
DIM1-3 Date of birth is after Date of diagnosis on matching Base tumour record. Core error
DIM1-4 Date of diagnosis is more than 117 years after Date of birth on matching Input patient record. Core error
DIM1-5 Date of diagnosis is more than 117 years after Date of birth on matching Base patient record. Core error
DIM1-6 Date of birth is more than 117 years before Date of diagnosis on matching Base tumour record. Core error
Revision (DIM1)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.28.

DIM2

Purpose

This edit ensures that date of diagnosis and date of death are coherent.

Referenced fields (DIM2)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P14 8 Date of death PDATDEA
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T12 8 Date of diagnosis TDATDIAG

Business rules

Tumour Date of diagnosis cannot be after the patient Date of death.

Important notes:

  • These sub-edits must be processed in a specific order. See Section 3.6.3.1 Special order of execution for more details.
  • Partially known dates must be compared using the highest common level of precision.

    Example: If Date1 = YYYYMMDD and Date2 = YYYYMM99 then dates must be compared using the year and month only. Thus, for the purpose of the following sub-edits, '20031002' and '20031099' are equal.
Edit logic (DIM2)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
DIM2-1 Core error-free56 Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] that matches a Core error-free Input patient record where IP4 IN ['1','2'] AND IP1=IT1 AND IP2=IT2 AND IP14 NOT IN ['99999999','00000000'] AND IP14<IT12 (see note above). Tumour record rejected
DIM2-2 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4 IS NOT NULL that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP3=IT4 but matches a Base Patient record where BP3=IT4 AND BP14 NOT IN ['99999999','00000000'] AND BP14<IT12 (see note above). Tumour record rejected
DIM2-3 Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP14 NOT IN ['99999999','00000000'] that matches a Base tumour record where IP3=BT4 AND BT12>IP14 (see note above) that matches no Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] AND IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3. Patient record rejected
Feedback report messages (DIM2)
Sub–edit Text Type
DIM2-1 Date of diagnosis is after Date of death on matching Input patient record. Core error
DIM2-2 Date of diagnosis is after Date of death on matching Base patient record. Core error
DIM2-3 Date of death is before Date of diagnosis on matching Base tumour record. Core error
Revision (DIM2)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.29.

DIM3

Purpose

This edit ensures that the method of diagnosis accurately reflects the relationship between the date of diagnosis and the date of death.

Referenced fields (DIM3)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P14 8 Date of death PDATDEA
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T11 1 Method of diagnosis TMETDIAG
T12 8 Date of diagnosis TDATDIAG
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable

Business rules

For tumours diagnosed between 1992 and 2003
  • Method of diagnosis cannot be 'Death certificate only (DCO)' or 'Autopsy' when the Date of death indicates that the 'Patient is not known to have died'.
  • Method of diagnosis can be anything when Date of death is unknown or equal to Date of diagnosis.
  • Method of diagnosis cannot be 'Death certificate only (DCO)' when Date of diagnosis is before Date of death.57

Important notes:

  • These sub-edits must be processed in a specific order. See Section 3.6.3.1 Special order of execution for more details.
  • Partially known dates must be compared using the highest common level of precision.

    Example: If Date1 = YYYYMMDD and Date2 = YYYYMM99 then dates must be compared using the year and month only. Thus, for the purpose of the following sub-edits, '20031002' and '20031099' are equal.
Edit logic (DIM3)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
DIM3-1 Core error-free56 Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT11 IN ['2','6'] AND IT12.YEAR>=1992 AND IT12.YEAR<=2003 that matches a Core error-free Input patient record where IP4 IN ['1','2'] AND IP1=IT1 AND IP2=IT2 AND IP14='00000000' Tumour record rejected
DIM3-2 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4 IS NOT NULL AND IT11 IN ['2','6'] AND IT12.YEAR>=1992 AND IT12.YEAR<=2003 that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP3=IT4 but matches a Base patient record where BP3=IT4 AND BP14='00000000' Tumour record rejected
DIM3-3 Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP14='00000000' that matches a Base tumour record where IP3=BT4 AND BT11 IN ['2','6'] AND BT12.YEAR>=1992 AND BT12.YEAR<=2003 that matches no Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] AND IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3. Patient record rejected
DIM3-4 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT11='6' AND IT12.YEAR>=1992 AND IT12.YEAR<=2003 that matches a Core error-free Input patient record where IP4 IN ['1','2'] AND IP1=IT1 AND IP2=IT2 AND IP14 NOT IN ['00000000', '99999999'] AND IP14>IT12 (see note above). Tumour record rejected
DIM3-5 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4 IS NOT NULL AND IT11='6' AND IT12.YEAR>=1992 AND IT12.YEAR<=2003 that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP3=IT4 but matches a Base patient record where BP3=IT4 AND BP14 NOT IN ['00000000', '99999999'] AND BP14>IT12 (see note above). Tumour record rejected
DIM3-6 Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP14 NOT IN ['00000000', '99999999'] that matches a Base tumour record where IP3=BT4 AND BT11='6' AND BT12.YEAR>=1992 AND BT12.YEAR<=2003 AND BT12<IP14 (see note above) that matches no Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] AND IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3. Patient record Rejected
Feedback report messages (DIM3)
Sub–edit Text Type
DIM3-1 Method of diagnosis cannot be 'Death certificate only (DCO)' or 'Autopsy' when the Date of death indicates that the 'Patient is not known to have died' on matching Input patient record. Core error
DIM3-2 Method of diagnosis cannot be 'Death certificate only (DCO)' or 'Autopsy' when the Date of death indicates that the 'Patient is not known to have died' on matching Base patient record. Core error
DIM3-3 Date of death cannot indicate that patient is alive when Method of diagnosis is 'Death certificate only (DCO)' or 'Autopsy' on a matching Base tumour record. Core error
DIM3-4 Method of Diagnosis cannot be 'Death certificate only (DCO)' when Date of diagnosis is before Date of death on matching Input patient record. Core error
DIM3-5 Method of diagnosis cannot be 'Death certificate only (DCO)' when the Date of diagnosis is before Date of death on matching Base patient record. Core error
DIM3-6 Date of death cannot be after Date of diagnosis on a matching Base tumour record where Method of diagnosis is 'Death certificate only (DCO)'. Core error
Revision (DIM3)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.30 – Part 1.

DIM4

Purpose

This edit ensures that the method used to establish the date of diagnosis accurately reflects the relationship between date of diagnosis and date of death.

Referenced fields (DIM4)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P14 8 Date of death PDATDEA
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T11 1 Method of diagnosis TMETDIAG
T12 8 Date of diagnosis TDATDIAG
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of T12 (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T24 1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis TMETHUSED

Business rules

For tumours diagnosed between 1992 and 2003
  • Method used to establish the date of diagnosis cannot be ‘Autopsy only' or ‘Death certificate only (DCO)' when Date of death indicates that the 'Patient is not known to have died' or when Date of diagnosis is before Date of death.
  • Method used to establish the date of diagnosis can be anything when Date of death is unknown or equal to Date of diagnosis.

Important notes:

  • These sub-edits must be processed in a specific order. See Section 3.6.3.1 Special order of execution for more details.
  • Partially known dates must be compared using the highest common level of precision.

    Example: If Date1 = YYYYMMDD and Date2 = YYYYMM99 then dates must be compared using the year and month only. Thus, for the purpose of the following sub-edits, '20031002' and '20031099' are equal.
Edit logic (DIM4)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
DIM4-1 Core error-free56 Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT12.YEAR>=2004 AND IT24 IN ['3','8'] that matches a Core error-free Input patient record where IP4 IN ['1','2'] AND IP1=IT1 AND IP2=IT2 AND IP14='00000000' Tumour record rejected
DIM4-2 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4 IS NOT NULL AND IT12.YEAR>=2004 AND IT24 IN ['3','8'] that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP3=IT4 but matches a Base patient record where BP3=IT4 AND BP14='00000000'. Tumour record rejected
DIM4-3 Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP14='00000000' that matches a Base tumour record where IP3=BT4 AND BT12.YEAR>=2004 AND BT24 IN ['3','8'] that matches no Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] AND IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3. Patient record rejected
DIM4-4 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT12.YEAR>=2004 AND IT24 IN ['3','8'] that matches a Core error-free Input patient record where IP4 IN ['1','2'] AND IP1=IT1 AND IP2=IT2 AND IP14 NOT IN ['00000000', '99999999'] AND IP14>IT12 (see note above). Tumour record rejected
DIM4-5 Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4 IS NOT NULL AND IT12.YEAR>=2004 AND IT24 IN ['3','8'] that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP3=IT4 but matches a Base patient record where BP3=IT4 AND BP14 NOT IN ['00000000', '99999999'] AND BP14>IT12 (see note above). Tumour record rejected
DIM4-6 Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP14 NOT IN ['00000000', '99999999'] that matches a Base tumour record where IP3=BT4 AND BT12.YEAR>=2004 AND BT12<IP14 (see note above) AND BT24 IN ['3','8'] that matches no Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] AND IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3. Patient record rejected
Feedback report messages (DIM4)
Sub–edit Text Type
DIM4-1 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis cannot be 'Autopsy Only' or 'Death certificate only (DCO)' when Date of death indicates that the 'Patient is not known to have died' on matching Input Patient record. Core error
DIM4-2 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis cannot be 'Autopsy Only' or 'Death certificate only (DCO)' when Date of death indicates that the 'Patient is not known to have died' on matching Base patient record. Core error
DIM4-3 Date of death cannot indicate that 'Patient is not known to have died' when Method used to establish the date of diagnosis is 'Autopsy Only' or 'Death certificate only (DCO)' on a matching Base tumour record. Core error
DIM4-4 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis cannot be 'Autopsy Only' or 'Death certificate only (DCO)' when Date of diagnosis is before Date of death on matching Input Patient record. Core error
DIM4-5 Method used to establish the date of diagnosis cannot be 'Autopsy Only' or 'Death certificate only (DCO)' when Date of diagnosis is before Date of death on matching Base patient record. Core error
DIM4-6 Date of death cannot be after Date of Diagnosis on matching Base tumour record where Method used to establish the date of diagnosis is 'Autopsy Only' or 'Death certificate only (DCO)' Core error
Revision (DIM4)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.30 – Part 2.

DIM5

Purpose

This edit ensures that patient sex and tumour topography are coherent.

Referenced fields (DIM5)
Field Length Description Acronym
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE
P10 1 Sex PSEX
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T

Business rules

  • Tumours diagnosed in female organ must be associated with female patient. Female organs are: ICD-O-2/3 Topography: C510-C589.
  • Tumours diagnosed in male organ must be associated with male patient. Male organs are: ICD-O-2/3 Topography: C600-C639.

Important notes

These sub-edits must be processed in a specific order. See Section – 3.6.3.1 Special order of execution.

DIM5

Edit logic (DIM5)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
DIM5-1 (Core error-free56 Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT15 IN [ICD-O-2/3 Topography codes associated to female organ] that matches a Core error-free Input patient record where IP4 IN ['1','2'] AND IP1=IT1 AND IP2=IT2 AND IP10 IN ['1','9'])
OR
(Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT15 IN [ICD-O-2/3 Topography codes associated to male organ] that matches a Core error-free Input patient record where IP4 IN ['1','2'] AND IP1=IT1 AND IP2=IT2 AND IP10 IN ['2','9'])
Tumour record rejected
DIM5-2 (Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4 IS NOT NULL AND IT15 IN [ICD-O-2/3 Topography codes associated to female organ] that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP3=IT4 but matches a Base patient record where BP3=IT4 AND BP10 IN ['1','9'])
OR
(Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4 IS NOT NULL AND IT15 IN [ICD-O-2/3 Topography codes associated to male organ] that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP3=IT4 but matches a Base patient record where BP3=IT4 AND BP10 IN ['2','9'])
Tumour record rejected
DIM5-3 (Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP10 IN ['1','9'] that matches a Base tumour record where IP3=BT4 AND BT15 IN [ICD-O-2/3 Topography codes associated to female organ] that matches no Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] AND IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3)
OR
(Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='2' AND IP10 IN ['2','9'] that matches a Base tumour record where IP3=BT4 AND BT15 IN [ICD-O-2/3 Topography codes associated to male organ] that matches no Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['2','3'] AND IT1=BT1 AND IT2=BT2 AND IT3=BT3)
Patient record Rejected
Feedback report messages (DIM5)
Sub–edit Text Type
DIM5-1 ICD-O-2/3 Topography does not agree with Sex code on matching Input patient record. Core error
DIM5-2 ICD-O-2/3 Topography does not agree with Sex code on matching Base patient record. Core error
DIM5-3 Sex code does not agree with ICD-O-2/3 Topography on a matching Base tumour record. Core error
Revision (DIM5)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as COR31.
Business rules changed: Verification is now performed on ICD-O-3 values only.

DIM6

Purpose

This edit ensures that no "duplicate" tumour records are created for any given patient record (1992-2006 data years only). As of 2007 the CCR has adopted SEER rules. New edits will be implemented to adhere to these new rules.

Referenced fields (DIM6)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T12.YEAR 4 First 4 digits of Date of diagnosis (year of date of diagnosis) Not applicable
T2 12 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 Tumour reference number TTRN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
T15 4 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T15.SITE 3 First 3 digits of T15 (ICD-O-2/3 Topography site) Not applicable
T15.SUBSITE 1 Last digit of T15 (ICD-O-2/3 Topography sub-site) Not applicable
T19 1 Laterality TLATERAL
T21 4 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H

Business rules

Definitions
  • Tumours with "equivalent topographies" are tumours that have:
    • The same ICD-O-3 sites56 and sub-sites59or
    • The same ICD-O-3 sites but at least one sub-site is 'Overlapping' (8) or 'NOS' (9) or
    • Overlapping topographies based on Equivalent Topographies for Overlapping and Unspecified Sites63 concordance table.
  • Tumours with "equivalent histologies" are tumours that have:
    • The same ICD-O-3 Histology code or
    • The same histological group based on Equivalent Histologies56 concordance table.
  • A Patient may have multiple Hematopoietic tumours (tumours with ICD-O-3 Histology codes in range 9590-9989) only if they have non-equivalent histologies. (Thus, a patient may not have more than one Hematopoietic tumour in each equivalent histology group, regardless of their respective topography and laterality.)
  • A Patient may have multiple non-Hematopoietic tumours with equivalent topographies and equivalent histologies only if they are found on paired organs with specific (right, left one side involved, origin not specified and bilateral) and different laterality.
See Appendix D – Multiple primary tumours rules for CCR for more detail.

Important notes

These sub-edits must be processed in a specific order. See Section - 3.6.3.1 Special order of execution

Edit logic DIM6)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
DIM6–1 Core error-free56 Input tumour record (say A) where A.T5 IN ['1','2'] AND A.T21 IN ['9590'-'9989'] that matches a Core error-free Input tumour record (say B) where B.T5 IN ['1','2'] AND A.T1=B.T1 AND A.T2=B.T2 AND A.T3<>B.T3 AND B.T21 IN ['9590'-'9989'] AND (A.T21=B.T21 OR (A.T21 and B.T21 are equivalent based on reference table Equivalent Histologies)). Tumour records A and B rejected
DIM6-2 Not applicable61 Not applicable
DIM6-3 Core error-free Input tumour record (say A) where A.T5 IN ['1','2'] AND A.T4 IS NOT NULL AND A.T21 IN ['9590'-'9989'] that matches a Base Tumour record (say B) where A.T4=B.T4 AND (A.T1<>B.T1 OR A.T3<>B.T3) AND B.T21 IN ['9590'-'9989'] AND (A.T21=B.T21 OR (A.T21 and B.T21 are equivalent based on reference table Equivalent Histologies)) that matches no Core error-free Input tumour record (say C) where C.T5 IN ['2','3'] AND C.T1=B.T1 AND C.T2=B.T2 AND C.T3=B.T3. Tumour record A rejected
DIM6-4 Core error-free Input tumour record (say A) where A.T5 IN ['1','2'] that matches a Core error-free Input tumour record (say B) where B.T5 IN ['1','2'] AND A.T1=B.T1 AND A.T2=B.T2 AND A.T3<>B.T3 AND NOT (A.T21 IN ['9590'-'9989'] AND B.T21 IN ['9590'-'9989']) AND (A.T15=B.T15 OR (A.T15.SITE=B.T15.SITE AND (A.T15.SUBSITE IN ['8','9'] OR B.T15.SUBSITE IN ['8','9'])) OR (A.T15 and B.T15 are equivalent based on Equivalent Topographies for Overlapping and Unspecified Sites)) AND (A.T21=B.T21 OR (A.T21 and B.T21 are equivalent based on Equivalent Histologies)) AND (A.T19 IN ['9','0'] OR B.T19 IN ['9','0'] OR A.T19=B.T19) Tumour records A and B rejected
DIM6-5 Not applicable59 Not applicable
DIM6-6 Core error-free Input tumour record (say A) where A.T5 IN ['1','2'] AND A.T4 IS NOT NULL that matches a Base tumour record (say B) where A.T4=B.T4 AND (A.T1<>B.T1 OR A.T3<>B.T3) AND NOT (A.T21 IN ['9590'-'9989'] AND NOT B.T21 IN ['9590'-'9989']) AND (A.T15=B.T15 OR (A.T15.SITE=B.T15.SITE AND (A.T15.SUBSITE IN ['8','9'] OR B.T15.SUBSITE IN ['8','9'])) OR (A.T15 and B.T15 are equivalent based on Equivalent Topographies for Overlapping and Unspecified Sites)) AND (A.T21=B.T21 OR (A.T21 and B.T21 are equivalent based on Equivalent Histologies)) AND (A.T19 IN ['9','0'] OR B.T19 IN ['9','0'] OR A.T19=B.T19) that matches no Core error-free Input Tumour record (say C) where C.T5 IN ['2','3'] AND C.T1=B.T1 AND C.T2=B.T2 AND C.T3=B.T3. Tumour record A rejected
Feedback report messages (DIM6)
Sub–edit Text Type
DIM6-1 Duplicate Input tumour records of the Hematopoietic system based on ICD-O-3 Histology. Core error
DIM6-2 Not applicable61 Not applicable
DIM6-3 Duplicates an existing Base tumour record of the Hematopoietic system based on ICD-O-3 Histology. Core error
DIM6-4 Duplicate Input tumour records based on ICD-O-3 Topography, ICD-O-3 Histology and Laterality. Core error
DIM6-5 Not applicable59 Not applicable
DIM6-6 Duplicates an existing Base tumour record based on ICD-O-3 Topography, ICD-O-3 Histology and Laterality. Core error
Revision (DIM6)
Year Description
2006 Edit no longer used (only applied for data years 1992-2006). New multiple primary/histology rules adopted.
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Correlation Edit No.34A-F.
Business rule changed: Potential duplicate tumours with unknown laterality are now rejected.
Edit logic changed to allow the addition of a Tumour record that duplicates a Base tumour record that is about to be updated or deleted.

3.6.4 Pre-posting match edits

The purpose of the pre-posting match edits is to identify core error-free4 input records that cannot be posted to the CCR because some other related input records are either missing or have core errors.

The following table summarizes the purpose of each individual edit of this category.

Table 32 Pre-posting edits summary
Edit name Purpose
PPM1 Ensures that no orphan Patient record is created in the CCR.
PPM2 Ensures that no orphan Tumour record is created in the CCR.

PPM1

Purpose

This edit ensures that no orphan patient record is created in the CCR.

Referenced fields (PPM1)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 9 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 9 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE

Business rules

Every Base patient record must have at least one Base tumour record with the same Reporting province/territory and Patient identification number and CCR identification number.
Edit logic (PPM1)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PPM1-1 Core error-free56 Input patient record where P4='1' that matches no Core error-free Input tumour record where T5='1' AND P1=T1 AND P2=T2. Patient record rejected
PPM1-2 One or more Core error-free Input tumour records with the same IT4 where IT5='3' that match no Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='3' AND IP3=IT4 and match no Core error-free Input tumour record where IT5 IN ['1','2'] AND IT4=IT4 but match a Base Patient record where IT1=BP1 AND IT4=BP3 and match as many Base tumour records where BT1=IT1 AND BT4=IT4. Tumour records rejected
Feedback report messages (PPM1)
Sub–edit Text Type
PPM1-1 Patient record cannot be added because all associated Add Tumour records have been rejected. Core error
PPM1-2 Tumour records cannot be deleted because it would create an orphan Patient record. Core error
Revision (PPM1)
Year Description
2004 Renamed: Formerly known as Additional rules for updating the CCR #2.
Business rules added: Prevent the addition of a new Patient record without Tumour record.

PPM2

Purpose

This edit ensures that no orphan tumour record is created in the CCR.

Referenced fields (PPM2)
Field Length Description Acronym
T1 2 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 9 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T4 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
T5 1 Tumour record type TRECTYPE
P1 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 9 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P4 1 Patient record type PRECTYPE

Business rules

Every Base tumour record must have one Base patient record with the same CCR identification number.
Edit logic (PPM2)
Sub–edit Conditions Outcome
PPM2-1 Core error-free56 Input tumour record where T5='1' AND T4 IS NULL that matches no Core error-free Input patient record where P4='1' AND P1=T1 AND P2=T2. Tumour record rejected
PPM2-2 Core error-free Input patient record where IP4='3' that matches less Core error-free Input tumour records where IT5='3' AND IT4=IP3 than Base tumour Record where BT1=IP1 AND BT4=IP3 Patient record rejected
Feedback report messages (PPM2)
Sub–edit Text Type
PPM2-1 Tumour record cannot be added because associated Add Patient record has been rejected. Core error
PPM2-2 Patient record cannot be deleted because not all related Base tumour records with the same Reporting province/territory have been deleted. Core error
Revision (PPM2)
Year Description
2004 Edit renamed: Formerly known as Additional rules for updating the CCR #1.
Business rules added: Prevent the addition of a new Tumour record without a Patient record.

3.7 Data posting

Description

The data posting phase is the actual registration of validated data on the CCR database. During this phase, successfully validated input records are added, updated or deleted from the CCR database in accordance with the operation specified by the PTCR on each record. Depending on the operation, a CCR identification number is generated and some derived variables are computed.

In addition to the data registration, the data posting phase also updates auxiliary tables used by other processes such as internal record linkage and death clearance. These tables are:

  • Deleted CCR ID,
  • Alternate surnames,
  • Internal Record Linkage – Don't Link Cross Reference table,
  • Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference.

The content and purpose of the above tables are described in Appendix F – Auxiliary tables

Organization

This section is organized as follow:

Data posting
Sub–section Description
3.7.1 Add Patient record processing
How Input records are processed based on the operation and the record type.
3.7.2 Add Tumour record processing
3.7.3 Update Patient record processing
3.7.4 Update Tumour record processing
3.7.5 Delete Patient record processing
3.7.6 Delete Tumour record processing
3.7.7 Patient Derived variable calculations
How patient and tumour derived variables are computed.
3.7.8 Tumour Derived variable calculations

Writing Conventions

Throughout the following pages, the prefixes "I" and "B" preceding field numbers indicate input or base fields respectively. These prefixes are used to indicate the origin of the corresponding variable in expressions.

Example: IP6 stands for P6 variable on an input record.
Example: BTD2 stands for TD2 variable on a base record

3.7.1 Add patient record processing

For each successfully validated add patient record, the following actions are conducted:

A new base patient record is created using:

  • CCR identification number (P3): A new CCR identification number (see below);
  • Core data items (P1 to -P19 except P4 – input record type): corresponding input record variables values;
  • Derived variables (PD1 to PD8): applicable patient derived variables values (see 3.7.7 patient derived variable calculations).

3.7.1.1 CCR identification number creation

The logic to create a new CCR identification number is the following:

LET
  • Today _Year4 be the year of today's date (4 digits).
  • Today_Year2 be the last two digits of the year of today's date (2 digits).
  • Last_CCRID_Year4 be the year the last CCR identification number was created (4 digits).
  • CCR_sequence_number be the numeric sequence used to create the CCR identification number (6 digits).
  • Check_Digit be a placeholder for the new CCR ID check digit (1 digit)
  • New_CCR_ID be a placeholder for the new CCR identification number (9 digits).
  • Check_Digit() be a function that returns a check digit based on the logic described in Appendix X – CCR_ID Check Digit Routine.
  • || be a string operator that concatenates two text strings together.
BEGIN
  • IF Last_CCRID_Year4 < Today_Year4THEN
  • CCR_Sequence_Number = '000000';
  • Last_CCRID_Year4 =Today _Year4;
  • End IF;
  • Check_Digit = Check_Digit (Today _Year2 || CCR_Sequence_Number)
  • New_CCR_ID = Today _Year2 || CCR_Sequence_Number ||Check_Digit
  • CCR_Sequence_Number =CCR_Sequence_Number + 1;/
  • RETURN New_CCR_ID;
END;

3.7.2 Add tumour record processing

For each add tumour record where the core data items (T1 to T26) are valid, the following actions are conducted:

A new base tumour record is created using:

  • Core data items (T1 to T26 except T5 – Input record type): corresponding input core data items;
  • CCR identification number (T4): reported CCR identification number or, if missing, the CCR identification number assigned to the corresponding new patient record (Patient record with the same reporting province/territory and patient identification number);
  • CS data items (T27 to T41 and T52):
    • If the tumour is within the CCR collaborative staging scope and the input CS data items are valid then the input CS data items are used.
    • If the tumour is within the CCR collaborative staging scope but the input CS data items are invalid then the corresponding base data items are "R" filled.
    • If the tumour is outside the CCR collaborative staging scope then NULL values are used.
  • AJCC TNM data items (T42 to T51):
    • If the tumour is within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope and the input AJCC TNM data items are valid then the input AJCC TNM data items are used.
    • If the tumour is within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope but input AJCC TNM data items are invalid then the corresponding base data items are "R" filled.
    • If the tumour is outside the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope then NULL values are used.
  • Derived data items (TD1 to TD20): applicable tumour derived variables values (see 3.7.8 Tumour derived variable calculations).

3.7.3 Update patient record processing

For each successfully validated Update patient record, the following actions are conducted:

  • Alternate surname table is updated (see below);
  • Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference table is updated (see below);
  • Corresponding base patient record is updated using:
    • Core data items (P1 to P19 except P4 – Input record type): all input record variable values,
    • Derived variables (PD1-PD8): applicable patient derived variables values (see 3.7.7 Patient derived variable calculations).

3.7.3.1 Alternate surname table update

Alternate surname table is updated as following:


Let P3 be the CCR identification number
Let P6 be the patient Current Surname
IF BP6 IS NOT NULL AND (IP6 IS NULL OR IP6 <> BP6) AND (BP3, BP6 combination NOT IN [Alternate Surname table]) THEN
BP3, BP6 combination is added to Alternate Surname table.
END IF

See Appendix F – Auxiliary Tables – Alternate surname for more details.

3.7.3.2 Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference Table Update

If a base Patient is Death-Cleared and the corresponding Input transaction resets all Death Information, the Death Confirmation is said to be Refused and the Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference Table is updated as follows;

Let P3 be the CCR Identification Number
Let P14 be the patient Date of Death
Let P15 be the patient Province/Territory or Country of Death
Let P16 be the patient Death Registration Number
Let P17 be the patient Underlying Cause of Death
Let P18 be the patient Autopsy Confirming Cause of Death
Let PD5 be the Death Clearance Status
IF (BPD5='2' AND IP14='00000000' AND IP15='000' AND IP16='000000' AND IP17='0000' AND IP18='0') THEN
BP3, BP14, BP15, BP16 combination is added to Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference table.
END IF

See Appendix F – Auxiliary Tables – Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference Table for more details.

3.7.4 Update tumour record processing

For each update tumour record where the core data items (T1 to T26) are valid, the following actions are conducted:

  • Corresponding base tumour record is updated using:

Core data items (T1 to T26 except T5 – Input record type): Corresponding input core data items;
CS data items (T27 to T41, and T52):

  • If the tumour is within the CCR collaborative staging scope and the input CS data items are valid then the input CS data items are used.
  • If the tumour is within the CCR collaborative staging scope but the input CS data items are invalid then the corresponding base data items are "R" filled.
  • If the tumour is outside the CCR collaborative staging scope then NULL values are used.

AJCC TNM data items (T42 to T51):

  • If the tumour is within the CCR AJCC TNM stagingscope and the input AJCC TNM data items are valid then the input AJCC TNM data items are used.
  • If the tumour is within the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope but input AJCC TNM data items are invalid then the corresponding base data items are "R" filled.
  • If the tumour is outside the CCR AJCC TNM staging scope then NULL values are used.

Derived data items (TD1 to TD20): applicable tumour derived variables values (see 3.7.8 Tumour derived variable calculations)

3.7.5 Delete patient record processing

For each successfully validated delete patient record, the following actions are conducted:

  • Deletion or reversal of ownership of the corresponding base patient record (see below);
  • If reversal of ownership takes place, corresponding patient derived variables are updated (See3.7.7 Patient derived variable calculations).

If true patient record deletion takes place:

  • Deleted CCR_ID table is updated (see below);
  • Alternate surname table is updated (see below);
  • Internal Record Linkage – Don't Link Cross Reference table is updated (see below);
  • Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference table is updated (see below).

3.7.5.1 Patient record deletion or reversal of ownership

A reversal of ownership is needed when a PTCR deletes a patient record but does not own all related tumours records (that is, at least one related tumour record is owned by another jurisdiction). In such case, the Patient record cannot be deleted from the database because it would otherwise create orphan tumour records. In lieu, the ownership (express by P1 – Patient Reporting Province/Territory and P2 – Patient Identification Number values) of the existing base patient record is changed to the jurisdiction that owns Patient's Last Diagnosed Tumour among remaining tumour records.

The Patient's Last Diagnosed Tumour is based on Date of Diagnosis (TDATDIAG) sorted in chronological order and the following additional rules:

When sorting in chronological order tumours based on the Date of Diagnosis, less precise dates must come before more precise dates. For example, if one tumour has a Date of Diagnosis of ‘19951099' and another tumour has a Date of Diagnosis of ‘19959999', then the tumour with the Date of Diagnosis of ‘19951099' is considered the Latest Tumour.
When two or more tumours share the same Date of Diagnosis, tumours are sorted in ascending order by Tumour Reference Number (TTRN), Health Insurance Number (THIN) and Reporting Province Code (TREPPROV) using an alphabetic comparison method63.
For example, if two tumours have the same Date of Diagnosis but one tumour has TTRN='2' and the other has a TTRN='12345', then the latest tumour will be the one with TTRN='2'.

The following box shows the conditions that need to be assessed and the action that must be performed when processing a delete patient record.


Let P1 be Patient reporting province/territory.
Let P2 be Patient Identification Number.
Let P3 be Patient CCR identification number.
Let T1 be Tumour reporting province/territory.
Let T2 be Tumour Patient Identification Number.
Let T4 be Tumour CCR identification number.
Let T12 be Tumour Date of diagnosis.
Let Patient Last Diagnosed Tumour () be a function that returns the latest diagnosed tumour based on the rules specified above.
IF [Base tumour records where BT4 = IP3 AND BT1 <> IP1] IS NOT NULL THEN
-- Reversal of Ownership: BP1 – Base patient reporting province/territory is updated.
BP1 and BP2 = BT1 and BT2 from Patient Last Diagnosed Tumour ([Base tumour record
where BT4 = IP3 AND BT1 <> IP1 AND MAX(BT12)])
ELSE
-- True Patient Deletion must take place
The corresponding Base record is deleted.
END IF

Since the corresponding base patient record is not really deleted from the CCR when a reversal of ownership occurs, the applicable patient derived variables must be updated.

3.7.5.2 Deleted CCR_ID Table update

When a true patient record deletion takes place (contrary to a reversal of ownership), a new entry in Deleted CCR_ID table must be created as following:

Deleted CCR_ID Table update
Deleted CCR_ID table variable Values
CCR identification number IP3
Reporting province/territory IP1
Patient identification number IP2
Date of Deletion Today's date using YYYYMMDD format.
New CCR_ID [blank]
Process 1

See Appendix F – Auxiliary Tables – Deleted CCR_ID for more details.

3.7.5.3 Alternate surname table update

When a true patient record deletion takes place (contrary to a reversal of ownership), all corresponding entries in the alternate surname table (if any) must be deleted as well.

See Appendix F – Auxiliary tables – Alternate surname for more details.

3.7.5.4 Internal Record Linkage – Don't Link Cross Reference Table Update

When a true Patient record deletion takes place (contrary to a reversal of ownership), all corresponding entries in the Internal Record Linkage – Don't Link Cross Reference table (if any) must be deleted as well.

See Appendix F – Auxiliary tables – IRL DLCR for more details.

3.7.5.5 Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference Table Update

When a true Patient record deletion takes place (contrary to a reversal of ownership), all corresponding entries in the Death Clearance - Don't Link Cross Reference table (if any) must be deleted as well.

See Appendix F – Auxiliary tables – DC DLCR for more details.

3.7.6 Delete tumour record processing

For each successfully validated delete tumour record, the following actions are conducted:

Deletion of the corresponding base Tumour record.

3.7.7 Patient derived variable calculations

The following table depicts how patient derived variables are calculated depending on the operation that takes place. See corresponding variable description pages in Chapter 2 for code meaning.

Table 33 Patient derived variable calculations
Operation variable Add patient Update patient Reversal of ownership (Deletepatient)
PD1 - Processing date – Patient record
Each time a Patient record is written (created or updated), the date of the transaction is saved.

PD1 = Today's date using YYYYMMDD format.
PD2 - Vital status
Not applicable: These variables are only derived for Tabulation master files. See Chapter 4 Tabulation master files for more detail.
PD3 – Number of tumours
PD4 - Death clearance cut Off date Patient never underwent Death clearance

PD4 = '00000000'
PD4 stays the same.
PD5 - Death clearance Status Patient never underwent Death clearance

PD5 = '0'
If the Patient is Death-Cleared and Patient date of death and/or province/territory/country of death and/or Death registration number is changed, then the Patient record is no longer Death-Cleared (Death Clearance Reversal)

Let P14 be the patient Date of death
Let P15 be the patient province/territory or country of death
Let P16 be the patient Death registration number
Let PD5 be the Death Clearance Status
Let PD6 be the Death Clearance Method
Let PD7 be the Death clearance underlying cause of death
Let PD8 be Date of death (Un) Confirmation
IF BPD5 = '2' AND (IP14<>BP14 OR IP15<>BP15 OR IP16<>BP16) THEN
PD5 = '3'
PD6=‘0'
PD7='0000'
PD8=Today's date using YYYMMDD format
ELSE
PD5 stays the same.
PD6 stays the same.
PD7 stays the same.
PD8 stays the same.
END IF
PD5 stays the same.

3.7.8 Tumour derived variable calculations

The following table depicts how tumour derived variables are calculated depending on the operation that takes place. See corresponding variable description pages in Chapter 2 for code meaning.

Table 34 Tumour derived variable calculations
Operation variable Add tumour Update tumour
TD1 – Processing date – Tumour record Each time a Tumour record is written (created or updated), the date of the transaction is saved.

TD1 = Today's date using YYYYMMDD format.
TD2 – Sequence number Not applicable: these variables are only derived for Tabulation master files. See Chapter 4 Tabulation master files for more detail.
TD3 – Age at diagnosis
TD4 – Age group at diagnosis
TD5 – Survival interval
TD6 – Survival censor
TD7 – Derived AJCC T
TD8 – Derived AJCC N
TD9 – Derived AJCC M
TD10 – Derived AJCC T descriptor
TD11 – Derived AJCC N descriptor
TD12 – Derived AJCC M descriptor
TD13 – Derived AJCC stage group
TD14 – Derived AJCC flag
TD15 – Derived SS1977
TD16 – Derived SS1977 flag
TD17 – Derived SS2000
TD18 – Derived SS2000 flag
TD19 – CS version latest

Chapter 4 – Tabulation master files

  • Description
  • Scope
  • Content and layout
  • Derived variables calculations
  • Confidentiality

4.1 Description

The Tabulation master file (TMF) produced from the Canadian Cancer Registry (CCR) serves as a snapshot of the entire CCR database. The resulting flat file merges the patient and tumour records from the CCR, using the unique patient record identifier (CCR identification number) to produce a composite record containing both patient and tumour information, with one record for each tumour.

The TMF is used by researchers, academics, regional health unit personnel, health policy/program planners and decision-makers, epidemiologists and public health professionals. It is provided to representatives from organizations such as Health Canada, the Public Health Agency of Canada, the Canadian Institute for Health Information, and other health-related non-government organizations in accordance with applicable legal agreements and Statistics Canada's guidelines pertaining to release of confidential information. It is created on a yearly basis or, in some instances, as warranted by operational requirements.

See http://www.statcan.ca/english/about/privact.htm section 4.5 Confidentiality

4.2 Scope

There are 2 versions of the tabulation master file, the Canadian Cancer Registry tabulation master file (CCRTMF) and the International Agency for Research on Cancer tabulation master file (IARCTMF). These two versions differ in scope as different rules for determining multiple primary neoplasms are applied.

In addition, each of the TMF can either be national (based on patients from all PTCRs) or provincial/territorial (based on patients from only one PTCR). Provincial/territorial TMFs are based on the ownership of Patient records, i.e. tumours are selected based on the reporting province or territory of its related patient record regardless of the province or territory that actually owns the tumour record itself.

4.2.1 CCRTMF – Canadian Cancer Registry tabulation master file.

Variations exist between provincial/territorial Cancer Registries in the coding practices for multiple primaries. Many registries adhere to CCR rules while others use IARC (Québec), IARC/Berg (Ontario) and SEER (Alberta from 1994) for recording tumours in their registries. Given that all cancer records submitted to the CCR are subjected to specific CCR rules for determining multiple primary tumours (see Appendix D – Multiple primary tumours rules for CCR for more details), the resulting CCRTMF consists of a mixture of IARC and CCR rules for determining multiple tumours. As of 2007 the CCR has adopted SEER rules.

4.2.2 IARCTMF – International agency for research on cancer (IARC) tabulation master file

Important note: IARCTMF implementation has changed in 2004. See Revision box at the end of this section for details.

Since not all registries follow the CCR standards, the annual release of cancer incidence and survival statistics are disseminated from STC using the IARC rules for determining multiple primary tumours for the purpose of comparability between registries over time.

All tumour records on IARCTMF have been selected from the CCR according to IARC coding rules for determining multiple primary tumours as specified by the IARC/IACR's Working Groups' Recommendations for coding Multiple Primaries. The International Classification of Diseases for Oncology – Third Edition outlines the rules as follows:

A working party of IARC recommended definitions of multiple neoplasms for the purpose of incidence reporting for international comparison. Their recommendations are:
  1. Recognition of the existence of two or more primary cancers does not depend on time.
  2. A primary cancer is one that originates in a primary site or tissue and is neither an extension, nor a recurrence, nor a metastasis.
  3. Only one tumour shall be recognized as arising in an organ or pair of organs or tissue. For tumours where site is coded by the first edition of ICD-O (or by ICD-9), an organ or tissue is defined by the three-character category of the topography code.

    ICD-1O and the Second and Third editions of ICD-O have a more detailed set of topography codes. The sites covered by some groups of codes are considered to be a single organ for the purposes of defining multiple tumours. These topography code groups are shown in Table 24*.

    Multifocal tumours – that is, discrete masses apparently not in continuity with other primary cancers originating in the same primary site or tissue, for example bladder – are counted as a single cancer.

    Skin cancer presents a special problem as the same individual may have many such neoplasms over a lifetime. The IARC/IACR rules imply that only the first tumour of a defined histological type, anywhere on the skin, is counted as an incident cancer unless, for example, one primary was a malignant melanoma and the other a basal cell carcinoma.
  4. Rule 3 does not apply in two circumstances: 4.1. For systemic or multicentric cancers potentially involving many discrete organs, four histological groups – lymphomas, leukemias, Kaposi sarcoma, and mesothelioma (groups 7, 8, 9 and 10 in Table 25*) – are included. They are counted only once in any individual.
    4.2. Other specific histologies – groups 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, and 11 in Table 25 – are considered to be different for the purpose of defining multiple tumours. Thus, a tumour in the same organ with a ‘different' histology is counted as a new tumour. Groups 5 and 12 include tumours that have not been satisfactorily typed histologically and cannot therefore be distinguished from the other groups.
- Source International Classification of Diseases for Oncology – Third Edition, page 35

"* "Table 24" and "Table 25" are reproduced on the following pages.

Table 24 Groups of topography codes from ICD-O-2 and ICD-O-3 considered a single site in the definition of multiple cancers
ICD–O–2/3 Topography codes Description
C01 Base of tongue
C02 Other and unspecified parts of tongue
C05 Palate
C06 Other and unspecified parts of mouth
C07 Parotid gland
C08 Other and unspecified major salivary glands
C09 Tonsil
C10 Oropharynx
C12 Pyriform sinus
C13 Hypopharynx
C23 Gallbladder
C24 Other and unspecified parts of biliary tract
C30 Nasal cavity and middle ear
C31 Accessory sinus
C33 Trachea
C34 Bronchus and lung
C37 Thymus
C38.0 Heart
C38.1-.3 Mediastinum
C38.8 Overlapping lesion of heart, mediastinum and pleura
C38.4 Pleura (visceral, parietal, NOS)
C51 Vulva
C52 Vagina
C57.7 Other specified female genital organs
C57.8-.9 Unspecified female genital organs
C56 Ovary
C57.0 Fallopian tube
C57.1 Broad ligaments
C57.2 Round ligament
C57.3 Parametrium
C57.4 Uterine adnexa
C60 Penis
C63 Other and unspecified male genital organs
C64 Kidney
C65 Renal pelvis
C66 Ureter
C68 Other and unspecified urinary organs
C74 Adrenal gland
C75 Other endocrine glands and related structures
Source: THE SEER PROGRAM CODING AND STAGING MANUAL 2004, Fourth Edition, January 2004, page 9, Surveillance Research Program Division Of Cancer Control And Population Sciences, National Cancer Institute, U.S. Department Of Health And Human Services.
Table 25 Groups of malignant neoplasms considered to be histologically "different" for the purpose of defining multiple tumours (adapted from Berg, 1994)
Group Description ICD-O-3 Histology codes
1 Squamous carcinomas 805 to 808, 812, 813
2 Basal cell carcinomas 809 to 811
3 Adenocarcinomas 814, 816, 819 to 822, 826to 833, 835 to 855, 857, 894
4 Other specific carcinomas 803, 804, 815, 817 to 818, 823 to 825, 834, 856, 858 to 867
(5) Unspecified carcinomas (NOS) 801, 802
6 Sarcomas and soft tissue tumours 868 to 871, 880 to 892, 899, 904, 912 to 913, 915 to 925, 937, 954 to 958
7 Lymphomas 959 to 972
8 Leukemia 980 to 994, 995, 996, 998
9 Kaposi sarcoma 914
10 Mesothelioma 905
11 Other specified types ofcancer 872 to 879, 893, 895 to 898, 900 to 903, 906 to 911, 926 to 936, 938 to 953, 973 to 975, 976
(12) Unspecified types of cancer 800, 997
Source: INTERNATIONAL CLASSIFICATION OF DISEASES FOR ONCOLOGY, Third Edition, 2000, page 37, World Health Organization.

Based on the above rules and tables, the following algorithm is used to eliminate duplicate tumours from the IARC tabulation master files.

Table 35 Algorithm used to eliminate duplicate tumours from IARC TMF

Definitions
Site: Identified by the 3 first digits of the ICD-O-2 Topography code.
Topography Group: See Table 24.
Histology Group: See Table 25.
Systemic and Multicentric groups: 7, 8, 9, 10
Non-Systemic and Non-Multicentric groups: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 11, 12
Specific Histology groups: 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 11
Non-Specific Histology groups: 5, 12
Rule 1: When there is more than one tumour in a subset, keep the tumour with the earliest Date of Diagnosis. If more than one tumour has the same Date of Diagnosis, then the tumour with the lowest TTRN, TPIN and TREPPROV is kept.
Logic
For a given patient with more than one tumour:
For Systemic and Multicentric Tumours:
Eliminate duplicate tumours in each Systemic and Multicentric Group using Rule1(regardless of the Site).
For Non-Systemic and Non-Multicentric Tumours:
Eliminate duplicate tumours within the same Site and same Specific Histology group using Rule1;
Eliminate duplicate tumours within the same Site and any Non-Specific Histology group using Rule1;
Eliminate all tumours within Non-Specific Histology groups when there is at least one tumour within Specific Histology groups for the same Site;
Eliminate duplicate tumours within the same Topography group and same Specific Histology group using Rule 1;
Eliminate duplicate tumours within the same Topography group and any Non-Specific Histology group using Rule 1;
Eliminate all tumours within Non-Specific Histology groups when there is at least one tumour within Specific Histology groups for the same Topography group

When a patient has only two tumours, it may be easier to use the following decision tree instead of the above algorithm to assess if tumours are duplicates. When a patient has more than two tumours, the above algorithm must always be used to eliminate duplicate tumours since the decision tree does not indicate the order in which to process tumours pairs which in turn may lead to incorrect results.

Figure 1 Decision tree to assess if two tumours are duplicates based on IARC rules

Figure 1 Decision tree to assess if two tumours are duplicates based on IARC rules
Revision (Description)
Year Description
2007 Table 24 changed:Topography group added: C38.4
2004 Table 24 changed: The latest SEER "Table 24" definition has been implemented.

Topography groups removed: C19, C20; C40, C41;

Topography groups added: C37, C38.0-3 and C38.8; C51, C52, C57.7 and C57.8-9; C56 and C57.0-4;

Algorithm changed:

Systemic and Multicentric tumours: IARC criteria are applied regardless of the CCR Multiple Primary rules.

Duplicate tumours within the same Histology group and with the same Date of Diagnosis: In this case, only the tumour with the lowest Tumour Reference Number, Patient identification number and Reporting Province/Territory Code is kept. This was needed to guarantee that the tumour selected is always the same when the Date of Diagnosis is the same for all tumours.

Histology group 5 vs 12: These two groups are now considered the same for the purpose of finding duplicate tumours.

Specific Histology groups vs Non-Specific Histology groups: A condition has been added to deal with duplicate tumours from different Histology groups where specific and non-specific histologies have been reported. In this case, only tumours with specific histology are kept, regardless of the Date of Diagnosis.

4.3 Content and layout

The TMF includes all variables on the patient and tumour records as provided by PTCRs (except for Fields P4 and T5, the patient and tumour record types) plus additional variables that are derived from the input variables or brought in from other sources by the CCR. (See Chapter 2 Data dictionary for more information about each variable.)

The record layout for both CCR and IARC tabulation master files is as follows.

Table 36 TMF record layout
Field Length Position Description Acronym
P1 2 1 - 2 Patient reporting province/territory PREPPROV
P2 12 3 - 14 Patient identification number PPIN
P3 9 15 - 23 CCR identification number CCR_ID
P5 1 24 - 24 Type of Current surname PTYP_CUR
P6 25 25 - 49 Current surname PCURSNAM
P7 15 50 - 64 First given name PGNAME_1
P8 15 65 - 79 Second given name PGNAME_2
P9 7 80 - 86 Third given name PGNAME_3
P10 1 87 - 87 Sex PSEX
P11 8 88 - 95 Date of birth PDATBIR
P12 3 96 - 98 Province/territory or country of birth PPROVBIR
P13 25 99 - 123 Birth surname PBIRNAM
P14 8 124 - 131 Date of death PDATDEA
P15 3 132 - 134 Province/territory or country of death PPROVDEA
P16 6 135 - 140 Death registration number PDEAREG
P17 4 141 - 144 Underlying cause of death PCAUSDEA
P18 1 145 - 145 Autopsy confirming cause of death PAUTOPSY
P19 8 146 - 153 Patient date of transmission PDATTRAN
PD1 8 154 - 161 Processing date – patient record PDCCRDATPROC
PD2 1 162 - 162 Vital status PDCCRVITALST
PD3 2 163 - 164 Number of tumours PDCCRNBRTMRS
PD4 8 165 - 172 Death clearance cut off date PDDCDATCO
PD5 1 173 - 173 Death clearance status PDDCSTAT
PD6 1 174 - 174 Death clearance method PDDCMETH
PD7 4 175 - 178 Death clearance underlying cause of death PDDCUCD
PD8 8 179 - 186 Date of death (Un) confirmation PDDCDATCN
T1 2 187 - 188 Tumour reporting province/territory TREPPROV
T2 12 189 - 200 Tumour patient identification number TPIN
T3 9 201 - 209 Tumour reference number TTRN
T6 25 210 - 234 Name of place of residence TPLACRES
T7 6 235 - 240 Postal code TPOSTCOD
T8 7 241 - 247 Standard geographic code TCODPLAC
T9 9 248 - 256 Census tract TCENTRAC
T10 15 257 - 271 Health insurance number THIN
T11 1 272 - 272 Method of diagnosis TMETHDIAG
T12 8 273 - 280 Date of diagnosis TDATDIAG
T13 4 281 - 284 ICD-9 cancer code TICD_9
T14 1 285 - 285 Source classification flag TSCF
T15 4 286 - 289 ICD-O-2/3 Topography TICD_O2T
T16 4 290 - 293 ICD-O-2 Histology TICD_O2H
T17 1 294 - 294 ICD-O-2 Behaviour TICD_O2B
T19 1 295 - 295 Laterality TLATERAL
T21 4 296 - 299 ICD-O-3 Histology TICD_O3H
T22 1 300 - 300 ICD-O-3 Behaviour TICD_O3B
T23 1 301 - 301 Grade, differentiation or cell indicator TGRADE
T24 1 302 - 302 Method used to establish date of diagnosis TMETHUSED
T25 1 303 - 303 Diagnostic confirmation TMETHCONF
T26 8 304 - 311 Tumour date of transmission TDATTRAN
T27 3 312 - 314 CS tumour size TCSTSIZE
T28 2 315 - 316 CS extension TCSEXTN
T29 1 317 - 317 CS tumour size/ext eval TCSEVAL
T30 2 318 - 319 CS lymph nodes TCSLNODE
T31 1 320 - 320 CS reg nodes eval TCSRNEVAL
T32 2 321 - 322 Regional nodes examined TCSRNEXAM
T33 2 323 - 324 Regional nodes positive TCSRNPOS
T34 2 325 - 326 CS mets at dx TCSMDIAG
T35 1 327 - 327 CS mets Eval TCSMEVAL
T36 3 328 - 330 CS site-specific factor 1 TCSSSF1
T37 3 331 - 333 CS site-specific factor 2 TCSSSF2
T38 3 334 - 336 CS site-specific factor 3 TCSSSF3
T39 3 337 - 339 CS site-specific factor 4 TCSSSF4
T40 3 340 - 342 CS site-specific factor 5 TCSSSF5
T41 3 343 - 345 CS site-specific factor 6 TCSSSF6
T42 9 346 - 354 AJCC clinical T TAJCCCLINT
T43 3 355 - 357 AJCC clinical N TAJCCCLINN
T44 3 358 - 360 AJCC clinical M TAJCCCLINM
T45 9 361 - 369 AJCC pathologic T TAJCCPATHT
T46 6 370 - 375 AJCC pathologic N TAJCCPATHN
T47 3 376 - 378 AJCC pathologic M TAJCCPATHM
T48 4 379 - 382 AJCC clinical TNM stage group TAJCCCLINSG
T49 4 383 - 386 AJCC pathologic TNM stage group TAJCCPATHSG
T50 4 387 - 390 AJCC TNM stage group TAJCCSG
T51 2 391 - 392 AJCC TNM edition number TAJCCEDNUM
TD1 8 393 - 400 Processing date – tumour record TDCCRDATPROC
TD2 2 401 - 402 Sequence number TDCCRSEQNUM
TD3 3 403 - 405 Age at diagnosis TDCCRAGEDIAG
TD4 2 406 - 407 Age group at diagnosis TDCCRAGEGRP
TD5 5 408 - 412 Survival interval TDDCSURVINT
TD6 1 413 - 413 Survival censor TDDCCENSOR
TD7 2 414 - 415 Derived AJCC T TDCSAJCCT
TD8 2 416 - 417 Derived AJCC N TDCSAJCCN
TD9 2 418 - 419 Derived AJCC M TDCSAJCCM
TD10 1 420 - 420 Derived AJCC T descriptor TDCSAJCCTDESC
TD11 1 421 - 421 Derived AJCC N descriptor TDCSAJCCNDESC
TD12 1 422 - 422 Derived AJCC M descriptor TDCSAJCCMDESC
TD13 2 423 - 424 Derived AJCC stage group TDCSAJCCSG
TD14 1 425 - 425 Derived AJCC flag TDCSAJCCF
TD15 1 426 - 426 Derived SS1977 TDCSSS1977
TD16 1 427 - 427 Derived SS1977 flag TDCSSS1977F
TD17 1 428 - 428 Derived SS2000 TDCSSS2000
TD18 1 429 - 429 Derived SS2000 flag TDCSSS2000F
T52 6 430 - 435 CS version 1st TCSFVER
TD19 6 436 - 441 CS version latest TDCSLVER
T53 1 442 - 442 Ambiguous Terminology Diagnosis TAMBIGTERM
T54 8 443 - 450 Date of conclusive diagnosis TDATCONCLUSDIAG
T55 2 451 - 452 Type of multiple tumours reported as one primary TMULTTUMONEPRIM
T56 8 453 - 460 Date of multiple tumours TDATMULT
T57 2 461 - 462 Multiplicity counter TMULTCOUNT
Revision (Content and layout)
Year Description
2008 Addition of T53 to T57
2007 Addition of T52, deletion of TD20

4.4 Derived variable calculations

Most of the derived variables found on the tabulation master file are used and updated by the CCR System main processes (namely data loading, internal record linkage and death clearance process). Thus, these variables are already available at tabulation master file (TMF) creation time and do not need to be recalculated. Variables that are not used by the CCR System main processes must be derived at TMF creation time. The following table shows which variables are derived at TMF creation time and their respective calculation specification.

Table 37 Derived variable calculations at TMF time
Variable Value
PD2 – Vital status  Let P14 be the patient Date of death

IF P14 = ‘00000000' THEN
PD2 = ‘1'
ELSE
PD2 = ‘2'
End IF
PD3 – Number of tumours PD3 = Patient's total number of tumours within the applicable TMF scope.
TD2 – Sequence number For a given CCR identification number and TNM scope, tumours are numbered from 1 to N in chronologic order based on the Date of diagnosis. If two or more tumours share the same Date of diagnosis, then tumours are ordered by Reporting province/territory and Tumour reference number in ascending order.

TD2 = Sequence number based on the above definition.
TD3 – Age at diagnosis If the Patient date of birth is unknown, then Age at diagnosis cannot be calculated. Otherwise, Age at diagnosis is calculated using Patient date of birth and the tumour Date of diagnosis.

Let INTERVAL_YEARS (Date1, Date2) be a function that returns the number of complete years between Date1 and Date2 as described in Appendix E – Interval and Mean Time Between Dates.
Let P11 be the corresponding Patient date of birth.
Let T12 be the Tumour date of diagnosis.

IF P11 = '99999999' THEN
TD3 = 999
ELSE
TD3 = INTERVAL_YEARS (P11, T12)
END IF
TD4 – Age group at diagnosis TD4 = Corresponding age group based on TD3 value. (See TD4 – Specified values and meaning.)
TD5 – Survival interval
TD6 – Survival censor
If the Patient never underwent Death clearance process; or the Date of diagnosis is after Death clearance cut-off date; or the Method of diagnosis is Death certificate only; or the Method of diagnosis is Autopsy and there is no clear evidence of a positive survival; or the Method used to establish the date of diagnosis is Autopsy or Death certificate only, then the Survival interval is not applicable.
If Survival interval is applicable but Date of death is unknown, then the Survival interval cannot be calculated.
If Survival interval is applicable but the Patient is not known to have died or died after the Death clearance cut-off date, then the Survival interval is calculated using Death clearance cut off date.
If the Survival interval is applicable and the patient died before or on the Death clearance cut-off date, then the Survival interval is calculated using Date of death.

Let INTERVAL_DAYS (Date1, Date2) be a function that returns the number of days between Date1 and Date2 as described in Appendix E – Interval and Mean Time Between Dates.
Let T11 be the Tumour method of diagnosis.
Let T12 be the Tumour date of diagnosis.
Let T24 be the Tumour method used to establish the date of diagnosis.
Let PD4 be the corresponding Patient death clearance cut-off date.
Let P14 be the corresponding Patient Date of death.

IF PD4 = '00000000'
OR T12.YEAR > PD4.YEAR
OR T11 = '6'
OR (T11 = '2' AND P14 = '99999999')
OR (T11 = '2' AND T12.YEAR = P14.YEAR AND (T12.MONTH = '99' OR P14.MONTH = '99'))
OR (T11 = '2' AND T12.YEAR = P14.YEAR AND T12.MONTH = P14.MONTH AND (T12.DAY = '99' OR P14.DAY = '99'))
OR T24 IN ['3', '8'] THEN
TD5 = 99998
TD6 = '0'
ELSE IF P14 = '99999999' THEN
TD5 = 99999
TD6 = '0'
ELSE IF P14 = '00000000' OR P14.YEAR > PD4.YEAR THEN
TD5 = INTERVAL_DAYS (T12, PD4)
TD6 = '2'
ELSE
TD5 = INTERVAL_DAYS (T12, P14)
TD6 = '1'
END IF
TD7 – Derived AJCC T Values returned by the recommended version of the AJCC CS algorithm based on CS Input variables and tumour ICD-O-2/3 Topography and ICD-O-3 Histology.
TD8 – Derived AJCC N
TD9 – Derived AJCC M
TD10 – Derived AJCC T descriptor
TD11 – Derived AJCC N descriptor
TD12 – Derived AJCC M descriptor
TD13 – Derived AJCC stage group
TD14 – Derived AJCC flag
TD15 – Derived SS1977
TD16 – Derived SS1977 flag
TD17 – Derived SS2000
TD18 – Derived SS2000 flag
TD19 – CS version latest
Revision (Derived variable calculations)
Year Description
2007 PD2 – Vital Status is now derived at TMF time

4.5 Confidentiality

In order to respect confidentiality agreements, three different filtering options may be applied to the tabulation master files.

  • No filtering: No fields are hidden. This TMF is used to return data to reporting PTCR and for authorized record linkage activities.
  • No name: All names and Health insurance number fields are hidden. This TMF is used for NAACCR submission.
  • No name, No key: All names, Health insurance number and patient identification number fields are hidden. This TMF is used for dissemination.

The following table explicitly lists which fields are hidden by the different confidentiality filters.

Table 38 Hidden fields on filtered tabulation master files
Sensitive Field Filtering Option
No Filtering No Name No Name, No Key
P2 – Patient Identification Number - - Hidden
P6 – Current Surname - Hidden Hidden
P7 – First Given Name - Hidden Hidden
P8 – Second Given Name - Hidden Hidden
P9 – Third Given Name - Hidden Hidden
P13 – Birth Surname - Hidden Hidden
T2 – Tumour Patient Identification Number - - Hidden
T10 – Health Insurance Number - Hidden Hidden

In order to keep the same record layout for all Tabulation Master Files, hidden fields are simply filled with 'X'.

Appendices

Appendix C – AJCC TNM reference tables
Appendix D – Multiple primary tumours rules for CCR
Appendix E – Interval and mean time between dates
Appendix F – Auxiliary tables
Appendix G – Grade, differentiation or cell indicator guidelines (for T23)
Appendix H – CCR Ambiguous Terms (for T12 and T53)
Appendix I – Guidelines for Abstracting and Determining Death Certificate Only (DCO) Cases for
Provincial/Territorial Cancer Registries (PTCRs) in Canada (for T12 and P18)
Appendix J – Internal between two dates (complete or partial)
Appendix T – Residency guidelines in Canada (for T1, T6, P1)
Appendix X – CCR_ID check digit routine
Appendix Z – References

Appendix C – AJCC TNM reference tables

This appendix describes all AJCC TNM reference tables, namely:

  • Valid AJCC clinical T by site;
  • Valid AJCC clinical N by site;
  • Valid AJCC clinical M by site;
  • Valid AJCC pathologic T by site;
  • Valid AJCC pathologic N by site;
  • Valid AJCC pathologic M by site;
  • Valid AJCC clinical TNM stage group by site;
  • Valid AJCC pathologic TNM stage group by site;
  • Valid AJCC TNM stage group by site;
  • Valid AJCC T, N, M and stage group combination by site

Valid AJCC clinical T by site

Table usage notes:

See Chapter 1 for a complete description of each eligible site in terms of topography, histology and behaviour.

Table 39 Valid AJCC clinical T by stageable site
Breast Prostate Colorectal
TX TX TX
T0 T0 T0
Tis -- Tis
TisDCIS -- --
TisLCIS -- --
TisPagets -- --
T1 T1 T1
T1mic -- --
T1a T1a --
T1b T1b --
T1c T1c --
T2 T2 T2
-- T2a --
-- T2b --
-- T2c --
T3 T3 T3
-- T3a --
-- T3b --
T4 T4 T4
T4a -- --
T4b -- --
T4c -- --
T4d -- --
99 99 99

Valid AJCC clinical N by site

Table usage notes:

See Chapter 1 for a complete description of each stageable site in terms of topography, histology and behaviour.

Table 40 Valid AJCC clinical N by stageable site
Breast Prostate Colorectal
NX NX NX
N0 N0 N0
N1 N1 N1
N2 -- N2
N2a -- --
N2b -- --
N3 -- --
N3a -- --
N3b -- --
N3c -- --
99 99 99

Valid AJCC clinical M by site

Table usage notes:

See Chapter 1 for a complete description of each stageable site in terms of topography, histology and behaviour.

Table 41 Valid AJCC clinical M by stageable site
Breast Prostate Colorectal
MX MX MX
M0 M0 M0
M1 M1 M1
-- M1a --
-- M1b --
-- M1c --
99 99 99

Valid AJCC pathologic T by site

Table usage notes:

See Chapter 1 for a complete description of each stageable site in terms of topography, histology and behaviour.

Table 42 Valid AJCC pathologic T by stageable site
Breast Prostate Colorectal
TX TX TX
T0 -- T0
Tis -- Tis
TisDCIS -- --
TisLCIS -- --
TisPagets -- --
T1 -- T1
T1mic -- --
T1a -- --
T1b -- --
T1c -- --
T2 T2 T2
-- T2a --
-- T2b --
-- T2c --
T3 T3 T3
-- T3a --
-- T3b --
T4 T4 T4
T4a -- --
T4b -- --
T4c -- --
T4d -- --
99 99 99

Valid AJCC pathologic N by site

See Chapter 1 for a complete description of each stageable site in terms of topography, histology and behaviour.

Table 43 Valid AJCC pathologic N by stageable site
Breast Prostate Colorectal
NX NX NX
N0 N0 N0
N0i- -- --
N0i+ -- --
N0mol- -- --
N0mol+ -- --
N1 N1 N1
N1mi -- --
N1a -- --
N1b -- --
N1c -- --
N2 -- N2
N2a -- --
N2b -- --
N3 -- --
N3a -- --
N3b -- --
N3c -- --
99 99 99

Valid AJCC pathologic M by site

Table usage notes:

See Chapter 1 for a complete description of each stageable site in terms of topography, histology and behaviour.

Table 44 Valid AJCC pathologic M by stageable site
Breast Prostate Colorectal
MX MX MX
M0 M0 M0
M1 M1 M1
-- M1a --
-- M1b --
-- M1c --
99 99 99

Valid AJCC clinical TNM stage group by site

Table usage notes:

See Chapter 1 for a complete description of each stageable site in terms of topography, histology and behaviour.

Table 45 Valid AJCC TNM clinical stage group by stageable site
Breast Prostate Colorectal
X X X
0 -- 0
I I I
-- II --
IIA -- IIA
IIB -- IIB
-- III --
IIIA -- IIIA
IIIB -- IIIB
IIIC -- IIIC
IV IV IV
99 99 99

Valid AJCC pathologic TNM stage group by site

Table usage notes:

See Chapter 1 for a complete description of each stageable site in terms of topography, histology and behaviour.

Table 46 Valid AJCC TNM pathologic stage group by stageable site
Breast Prostate Colorectal
X X X
0 -- 0
I I I
-- II --
IIA -- IIA
IIB -- IIB
-- III --
IIIA -- IIIA
IIIB -- IIIB
IIIC -- IIIC
IV IV IV
99 99 99

Valid AJCC TNM stage group by site

Table usage notes:

See Chapter 1 for a complete description of each stageable site in terms of topography, histology and behaviour.

Table 47 Valid AJCC TNM stage group by stageable site
Breast Prostate Colorectal
0 -- 0
I I I
II61 II II61
IIA -- IIA
IIB -- IIB
III61 III III61
IIIA -- IIIA
IIIB -- IIIB
IIIC -- IIIC
IV IV IV
99 99 99

Valid AJCC T, N, M and stage group combination by site

Table usage notes

  • The following tables assess the validity of the T, N, M and stage group values combination. They can be used to assess either clinical or pathologicvalues.
  • TNM values in the tables include all their sub-values. Thus, the expression ‘T1' includes {T1, T1a, T1b, T1is...}. The actual list of included values depends on the site.
  • In the context of the CCR System, the expression ‘Any T' or ‘Any N' include all their respective sub-values and the value ‘99'. Thus, the expression ‘Any N' includes {99, NX, N0, N1, N1a...}
Table 48 Valid AJCC T, N, M and stage group combination for colorectal sites
Stage Group T N M
0 Tis N0 M0
I T1 N0 M0
I T2 N0 M0
IIA T3 N0 M0
IIB T4 N0 M0
IIIA T1 N1 M0
IIIA T2 N1 M0
IIIB T3 N1 M0
IIIB T4 N1 M0
IIIC Any T N2 M0
IV Any T Any N M1
Table 49 Valid AJCC T, N, M and stage group combination for breast sites
Stage group T N M
0 Tis N0 M0
I T1 N0 M0
IIA T0 N1 M0
IIA T1 N1 M0
IIA T2 N0 M0
IIB T2 N1 M0
IIB T3 N0 M0
IIIA T0 N2 M0
IIIA T1 N2 M0
IIIA T2 N2 M0
IIIA T3 N1 M0
IIIA T3 N2 M0
IIIB T4 N0 M0
IIIB T4 N1 M0
IIIB T4 N2 M0
IIIC Any T N3 M0
IV Any T Any N M1
Table 50 Valid AJCC T, N, M and stage group combination for prostate sites
Stage group T N M
I T1a N0 M0
II T1a N0 M0
II T1b N0 M0
II T1c N0 M0
II T2 N0 M0
III T3 N0 M0
IV T4 N0 M0
IV Any T N1 M0
IV Any T Any N M1

This table has been slightly modified from the AJCC cancer staging manual, 6,th Edition since the CCR system does not consider the grade when validating the stage group and T, N, M values combination

Revision (Valid AJCC T, N, M and stage group combination by site)
Year Description
2008 Table 50: updated Stage group II with T1a, T1b and T1c

Appendix D – Multiple primary tumours rules for CCR

As of 2007 the CCR has adopted SEER rules. New edits will be implemented to adhere to these new rules.

Figure 2 Decision tree to assess CCR Multiple primary tumours

Figure 2 Decision tree to assess CCR Multiple primary tumours

Appendix E – Interval and mean time between dates

The following algorithm can be used to assess the number of days or complete years between two dates. When both dates are complete, the algorithm returns the exact number of days or complete years between the two dates. When one or both dates are partial, the mean number of days or complete years between the two dates is returned. This algorithm cannot be used if one or both dates are totally unknown, i.e. equal to '99999999'. The returned value is always a positive whole number (including zero).

Definitions

Let Date1 and Date2 be the two dates from which the interval must be calculated and where Date1 <= Date2.

Let Y1, M1 and D1 be the year, month and day of date1.
Let Y2, M2 and D2 be the year, month and day of date2.
Let MOD (X, Y) be a function that returns the remainder of X divided by Y.
Let MIDDLE_DAY (Month) be a function that returns the middle day of month using the following logic:

If Month='02' Then
Return '15'
Otherwise
Return '16'

Let LAST_DAY (Year, Month) be a function that returns the last day of the month for the specified year using the following logic:

If Month='02' Then
If (MOD(Y2,4)=0 AND MOD(Y2,100)<>0) OR (MOD(Y2,4)=0 AND MOD(Y2,400)=0) Then
Return '29'
Else
Return '28'
Else If Month in ('04','06','09','11') Then
Return '30'
Else
Return '31'

Let MONTH_BETWEEN (Date1, Date2) be a function that returns the number of months between date1 and date2. If date1 is later than date2, then the result is positive. If date1 is earlier than date2, then the result is negative. If date1 and date2 are either the same days of the month or both last days of months, then the result is always a whole number. Otherwise a fractional portion of the result based on a 31-day month is also added.

Algorithm (Appendix E – Interval and mean time between dates)
Number of days between Date1 and Date2 Number of years between Date1 and Date2
Based on unknown date components and existing conditions between Date1 and Date2, found the right expression to compute the number of days between Date1 and Date2 using the following table.
Evaluate the expression.
Return rounded result.
Based on unknown date components and existing conditions between Date1 and Date2, found the right expression to compute the number complete years between Date1 and Date2 using the following table.
Evaluate the expression.
Return truncated result.
Table 51 Interval and mean time between dates calculation
Unknown date components Conditions Number of days between Date1 and Date2 Number of years between Date1 and Date2
None None Y2/M2/D2 - Y1/M1/D1 MONTH_BETWEEN (Y2/M2/D2, Y1/M1/D1) / 12
D1 Y1=Y2 AND M1=M2 ½ * (Y2/M2/D2 - Y1/M1/01) 0
Otherwise Y2/M2/D2 - Y1/M1/MIDDLE_DAY(M1) MONTH_BETWEEN (Y2/M2/D2, Y1/M1/MIDDLE_DAY(M1)) / 12
D2 Y1=Y2 AND M1=M2 ½ * (Y2/M2/LAST_DAY(Y2,M2) - Y1/M1/D1) 0
Otherwise Y2/M2/MIDDLE_DAY(M2) - Y1/M1/D1 MONTH_BETWEEN (Y2/M2/MIDDLE_DAY(M2), Y1/M1/D1) / 12
D1, D2 Y1=Y2 AND M1=M2 ½ * (Y2/M2/LAST_DAY(Y2,M2) - Y1/M1/MIDDLE_DAY(M1)) [~ 7]
Note: Given the small difference between all possible cases, 7 can be used for all cases.
Case 1: there are 31 days in M1: (31-16)/2=7,5
Case 2: there are 30 days in M1: (30-16)/2=7
Case 3: there are 29 days in M1: (29-15)/2=7
Case 4: there are 28 days in M1: (28-15)/2=6,5
0
Otherwise Y2/M2/MIDDLE_DAY(M2) - Y1/M1/MIDDLE_DAY(M1) MONTH_BETWEEN (Y2/M2/MIDDLE_DAY(M2), Y1/M1/MIDDLE_DAY(M1)) / 12
M1, D1 Y1=Y2 ½ * (Y2/M2/D2 - Y1/01/01) 0
Y1<Y2 Y2/M2/D2 - Y1/07/02 MONTH_BETWEEN (Y2/M2/D2, Y1/07/02) / 12
M2, D2 Y1=Y2 ½ * (Y2/12/31 - Y1/M1/D1) 0
Y1<Y2 Y2/07/02 - Y1/M1/D1 MONTH_BETWEEN (Y2/07/02, Y1/M1/D1) / 12
D1, M2, D2 Y1=Y2 ½ * (Y2/12/31 - Y1/M1/MIDDLE_DAY(M1)) 0
Y1<Y2 Y2/07/02 - Y1/M1/MIDDLE_DAY(M1) MONTH_BETWEEN (Y2/07/02, Y1/M1/MIDDLE_DAY(M1)) / 12
M1, D1, D2 Y1=Y2 ½ * (Y2/M2/MIDDLE_DAY(M2) - Y1/01/01) 0
Y1<Y2 Y2/M2/MIDDLE_DAY(M2) - Y1/07/02 MONTH_BETWEEN (Y2/M2/MIDDLE_DAY(M2), Y1/07/02) / 12
M1, D1, M2, D2 Y1=Y2 ½ * (Y2/12/31 - Y1/07/02) [= 91]
Note: Since the outcome is constant, 91 can be used directly.
0
Y1<Y2 Y2/07/02 - Y1/07/02 MONTH_BETWEEN (Y2/07/02, Y1/07/02) / 12

Used by

  • Data loading – posting.
  • Tabulation master file

Appendix F – Auxiliary tables

This section describes all auxiliary tables used by several processes, namely:

  • Delete CCR ID;
  • Alternate surname;
  • Internal Record Linkage – Don't Link Cross Reference;
  • Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference.

Appendix E – Interval and mean time between dates

Description

This table keeps a log of patient record deletions.

Content

  • CCR identification number: The CCR identification number of the deleted patient record.
  • Reporting province/territory: The reporting province/territory of the deleted patient record.
  • Patient identification number: The patient identification number of the deleted patient record.
  • Date of deletion: The date of the day the patient record was deleted or merged with another.
  • New CCR_ID: The CCR identification number of the remaining patient record when two patient records are merged through internal record linkage resolution.
  • Process: Code indicating which process has deleted the patient record. Possible values are:
    1. Data loading process through posting step.
    2. Internal record linkage through resolution step.

Usage

This table can be used to know how and when a patient record has been deleted. This is especially useful when providing feedback to PTCR about an input patient record that is rejected because the corresponding base patient record is not found on the CCR.

Used By

  • Data loading – posting
  • Internal record linkage
Revision (Appendix E – Interval and mean time between dates)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

Alternate surname

Description

This table keeps a copy of other patient surnames used since a patient enters the CCR.

Content

  • CCR identification number: The CCR identification number of the patient.
  • Surname: Former surname used by the patient.

Usage

This table is used during record linkage activities to augment the chances of a link between two records. This is useful when a patient surname changed overtime. Generally speaking, an additional patient record is created for every alternate patient surname. Doing so will allow a better link between a jurisdiction that uses the former patient surname and another jurisdiction that uses the latter patient surname.

Used By

  • Data loading – posting;
  • Internal record linkage – Record explosion;
  • Death clearance process – Record explosion.
Revision (Alternate surname)
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

Internal Record Linkage – Don't Link Cross Reference

Description

This table keeps a log of potential duplicate patient record pairs that have been reviewed and rejected by PTCR through the Internal Record Linkage process.

Content

  • CCR Identification Number 1: The CCR Identification Number of the first patient.
  • CCR Identification Number 2: The CCR Identification Number of the second patient.
  • Resolution Date: The date when the Resolution step of the Internal Record Linkage process has run and has created the entry. (Format: YYYYMMDD)

Usage

This table is used during Internal Record Linkage process to avoid resending for review potential duplicate patient records that have been already reviewed and rejected by PTCR.

Used By

  • Data Loading – Posting;
Internal Record Linkage – Don't Link Cross Reference
Year Description
Not applicable Not applicable

Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference

Description

This table keeps a log of Death Confirmation refused by PTCR through the Death Confirmation Refusal Process.

Content

  • CCR Identification Number: The CCR Identification Number of the patient.
  • Date of Death: The Date of Death as specified on the rejected Death Event (format: YYYYMMDD);
  • Place of Death: The Place of Death as specified on the rejected Death Event;
  • Death Registration Number: The Death Registration Numner as specified on the rejected Death Event
  • Refusal Date: The date when the Death Confirmation Refusal has been processed (Format: YYYYMMDD)

The Year of Death, the Place of Death and the Death Registration Number altogether create a key that uniquely identifies a Death Event.

Usage

This table is used during Death Clearance process to avoid resending for review Death Clearance Confirmation that have been already reviewed and rejected by PTCR.

Used By

  • Data Loading – Posting (Death Confirmation Refusal);
  • Internal Record Linkage – Resolution;
  • Death Clearance – Probabilistic Linkage.
Revision (Death Clearance – Don't Link Cross Reference)
Year Description
2004 Reporting Province and Patient Identification Number have been removed from this table since they are not part of the Patient Primary Key and were not maintained upon Patient Reversal of Ownership.

Appendix G – Guidelines for reporting grade, differentiation or cell indicator

Note: The CCR captures Grade for "invasive" tumours only beginning with January 1, 2004 data to accommodate grade collection in the CS Algorithm. These guidelines apply to January 1, 2006 data.

The CCR does not collect Grade for "in situ" tumours.

All CCR codes are based on the SEER codes as defined in the SEER Program Coding and Staging Manual 2004. The intent is to collect histopathologic grade however there are recognized anatomical site exceptions (for example, kidney) that apply other grading schemes.

Site Specific Grade Guidelines (page 4) take precedence over the General Coding RULES (page 2); use the General Coding Rules only when there are no Site Specific Grade Guidelines.

Grade, Differentiation (Codes 1, 2, 3, 4, 9)

Pathologic testing determines the grade, or degree of differentiation, of the tumour. For cancers, the grade is a measurement of how closely the tumour cells resemble the parent tissue (organ of origin). Well differentiated tumour cells closely resemble the tissue from the organ of origin. Poorly differentiated and undifferentiated tumour cells are disorganized and abnormal looking; they bear little or no resemblance to the tissue from the organ of origin.

Pathologists describe the tumour grade by levels of similarity. Pathologists may define the tumour by describing two levels of similarity (two-grade system); by describing three levels of similarity (three-grade system); or by describing four levels of similarity (four-grade system). The four-grade system describes the tumour as grade I, grade II, grade III, and grade IV (also called well differentiated, moderately differentiated, poorly differentiated, and undifferentiated/anaplastic). These similarities/differences may be based on pattern (architecture), cytology, or nuclear features or a combination of these elements depending upon the grading system that is used. The information from this data item is useful for determining prognosis.

Cell Indicator (Codes 5, 6, 7, 8, 9)

Describes the lineage or phenotype of the cell that became malignant. Cell indicator codes apply to hematopoietic malignancies (ICD-O-3 range 9590-9989) and for these diagnoses cell indicator takes precedence over grade/differentiation. Note: See the ICD-O-3 chapter Morphology (page 67)for further instructions on coding grade.

CCR Codes:

1 Grade I; grade i; grade 1; well differentiated; differentiated, NOS
2 Grade II; grade ii; grade 2; moderately differentiated; moderately well differentiated; intermediate differentiation
3 Grade III; grade iii, grade 3; poorly differentiated; dedifferentiated
4 Grade IV; grade iv; grade 4; undifferentiated; anaplastic
5 T-cell; T-precursor
6 B-Cell; Pre-B; B-precursor
7 Null cell; Non T-non B
8 NK cell (natural killer cell) (effective beginning with diagnosis 1/1/1995)
9 Grade/differentiations unknown, not stated, or not applicable

GENERAL CODING RULES

  1. If there is any confusion relating to grade, we strongly recommend consulting the pathologist for confirmation.

    Example: To determine grade when there are multiple pathology consults.
  2. The site-specific coding guidelines (pages 4-9) include rules for coding grade for the following primary sites: breast, kidney, prostate, CNS, lymphoma, leukemia and sarcoma.
  3. Code the grade from the final diagnosis in the pathology report. If there is more than one pathology report, and the grades in the final diagnoses differ, code the highest grade for the primary site from any pathology report.
  4. If grade is not stated in the final pathology diagnosis, use the information in the microscopic section, addendum, or comment to code grade.
  5. If there is no tissue diagnosis (pathology or cytology report), code the grade from the Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) or Positron Emission Tomography (PET).
  6. If more than one grade is recorded for a single tumour, code the highest grade, even if it is a focus.

    Example: Pathology report reads: Grade II adenocarcinoma with a focus of undifferentiated adenocarcinoma. Code the tumour grade as grade 4, CCR Code 4.
  7. Code the grade information from the consultation or tumour board round if the specimen is sent to a specialty pathology department for a consult.
  8. Code the grade from the primary tumour only, never from a recurrence or metastatic site (distant and/or regional) even if this is theonly reference to grade that you have.
  9. Code the grade for all unknown primaries to 9 (unknown grade) unless grade is implied by histology (i.e. anaplastic carcinoma (grade = 4).
  10. Some terms in ICD-O-3 carry an implied statement of grade. These histologies must be reported with the correct grade as stated below even if the primary site is unknown:
    8020/34 Carcinoma, undifferentiated
    8021/34 Carcinoma, anaplastic
    8331/31 Follicular adenocarcinoma, well differentiated
    9082/34 Malignant teratoma, undifferentiated
    9083/32 Malignant teratoma, intermediate type
    9401/34 Astrocytoma, anaplastic
    9451/34 Oligodendroglioma, anaplastic
    9511/31 Retinoblastoma, differentiated
    9512/34 Retinoblastoma, undifferentiated
  11. Code the grade of the invasive component when the tumour has both in situ and invasive portions. If the invasive component grade is unknown and in situ is graded, code the grade as unknown (9). Note: The CCR does not capture grade for in situ (high dysplasia) cases.
  12. If a patient receives pre-operative systemic treatment for example, chemotherapy, radiotherapy, hormonal etc), code grade:
    – from a pre-treatment pathology report, if available.
    –after pre-operative systemic treatment if this is the only grade information available.

SITE SPECIFIC GRADE GUIDELINES

If the site specific guidelines do not apply or only limited information is available, then refer to the Common Grading Systems tables (page 10) and the Terminology (Four Grade) Conversion Table (page 11).

Exception: Cell indicator takes precedence over grade/differentiation for lymphomas and leukemias.

Breast Cancer

Priority Order for Coding Breast Cancer Grade Code grade in the following priority order (See following table):

  1. Bloom-Richardson (BR) scores 3-9 converted to grade
  2. Bloom Richardson (BR) grade (low, intermediate, high)
  3. Terminology
    a. Differentiation (well differentiated, moderately differentiated, etc)
  4. Histologic grade (Breast Grade NOS, invasive cancer, histologic grade is implied).
    a. Grade 1/I/i, grade 2/II/ii, grade 3/III/iii, grade 4/IV/iv

Note: The conversion of low, intermediate, and high grade for breast is different from the conversion used for all other tumours. Do not use three-grade conversion for breast primaries (see page 10).

Breast Grading Conversion Table
BR Scores BR Grade Terminology Histologic Grade CCR Code
3, 4, 5 Low Well differentiated I/III; 1/3 1
6, 7 Intermediate Moderately differentiated II/III; 2/3 2
8, 9 High Poorly differentiated III/III; 3/3 3

Bloom-Richardson (BR)

  1. BR may also be called: modified Bloom-Richardson, Scarff-Bloom-Richardson, SBR grading, BR grading, Elston-Ellis modification of Bloom Richardson score, the Nottingham modification of Bloom Richardson score, Nottingham-Tenovus, or Nottingham grade
  2. BR may be expressed in scores (range 3-9)The score is based on three morphologic features of "invasive no-special-type" breast cancers (degree of tubule formation/histologic grade, mitotic activity, nuclear pleomorphism of tumour cells)
  3. BR may be expressed as a grade (low, intermediate, high)
  4. BR grade is derived from the BR score
  5. Use the Breast Grading Conversion Table above to convert the score, grade or terminology into the CCR code

Kidney Cancer

Fuhrman grade describes the nucleus of the cell. If Fuhrman grade is not specified, nuclear grade has second priority.For kidney, nuclear grade is more important (priority) than looking at the overall histologic grade of the tumor.

Note: Use the general coding rules for coding grade for Wilms tumour (8960) as these prioritization rules do not apply.

Priority Order for Coding Kidney Cancer Grade

Code grade in the following priority order:

  1. Fuhrman grade (grade 1, 2 ,3 ,4)
  2. Nuclear grade (grade 1, 2, 3, 4)
  3. Terminology (well diff, mod diff)
  4. Histologic grade (grade 1, grade 2)
Fuhrman Conversion Table
Grade Differentiation or Descriptor CCR Code
Grade i Well differentiated 1
Grade ii Moderately differentiated 2
Grade iii Poorly differentiated 3
Grade iv Undifferentiated 4

Prostate

Nuclear grade is not equivalent to any part of the Gleason grading process (cannot be converted from Gleason's Score or Pattern).

Priority Rules for Coding Prostate Cancer Grade

Code grade in the following priority order:

  1. Gleason's Grade (score or pattern)
  2. Terminology
    a. Differentiation (well differentiated, moderately differentiated, etc.)
  3. Histologic grade
    a. Grade 1/I/i, grade 2/II/ii, grade 3/III/iii, grade 4/IV/iv

Use the following table to convert Gleason's pattern or score into CCR codes:

Gleason Conversion Table
Gleason's Score (Gleason's Grade) Gleason's Pattern Terminology Histologic Grade CCR Code
2, 3, 4 1, 2 Well differentiated I 1
5, 6 3 Moderately differentiated II 2
7, 8, 9, 10 4, 5 Poorly differentiated III 3

Note: if Gleason's score or pattern is not specified, see examples below:

Gleason's Pattern

Prostate cancers are commonly graded using Gleason's score or pattern. Gleason's grading is based on a 5-level system, meaning it is based on 5 histologic patterns. The pathologist will evaluate the primary (majority) and secondary patterns for the tumour. The pattern is usually written as a sum, with the majority pattern appearing first and the secondary pattern as the second number.

Example: A Gleason pattern of 2 + 4 means that the primary pattern is 2 and the secondary pattern is 4.

Gleason's Score

The patterns are added together to create a score.

Example: If the pattern is 2 + 4, the score is 6 (the sum of 2 and 4).

When reviewing prostate grading terminology and attempting to determine whether it represents a grade or a score, consider the following results:

  • less than or equal to 5 are coded as a pattern and
  • more than 5 are coded as a score.
  1. If the pathology report contains only one number, and that number is less than or equal to 5, it is a pattern. Please see General Coding Rule 1.
  2. If the pathology report contains only one number, and that number is greater than 5, it is a score. Please see General Coding Rule #1.
  3. If the pathology report specifies a specific number out of a total of 10, the first number given is the score.

    Example: The pathology report says "Gleason's 3/10". The Gleason's score would be 3.
  4. If there are two numbers less than 6, assume they refer to two patterns. The first number is the primary pattern and the second is the secondary pattern.

    Example: If the pathology report says "Gleason's 3 + 5," the Gleason's score would be 8, the sum of 3 and 5.

Central Nervous System

  1. WHO grading forbrain is used to estimate prognosis and can refer to both benign and malignant lesions. It is never coded in the 6th digit of the histology code.
    a. WHO grade is captured in Collaborative Stage Site Specific Factor 1.
  2. Pathologists do not always describe ICD-O-3 grade or differentiation of CNS tumors.a. If no grade is given, code the 6th digit histology code to ‘9' unknown.
    b. Some histologies include/imply grade in the terms; in these cases the grade can be coded (for example, anaplastic astrocytoma 9401/34). SeeGeneral Coding Rule 10.
  3. Do not automatically code glioblastoma multiforme as grade IV, if no grade is given, code to ‘9' unknown. (9440/39).
  4. All glioma's with histology 938-946 with the exception of those with an implied grade are ‘9' not applicable.
  5. Grade astrocytomas according to ICD-O-3 rules. Do not use the WHO grade to code this field.

Lymphoma and Leukemia 9590-9989

  1. The designation of T-cell, B-cell, null cell, or NK cell has precedence over any statement of differentiation.
    a. Code ANY statement of T-cell, B-cell, null cell, or NK cell including:
    T-cell (code 5)
    Cortical T
    Mature T
    Pre-T
    Pro-T
    T-cell phenotype
    T-precursor
    B-Cell (code 6)
    B-cell phenotype
    B-precursor
    Pre-B
    Pre-pre-B
    Pro-B
    Null-Cell; Non-T-non-B (code 7)
    Null-cell
    Non T-non-B
    Common cell
    NK (Natural Killer) cell (code 8)
    NK/T cell
    Cell type not determined, not stated or not applicable (code 9)
    Combined B cell and T cell

    Note: The ‘code to the higher code' rule usually does not apply to phenotypes.

    b. Code information on cell type from any source, whether or not marker studies are documented in the patient record.

    Example: The history portion of the medical record documents that the patient has a T-cell lymphoma. There are no marker studies on the chart. Code the grade as T-cell.
  2. Do not use the terms "high grade," "low grade," and "intermediate grade" to code differentiation or Cell Indicator field. These terms refer to prognosis, not grade.
    a. In some instances, the term ‘grade' does not imply differentiation and should not be used to code the 6th digit of the morphology code. It is important to recognize when the term "grade" refers to category and when it refers to biologic activity. When describing some diseases, pathologists use the term "grade" as a synonym for "type" or "category." Registrars recognize the term "grade" as an indicator of cell differentiation that is coded in the 6th digit of the ICD-O morphology code.
    i. The grade descriptors for nodular sclerosing Hodgkin lymphoma and follicular lymphoma are actually types or categories of these diseases. The 6th digit should not be coded as grade 1, 2 or 3 for these cases.
    ii. Poorly differentiated lymphocytic lymphoma or a B-cell or T-cell lymphoma should be coded in the 6th digit of the morphology code.
    iii. Other terms described as high grade or low grade as part of the diagnostic term may be used to code the 6th digit of the morphology code.
  3. Do not code the descriptions "Grade 1," "Grade 2," or "Grade 3" in the Grade, Differentiation or Cell Indicator field.
  4. Codes 9950-9989 rarely have a grade associated with them and are generally coded as a ‘9'.
  5. Grade codes 5-8 are T-cell, B-cell, or NK cell indicators used for leukemias and lymphomas only. Therefore, codes 5-8 may only be used with morphologies in the range of 9590-9989.

Sarcoma

Several grading systems exist and may be used to grade sarcomas. The following table incorporates two, three and four-tier grading systems. If a sarcoma is graded using terminology, refer to the Terminology Conversion Table on page 11.

Gleason Conversion Table
Grade Differentiation or Descriptor CCR Code
Low Grade 1/2 1/3 1/4 2/4 2
Intermediate Grade 2/3 3
High Grade 2/2 3/3 3/4 4/4 4

Common Grading Systems

Two-Grade System

There are some cancers for which a two-grade system is used (i.e. colon cancer, papillary transitional cell carcinoma, bladder, endometrial stromal sarcoma). The patterns of cell growth are measured on a scale of 1 or 2 (also referred to as low and high grade). The expected outcome is more favorable for lower grades.

  • If the grade is listed as 1/2 or as low grade, assign code 2.
  • If the grade is listed as 2/2 or as high grade, assign code 4.
Two-Grade Conversion Table
Grade Differentiation /
Description
CCR Code
1/2, I/II Low grade 2
2/2, II/II High grade 4

Three-Grade System

There are several cancers for which a three-grade system is used (for example peritoneum, endometrium, fallopian tube, prostate, bladder and soft tissue sarcoma). The patterns of cell growth are measured on a scale of 1, 2, and 3 (also referred to as low, medium/intermediate, and high grade). This system measures the proportion of cancer cells that are growing and making new cells and how closely they resemble the cells of the host tissue. Thus, it is similar to a four-grade system (see Terminology Conversion Table on page 10), but simply divides the spectrum into 3 rather than 4 categories (see Three-Grade Conversion Table below). The expected outcome is more favorable for lower grades.

  • If the grade is listed as1/3 or as low grade, assign code 2.
  • If the grade is listed as 2/3 or as medium/intermediate grade, assign code 3.
  • If the grade is listed as 3/3 or as high grade, assign code 4.

Use the following table to convert the grade to CCR codes:

Three-Grade Conversion Table*
Grade Differentiation /
Description
CCR Code
1/3, I/III Low grade 2
2/3, II/III Medium/Intermediate grade 3
3/3, III/III High grade 4

*Do not use for breast primaries

Terminology Conversion Table
This system measures the proportion of cancer cells that are growing and making new cells and how closely they resemble the cells of the host tissue. The expected outcome is more favorable for lower grades.

Terminology Conversion Table
Description Grade CCR Code
Differentiated, NOS I 1
Well differentiated I 1
Fairly well differentiated II 2
Intermediate differentiation II 2
Low grade I-II 2
Mid differentiated II 2
Moderately differentiated II 2
Moderately well differentiated II 2
Partially differentiated II 2
Partially well differentiated I-II 2
Relatively or generally well differentiated II 2
Medium grade, intermediate grade II-III 3
Moderately poorly differentiated III 3
Moderately undifferentiated III 3
Poorly differentiated III 3
Relatively poorly differentiated III 3
Relatively undifferentiated III 3
Slightly differentiated III 3
Dedifferentiated III 3
High grade III-IV 4
Undifferentiated, anaplastic, not differentiated IV 4
Non-high grade 9

References:

  1. SEER Program Coding and Staging Manual (2004) Published by the U. S. Department of Health & Human Services (Bethesda, MD), 2004. NIH Publication Number 04-5581.
  2. International Classification of Diseases for Oncology, Third Edition. WHO.
  3. NAACCR Edit Logic Report for Metafile NAACR10E.EMF
  4. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Data collection of primary central nervous system tumors. National Program of Cancer Registries Training Materials. Atlanta, Georgia: Department of Health and Human Services, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, 2004.
Revision (Terminology Conversion Table)
Year Description
2006 New appendix

Appendix H – CCR Ambiguous Terms

Effective for January 1, 2001 data and forward

The Data Quality Management Committee, with the approval of the CCCR, recommends that the SEER Program list4 of ambiguous terms be adopted as the Canadian list when identifying cancer cases5. Where possible, it is best to obtain additional information or consult with a pathologist for clarification. If neither is possible, use the following list for determining whether to register/report a cancer case to the CCR.

Appendix H – CCR Ambiguous Terms
Consider as diagnostic of cancer NOT considered diagnostic of cancer*
apparent(ly) cannot be ruled out
appears to equivocal
comparable with possible
compatible with potentially malignant
consistent with questionable
favor(s) rule out
malignant appearing suggests
most likely worrisome
presumed
probable
suspect(ed)
suspicious (for)
typical of * without additional information
Exception:
If cytology is reported as "suspicious", do not
interpret this as a diagnosis of cancer.
Abstract the case only if a positive biopsy
or a physician's clinical impression of cancer supports the cytology findings.
Do not include patients who have a diagnosis consisting only of these terms.
Revision (Appendix H – CCR Ambiguous Terms)
Year Description
2006 New appendix

Appendix I – Guidelines for Abstracting and Determining Death Certificate Only (DCO) Cases for Provincial/Territorial Cancer Registries (PTCRs) in Canada (for T12 and P18)

Cancer registries have identified access to death information as a critical component for operating a high quality program. There are two main reasons for acquiring this particular data, including:

  1. Determination of Death Status for Currently Enrolled Cases: Once a registry has enrolled a case of cancer the addition of death information can provide a more complete picture of how cancer has impacted this individual. Death information on a specific case can remove it from active follow up routines and allow registries to perform more accurate and complete survival calculations.
  2. Case Completeness: To ensure a high level of case completeness a registry typically relies on a variety of methods to ascertain newly diagnosed cancers. One common method is to complete a linkage to vital statistics information regarding cause(s) of death. If an individual is reported with a cancer cause of death and is not found in the registry the case should be followed back to determine if it meets the criteria for cancer registration.

Therefore it is important that PTCRs enter into agreements with Vital Statistics registrars to receive at a minimum all cases for which cancer is listed on any part of the medical certificate of death. In Canada death registration is subject to provincial mandates and includes the completion of a Statement of Death and/or a Medical Certificate of Death. Cancer registries receive death notifications in various formats i.e., hardcopy, electronically, or computer files and at varying intervals for example, monthly, quarterly or annually.

The ideal is to receive notification of all deaths including all causes of death occurring within the province, enabling the registry to perform a comprehensive death clearance. When linked with the registry database this information will result in both matched and non-matched cancer incidence. A death certificate with a reportable tumour listed that does not link to other records in the cancer registry is called a Death Certificate Notification (DCN) and requires further investigation. DCNs include cases in which the underlying cause of death is cancer as well as cases in which cancer is simply mentioned on the death certificate. When additional information is obtained the case should be registered with that year's incidence data. If additional information cannot be obtained, the case is a true Death Certificate Only (DCO) and can be reported as such to the Canadian Cancer Registry (CCR).

Death certificate information is a critical component in the registry certification process operated by the North American Association of Central Cancer Registries (NAACCR). To be eligible for NAACCR certification a PTCR must participate in the NAACCR Call for Data. The data criteria reviewed during this process include: Completeness, passing EDITS, DCO, Interval for Criteria, Timeliness, Duplicate Reports and Missing Data Fields in Sex, Age, County and Race. The DCO certification requirement is less than 5% silver and less than 3% gold.

The CCR and NAACCR accepted formula for calculating the DCO rate is:

The CCR and NAACCR accepted formula for calculating the DCO rate is:

Differences exist in the denominator as CCR does not include in situ bladder cancers and NAACCR does.Where cancer cases = all unduplicated invasive cancers + in situ bladder cancers within the diagnosis year for state (provincial) residents. These include all cases identified and abstracted from the death clearance project and all true DCOs. This information is included in the NAACCR Call for Data.

(Source: NAACCR Series II: Calculating the DCO Rate)

1. Definitions

Cause of Death

The causes of death to be entered on the medical certificate of cause of death are all those diseases; morbid conditions or injuries which either resulted in or contributed to death and the circumstances of the accident or violence which produced any such injuries.

(Source: World Health Assembly, Article 23 of the Constitution of the World Health Organization. ICD-9 pg. 763)

Death Certificate Notification (DCN)

Death certificate notification is a cancer death identified from any source including a Vital Statistics Death Registration that could not be linked (electronically or manually) to an existing cancer record.

Death Certificate Only (DCO)

"Death certificate only" means that the only source of information about the case was a death certificate. This category includes deaths where either the Underlying Cause of Death is cancer, or there is any mention of cancer on the death certificate.
(Source: CCR – Report No. 3.2.2. – Input Data Dictionary, page 79. Revised on: 17/06/94.)As of January 1, 2000 mortality information in Canada was captured by Vital Statistics using the ICD-10 classification system.

Follow Back (FB)

Followback is the process of actively searching for additional information on DCNs at the patient and disease level and updating the cancer database as a complete abstract when possible. If additional information cannot be found the case is a true DCO.

Underlying Cause of Death

The underlying cause of death is (a) the disease or injury which initiated the train of events leading directly to death, or (b) the circumstances of the accident or violence which produced the fatal injury.

(Source: World Health Assembly, Article 23 of the Constitution of the World Health Organization. ICD-9 pg. 763)

2. Process

The process for determining a DCO case will vary and should be modified to meet the requirements of the individual PTCRs. PTCRs should match DCNs to their database; those cancer deaths that do not match require further investigation. Processing is required when the decedent was a resident of your province at the time of death, and a reportable cancer is mentioned on the DCN and no record is found in the PTCR database. No further processing is required when the only tumour mentioned on the DCN is a non-reportable tumour, the decedent was a non-resident of your province (forward to province of ownership if agreements are in place) or when a non-cancer death is identified.

The underlying cause of death field is intended to capture a patient's official cause of death. As this variable is important for record linkage purposes and has legal implications, the death information coded and provided to cancer registries from provincial and territorial Vital Statistics offices should not be altered even when cancer registries have more complete or detailed diagnostic information. The only PTCR reported data that may be changed on the CCR patient record because of a confirmation of death are: Date of Death, Province/Country of Death and Death Registration Number.
(Source, CCR – Report No. 3.2.1 – Coding and Reporting Guidelines – December 18, 1995)

A. DCN Match to Provincial/Territorial cancer registry database. (Example: positive match on four variables for example, HIN, Surname, Sex and DOB).

  • Determine same primary versus new primary.
  • Identify discrepancies between cancer on certificate of death and registry diagnosis codes.
  • Update missing or incomplete fields.

An inconclusive Match shows some discrepancies between identifiers in the incidence and death data but the records may belong to the same person. (Example: positive or close match on the four variables for example, HIN positive match, mismatch with surname, sex or DOB.

  • Visual verification to determine if it's "close enough" to be judged a match or non-match.
  • FB to make a valid determination.

Followback (FB) for new primaries or abstract for additional DCO primaries. Edit and review cases in registry database not microscopically confirmed.

B. DCO. DCN cancer death, Non-match to Provincial/Territorial cancer registry database.
Nonmatched cancer deaths are cleared in a variety of ways, depending on the PTCR's ability to staff a DCO clearance program. Each non-match cancer death must be manually reviewed for reportability and to ascertain where to follow back. Followback sources include facility (chronic care, hospital/nursing home), coroner and attending physician where the death occurred.

Based upon the information received from follow back, the case may be abstracted as:

  • FollowBack is recommended by form letter to the institution (Appendix A) where the patient expired and secondly to the informant (Appendix B) who signed the death certificate to obtain additional information.
  • Cases that are identified after followback should be added to the appropriate diagnosis year as actual incident records (not DCOs).
  • Cases where no additional information is obtained should be reported to the CCR as a DCO.

C. Standard conventions for abstracting DCO cases:

  1. If FB is not returned from facility/physician, the information from the DCN may be used and the case considered a DCO.
  2. If a date of diagnosis or an approximate date cannot be established, the case is a DCO and the date of death is used as the date of diagnosis.
  3. Follow standard coding conventions for site/histology.
  4. There may be more than one primary noted on the Death Certificate. More than one DCO abstract may be required.
  5. Code the histology from the Death Certificate, i.e., squamous cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, etc., if available. If "carcinoma" is recorded, code as 8010/3. If "cancer" is recorded, code as 8000/3.
  6. Code the Primary Site recorded on the Death Certificate, i.e., lung, prostate, breast.
  7. Melanoma, unknown primary site code to Malignant melanoma of skin, site unspecified (ICD-9 172.9, ICD-10 C43.9).
  8. Lymphoma, unknown primary site code to Lymph Nodes, NOS (ICD-9 202.8, ICD-10 C85.9).
  9. Leukemia is always coded to Bone Marrow (1CD-9 208.9, ICD-10 C95.9).
  10. Watch for primary sites where metastases are common (Lung, Liver, Brain and Bone).
  11. The death certificate may state "metastatic liver cancer" or "metastatic bone cancer". If it is unclear if the site recorded is the primary or a metastatic site, code to Unknown Primary Site (ICD-9 199.0, ICD-10 C80.9).
  12. Stage is always "unknown".
  13. Diagnostic confirmation is always "unknown".
  14. No treatment is recorded, even if noted on the DCN.
  15. Include DCO cases in edits.

(Cover letter to Institution)

PTCR

Inside address

To Whom It May Concern

The Registry Name is presently completing the Death Certificate Only (DCO) follow back process for year/s. DCO means that the only source of information about the case was a death certificate. The death certificate identified the decedent as having expired in your facility however the cancer registry has no prior information on this case through its routine data collection. Data collection is legislated by act/privacy act. Enclosed you will find a Registry Form letter for completion, it is important that we collect the initial date and address at time of diagnosis. If, your records do not identify this patient as having cancer please indicate and we will adjust our records accordingly.

By completing the enclosed Registry Form letter we can finalize the information on this patient. Complete information permits the calculation of survival rates on patients diagnosed with cancer, facilitates epidemiological studies and improves the completeness and quality of reported death and other demographic information. Your continued support in improving the quality of data allows us to participate in provincial and national studies and to provide accurate statistics on an ongoing basis to our stakeholders.

If there are any questions or concerns, please do not hesitate to contact me, contact name at facility name and phone number.

Sincerely yours,

Signature

Enclosure

(Cover letter to Informant)

PTCR

Inside address

Dear Insert name here,

The Registry Name is presently completing the Death Certificate Only (DCO) follow back process for year/s. DCO means that the only source of information about the case was a death certificate. The death certificate stated the decedent had cancer, however the cancer registry has no prior information on this case through its routine data collection. Data collection is legislated by act/privacy act. The death certificate identifies you as the last attending physician at time of death for patient name. Enclosed you will find a Registry Form letter for completion, it is important that we collect the initial date and address at time of diagnosis. If, your records do not identify this patient as having cancer please indicate and we will adjust our records accordingly.

By completing the enclosed Registry Form letter we can finalize the information on this patient. Complete information permits the calculation of survival rates on patients diagnosed with cancer, facilitates epidemiological studies and improves the completeness and quality of reported death and other demographic information. Your continued support in improving the quality of data allows us to participate in provincial and national studies and to provide accurate statistics on an ongoing basis to our stakeholders.

If there are any questions or concerns, please do not hesitate to contact me, contact name at facility name and phone number.

Sincerely yours,

Signature

Enclosure

Death Certificate Notification (DCN)
Year Description
2007 New appendix

Appendix J – Interval between two dates (complete or partial)

The following algorithm can be used to assess the number of days between two dates. When both dates are complete, the algorithm returns the exact number of days. When one or both dates are partial, the missing parts of the dates are "derived" and the number of days returned, based on the derived dates. This algorithm cannot be used if one or more dates is totally unknown, i.e. equal to '99999999'. The returned value is always a positive whole number (including zero).

Definitions

Let Date1 and Date2 be the two dates for which the interval must be calculated and where Date1 <= Date2.

Let Y1, M1 and D1 be the year, month and day of date1.
Let Y2, M2 and D2 be the year, month and day of date2.

Let DIFF_DAYS (Date1, Date2) be a function that returns the number of days between date1 and date2.

Assumptions if there are partial dates
Date1 is a partial date Date2 is a partial date
If MONTH is not reported then MONTH is assumed to be '01'.
If DAY is not reported then DAY is assumed to be '01'.
If MONTH is not reported then MONTH is assumed to be '12'.
If DAY is not reported then DAY is assumed to be the last day of the reported MONTH (28, 29, 30 or 31).

Examples

Date1 = 20060627.
Date2 = 20060930.

DIFF_DAYS (20060627, 20060930)

Date1 = 20060699
Date2 = 20070999.

DIFF_DAYS = (20060601, 20070930)

Date1 = 20069999
Date2 = 20079999

DIFF_DAYS = (200601, 20071231)

Appendix J – Interval between two dates (complete or partial)
Year Description
2008 New appendix

Appendix T – Residency guidelines in Canada

To ensure comparability of definitions of cases and the population at risk (numerator and denominator), the Canadian Cancer Registry (CCR) rules for determining residency at time of diagnosis are to be identical or comparable to rules used by the Canadian Census Bureau, whenever possible.

The residence at diagnosis is generally the place of usual residence, as stated by the patient or, as stated by the Census Bureau, ‘the dwelling in Canada where a person lives most of the time'. Residency is their usual place of residence, regardless of where they are when diagnosed. For patients with multiple tumours, the address may be different for each primary tumour.

There are a number of situations for which the process of determining residency is not intuitive, and special guidelines have been created in order to define an individual's usual place of residence. The Data Quality Committee (DQC) for the Canadian Council of Cancer Registries (CCCR) recognizes that some Provincial/Territorial Cancer Registries (PTCRs) are removed from the direct patient contact relationship, and may not have access to the patient or the information to confirm residency. Using the provincial health insurance number (HIN) as a determining factor of residency during initial case abstraction is appropriate. When permanently relocating, the HIN from the previous province of residence is valid for three months. However, if the case is identified as a potential duplicate during a Record Linkage cycle, additional information should be obtained before confirming residency, as it may not be appropriate to default to using province of HIN, as the primary residence.

PTCRs are encouraged to use these guidelines to determine residency for categories of persons for whom residence is not immediately apparent.

  1. Residence (one residence). The dwelling in Canada where a person lives most of the time.
  2. Persons with more than one residence. Usual residence rule applies; however, if the time spent at each residence is equal or the abstractor is not sure which one to choose, the residence where the patient was staying on the day cancer was diagnosed should be considered the usual place of residence (see examples below). a) Exception: Consider the residence shared with their family as their usual place of residence, even if they spend most of the year elsewhere.
    Commuter workers living away part of the week while working: Consider the residence shared with their family as the usual place of residence, even if they spend most of the year elsewhere. (for example, parents, husbands, wives or common-law partners)
    b) Snowbirds: People who live at another residence (city, province or country) with a warmer climate. Residence should be documented as where they live most of the time.
    c) Children in joint custody: Residence should be documented as where they live most of the time. If time is equally divided, their residence is documented as where they were staying on the day cancer was diagnosed.
  3. Patients with rural addresses. If the information provides a rural address only, which may be the post office box, record the address as stated, but make every attempt, within your resources, to identify the actual physical place of residence at time of diagnosis.
  4. Patients with no usual place of residence (i.e. homeless, transient people). Residents who do not have a usual place of residence should be documented as where they were staying on the day cancer was diagnosed.
  5. Institutional collective dwellings (Collective dwellings that provide care or assistance services). Persons in institutions with no other usual place of residence elsewhere in Canada, or persons who have been in one or more institutions for a continuous period of six months or longer, are to be considered as usual residents of the institution.
    Institutional collective dwellings include:
    a) Residents of a long-term care facility, a hospital, or a home for the aged.
    b) In homes, schools, hospitals, or wards for the physically disabled, mentally challenged, or mentally ill or in drug/alcohol treatment facilities.
    c) Inmates of correctional institutions, including prisons, jails, detention centers, or halfway houses.
    d) Children in juvenile institutions, such as residential care facilities for neglected or abused children or orphanages.
    e) For abused women, or for runaway or neglected youth please see section 6 - Non-institutional collective dwellings.
  6. Non-institutional collective dwellings (Collective dwellings that do not provide care or assistance services). Residence should be documented as their usual residence, if they report one (the place where they live most of the time) or otherwise at the inn, hotel, etc.
    Non-institutional collective dwellings include:
    a) Inns, hotels, motels and hostels.
    b) YMCAs/YWCAs, or public or commercial campgrounds.
    c) Military bases.
    d) Migrant workers (lumber / mining camps & farms).
    e) Members of religious orders in monasteries or convents.
    f) Shelters with sleeping facilities for people without housing, for abused women, or for runaway or neglected youth. Residence should be documented as the shelter.
  7. Students. Students who live away from home while attending school, but who return to live with their parents part of the year should consider their place of residence as their parents' home, even if they spend most of the year elsewhere.
  8. Live-ins:
    a) Live-in nannies. Residence should be documented as where they live most of the week.
    b) Foster children, boarders or housemates. Residence should be documented as where they are living at time of diagnosis.
  9. Merchant and coast guard vessels. Merchant vessels, coast guard vessels and oil rigs at sea should be documented as their usual onshore residence, if they report one (the place where they live most of the time when they are onshore) or otherwise, at their vessel's homeport.
  10. Naval vessels. Canadian Forces Naval Vessel residence should be documented as their usual onshore residence, if they report one (the place where they live most of the time when they are onshore) or otherwise, at their vessel's homeport.
  11. Armed forces. Canadian Armed Forces residence should be documented as their usual place of residence, if they report one, or otherwise, where they are stationed at time of diagnosis.
  12. Non-permanent residents (foreign citizens). Persons who hold a student or employment authorization, Minister's permit or who were refugee claimants at time of diagnosis, for a continuous period of six months or more.
    a) Citizens of foreign countries who have established a household or are part of an established household in Canada while working or studying, including family members with them. Residence should be documented as their household in Canada.
    b) Citizens of foreign countries who are living in Canadian embassies, ministries, legations or consulates. Residence should be documented as the embassy.
    c) Citizens of foreign countries temporarily traveling or visiting Canada. These cases are not reportable to the Canadian Cancer Registry.

Appendix X – CCR_ID check digit routine

The last digit of the CCR_ID is a check digit, for example, digit calculated from the other CCR_ID digits. The purpose of using a check digit is twofold: it allows the detection of some data corruption and prevents one from creating new IDs too easily. The next routine returns a check digit for a given CCR_ID.

Pseudo code


Let N1 be the first digit of CCR_ID (starting from the left)
Let N2 be the second digit of CCR_ID (starting from the left)
Let N8 be the eighth digit of CCR_ID (starting from the left)

Change the values of N2, N4, N6, N8 according to the following pattern
 
Initial value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
New value 0 2 4 6 8 1 3 5 7 9


Let REMAINDER be the remainder of ((N1 + N2 + N3 + N4 + N5 + N6 + N7 + N8) / 10)
If REMAINDER = 0 then
RETURN 0
Else
RETURN (10 – REMAINDER)

Used by

  • Data loading – Edit
  • Data loading – posting

Appendix Z – References

Collaborative Staging Task Force of the American Joint Committee on Cancer. Collaborative Staging Manual and Coding Instructions, Version 01.04.01. Jointly published by American Joint Committee on Cancer (Chicago, IL) and U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (Bethesda, MD), 2004. NIH Publication Number 04-5496.
http://www.cancerstaging.org/cstage/index.html

Fritz A, Percy C, Jack A, et al (eds): ICD-O: International Classification of Diseases for Oncology, Third Edition. Geneva, World Health Organization, 2000.

SEER Program Coding and Staging Manual 2004, Surveillance, Epidemiology and End Results (SEER) Program, National Cancer Institute, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD. NIH Publication Number 04-5581.

SEER Program Coding and Staging Manual 2007, Surveillance, Epidemiology and End Results (SEER) Program, National Cancer Institute, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD. NIH Publication Number 07-5581.

Johnson CH, Peace S, Adamo P, Fritz A, Percy-Laurry A, Edwards BK. The 2007 Multiple Primary and Histology Coding Rules. National Cancer Institute, Surveillance, Epidemiology and End Results Program. Bethesda, MD, 2007. Revised April 30, 2008

NAACCR Standards for Cancer Registries, Volume II Version 11.3 - Data Standards and Data Dictionary, Thirteenth Edition.

National Cancer Institute Surveillance Epidemiology and End Results training website, American Joint Committee on Cancer. http://www.training.seer.cancer.gov/
module_staging_cancer/unit03_sec03_part00_ajcc.html

CCCR Committee on Data and Quality Management - Clinical Core Data Set - March 2001 version

AJCC Cancer Staging Manual, 6th Edition, American Joint Committee on Cancer (AJCC), 2002

Facility Oncology Registry Data Standards (FORDS), revised for 2007. Published by the American College of Surgeons (ACoS) and the Commission on Cancer (COC), 2007.

Facility Oncology Registry Data Standards (FORDS) manual, revised for 2009. Published by the American College of Surgeons (ACoS) and the Commission on Cancer (COC), 2009.

Footnotes

1.The original set of ISO codes has been expanded to include individual Canadian provinces and territories and other Statistics Canada specific codes.

2. Available upon request.

3.The only source of information about the case was a death certificate. This category includes deaths where either the underlying cause of death (patient record, Field No.17) is cancer, or there is any mention of cancer on the death certificate.

4. Input records that passed successfully through all validation edits, correlation edits and other match edits.

5. Because CS and AJCC TNM data items are fairly new to CCR, it has been temporarily decided that CS and AJCC TNM errors (including fatal errors)will not prevent valid core data items from being loaded on the CCR database

6. See Appendix A – Core reference tables - ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table for details.

7. See P1 Specific values & meaning.

8. See Appendix X - CCR_ID check digit routine.

9. See P4 Specific values & meaning.

10. See P5 Specific values & meaning.

11. See P10 Specific values & meaning.

12. See Appendix A – Core reference tables.

13. See Appendix – Core reference tables.

14. See P18 Specific values & meaning.

15. See T1 Specific values & meaning.

16. See Appendix X – CCR_ID check digit routine.

17. See T5 Specific values & meaning.

18. See T11 Specific values & meaning.

19. See T13 Specific values & meaning.

20. See T14 Specific values & meaning.

21. See T17 Specific values & meaning.

22. See T19 Specific values & meaning.

23. Eligible ICD-O-3 histology codes do not include ‘0000' since this value should have been converted to a more meaningful value during the Pre-edit processing.

24. See T22 Specific values & meaning.

25. See T23 Specific values & meaning.

26. See T24 Specific values & meaning.

27.See T25 Specific values & meaning.

28. See section 1.1.2.2 – CCR collaborative staging scope.

29. See section 1.1.2.3 – CCR AJCC TNM staging scope.

30. See Appendix C – AJCC TNM concordance tables - Valid AJCC clinical T by site.

31. See Appendix C – AJCC TNM concordance tables - Valid AJCC clinical N by site.

32. See Appendix C – AJCC TNM concordance tables – Valid AJCC clinical M by site.

33. See Appendix C – AJCC TNM concordance tables – Valid AJCC pathologic T by site.

34. See Appendix C – AJCC TNM concordance tables – Valid AJCC pathologic N by site.

35. See Appendix C – AJCC TNM concordance tables – Valid AJCC pathologic M by site.

36. See Appendix C – AJCC TNM concordance tables – Valid AJCC TNM clinical stage group by site.

37. See Appendix C – AJCC TNM concordance tables – Valid AJCC TNM staging group by site.

38. See T51 Specific values & meaning.

39. Collaborative staging data items (T27-T41) and AJCC TNM staging data items (T42-T51) may or may not be reported. See TCOR-18 and TCOR-19 respectively for more details.

40. Already enforced by TVAL15.

41. Impossible to enforce since the code that stands for 'Not Reported' also stands for 'Benign behaviour'.

42. Already enforced by TVAL21.

43. See Appendix A – Core reference tables – ICD-9 to ICD-O-2 conversion table.

44.See Appendix A – Core reference tables – ICD-O-2 to ICD-O-3 conversion table.

45. See Appendix A – Core reference tables – CCR core scope.

46. See Appendix A – Core reference tables – Invalid site and histology combinations.

47. See Appendix A – Core reference tables – Invalid histology and behaviour combinations.

48. See collaborative staging scope in Chapter 1.

49.See Appendix C – AJCC TNM concordance tables – Valid AJCC T, N, M and stage group combination bysite.

50. Thus, unknown or not assessed AJCC clinical/pathologic T, N, M values are excluded.

51. All related patient and tumour records are rejected, but corresponding message is only attached to each conflicting patient record of the family.

52. All related patient and tumour records are rejected, but corresponding message is only attached to each conflicting tumour record of the family.

53. All related patient and tumour records are rejected, but corresponding message is only attached to each erroneous or conflicting patient record of the family.

54. The match with a delete patient transaction is covered by KIM4.

55. All related patient and tumour records are rejected, but corresponding message is only attached to each erroneous or conflicting tumour record of the family.

56. Input record that has neither core fatal errors nor core errors from all previous edits.

57. Method of diagnosis can be 'Autopsy' even when date of diagnosis is before date of death. This is possible since method of diagnosis is not linked to date of diagnosis. See corresponding definitions for more detail.

58. According to cancer staging manual, 6th edition, this value is not a valid stage group for the site.

59. Place holder to keep sub-edit numbering in accordance with the required processing order. See Data Item match edits introduction for more information.

60. Based on the underlying cause of death coding rules, these 2 codes cannot be used.

61. According to cancer staging manual, 6th edition, this value is not a valid stage group for the site. On the other hand, since AJCC TNM stage group is likely to be assigned by a physician rather than derived from any T, N and M values, this value must be accepted.

62. Lymphoma, leukemia or immunoproliferative disease is identified by the following ICD-0-3 codes: 9590-9989 excluding 9731, 9734, 9740, 9750, 9755-9758, 9930.

63. Alphabetic comparison as opposed to numeric comparison is used because TTRN and Health Insurance Number may contain letters.

User Guide for Personalized Electronic Reporting Questionnaire System (PERQS) – 2011 Annual Retail Trade Survey

Unified Enterprise Survey

5-3600-152.3: 2012-02-16

Personalized Electronic Reporting Questionnaire System (PERQS)

User Guide for Electronic Data Reporting

User Guide Contents

About PERQS
Tools needed to use PERQS
Accessing the 2011 version of PERQS for the first time
Decrypting the company data file
Opening PERQS
Completing Part A of the questionnaire
Completing Part B of the questionnaire
General information
Exporting and importing
Closing the questionnaire
Returning your company data to Statistics Canada via Internet
Accessing the e-File Transfer Service
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D

PERQS – User guide for electronic data reporting

About PERQS

Welcome to Statistics Canada’s electronic data reporting system for the 2011 Annual Retail Trade Survey. This system, referred to as PERQS (Personalized Electronic Reporting Questionnaire System), is comprised of preloaded encrypted Excel spreadsheets stored on an electronic Statistics Canada vault. A tool allows you to decrypt the spreadsheets to get started, then the e-File Transfer Service allows you to securely send them back to Statistics Canada via the Internet (see page 13, Returning your Company Data to Statistics Canada).

Information from your previous year’s report: (business name(s), addresses, square footage, contacts, reporting period, etc.) has been pre-loaded into PERQS.

Also stored in the same Statistics Canada vault are guides to use PERQS; reporting guides for the questionnaire; a North American Industrial Classification System Guide and the decryption tool called ETUNPROT.exe.

Tools needed to use PERQS

PERQS was designed to run in a Windows 95 or higher environment and requires Microsoft Excel 97 or higher. If you do not have access to a PC with Windows installed on it, or if you do not have Microsoft Excel 97 or higher, you will not be able to use PERQS.

In order to read the Reporting Guide: 2011 Annual Retail Trade Survey and the NAICS (North American Industrial Classification System), you must install Adobe Acrobat reader. If you do not have Adobe reader installed, it is available as a download from www.adobe.com. You will also need access to the Internet.

You should have received a letter containing your password, a series of 9 randomly generated characters. This password is unique to each PERQS package and is needed to decrypt the PERQS company data file. If at any time you lose or forget your original password, please call our toll-free Help Line at 1-877-949-9492 for instructions or email - - SOS@statcan.gc.ca.

If you do not wish to have PERQS pre-loaded with information from your previous report, please advise us.

Thank you for taking the time to respond to the 2011 Annual Retail Trade Survey.

Note to users:

Please uninstall any previous versions of PERQS from your system before accessing the 2011 version of PERQS.

To uninstall previous PERQS versions from your PC’s hard drive:

1. From the Windows Start menu, select Settings;

2. In the Control Panel, select the Add/Remove Program icon;

3. Select STCDRF;

4. Click Remove.

Accessing the 2011 version of PERQS for the first time

1. From the Internet, go to URL http://www.statcan.gc.ca/ec-ce/eft-tef. Click the Logon button.

2. Enter the username that was provided by Statistics Canada.

3.Enter temporary password that was provided by Statistics Canada. Click the Logon button.

4. Your password will expire and an error message is displayed in red
(Error: ITATS203E Password has expired) and you will be prompted to enter a new one*.

5. Enter the new password.

6. Re-enter the new password to confirm.

7. You will see a list of safes.

8. Click on the safe of your choice.

9. To download files, click on FromStatcan-->Download, and then browse for the files you want to download to your computer. Please save the decryption file, ETUNPROT.exe, to your desktop. Please save the other files (especially the “.xls.enp” file) to a location of your choice (e.g. “C:\PERQSTemp\DownloadedFiles”).
Note: Some respondents may receive a security message asking if they want to run or save the etunprot.exe file. Please choose the SAVE option.

10. Logout.

* Password must be at least 8 characters with at least one capital letter and one digit.

Note: if you have a problem using the e-File Transfer service, please send an e-mail to the support team at: SOS@statcan.gc.ca.

Decrypting the company data file

1. After the PERQS excel (.xls.enp) file and the decryption program have been downloaded to your computer, execute the decryption file, ETUNPROT.exe, by double-clicking the icon on your desktop. This will cause the following window to appear (see Figure 1).

Figure 1

Figure 1 is an image of a screen entitled “Select a password-protected file”. The full title of the PERQS file that you have just downloaded appears on the screen. When you open the file (by clicking on “Open”) you will be asked to enter the password that was written on the letter that was sent to you in the mail.

2. Browse to the location that you downloaded the files to and select the file you have saved “your file name.xls.enp” then select the Open button.

3. You will then be prompted to enter a password (see Figure 2). This password was written on the letter that was sent to you in the mail.

Figure 2

Figure 2 asks you to enter that password.

4. You will then be prompted to save the data file to a location of your choice (see Figure 3).

Figure 3

Figure 3 asks you to save the PERQS file on your computer. Now you are ready to fill in your PERQS questionnaire. The reporting guide will give you more information and help to fill it in.

5. Fill in the questionnaire (see below for instructions). The Reporting Guide (found on the Statistics Canada electronic vault) can assist you in completing the questionnaire.

6. After completing the questionnaire, follow the Returning your company data to Statistics Canada via Internet instructions.

Opening PERQS

PERQS 2011 was developed using Microsoft Excel 97 and therefore requires that either Excel 97 or higher be installed on your PC.

When your customized questionnaire information on the company data file is decrypted, please locate it using Windows Explorer and double click on it (Excel should automatically open your questionnaire).

Alternatively, open Microsoft Excel, and go to File -> Open. Locate the questionnaire using the Excel browser. When the questionnaire is opened, the following message (Figure 4a) will appear:

Note: For users of Excel 2007, see Appendix D "Using Excel 2007 to open the questionnaire and use the macros".

Figure 4a

Figure 4a tells you that you should click on “Enable macros”.

Activate the user-friendly macros developed by Statistics Canada by clicking Enable Macros

Disabling macros will make it impossible to fill out the questionnaire. Instructions will appear on the screen, as shown in Figure 4b.

Figure 4b

Figure 4b contains instructions to open the questionnaire in various Excel versions.

You now have full access to PERQS which is made up of two Excel spreadsheets, identified as Part A and Part B. When the questionnaire is opened, Part A will be displayed. In the upper left hand corner you will see the title 2011 Annual Retail Trade Survey.

Completing Part A of the questionnaire

The questionnaire text in PERQS is black on a coloured background. The coloured boxes contain instructions, information and/or questions. The white boxes are reserved for your answers.

The easiest way to move through PERQS is to use the Tab key. It will take you from one white box to the next, from left to right and from top to bottom. This is the order in which you should answer the questions.

Shift +Tab enables you to go backwards. Using the Enter key is not recommended, as it does not allow you to go from one white area to the next; instead, the Enter key takes you to the cell below in the next row down.

Some white boxes may contain information collected in previous years. Please verify the information and make the necessary corrections. To change it, please overwrite the content of the cell by entering the corrections.

You will also see several additional buttons displayed on the menu (see Figure 4c). Go to Part B will move your cursor to the second Excel spreadsheet, entitled Part B. Save and Close closes the application (see Closing the questionnaire on page 12). Save saves the current session on your hard disk. Next Error moves your cursor to the next cell in error.

Note: For users of Excel 2007, see Appendix D "Finding additional buttons when accessing Part A and Part B of the questionnaire".

Figure 4c

Figure 4c is an image of four computer buttons: go to Part B, Close, Save and Next Error.

Some cells may contain a small red triangle in the upper right hand corner. When you point your cursor over this red triangle, a dialog box containing additional information about this cell will appear (see Figure 5).

Figure 5

Figure 5 is an image that contains blank spaces for some information you might have missed. When you move the curser on these spaces, the computer will let you know which one you have missed.

If PERQS assesses that the information collected is erroneous, the cell turns red. When you move your cursor over it, a dialog box containing the information of the erroneous cell will be posted (see General Information section).

You will have the option of coming back later by clicking the Next Error button at the top of the worksheet. Next Error will allow you to navigate between all the possibly erroneous cells in Part A.

You may now complete Part A by following the instructions on the questionnaire. Once Part A is completed, please go to Part B by clicking the appropriate button on the top menu or by selecting the sheet tab entitled Part B at the bottom of the worksheet.

Completing Part B of the questionnaire

Part B is designed to capture detailed information on each retail chain store. Many additional buttons also appear in Part B (see Figure 6a).

Note: For users of Excel 2007, see Appendix D "Finding additional buttons when accessing Part A and Part B of the questionnaire".

Figure 6a

Figure 6a is an image of ten computer buttons: Go to Part A, Close, Save, Sort A-Z, Sort Z to A, Next error, Record ID, Export ID, Import, and Export.

Go to Part A moves your cursor to the first Excel spreadsheet entitled Part A. Close closes the application, Save saves the current session on your hard disk and Next Error moves your cursor to the next cell with an error.

Sort A-Z will allow you to sort the content of the selected column in alphabetical order. Sort Z-A will sort in the reverse order. Please note that you can only sort one column at a time.

Recode ID, Export ID, Import and Export are explained on page 11.

Part B is divided by store, and the information collected for each store is on the same line. As in Part A, the sheet already contains information collected over the years. To change it, simply overwrite the content of the cell by entering the corrections.

Columns containing store addresses and company IDs appear twice. Columns appearing in colour are protected and reserved for use by Statistics Canada for processing purposes. Use blank store address and company ID columns to update information.

To add a new location, use a new line at the bottom of the spreadsheet.

If a store has gone out of business, you must indicate this in the column headed Part Year Operation. This application does not allow you to delete stores.

For Part Year Operation (see Figure 6b), enter the number corresponding to the correct description. The numbers and their descriptions are available by moving the cursor to the top of the red triangle located in the header of the column as illustrated in Figure 6b.

Figure 6b

Figure 6b pertains to you if your store was only open part of the year. As you tab down the list, choose the description that most closely relates to your situation.

In Part B, it is recommended that you use the Tab key for browsing. By using the Tab key, you can move through all the boxes for the same store before moving to the next.

When Part B is completed, you can either return to Part A or save and close the questionnaire so that it can be sent to Statistics Canada (see Closing the questionnaire on page 12).

General information

Error message

Error messages identifying inconsistencies in your answers may appear at various points while you complete the questionnaire. Please read the messages and correct the erroneous information.

Also, when PERQS assesses that the data entry is erroneous, the cell turns red. When you move your cursor over the cell, a comment box containing the information on this erroneous cell is posted (see Figure 7a).

Figure 7a

Figure 7a will let you know there is a mistake in one of the numbers you have entered and will tell you which cell number needs to be re-entered.

It is possible that some of your data will seem inconsistent according to PERQS. If this happens, explanations for particular questions may be provided in the comment box (see Figure 7b). Providing such explanations means that Statistics Canada might not have to contact you to obtain more details about the information.

Figure 7b

Figure 7b is a comment box that provides space for explaining why some of your data seems inconsistent.

You may also include additional comments in Section G of Part A.

Printing the questionnaire

To print your questionnaire select Part A or Part B. Then, select File -> Print in the Excel menu.

Since every printer has its own configuration, you may have to adjust your margins to print a presentable document. Also, in Part B, due to the amount of information included, we recommend that you use the Export option for better printing capabilities.

Exporting and importing

Recoding ID and exporting ID

In Part B of PERQS you will see 2 buttons entitled Recode ID or Export ID. These PERQS buttons allow you to import and export data using Excel. This section will explain how to use these functions.

Exporting and changing the location number

Sometimes the number used to identify your locations can vary from one year to the next. PERQS allows you to overwrite the number directly in the questionnaire and gives you the option to import the number from another, pre-existing spreadsheet.

If you want to use the import option, create another Excel spreadsheet with two columns: one column containing the old identification number and another column containing the updates (see Appendix B).

Click on Recode ID and select the spreadsheet containing this information. PERQS will open the file and update the number of locations using the information collected.

If necessary, PERQS will allow you to export the identification numbers currently in your system to another Excel file. When you use the Export ID option, PERQS can create a new Excel file requesting the identification of a location for your new file. The new file is saved and you return to PERQS.

This new file will contain a complete list of numbers already in PERQS, as well as the names of columns already identified to facilitate the future import of these files.

For users with another spreadsheet program (such as Lotus), please refer to Appendix C for information on how to convert from Lotus to Excel.

Exporting and/or importing data

If you have most of the information required by the questionnaire in another Excel spreadsheet, PERQS gives you the option of importing this information.

To import information, you must have an Excel spreadsheet that has specific names for its columns in the first row (see Appendix A). The system will use the names of the rows to update the data.

To use the import function, click on Import and select the spreadsheet containing the updated information. PERQS will open the file and update the location data. It will use the identification number of the location to merge the spreadsheets.

When PERQS discovers new locations during the process (i.e., the ID number of the source file does not correspond to any record presently on PERQS), it will automatically add it to the end of the questionnaire.

PERQS will allow you to export the data presently in the system to another Excel file. When using the Export option, PERQS will create a new Excel file and ask you to identify a location for your new file through Explorer in Excel. The new file is saved and you return to PERQS.

The new file will contain a complete list of numbers already in PERQS, as well as the names of already identified columns to facilitate future importation of these files. Columns labelled ADDRESS, CITY, PROVINCE and PCODE are blank white columns on your questionnaire.

For users with another spreadsheet program (such as Lotus), please refer to Appendix C for information on how to convert from Lotus to Excel.

Closing the questionnaire

Once the questionnaire is completed, click on the Save or on the Close button to save your changes or exit the questionnaire. When you click on this button, this window (Figure 8a) will appear:

Figure 8a

Figure 8a asks if you have completed filling in the questionnaire, a yes or no answer.

If the questionnaire is fully completed, click on Yes and the questionnaire with your information will be saved.

Consistency errors in your questionnaire (see Figure 8b) will also appear. If you do not want to correct these errors, you can add a comment concerning these errors (see Figure 8c).

If you have not finished completing the questionnaire, click on No and the information will be saved. Cancel will take you back to the application.

Figure 8b

Figure 8b lists particular questions that you may have missed when filling in your questionnaire and asks if you would like to complete them now. These missed questions appear as errors.

Figure 8c

Figure 8c is a comment box asking for your comments regarding the errors in the figure above.

Returning your company data to Statistics Canada via Internet

Once you have completed the survey and you are ready to return it to Statistics Canada via the Internet, you must execute the e-File Transfer Service to upload PERQS.

Accessing the e-File Transfer Service

1. From the Internet, go to URL http://www.statcan.gc.ca/ec-ce/eft-tef.

2. Enter username provided by Statistics Canada.

3. Enter your password, then click Logon.

4. You will see a list of safes.

5. Click on your safe.

6. To upload files to Statistics Canada, click ToStatcan-->Upload file, then Browse for the file you want to upload (e.g. Q11111111.xls).

7. Once you have chosen the file, click on the Upload button.

8. Logout.

Note: if you have a problem using the e-File Transfer service, please send an e-mail to the support team at: SOS@statcan.gc.ca

Appendix A

PERQS Import file record layout:
  Column Header Description
Column 1 SNUMBER Location ID (from Statistics Canada)
Column 2 COMPID Location ID (do not exceed 8 characters)
Column 3 OPNAME Operating name
Column 4 ADDRESS Name of street
Column 5 CITY City
Column 6 PROVINCE Province or territory (2 characters)*
Column 7 PCODE Postal code
Column 8 C2080 Total operating revenue
Column 9 C0876 Gross leasable area
Column 10 C0875 Unit of measurement (1 = square feet; 2 = square meters)
Column 11 C0873 Part year operation (1 digit)
1: Seasonal operation;
2: New store;
3: Change of fiscal year;
4: Change of ownership;
5: Ceased operations;
6: Temporarily closed;
7: Moved
Column 12 C0871 Part year operation from (6 digits) yyyy/mm or leave blank
Column 13 C0872 Part year operation to (6 digits) yyy/mm or leave blank
Column 14 NAICS NAICS (North American Industry Classification System) (6 digits)
Column 15 C9921 Comments

Numeric columns:

C2080, C0875, C0876, C0873, C0871 and C0872.

Abbreviations used for the provinces and territories:
Province *Code
Newfoundland and Labrador NL
Nova Scotia NS
New Brunswick NB
Prince Edward Island PE
Quebec QC
Ontario ON
Manitoba MB
Saskatchewan SK
Alberta AB
British Columbia BC
Yukon YT
North West Territories NT
Nunavut NU

Appendix B

To import data in PERQS, you must use Excel 97 or higher. In order for PERQS to import your data correctly, please indicate the names of the following columns in the first row of your Excel spreadsheet.

Record layout for importing new location number in PERQS:
  Column Header Description
Column 1 OLDID Old Location ID
Column 2 NEWID New Location ID (do not exceed 8 characters)

Appendix C

As mentioned in this guide, you may only import and export if your data currently exists in an Excel 97 spreadsheet or higher. However, if your data exists in a different format your software may convert to Excel. Conversion to Excel is possible for Lotus and Microsoft Access.

For users who have other types of software, please consult your software documentation to find out whether it is possible to convert to Excel 97 and follow those instructions.

Lotus to Excel

To convert from Lotus to Excel, you must use the command Save under and click on File in your Lotus tab. Please save the spreadsheet in Excel 97 format (see figure 9a).

Figure 9a

Figure 9a is an image of a screen that will help you convert your data from Lotus to Excel. Select “Save under” and click on “File”.

Microsoft Access to Excel

To convert from Microsoft Access to Excel you must select your data and use the command Save as under File on your toolbar (see Figure 9b).

Figure 9b

Figure 9b is an image of a screen that will help you convert your data from Microsoft Access to Excel. Select “Save as” under “File” on your toolbar.

After choosing the option to save to the external file, you must save your data in Excel 97 format by selecting Microsoft Excel 97 (*.xls) as the type of file (see Figure 9c).

Figure 9c

Figure 9c is an image of a screen that allows you to save your data in Excel format. At the bottom of the screen, select “Microsoft Excel 97”.

Using Excel 2007 to open the questionnaire and use the macros

Open the questionnaire with the Microsoft Office button, menu Open, and then find the questionnaire using the Excel explorer.

To activate the macros, use the Options… buttons which will be found on the security warning tool bar (Figure 10a). Once the Microsoft Office Security Options window has open, choose the option: Enable this content (Figure 10b). This will open the questionnaire and data entry can begin.

Figure 10a

Figure 10a shows part of the Microsoft toolbar. In order to open the questionnaire and activate the macros, you will need to go to the “Options” button on the security toolbar.

Figure 10b

Figure 10b allows you to open the questionnaire by choosing “Enable this content”.

Finding additional buttons when accessing Part A and Part B of the questionnaire

To manoeuvre more easily once in either Part A or Part B of the questionnaire, use the Add-Ins ribbon, see Figure 10c.

Figure 10c

(Part A)

Figure 10c, Part A allows you to manoeuvre more easily in Part B by using the Add-Ins ribbon.

(Part B)

Figure 10c, Part B allows you to manoeuvre more easily in Part A by using the Add-Ins ribbon.

Thank you!

 

User Guide for Personalized Electronic Reporting Questionnaire System (PERQS) – 2010 Annual Retail Trade Survey

Unified Enterprise Survey

5-3600-152.3 E STC/UES-375-75376

Personalized Electronic Reporting Questionnaire System (PERQS)

User Guide for Electronic Data Reporting

User Guide Contents

About PERQS
Tools needed to use PERQS
Accessing the 2010 version of PERQS for the first time
Decrypting the company data file
Opening PERQS
Completing Part A of the questionnaire
Completing Part B of the questionnaire
General information
Exporting and importing
Closing the questionnaire
Returning your company data to Statistics Canada via Internet
Accessing the e-File Transfer Service
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D

PERQS – User guide for electronic data reporting

About PERQS

Welcome to Statistics Canada’s electronic data reporting system for the 2010 Annual Retail Trade Survey. This system, referred to as PERQS (Personalized Electronic Reporting Questionnaire System), is comprised of preloaded encrypted Excel spreadsheets stored on an electronic Statistics Canada vault. A tool allows you to decrypt the spreadsheets to get started, then the e-File Transfer Service allows you to securely send them back to Statistics Canada via the Internet (see page 13, Returning your Company Data to Statistics Canada).

Information from your previous year’s report: (business name(s), addresses, square footage, contacts, reporting period, etc.) has been pre-loaded into PERQS.

Also stored in the same Statistics Canada vault are guides to use PERQS; reporting guides for the questionnaire; a North American Industrial Classification System Guide and the decryption tool called ETUNPROT.exe.

Tools needed to use PERQS

PERQS was designed to run in a Windows 95 or higher environment and requires Microsoft Excel 97 or higher. If you do not have access to a PC with Windows installed on it, or if you do not have Microsoft Excel 97 or higher, you will not be able to use PERQS.

In order to read the Reporting Guide: 2010 Annual Retail Trade Survey and the NAICS (North American Industrial Classification System), you must install Adobe Acrobat reader. If you do not have Adobe reader installed, it is available as a download from www.adobe.com. You will also need access to the Internet.

You should have received a letter containing your password, a series of 9 randomly generated characters. This password is unique to each PERQS package and is needed to decrypt the PERQS company data file. If at any time you lose or forget your original password, please call our toll-free Help Line at 1-877-949-9492 for instructions or email - - SOS@statcan.gc.ca.

If you do not wish to have PERQS pre-loaded with information from your previous report, please advise us.

Thank you for taking the time to respond to the 2010 Annual Retail Trade Survey.

Note to users:

Please uninstall any previous versions of PERQS from your system before accessing the 2010 version of PERQS.

To uninstall previous PERQS versions from your PC’s hard drive:

1. From the Windows Start menu, select Settings;

2. In the Control Panel, select the Add/Remove Program icon;

3. Select STCDRF;

4. Click Remove.

Accessing the 2010 version of PERQS for the first time

1. From the Internet, go to URL http://www.statcan.gc.ca/ec-ce/eft-tef. Click the Logon button.

2. Enter the username that was provided by Statistics Canada.

3.Enter temporary password that was provided by Statistics Canada. Click the Logon button.

4. Your password will expire and an error message is displayed in red
(Error: ITATS203E Password has expired) and you will be prompted to enter a new one*.

5. Enter the new password.

6. Re-enter the new password to confirm.

7. You will see a list of safes.

8. Click on the safe of your choice.

9. To download files, click on FromStatcan-->Download, and then browse for the files you want to download to your computer. Please save the decryption file, ETUNPROT.exe, to your desktop. Please save the other files (especially the “.xls.enp” file) to a location of your choice (e.g. “C:\PERQSTemp\DownloadedFiles”).
Note: Some respondents may receive a security message asking if they want to run or save the etunprot.exe file. Please choose the SAVE option.

10. Logout.

* Password must be at least 8 characters with at least one capital letter and one digit.

Note: if you have a problem using the e-File Transfer service, please send an e-mail to the support team at: SOS@statcan.gc.ca.

Decrypting the company data file

1. After the PERQS excel (.xls.enp) file and the decryption program have been downloaded to your computer, execute the decryption file, ETUNPROT.exe, by double-clicking the icon on your desktop. This will cause the following window to appear (see Figure 1).

Figure 1

Figure 1 is an image of a screen entitled “Select a password-protected file”. The full title of the PERQS file that you have just downloaded appears on the screen. When you open the file (by clicking on “Open”) you will be asked to enter the password that was written on the letter that was sent to you in the mail.

2. Browse to the location that you downloaded the files to and select the file you have saved “your file name.xls.enp” then select the Open button.

3. You will then be prompted to enter a password (see Figure 2). This password was written on the letter that was sent to you in the mail.

Figure 2

Figure 2 asks you to enter that password.

4. You will then be prompted to save the data file to a location of your choice (see Figure 3).

Figure 3

Figure 3 asks you to save the PERQS file on your computer. Now you are ready to fill in your PERQS questionnaire. The reporting guide will give you more information and help to fill it in.

5. Fill in the questionnaire (see below for instructions). The Reporting Guide (found on the Statistics Canada electronic vault) can assist you in completing the questionnaire.

6. After completing the questionnaire, follow the Returning your company data to Statistics Canada via Internet instructions.

Opening PERQS

PERQS 2010 was developed using Microsoft Excel 97 and therefore requires that either Excel 97 or higher be installed on your PC.

When your customized questionnaire information on the company data file is decrypted, please locate it using Windows Explorer and double click on it (Excel should automatically open your questionnaire).

Alternatively, open Microsoft Excel, and go to File -> Open. Locate the questionnaire using the Excel browser. When the questionnaire is opened, the following message (Figure 4a) will appear:

Note: For users of Excel 2007, see Appendix D "Using Excel 2007 to open the questionnaire and use the macros".

Figure 4a

Figure 4a tells you that you should click on “Enable macros”.

Activate the user-friendly macros developed by Statistics Canada by clicking Enable Macros

Disabling macros will make it impossible to fill out the questionnaire. Instructions will appear on the screen, as shown in Figure 4b.

Figure 4b

Figure 4b contains instructions to open the questionnaire in various Excel versions.

You now have full access to PERQS which is made up of two Excel spreadsheets, identified as Part A and Part B. When the questionnaire is opened, Part A will be displayed. In the upper left hand corner you will see the title 2010 Annual Retail Trade Survey.

Completing Part A of the questionnaire

The questionnaire text in PERQS is black on a coloured background. The coloured boxes contain instructions, information and/or questions. The white boxes are reserved for your answers.

The easiest way to move through PERQS is to use the Tab key. It will take you from one white box to the next, from left to right and from top to bottom. This is the order in which you should answer the questions.

Shift +Tab enables you to go backwards. Using the Enter key is not recommended, as it does not allow you to go from one white area to the next; instead, the Enter key takes you to the cell below in the next row down.

Some white boxes may contain information collected in previous years. Please verify the information and make the necessary corrections. To change it, please overwrite the content of the cell by entering the corrections.

You will also see several additional buttons displayed on the menu (see Figure 4c). Go to Part B will move your cursor to the second Excel spreadsheet, entitled Part B. Save and Close closes the application (see Closing the questionnaire on page 12). Save saves the current session on your hard disk. Next Error moves your cursor to the next cell in error.

Note: For users of Excel 2007, see Appendix D "Finding additional buttons when accessing Part A and Part B of the questionnaire".

Figure 4c

Figure 4c is an image of four computer buttons: go to Part B, Close, Save and Next Error.

Some cells may contain a small red triangle in the upper right hand corner. When you point your cursor over this red triangle, a dialog box containing additional information about this cell will appear (see Figure 5).

Figure 5

Figure 5 is an image that contains blank spaces for some information you might have missed. When you move the curser on these spaces, the computer will let you know which one you have missed.

If PERQS assesses that the information collected is erroneous, the cell turns red. When you move your cursor over it, a dialog box containing the information of the erroneous cell will be posted (see General Information section).

You will have the option of coming back later by clicking the Next Error button at the top of the worksheet. Next Error will allow you to navigate between all the possibly erroneous cells in Part A.

You may now complete Part A by following the instructions on the questionnaire. Once Part A is completed, please go to Part B by clicking the appropriate button on the top menu or by selecting the sheet tab entitled Part B at the bottom of the worksheet.

Completing Part B of the questionnaire

Part B is designed to capture detailed information on each retail chain store. Many additional buttons also appear in Part B (see Figure 6a).

Note: For users of Excel 2007, see Appendix D "Finding additional buttons when accessing Part A and Part B of the questionnaire".

Figure 6a

Figure 6a is an image of ten computer buttons: Go to Part A, Close, Save, Sort A-Z, Sort Z to A, Next error, Record ID, Export ID, Import, and Export.

Go to Part A moves your cursor to the first Excel spreadsheet entitled Part A. Close closes the application, Save saves the current session on your hard disk and Next Error moves your cursor to the next cell with an error.

Sort A-Z will allow you to sort the content of the selected column in alphabetical order. Sort Z-A will sort in the reverse order. Please note that you can only sort one column at a time.

Recode ID, Export ID, Import and Export are explained on page 11.

Part B is divided by store, and the information collected for each store is on the same line. As in Part A, the sheet already contains information collected over the years. To change it, simply overwrite the content of the cell by entering the corrections.

Columns containing store addresses and company IDs appear twice. Columns appearing in colour are protected and reserved for use by Statistics Canada for processing purposes. Use blank store address and company ID columns to update information.

To add a new location, use a new line at the bottom of the spreadsheet.

If a store has gone out of business, you must indicate this in the column headed Part Year Operation. This application does not allow you to delete stores.

For Part Year Operation (see Figure 6b), enter the number corresponding to the correct description. The numbers and their descriptions are available by moving the cursor to the top of the red triangle located in the header of the column as illustrated in Figure 6b.

Figure 6b

Figure 6b pertains to you if your store was only open part of the year. As you tab down the list, choose the description that most closely relates to your situation.

In Part B, it is recommended that you use the Tab key for browsing. By using the Tab key, you can move through all the boxes for the same store before moving to the next.

When Part B is completed, you can either return to Part A or save and close the questionnaire so that it can be sent to Statistics Canada (see Closing the questionnaire on page 12).

General information

Error message

Error messages identifying inconsistencies in your answers may appear at various points while you complete the questionnaire. Please read the messages and correct the erroneous information.

Also, when PERQS assesses that the data entry is erroneous, the cell turns red. When you move your cursor over the cell, a comment box containing the information on this erroneous cell is posted (see Figure 7a).

Figure 7a

Figure 7a will let you know there is a mistake in one of the numbers you have entered and will tell you which cell number needs to be re-entered.

It is possible that some of your data will seem inconsistent according to PERQS. If this happens, explanations for particular questions may be provided in the comment box (see Figure 7b). Providing such explanations means that Statistics Canada might not have to contact you to obtain more details about the information.

Figure 7b

Figure 7b is a comment box that provides space for explaining why some of your data seems inconsistent.

You may also include additional comments in Section G of Part A.

Printing the questionnaire

To print your questionnaire select Part A or Part B. Then, select File -> Print in the Excel menu.

Since every printer has its own configuration, you may have to adjust your margins to print a presentable document. Also, in Part B, due to the amount of information included, we recommend that you use the Export option for better printing capabilities.

Exporting and importing

Recoding ID and exporting ID

In Part B of PERQS you will see 2 buttons entitled Recode ID or Export ID. These PERQS buttons allow you to import and export data using Excel. This section will explain how to use these functions.

Exporting and changing the location number

Sometimes the number used to identify your locations can vary from one year to the next. PERQS allows you to overwrite the number directly in the questionnaire and gives you the option to import the number from another, pre-existing spreadsheet.

If you want to use the import option, create another Excel spreadsheet with two columns: one column containing the old identification number and another column containing the updates (see Appendix B).

Click on Recode ID and select the spreadsheet containing this information. PERQS will open the file and update the number of locations using the information collected.

If necessary, PERQS will allow you to export the identification numbers currently in your system to another Excel file. When you use the Export ID option, PERQS can create a new Excel file requesting the identification of a location for your new file. The new file is saved and you return to PERQS.

This new file will contain a complete list of numbers already in PERQS, as well as the names of columns already identified to facilitate the future import of these files.

For users with another spreadsheet program (such as Lotus), please refer to Appendix C for information on how to convert from Lotus to Excel.

Exporting and/or importing data

If you have most of the information required by the questionnaire in another Excel spreadsheet, PERQS gives you the option of importing this information.

To import information, you must have an Excel spreadsheet that has specific names for its columns in the first row (see Appendix A). The system will use the names of the rows to update the data.

To use the import function, click on Import and select the spreadsheet containing the updated information. PERQS will open the file and update the location data. It will use the identification number of the location to merge the spreadsheets.

When PERQS discovers new locations during the process (i.e., the ID number of the source file does not correspond to any record presently on PERQS), it will automatically add it to the end of the questionnaire.

PERQS will allow you to export the data presently in the system to another Excel file. When using the Export option, PERQS will create a new Excel file and ask you to identify a location for your new file through Explorer in Excel. The new file is saved and you return to PERQS.

The new file will contain a complete list of numbers already in PERQS, as well as the names of already identified columns to facilitate future importation of these files. Columns labelled ADDRESS, CITY, PROVINCE and PCODE are blank white columns on your questionnaire.

For users with another spreadsheet program (such as Lotus), please refer to Appendix C for information on how to convert from Lotus to Excel.

Closing the questionnaire

Once the questionnaire is completed, click on the Save or on the Close button to save your changes or exit the questionnaire. When you click on this button, this window (Figure 8a) will appear:

Figure 8a

Figure 8a asks if you have completed filling in the questionnaire, a yes or no answer.

If the questionnaire is fully completed, click on Yes and the questionnaire with your information will be saved.

Consistency errors in your questionnaire (see Figure 8b) will also appear. If you do not want to correct these errors, you can add a comment concerning these errors (see Figure 8c).

If you have not finished completing the questionnaire, click on No and the information will be saved. Cancel will take you back to the application.

Figure 8b

Figure 8b lists particular questions that you may have missed when filling in your questionnaire and asks if you would like to complete them now. These missed questions appear as errors.

Figure 8c

Figure 8c is a comment box asking for your comments regarding the errors in the figure above.

Returning your company data to Statistics Canada via Internet

Once you have completed the survey and you are ready to return it to Statistics Canada via the Internet, you must execute the e-File Transfer Service to upload PERQS.

Accessing the e-File Transfer Service

1. From the Internet, go to URL http://www.statcan.gc.ca/ec-ce/eft-tef.

2. Enter username provided by Statistics Canada.

3. Enter your password, then click Logon.

4. You will see a list of safes.

5. Click on your safe.

6. To upload files to Statistics Canada, click ToStatcan-->Upload file, then Browse for the file you want to upload (e.g. Q11111111.xls).

7. Once you have chosen the file, click on the Upload button.

8. Logout.

Note: if you have a problem using the e-File Transfer service, please send an e-mail to the support team at: SOS@statcan.gc.ca

Appendix A

PERQS Import file record layout:
  Column Header Description
Column 1 SNUMBER Location ID (from Statistics Canada)
Column 2 COMPID Location ID (do not exceed 8 characters)
Column 3 OPNAME Operating name
Column 4 ADDRESS Name of street
Column 5 CITY City
Column 6 PROVINCE Province or territory (2 characters)*
Column 7 PCODE Postal code
Column 8 C2080 Total operating revenue
Column 9 C0876 Gross leasable area
Column 10 C0875 Unit of measurement (1 = square feet; 2 = square meters)
Column 11 C0873 Part year operation (1 digit)
1: Seasonal operation;
2: New store;
3: Change of fiscal year;
4: Change of ownership;
5: Ceased operations;
6: Temporarily closed;
7: Moved
Column 12 C0871 Part year operation from (6 digits) yyyy/mm or leave blank
Column 13 C0872 Part year operation to (6 digits) yyy/mm or leave blank
Column 14 NAICS NAICS (North American Industry Classification System) (6 digits)
Column 15 C9921 Comments

Numeric columns:

C2080, C0875, C0876, C0873, C0871 and C0872.

Abbreviations used for the provinces and territories:
Province *Code
Newfoundland and Labrador NL
Nova Scotia NS
New Brunswick NB
Prince Edward Island PE
Quebec QC
Ontario ON
Manitoba MB
Saskatchewan SK
Alberta AB
British Columbia BC
Yukon YT
North West Territories NT
Nunavut NU

Appendix B

To import data in PERQS, you must use Excel 97 or higher. In order for PERQS to import your data correctly, please indicate the names of the following columns in the first row of your Excel spreadsheet.

Record layout for importing new location number in PERQS:
  Column Header Description
Column 1 OLDID Old Location ID
Column 2 NEWID New Location ID (do not exceed 8 characters)

Appendix C

As mentioned in this guide, you may only import and export if your data currently exists in an Excel 97 spreadsheet or higher. However, if your data exists in a different format your software may convert to Excel. Conversion to Excel is possible for Lotus and Microsoft Access.

For users who have other types of software, please consult your software documentation to find out whether it is possible to convert to Excel 97 and follow those instructions.

Lotus to Excel

To convert from Lotus to Excel, you must use the command Save under and click on File in your Lotus tab. Please save the spreadsheet in Excel 97 format (see figure 9a).

Figure 9a

Figure 9a is an image of a screen that will help you convert your data from Lotus to Excel. Select “Save under” and click on “File”.

Microsoft Access to Excel

To convert from Microsoft Access to Excel you must select your data and use the command Save as under File on your toolbar (see Figure 9b).

Figure 9b

Figure 9b is an image of a screen that will help you convert your data from Microsoft Access to Excel. Select “Save as” under “File” on your toolbar.

After choosing the option to save to the external file, you must save your data in Excel 97 format by selecting Microsoft Excel 97 (*.xls) as the type of file (see Figure 9c).

Figure 9c

Figure 9c is an image of a screen that allows you to save your data in Excel format. At the bottom of the screen, select “Microsoft Excel 97”.

Using Excel 2007 to open the questionnaire and use the macros

Open the questionnaire with the Microsoft Office, menu Open, and then find the questionnaire using the Excel explorer.

To activate the macros, use the Options… buttons which will be found on the security warning tool bar (Figure 10a). Once the Microsoft Office Security Options window has open, choose the option: Enable this content (Figure 10b). This will open the questionnaire and data entry can begin.

Figure 10a

Figure 10a shows part of the Microsoft toolbar. In order to open the questionnaire and activate the macros, you will need to go to the “Options” button on the security toolbar.

Figure 10b

Figure 10b allows you to open the questionnaire by choosing “Enable this content”.

Finding additional buttons when accessing Part A and Part B of the questionnaire

To manoeuvre more easily once in either Part A or Part B of the questionnaire, use the Add-Ins ribbon, see Figure 10c.

Figure 10c

(Part A)

Figure 10c, Part A allows you to manoeuvre more easily in Part B by using the Add-Ins ribbon.

(Part B)

Figure 10c, Part B allows you to manoeuvre more easily in Part A by using the Add-Ins ribbon.

Thank you!

 

User Guide for Personalized Electronic Reporting Questionnaire System (PERQS) – 2009 Annual Retail Trade Survey

Unified Enterprise Survey

5-3600-152.3 E STC/UES-375-75376

Personalized Electronic Reporting Questionnaire System (PERQS)

User Guide for Electronic Data Reporting

What’s new for 2009:

Statistics Canada has acquired a new software product called e-File Transfer Service (e-FT). This product allows the retrieval of the PERQS files and guides from secure electronic storage vaults and then enables organizations to securely exchange confidential information back to Statistics Canada using the Internet.

User Guide Contents

About PERQS
Tools needed to use PERQS
Accessing the 2009 version of PERQS for the first time
Decrypting the company data file
Opening PERQS
Completing Part A of the questionnaire
Completing Part B of the questionnaire
General information
Exporting and importing
Closing the questionnaire
Returning your company data to Statistics Canada via Internet
Accessing the e-File Transfer Service
Appendix A
Appendix B
Appendix C
Appendix D

PERQS – User guide for electronic data reporting

About PERQS

Welcome to Statistics Canada’s electronic data reporting system for the 2009 Annual Retail Trade Survey. This system, referred to as PERQS (Personalized Electronic Reporting Questionnaire System), is comprised of preloaded encrypted Excel spreadsheets stored on an electronic Statistics Canada vault. A tool allows you to decrypt the spreadsheets to get started, then the e-File Transfer Service allows you to securely send them back to Statistics Canada via the Internet (see page 13, Returning your Company Data to Statistics Canada).

Information from your previous year’s report: (business name(s), addresses, square footage, contacts, reporting period, etc.) has been pre-loaded into PERQS.

Also stored in the same Statistics Canada vault are guides to use PERQS; reporting guides for the questionnaire; a North American Industrial Classification System Guide and the decryption tool called ETUNPROT.exe.

Tools needed to use PERQS

PERQS was designed to run in a Windows 95 or higher environment and requires Microsoft Excel 97 or higher. If you do not have access to a PC with Windows installed on it, or if you do not have Microsoft Excel 97 or higher, you will not be able to use PERQS.

In order to read the Reporting Guide: 2009 Annual Retail Trade Survey and the NAICS (North American Industrial Classification System), you must install Adobe Acrobat reader. If you do not have Adobe reader installed, it is available as a download from www.adobe.com. You will also need access to the Internet.

You should have received a letter containing your password, a series of 9 randomly generated characters. This password is unique to each PERQS package and is needed to decrypt the PERQS company data file. If at any time you lose or forget your original password, please call our toll-free Help Line at 1-800-368-1582 for instructions or email - - business.surveys.unit.oid@statcan.gc.ca.

If you do not wish to have PERQS pre-loaded with information from your previous report, please advise us.

Thank you for taking the time to respond to the 2009 Annual Retail Trade Survey.

Note to users:

Please uninstall any previous versions of PERQS from your system before accessing the 2009 version of PERQS.

To uninstall previous PERQS versions from your PC’s hard drive:

1. From the Windows Start menu, select Settings;

2. In the Control Panel, select the Add/Remove Program icon;

3. Select STCDRF;

4. Click Remove.

Accessing the 2009 version of PERQS for the first time

1. From the Internet, go to URL http://www.statcan.gc.ca/ec-ce/eft-tef. Click the Logon button.

2. Enter the username that was provided by Statistics Canada.

3. Enter temporary password: Password1. Click the Logon button.

4. Your password will expire and an error message is displayed in red
(Error: ITATS203E Password has expired) and you will be prompted to enter a new one*.

5. Enter the new password.

6. Re-enter the new password to confirm.

7. You will see a list of safes.

8. Click on the safe of your choice.

9. To download files, click on FromStatcan-->Download, and then browse for the files you want to download to your computer. Please save the decryption file, ETUNPROT.exe, to your desktop, Please save the other files (especially the “.xls.enp” file) to a location of your choice (e.g. “C:\PerqsTemp\DownloadedFiles”).
Note: Some respondents may receive a security message asking if they want to run or save the etunprot.exe file. Please choose the SAVE option.

10. Logout.

* Password must be at least 8 characters with at least one capital letter and one digit.

Note: if you have a problem using the e-File Transfer service, please send an e-mail to the support team at: eft-tef-support@statcan.gc.ca.

Decrypting the company data file

1. After the PERQS excel (.xls.enp) file and the decryption program have been downloaded to your computer, execute the decryption file, ETUNPROT.exe, by double-clicking the icon on your desktop. This will cause the following window to appear (see Figure 1).

Figure 1

Figure 1 is an image of a screen entitled “Select a password-protected file”. The full title of the PERQS file that you have just downloaded appears on the screen. When you open the file (by clicking on “Open”) you will be asked to enter the password that was written on the letter that was sent to you in the mail.

2. Browse to the location that you downloaded the files to and select the file “PerqsFileStatCan.xls.enp” then select the Open button.

3. You will then be prompted to enter a password (see Figure 2). This password was written on the letter that was sent to you in the mail.

Figure 2

Figure 2 asks you to enter that password.

4. You will then be prompted to save the data file to a location of your choice (see Figure 3).

Figure 3

Figure 3 asks you to save the PERQS file on your computer. Now you are ready to fill in your PERQS questionnaire. The reporting guide will give you more information and help to fill it in.

5. Fill in the questionnaire (see below for instructions). The Reporting Guide (found on the Statistics Canada electronic vault) can assist you in completing the questionnaire.

6. After completing the questionnaire, follow the Returning your company data to Statistics Canada via Internet instructions.

Opening PERQS

PERQS 2009 was developed using Microsoft Excel 97 and therefore requires that either Excel 97 or higher be installed on your PC.

When your customized questionnaire information on the company data file is decrypted, please locate it using Windows Explorer and double click on it (Excel should automatically open your questionnaire).

Alternatively, open Microsoft Excel, and go to File -> Open. Locate the questionnaire using the Excel browser. When the questionnaire is opened, the following message (Figure 4a) will appear:

Note: For users of Excel 2007, see Appendix D "Using Excel 2007 to open the questionnaire and use the macros".

Figure 4a

Figure 4a tells you that you should click on “Enable macros”.

Activate the user-friendly macros developed by Statistics Canada by clicking Enable Macros

Disabling macros will make it impossible to fill out the questionnaire. Instructions will appear on the screen, as shown in Figure 4b.

Figure 4b

Figure 4b contains instructions to open the questionnaire in various Excel versions.

You now have full access to PERQS which is made up of two Excel spreadsheets, identified as Part A and Part B. When the questionnaire is opened, Part A will be displayed. In the upper left hand corner you will see the title 2009 Annual Retail Trade Survey.

Completing Part A of the questionnaire

The questionnaire text in PERQS is black on a coloured background. The coloured boxes contain instructions, information and/or questions. The white boxes are reserved for your answers.

The easiest way to move through PERQS is to use the Tab key. It will take you from one white box to the next, from left to right and from top to bottom. This is the order in which you should answer the questions.

Shift +Tab enables you to go backwards. Using the Enter key is not recommended, as it does not allow you to go from one white area to the next; instead, the Enter key takes you to the cell below in the next row down.

Some white boxes may contain information collected in previous years. Please verify the information and make the necessary corrections. To change it, please overwrite the content of the cell by entering the corrections.

You will also see several additional buttons displayed on the menu (see Figure 4c). Go to Part B will move your cursor to the second Excel spreadsheet, entitled Part B. Save and Close closes the application (see Closing the questionnaire on page 12). Save saves the current session on your hard disk. Next Error moves your cursor to the next cell in error.

Note: For users of Excel 2007, see Appendix D "Finding additional buttons when accessing Part A and Part B of the questionnaire".

Figure 4c

Figure 4c is an image of four computer buttons: go to Part B, Close, Save and Next Error.

Some cells may contain a small red triangle in the upper right hand corner. When you point your cursor over this red triangle, a dialog box containing additional information about this cell will appear (see Figure 5).

Figure 5

Figure 5 is an image that contains blank spaces for some information you might have missed. When you move the curser on these spaces, the computer will let you know which one you have missed.

If PERQS assesses that the information collected is erroneous, the cell turns red. When you move your cursor over it, a dialog box containing the information of the erroneous cell will be posted (see General Information section).

You will have the option of coming back later by clicking the Next Error button at the top of the worksheet. Next Error will allow you to navigate between all the possibly erroneous cells in Part A.

You may now complete Part A by following the instructions on the questionnaire. Once Part A is completed, please go to Part B by clicking the appropriate button on the top menu or by selecting the sheet tab entitled Part B at the bottom of the worksheet.

Completing Part B of the questionnaire

Part B is designed to capture detailed information on each retail chain store. Many additional buttons also appear in Part B (see Figure 6a).

Note: For users of Excel 2007, see Appendix D "Finding additional buttons when accessing Part A and Part B of the questionnaire".

Figure 6a

Figure 6a is an image of ten computer buttons: Go to Part A, Close, Save, Sort A-Z, Sort Z to A, Next error, Record ID, Export ID, Import, and Export.

Go to Part A moves your cursor to the first Excel spreadsheet entitled Part A. Close closes the application, Save saves the current session on your hard disk and Next Error moves your cursor to the next cell with an error.

Sort A-Z will allow you to sort the content of the selected column in alphabetical order. Sort Z-A will sort in the reverse order. Please note that you can only sort one column at a time.

Recode ID, Export ID, Import and Export are explained on page 11.

Part B is divided by store, and the information collected for each store is on the same line. As in Part A, the sheet already contains information collected over the years. To change it, simply overwrite the content of the cell by entering the corrections.

Columns containing store addresses and company IDs appear twice. Columns appearing in colour are protected and reserved for use by Statistics Canada for processing purposes. Use blank store address and company ID columns to update information.

To add a new location, use a new line at the bottom of the spreadsheet.

If a store has gone out of business, you must indicate this in the column headed Part Year Operation. This application does not allow you to delete stores.

For Part Year Operation (see Figure 6b), enter the number corresponding to the correct description. The numbers and their descriptions are available by moving the cursor to the top of the red triangle located in the header of the column as illustrated in Figure 6b.

Figure 6b

Figure 6b pertains to you if your store was only open part of the year. As you tab down the list, choose the description that most closely relates to your situation.

In Part B, it is recommended that you use the Tab key for browsing. By using the Tab key, you can move through all the boxes for the same store before moving to the next.

When Part B is completed, you can either return to Part A or save and close the questionnaire so that it can be sent to Statistics Canada (see Closing the questionnaire on page 12).

General information

Error message

Error messages identifying inconsistencies in your answers may appear at various points while you complete the questionnaire. Please read the messages and correct the erroneous information.

Also, when PERQS assesses that the data entry is erroneous, the cell turns red. When you move your cursor over the cell, a comment box containing the information on this erroneous cell is posted (see Figure 7a).

Figure 7a

Figure 7a will let you know there is a mistake in one of the numbers you have entered and will tell you which cell number needs to be re-entered.

It is possible that some of your data will seem inconsistent according to PERQS. If this happens, explanations for particular questions may be provided in the comment box (see Figure 7b). Providing such explanations means that Statistics Canada might not have to contact you to obtain more details about the information.

Figure 7b

Figure 7b is a comment box that provides space for explaining why some of your data seems inconsistent.

You may also include additional comments in Section G of Part A.

Printing the questionnaire

To print your questionnaire select Part A or Part B. Then, select File -> Print in the Excel menu.

Since every printer has its own configuration, you may have to adjust your margins to print a presentable document. Also, in Part B, due to the amount of information included, we recommend that you use the Export option for better printing capabilities.

Exporting and importing

Recoding ID and exporting ID

In Part B of PERQS you will see 2 buttons entitled Recode ID or Export ID. These PERQS buttons allow you to import and export data using Excel. This section will explain how to use these functions.

Exporting and changing the location number

Sometimes the number used to identify your locations can vary from one year to the next. PERQS allows you to overwrite the number directly in the questionnaire and gives you the option to import the number from another, pre-existing spreadsheet.

If you want to use the import option, create another Excel spreadsheet with two columns: one column containing the old identification number and another column containing the updates (see Appendix B).

Click on Recode ID and select the spreadsheet containing this information. PERQS will open the file and update the number of locations using the information collected.

If necessary, PERQS will allow you to export the identification numbers currently in your system to another Excel file. When you use the Export ID option, PERQS can create a new Excel file requesting the identification of a location for your new file. The new file is saved and you return to PERQS.

This new file will contain a complete list of numbers already in PERQS, as well as the names of columns already identified to facilitate the future import of these files.

For users with another spreadsheet program (such as Lotus), please refer to Appendix C for information on how to convert from Lotus to Excel.

Exporting and/or importing data

If you have most of the information required by the questionnaire in another Excel spreadsheet, PERQS gives you the option of importing this information.

To import information, you must have an Excel spreadsheet that has specific names for its columns in the first row (see Appendix A). The system will use the names of the rows to update the data.

To use the import function, click on Import and select the spreadsheet containing the updated information. PERQS will open the file and update the location data. It will use the identification number of the location to merge the spreadsheets.

When PERQS discovers new locations during the process (i.e., the ID number of the source file does not correspond to any record presently on PERQS), it will automatically add it to the end of the questionnaire.

PERQS will allow you to export the data presently in the system to another Excel file. When using the Export option, PERQS will create a new Excel file and ask you to identify a location for your new file through Explorer in Excel. The new file is saved and you return to PERQS.

The new file will contain a complete list of numbers already in PERQS, as well as the names of already identified columns to facilitate future importation of these files. Columns labelled ADDRESS, CITY, PROVINCE and PCODE are blank white columns on your questionnaire.

For users with another spreadsheet program (such as Lotus), please refer to Appendix C for information on how to convert from Lotus to Excel.

Closing the questionnaire

Once the questionnaire is completed, click on the Save or on the Close button to save your changes or exit the questionnaire. When you click on this button, this window (Figure 8a) will appear:

Figure 8a

Figure 8a asks if you have completed filling in the questionnaire, a yes or no answer.

If the questionnaire is fully completed, click on Yes and the questionnaire with your information will be saved.

Consistency errors in your questionnaire (see Figure 8b) will also appear. If you do not want to correct these errors, you can add a comment concerning these errors (see Figure 8c).

If you have not finished completing the questionnaire, click on No and the information will be saved. Cancel will take you back to the application.

Figure 8b

Figure 8b lists particular questions that you may have missed when filling in your questionnaire and asks if you would like to complete them now. These missed questions appear as errors.

Figure 8c

Figure 8c is a comment box asking for your comments regarding the errors in the figure above.

Returning your company data to Statistics Canada via Internet

Once you have completed the survey and you are ready to return it to Statistics Canada via the Internet, you must execute the e-File Transfer Service to upload PERQS.

Accessing the e-File Transfer Service

1. From the Internet, go to URL http://www.statcan.gc.ca/ec-ce/eft-tef.

2. Enter username provided by Statistics Canada.

3. Enter your password, then click Logon.

4. You will see a list of safes.

5. Click on your safe.

6. To upload files to Statistics Canada, click ToStatcan-->Upload file, then Browse for the file you want to upload (e.g. Q11111111.xls).

7. Once you have chosen the file, click on the Upload button.

8. Logout.

Note: if you have a problem using the e-File Transfer service, please send an e-mail to the support team at: eft-tef-support@statcan.gc.ca

Appendix A

PERQS Import file record layout:
  Column Header Description
Column 1 SNUMBER Location ID (from Statistics Canada)
Column 2 COMPID Location ID (do not exceed 8 characters)
Column 3 OPNAME Operating name
Column 4 ADDRESS Name of street
Column 5 CITY City
Column 6 PROVINCE Province or territory (2 characters)*
Column 7 PCODE Postal code
Column 8 C2080 Total operating revenue
Column 9 C0876 Gross leasable area
Column 10 C0875 Unit of measurement (1 = square feet; 2 = square meters)
Column 11 C0873 Part year operation (1 digit)
1: Seasonal operation;
2: New store;
3: Change of fiscal year;
4: Change of ownership;
5: Ceased operations;
6: Temporarily closed;
7: Moved
Column 12 C0871 Part year operation from (6 digits) yyyy/mm or leave blank
Column 13 C0872 Part year operation to (6 digits) yyy/mm or leave blank
Column 14 NAICS NAICS (North American Industry Classification System) (6 digits)
Column 15 C9921 Comments

Numeric columns:

C2080, C0875, C0876, C0873, C0871 and C0872.

Abbreviations used for the provinces and territories:
Province *Code
Newfoundland and Labrador NL
Nova Scotia NS
New Brunswick NB
Prince Edward Island PE
Quebec QC
Ontario ON
Manitoba MB
Saskatchewan SK
Alberta AB
British Columbia BC
Yukon YT
North West Territories NT
Nunavut NU

Appendix B

To import data in PERQS, you must use Excel 97 or higher. In order for PERQS to import your data correctly, please indicate the names of the following columns in the first row of your Excel spreadsheet.

Record layout for importing new location number in PERQS:
  Column Header Description
Column 1 OLDID Old Location ID
Column 2 NEWID New Location ID (do not exceed 8 characters)

Appendix C

As mentioned in this guide, you may only import and export if your data currently exists in an Excel 97 spreadsheet or higher. However, if your data exists in a different format your software may convert to Excel. Conversion to Excel is possible for Lotus and Microsoft Access.

For users who have other types of software, please consult your software documentation to find out whether it is possible to convert to Excel 97 and follow those instructions.

Lotus to Excel

To convert from Lotus to Excel, you must use the command Save under and click on File in your Lotus tab. Please save the spreadsheet in Excel 97 format (see figure 9a).

Figure 9a

Figure 9a is an image of a screen that will help you convert your data from Lotus to Excel. Select “Save under” and click on “File”.

Microsoft Access to Excel

To convert from Microsoft Access to Excel you must select your data and use the command Save as under File on your toolbar (see Figure 9b).

Figure 9b

Figure 9b is an image of a screen that will help you convert your data from Microsoft Access to Excel. Select “Save as” under “File” on your toolbar.

After choosing the option to save to the external file, you must save your data in Excel 97 format by selecting Microsoft Excel 97 (*.xls) as the type of file (see Figure 9c).

Figure 9c

Figure 9c is an image of a screen that allows you to save your data in Excel format. At the bottom of the screen, select “Microsoft Excel 97”.

Using Excel 2007 to open the questionnaire and use the macros

Open the questionnaire with the Microsoft Office, menu Open, and then find the questionnaire using the Excel explorer.

To activate the macros, use the Options buttons which will be found on the security warning tool bar (Figure 10a). Once the Microsoft Office Security Options window has open, choose the option: Enable this content (Figure 10b). This will open the questionnaire and data entry can begin.

Figure 10a

Figure 10a shows part of the Microsoft toolbar. In order to open the questionnaire and activate the macros, you will need to go to the “Options” button on the security toolbar.

Figure 10b

Figure 10b allows you to open the questionnaire by choosing “Enable this content”.

Finding additional buttons when accessing Part A and Part B of the questionnaire

To manoeuvre more easily once in either Part A or Part B of the questionnaire, use the Add-Ins ribbon, see Figure 10c.

Figure 10c

(Part A)

Figure 10c, Part A allows you to manoeuvre more easily in Part B by using the Add-Ins ribbon.

(Part B)

Figure 10c, Part B allows you to manoeuvre more easily in Part A by using the Add-Ins ribbon.

Thank you!

 

Protecting your privacy as a client

This notice applies to Statistics Canada clients who use our data, products or services, visit our website, or contact us for information. It does NOT apply to people, organizations, institutions or businesses who respond to our surveys; their information is protected by the Statistics Act. See also: When you give information in a Statistics Canada survey.

Your right to privacy and security is fundamental

We are fully committed to protecting the confidentiality of the information provided by our clients. This information will be used only to support your client relationship with Statistics Canada. The following explains how practices at Statistics Canada protect your privacy and your personal information.

You have a choice about how your personal information will be used. Statistics Canada is committed to helping you maintain control over which personal information you provide to us. You will be given the opportunity to inform Statistics Canada if you prefer not to receive promotional materials. You are entitled to confirm that information held about you is correct or ask to be removed from our client file at any time.

Statistics Canada’s principles for client information privacy

Statistics Canada must ensure that client information, whether received online, by telephone, fax or mail, or by personal contact, is fully protected as required under the federal Privacy Act. The following are the principles developed by Statistics Canada to protect your privacy and the confidentiality of your personal information.

  • Statistics Canada will not sell, distribute, trade or transfer client information to other government departments, businesses, institutions, organizations or individuals outside the Agency for commercial or any other purposes, unless required by law.
  • When you make a purchase from Statistics Canada, only the information required to complete your transaction will be requested.
  • No personal information is gathered without your knowledge.

Privacy notices are found on all our order forms, invoices and on our website.

Why is information collected?

Statistics Canada requires information:

  • to complete your sales transaction, deliver products or services to you, announce product updates and administer your account; and
  • to offer you products and services that we think you would like to hear about.

Contact us, if you wish to:

  • obtain a copy of your contact information;
  • change your contact information;
  • have your name removed from our client file for promotional purposes; and
  • ask questions or make comments about this privacy statement.

If you are not satisfied that we have adequately responded to your privacy concerns, you may wish to contact the Office of the Privacy Commissioner at 1-800-282-1376 or Office of the Privacy Commissioner of Canada.

Ordering products and services online

You can order products and services via our website. When you do this, you are usually required to provide contact information, such as your name and address, and financial information such as a credit card number.

We use contact information only to support your client relationship with us. In other words, we use it for invoicing purposes or informing you about new products. If you do not wish to be contacted for promotional purposes, please contact us.

Statistics Canada stores your client information for seven years and then destroys it. While the information is in Statistics Canada's keeping, it is completely confidential. Statistics Canada will not sell, distribute, trade or transfer client information to other government departments, businesses, institutions, organizations or individuals outside Statistics Canada for commercial or any other purposes, unless required by law.

For more information on Statistics Canada's commitment to respecting the privacy of individuals—whether you are respondents to one of our surveys, clients who are purchasing a product or service or users of our website—view our Privacy notice.

Countries and Areas of Interest for Social Statistics – SCCAI 2011

Introduction to the classification

The variant Countries and Areas of Interest for Social Statistics – SCCAI 2011 was developed to create groupings of countries to enable the production of integrated statistics when publishing social statistics data. These groupings are based on those used historically for Statistics Canada's Census of Population, place of birth variable.

The variant Countries and Areas of Interest for Social Statistics – SCCAI 2011 has three levels: 6 geographical macro-regions, 19 geographical sub-regions and 251 countries or areas of interest. This variant is defined in terms of countries or areas of interest in the Standard Classification of Countries and Areas of Interest (SCCAI) 2011. The hierarchical structure of the classification shows the relationship between the three levels of the classification variant.

This variant has a coding structure built on the United Nations numeric codes (NUM-3) for countries or areas. These three-digit codes are preceded by two numeric digits where the first digit represents the macro-regions and the second digit identifies the sub-regions within the macro-region; together these five-digit codes form the SCCAI code.

Relation to previous standard

This is a revision of the previous Standard Classification of Countries and Areas of Interest (SCCAI) 2010. The current standard, like the previous standard, is also based on the International Standard for country codes ISO 3166-1:2006Footnote 1, and has been modified for consistency with Canadian norms. This standard includes a classification variant Countries and Areas of Interest for Social Statistics – SCCAI 2011 that provides standard groupings of countries and associated codes for publication purposes. Usage notes are included with the standard.

Conformity to relevant internationally recognized standards

This standard is compatible with the composition of geographical macro-regions and geographical sub-regions of the United Nations Statistics DivisionFootnote 2; however, some differences remain. The main differences are:

  • In this standard, Bermuda is included within the sub-region Caribbean and Bermuda while it is part of Northern America in the United Nations groupings;
  • The macro-region Oceania is not further divided into sub-regions in SCCAI;
  • The West Central Asia and the Middle East is one sub-region in SCCAI while most of the countries found here are in two sub-regions: Central Asia, and Western Asia in the United Nations groupings;
  • Estonia, Latvia and Lithuania are included with Eastern Europe in SCCAI while they are part of Northern Europe within the United Nations groupings;
  • Finally, some French sub-region names used by the United Nations have been modified in the SCCAI to make them simpler and more consistent with Canadian convention.

Footnotes

Footnote 1

International Organization for Standardization, ISO 3166 code lists (accessed February 16, 2012). The country list accessed contains updates from Newsletters of ISO 3166-1:2006, including updates from Newsletter ISO 3166-1:2006 VI-11 published on November 8, 2011.

Return to footnote 1 referrer

Footnote 2

United Nations Statistics Division, Standard Country or Area Codes for Statistical Use (accessed February 16, 2012).

Return to first footnote 2 referrer

Countries and Areas of Interest for Social Statistics – SCCAI 2010

Introduction to the classification

The variant Countries and Areas of Interest for Social Statistics – SCCAI 2010 was developed to create groupings of countries to enable the production of integrated statistics when publishing social statistics data.

The variant Countries and Areas of Interest for Social Statistics has three levels: 6 geographical macro-regions, 19 geographical sub-regions and 249 countries or areas of interest. This variant is defined in terms of countries or areas of interest in the Standard Classification of Countries and Areas of Interest (SCCAI) 2010. The hierarchical structure of the classification shows the relationship between the three levels of the classification variant.

This variant has a coding structure built on the United Nations numeric codes (NUM-3) for countries or areas. These three-digit codes are preceded by two numeric digits where the first digit represents the macro-regions and the second digit identifies the sub-regions within the macro-region; together these five-digit codes form the SCCAI code.

These groupings are based on those used historically for Statistics Canada's Census of Population, place of birth variable.

Relation to previous standard

This is a revision of the previous Standard Classification of Countries and Areas of Interest (SCCAI) 2009. The current standard, like the previous standard, is also based on the International Standard for country codes ISO 3166-1:2006Footnote 1, and has been modified for consistency with Canadian norms. This standard includes a classification variant Countries and Areas of Interest for Social Statistics – SCCAI 2010 that provides standard groupings of countries and associated codes for publication purposes. Usage notes are included with the standard.

Conformity to relevant internationally recognized standards

This standard is compatible with the composition of geographical macro-regions and geographical sub-regions of the United Nations Statistics DivisionFootnote 2; however, some differences remain. The main differences are:

  • In this standard, Bermuda is included within the sub-region Caribbean and Bermuda while it is part of Northern America in the United Nations groupings;
  • The macro-region Oceania is not further divided into sub-regions in SCCAI;
  • The West Central Asia and the Middle East is one sub-region in SCCAI while most of the countries found here are in two sub-regions: Central Asia, and Western Asia in the United Nations groupings;
  • The former Soviet Baltic republics are included with Eastern Europe in SCCAI while they are part of Northern Europe within the United Nations groupings;
  • Finally, some French sub-region names used by the United Nations have been modified in the SCCAI to make them simpler and more consistent with Canadian convention.

Footnotes

Footnote 1

International Organization for Standardization, ISO 3166 code lists (accessed December 23, 2010).The country list accessed contains updates from Newsletters of ISO 3166-1:2006, including updates from Newsletter ISO 3166-1:2006 VI-8 published on December 15, 2010.

Return to footnote 1 referrer

Footnote 2

United Nations Statistics Division, Standard Country or Area Codes for Statistical Use (accessed December 23, 2010).

Return to first footnote 2 referrer

Countries and Areas of Interest for Social Statistics – SCCAI 2009

Introduction to the classification

The variant Countries and Areas of Interest for Social Statistics – SCCAI 2009 was developed to create groupings of countries to enable the production of integrated statistics when publishing social statistics data.

The variant Countries and Areas of Interest for Social Statistics has three levels: 6 geographical macro-regions, 19 geographical sub-regions and 247 countries or areas of interest. This variant is defined in terms of countries or areas of interest in the Standard Classification of Countries and Areas of Interest (SCCAI) 2009. The hierarchical structure of the classification shows the relationship between the three levels of the classification variant.

This variant has a coding structure built on the United Nations numeric codes (NUM-3) for countries or areas. These three-digit codes are preceded by two numeric digits where the first digit represents the macro-regions and the second digit identifies the sub-regions within the macro-region; together these five-digit codes form the SCCAI code.

These groupings are based on those used historically for Statistics Canada's Census of Population, place of birth variable.

Relation to previous standard

This is a revision of the previous standard List of Countries, Dependencies and Other Areas of Interest. The current standard, like the previous standard, is also based on the International Standard for country codes ISO 3166-1:2006Footnote 1, but the current standard has been modified for consistency with Canadian norms. This standard includes a classification variant Countries and Areas of Interest for Social Statistics – SCCAI 2009 that provides standard groupings of countries and associated codes for publication purposes. New usage notes are included with the standard.

Conformity to relevant internationally recognized standards

This standard is compatible with the composition of geographical macro-regions and geographical sub-regions of the United Nations Statistics DivisionFootnote 2; however, some differences remain. The main differences are:

  • In this standard, Bermuda is included within the sub-region Caribbean and Bermuda while it is part of Northern America in the United Nations groupings;
  • The macro-region Oceania is not further divided into sub-regions in SCCAI;
  • The West Central Asia and the Middle East is one sub-region in SCCAI while most of the countries found here are in two sub-regions: Central Asia, and Western Asia in the United Nations groupings;
  • The former Soviet Baltic republics are included with Eastern Europe in SCCAI while they are part of Northern Europe within the United Nations groupings;
  • Finally, some French sub-region names used by the United Nations have been modified in the SCCAI to make them simpler and more consistent with Canadian convention.

Footnotes

Footnote 1

International Organization for Standardization, ISO 3166 code lists (accessed June 24, 2010).

Return to footnote 1 referrer

Footnote 2

United Nations Statistics Division, Standard Country or Area Codes for Statistical Use (accessed June 24, 2010).

Return to first footnote 2 referrer

National Occupational Classification (NOC) 2011

Introduction

Preface

This publication represents the third revision of the National Occupational Classification (NOC) system and the National Occupational Classification for Statistics (NOC-S). The NOC was jointly developed by Human Resources and Skills Development Canada and Statistics Canada and has been maintained in partnership since the first edition published in 1991/1992. However, until this revision, NOC and NOC-S differed in their major group structures and, consequently, in their coding systems. The publication of NOC 2011 on this twentieth anniversary of the classification system reflects the unification of the two versions. With the adoption of NOC 2011 all differences between the classifications used by Human Resources and Skills Development Canada and by Statistics Canada have been eliminated. Furthermore, this has been accomplished while maintaining the advantages of both former classification versions.

NOC 2011 would not have been possible without the significant contribution of a number of individuals and groups. Their commitment to excellence is evident in this revised edition of the foundational system used for describing occupations in the Canadian labour market and for managing the collection and reporting of occupational statistics. The collaborative partnership between the two departments has ensured that the quantitative and qualitative information on occupations is reliable, timely and relevant for a wide range of audiences.

Acknowledgements

This major, structural revision of the NOC was accomplished under the guidance of Alice Born, Director of Standards Division, Statistics Canada and Christian Boucher, Director, Labour Market Information (LMI) Division of the Temporary Foreign Worker and Labour Market Information Directorate, Human Resources and Skills Development Canada. Subject matter expertise was provided from Statistics Canada by Debra Mair of Standards Division and Sandra Swain of Labour Statistics Division. From Human Resources and Skills Development Canada, subject matter expertise was provided by Clara Hamory and Ian McRae of LMI Division. Service Canada's Regional Labour Market Information Directors, their staff and provincial colleagues, as well as Statistics Canada's Methods and Standards Committee and its Advisory Committee on Labour and Income Statistics provided important input to the development of NOC 2011. The many stakeholders who responded to the public online consultation for the 2011 Revision of the NOC, hosted by both departments, provided valuable input which is much appreciated.

The realization of NOC 2011 was dependent on the direct involvement and hard work of a team of occupational research analysts and assistants from both Human Resources and Skills Development Canada and Statistics Canada. The overall process also included consultations with an Interdepartmental Committee of representatives from several government departments that are key users of the NOC. The professionalism and dedication of all those involved in the revision process is reflected in the results of this project which has unified the two variants of the classification while maintaining the advantages of both systems. This success is attributable to the co-operation between these stakeholders and to the partnership between Human Resources and Skills Development Canada and Statistics Canada.

Statistics Canada's Internet version of this publication was created jointly by Sylvain Boucher and Niloufar Zanganeh. Their Systems Engineering Division and Administrative and Dissemination Systems Division were responsible for their systems development of the PDF and HTML versions. Human Resources and Skills Development Canada's NOC content development was undertaken by the analysts of LMI Division's Occupational Research unit and Web development by Lyne Philion, Linda Trudel and Jules-André Léger with the help of the Skills and Labour Market Information team of Innovation, Information and Technology Branch.

Both Statistics Canada and Human Resources and Skills Development Canada wish to acknowledge the valuable input of other individuals and groups too numerous to name. Research consultants, academics, professional associations, sector organizations, educators as well as employers and workers throughout the Canadian labour market provided occupational information and advice that informed this revision process. Their contribution has ensured that the quality and integrity of NOC 2011 has been maintained and it will continue to be the authoritative foundational reference and framework for occupational data and descriptive information.

Background

The National Occupational Classification (NOC) 2011 updates both the National Occupational Classification of Human Resources and Skills Development Canada and Statistics Canada's National Occupational Classification for Statistics (NOC-S) which was based on it. It is the nationally accepted taxonomy and organizational framework of occupations in the Canadian labour market. This revision represents the 20th anniversary of the classification and reflects the unification of Human Resources and Skills Development Canada's NOC and Statistics Canada's NOC-S. This revised edition eliminates the differences between the two former systems and incorporates the advantages of both. Through the collaborative partnership between Human Resources and Skills Development Canada and Statistics Canada the department and the statistical agency introduce the revised and unified National Occupational Classification - NOC 2011.

As in the past, this revision is based on extensive occupational research, analysis and consultation conducted across the country. In the decade since its first structural revision in 2001, the labour market has evolved significantly. Technological innovation, further globalization of the economy and restructuring of the workplace have impacted many occupations. In addition to content changes, the harmonization of the NOC and the NOC-S has resulted in a new classification structure.

The NOC is designed to classify occupational information from statistical surveys. It is also used in a range of contexts to compile, analyze and communicate information about occupations. Occupational information is of critical importance for the provision of labour market and career intelligence, skills development, occupational forecasting, labour supply and demand analysis, employment equity and numerous other programs and services. It provides a standardized framework for organizing the world of work in a manageable, understandable and coherent system.

The basic principle of classification of the NOC is that of kind of work performed. Occupations are identified and grouped primarily in terms of the work usually performed, this being determined by the tasks, duties, and responsibilities of the occupation. Factors such as the materials processed or used, the industrial processes and the equipment used, the degree of responsibility and complexity of work, as well as the products made and services provided, have been taken as indicators of the work performed when combining jobs into occupations and occupations into groups.

An occupation is defined as a collection of jobs, sufficiently similar in work performed to be grouped under a common label for classification purposes. A job, in turn, encompasses all the tasks carried out by a particular worker to complete their duties.

Structure of NOC 2011

The National Occupational Classification 2011 is a four-tiered hierarchical arrangement of occupational groups with successive levels of disaggregation. It contains broad occupational categories, major, minor and unit groups.

10 broad occupational categories

Each broad occupational category has a unique one-digit code number and is composed of one or more major groups.

40 major groups

Each major group has a unique two-digit code number and is composed of one or more minor groups. The first digit of this code indicates the broad occupational category to which the major group belongs.

140 minor groups

Each minor group has a unique three-digit code number and is composed of one or more unit groups. The first two digits of this code indicate the major group to which the minor group belongs.

500 unit groups

Each unit group has a unique four-digit code. The first three digits of this code indicate the major and minor groups to which the unit group belongs.

For example:

0
Management occupations
00
Senior management occupations
001
Legislators and senior management
0011
Legislators
0012
Senior government managers and officials
0013
Senior managers - financial, communications and other business services
0014
Senior managers - health, education, social and community services and membership organizations
0015
Senior managers - trade, broadcasting and other services, n.e.c.
0016
Senior managers - construction, transportation, production and utilities

The broad occupational category code, designated by a single digit, is repeated at all levels. Major group codes are created by adding a second digit. This digit appears in the second position at all lower levels in the structure. Minor group codes add a third digit. Finally, the 4-digit unit group codes contain the digit identifying the broad occupational category, followed by the digit identifying the major group and the digit identifying the minor group and a last digit identifying the unit group.

There are approximately 40,000 occupational titles classified in the 500 unit groups of the NOC 2011. Some of these titles are clearly occupations, such as librarian and chef, while others reflect specializations within an occupational area, such as music librarian and pastry chef. Still others represent a range of jobs, such as furniture assembler and sawmill machine operator.

These titles are used to describe the work performed by many individuals holding similar jobs within an occupational area. The list of titles in the NOC is not meant to be exhaustive, but attempts to cover the most commonly used and universally understood labels that identify work in the labour market.

Abbreviations

Few abbreviations are used in this classification. Particular attention should be given to the abbreviation n.e.c. (not elsewhere classified). As an occupational qualifier it is occasionally used in the labels of major, minor and unit groups to refer to occupations not elsewhere classified; e.g. 065 Managers in customer and personal services, n.e.c. indicates that this class includes managers in customer and personal services that are not classified elsewhere in the classification.

Language

The NOC is available separately in both official languages. It is important to note that the French version includes only titles commonly used in French and proper to the milieu and, therefore, these are not normally translations of the English titles. The classification structure is the same in both languages.

Unit group labels are presented in gender-neutral format in French identifying the masculine and feminine titles separated by a slash. Where relevant, this structure is used in English as well. The illustrative example titles are also presented in gender-neutral format. The NOC descriptions are written using the masculine form as they refer to all workers within the included occupations. This has been done in order to lighten the text and to reduce reading burden.

Modifying terms

Modifying terms have been added to several job titles, as extensions, to designate the industrial sector or the domain of expertise. If applicable, this information is preceded by a dash at the end of the title (cashier supervisor - retail trade) to distinguish between similar titles. These modifying terms specify where the titles appear in the classification structure (painter - visual arts; painter - manufacture of motor vehicles). This information should be considered when coding job titles.

Format of unit group descriptions

Each NOC unit group description consists of several standardized sections which define and describe its content.

Lead statement

This section provides a general description of the content and boundaries of the unit group and indicates the main activities of occupations within the unit group. It also indicates the kinds of industries or establishments in which the occupations are found. The list of places of employment is not always exhaustive, but can assist in clarifying the occupations described and in differentiating them from occupations found in other groups.

Illustrative examplesFootnote 1 / Example titlesFootnote 2

This section is a list of titles commonly used in the labour market. The titles are intended to illustrate the contents and range of the occupational group. This is not an exhaustive list of titles.

ExclusionsFootnote 1 / Classified elsewhereFootnote 2

This section clarifies the boundaries of the unit group by identifying related unit groups and similar occupations that are classified elsewhere. Unit groups or individual occupations are cited in this section when they bear a functional similarity to the unit group or when similar titles occur.

Main duties

This section lists some of the tasks or duties performed in the occupations in the unit group. Depending on the contents of the unit group, one of three formats is used.

  • A series of statements that can be applied to all occupations in the unit group. This format was selected for unit groups that contain a single core occupation, such as 1242 Legal administrative assistants and 2146 Aerospace engineers. This format was also selected for unit groups that contain a range of related titles that nevertheless share a set of common duties, such as 1411 General office support workers and 9417 Machining tool operators.
  • Two or more sub-sets of occupations with a series of statements that apply to each component. This format was selected for unit groups that consist of two or more sub-components which, while similar enough to be in the same unit group, can be described separately. Examples of unit groups with this format are 3141 Audiologists and speech-language pathologists and 5125 Translators, terminologists and interpreters.
  • A series of brief descriptive statements that are linked to specific occupations within a group. This format was selected for unit groups that contain a series of occupations which, while similar enough to be in the same unit group, can be described separately. Examples of unit groups with this format include 4423 By-law enforcement and other regulatory officers, n.e.c. and 5226 Other technical and co-ordinating occupations in motion pictures, broadcasting and the performing arts.

For some unit groups, a statement appears at the end of the tasks performed or main duties section, identifying specializations that exist within the occupational area encompassed by the unit group.

Employment requirements

This section describes the employment requirements for the unit group. Several types of requirements are identified in this section and are listed in the following order.

  • Type and level of formal education: for example, secondary school, college diploma, university degree. Efforts were made to be as specific as possible, though many unit groups have a range of acceptable educational requirements.
  • Specific training: for example, apprenticeship training, on-the-job training, training courses specific to an occupation.
  • Experience in another occupation: for example, supervisors usually require several years of experience in the occupation that they supervise.
  • Licences, certificates or registration: for example, regulatory requirements to practice in a regulated profession, special licenses to operate certain kinds of vehicles.
  • Other requirements: for example, athletic ability or artistic talent.

Note: Some occupations are designated as regulated professions and trades. Regulations are subject to change and may vary across jurisdictions. The most reliable information on regulatory requirements for occupations is found on the Web sites of provincial regulatory organizations and licensing authorities.

The Employment requirements section does not attempt to describe personal suitability requirements that are assessed by employers as part of the hiring process.

Some occupations have very definite employment requirements while for others, there is no consensus or a range of acceptable requirements exist. To reflect this variation in the labour market, this section describes employment requirements using the following terminology:

  • "... is required" - to indicate a definite requirement;
  • "... is usually required" - to indicate something that is usually required by the majority of employers, but not always required by all employers; and
  • "... may be required" - to indicate something that may be required by some employers, but on a less frequent basis.

Note: For reasons of brevity, in this section the term college includes the following types of post-secondary institutions: community colleges, CÉGEPS, technical institutes, trade schools and agricultural colleges. Where relevant, in some provinces, it may also include private training organizations, music conservatories and other non-degree granting institutions.

Additional information

This section appears in some unit group descriptions. It provides information on the following:

  • progression to other occupations (such as supervisory or management positions) based on transferability of skills from acquired occupational experience;
  • mobility patterns, such as inter- and intra-occupational transferability of skills (for example, identifying occupations that are part of internal lines of progression or specializations within a subject matter area);
  • trends and forthcoming changes in the unit group's employment requirements; and
  • other information to clarify and define the unit group.

Related classifications: NAICS, Class of Worker

The classification of occupations does not stand alone but must be understood as being related to other classifications, such as the North American Industry Classification System (NAICS) and that of Class of Worker. Each of these classifications supplements the NOC 2011 in presenting a rounded picture of the nature of a person's job.

North American Industry Classification System (NAICS)

The industrial qualifier which may accompany the job title:

  1. Indicates the type of economic activity with which the job is usually associated. (It is important to note that the assignment of an industrial qualifier does not necessarily limit a job to that industry. These qualifiers are merely indicative of the possible areas of activity in which the job may be found.)
  2. Permits the assignment of similar occupational titles to different occupation groups where the duties vary between industries.
  3. Aids in defining the specific occupations and helps the coder grasp the underlying principles of this classification.

The industry in which the individual is employed is determined by the kind of economic activity of the establishment. The establishment is usually a factory, mine, farm, store, other place of business or an institution for which a number of basic production variables can be compiled.

It is important to note the conceptual differences between an industry classification and an occupation classification. An establishment can employ individuals performing completely different occupations, and these are classified to appropriate occupational groups, but the industrial classification of each individual employed in the establishment should be the same and is determined by the nature of the product made or service rendered. In other words, the nature of the factory, business or service in which the person is employed does not determine the classification of the occupation, except to the extent that it enables the nature of the duties to be more clearly defined.

Class of Worker

Class of worker refers to an individual's employment relationship to the business in which he or she works, as employee or self employed, including unpaid family worker, and thus provides another means of describing the work. The NOC 2011 does not indicate the class of worker classification for each occupation since many occupations contain both jobs held by employees and jobs of self-employed individuals. However, a general rule has been established for coding purposes and is discussed in full under the section on Coding.


NOC 2011

NOC 2011 replaces the National Occupational Classification (NOC) of Human Resources and Skills Development Canada and Statistics Canada's National Occupational Classification for Statistics (NOC-S). These classifications were revised jointly by Human Resources and Skills Development Canada and Statistics Canada every 5 years according to the census cycle. The maintenance of the classification alternates between minor updates and structural revisions. Only in 10-year structural revisions are such changes considered as: the creation of new classes, the collapsing of classes, the moving of classes in the structure or the moving of content between classes.

The 2011 revision represents a major structural realignment. A key objective of this revision was to harmonize the coding structures and eliminate all other differences between the two classifications, fulfilling a request heard from users of both the NOC and the NOC-S. The result is the unified NOC 2011 which was developed through the joint efforts of Human Resources and Skills Development Canada and Statistics Canada and will be used by both.

Separate concordance tables explain the revisions to both classification systems that have resulted in the harmonized classification structure for NOC 2011.

In addition to these changes, for NOC 2011, a new variant of the classification has been developed at a high level of aggregation. It is designed to better support the analysis of highly aggregated data (See: Variant for highly aggregated data).

Citation

The National Occupation Classification 2011 is a joint product of Statistics Canada and Human Resources and Skills Development Canada. The appropriate department should be cited when materials are used. The structure, class labels, class definitions (lead statements), example titles and exclusions were jointly developed and are to be attributed to both departments. The content of the main duties, employment requirements and additional information sections as well as the theoretical framework and the accompanying definitions of skill level and skill type are the intellectual property of Human Resources and Skills Development Canada and are to be attributed to the department when cited.

Comparison of NOC 2006 and NOC-S 2006 to NOC 2011

The major difference between the NOC and the NOC-S had been the greater use in the NOC of skill level as a classification criterion. Whereas the NOC organized occupations by 10 skill types and four skill levels, NOC-S relied more on skill type in defining its major groups. The NOC 2011 uses the organizational structure of the NOC (See: NOC Classification criteria).

In order to incorporate skill level as an organizational principle, several major groups from NOC-S 2006 were changed and a new coding structure reflecting the skill type by skill level numerical coding of the NOC was adopted. The relationship between the major groups of NOC 2011 and NOC-S 2006 is detailed in the concordance tables (See: NOC 2011 - NOC-S 2006 and NOC-S 2006 - NOC 2011).

In order to provide at the major group level a comparable level of detail to that which had been provided by the NOC-S major groups, the number of major groups was increased from the 26 major groups of NOC 2006 to 40 major groups in NOC 2011. The relationship between the major groups of NOC 2011 and NOC 2006 is detailed in the concordance tables (See: NOC 2006 - NOC 2011).

The unit group descriptions of NOC 2011 contain all the types of information carried in NOC 2006. In comparison to NOC-S 2006, users will find additional information on the activities performed by workers in each unit group and a section related to educational and/or training requirements for entering an occupation. These sections provide further information on the nature of the jobs included in each unit group, help to code job titles to the correct class and help identify the relative distinctions between skill levels for occupations.

The NOC and NOC-S had also differed in their treatment of military personnel. The NOC classified military personnel whose occupations had a civilian counterpart in the group appropriate to that civilian occupation. The NOC-S classified all military personnel on the basis of rank to one of two unit groups: one for commissioned officers and one for other ranks. NOC 2011 follows the approach used in NOC-S, with all military personnel being classified to either 0433 Commissioned officers of the Canadian Forces or 4313 Non-commissioned ranks of the Canadian Forces. The adoption of the NOC-S approach allowed this difference to be resolved with no impact on the historical comparability of data.

In this structural revision, various changes were also made at the unit group level to enable the classification to continue to provide a framework for the provision of relevant and reliable information on the occupational structure of Canada. New unit groups have been formed either by combining unit groups or parts of unit groups from 2006 and content has been moved between skill types and levels. The full relationship between the unit groups of NOC 2011 and those of NOC and NOC-S 2006 is presented in the concordances, but some highlights are noted here.

Some unit groups were moved to better reflect the skill type of the work performed. For example, Loan officers, Customer service representatives - financial, and Customer service, information and related clerks all moved from Business to Sales and service. Public relations and communications professionals moved from Art and culture to Business. Protective service occupations, including the military, police and firefighters, moved from Sales and service to Government services. Care providers and educational assistants moved from Sales and service to Community and education services. Certain trades, including upholsterers and tailors, moved from Trades and equipment to Services. As a final example, Power system, station and auxiliary equipment operators moved from Trades and equipment operators to Utilities.

In other cases, only part of a group was moved. For example, legal assistants moved out of Paralegal and related occupations, in Law, into Legal administrative assistants, in Business. Advertising and marketing managers moved out of Sales, marketing and advertising managers, in Sales, into Advertising, marketing and public relations managers, in Business services. Similarly, Library assistants moved from Library and archive technicians and assistants, in Education, law and social, community and government services, to Library assistants and clerks, in Business, finance and administration.

Other unit groups were moved to better reflect the occupation's current skill level. For example, the group for Non-commissioned ranks of the Canadian Forces was moved from skill level C to skill level B to recognize the training that occurs post-recruitment. Water and waste treatment plant operators also moved from skill level C to B due to the changing requirements associated with this occupation. Farmers and farm managers were moved into management to recognize the significant management component in these occupations.

As was the case with skill type, here also there were cases where only part of a unit group was moved. For example, midwives were moved from skill level B to skill level A into a new unit group, Allied primary health practitioners. Pharmacy technicians and physiotherapy assistants moved from skill level C to skill level B, now included, respectively, in Other medical technologists and technicians (except dental health) and Other technical occupations in therapy and assessment.

Finally, some unit groups were combined. Administrative clerks were merged with General office clerks due to the increasing similarity in the job titles and work performed in these two unit groups. In other cases, particularly in manufacturing, unit groups that have been declining in size were combined with related groups.

In addition to these structural changes, the 2011 revision also provided an opportunity to add many new job titles in order to reflect changing terminology and new technology in the workplace and the rise of new occupations and specializations. Too numerous to list, these additions included titles ranging from oil and gas contractor to mystery shopper and from physician assistant to seismic buried facilities locator.

NOC classification criteria

The two major attributes of jobs used as classification criteria in developing the NOC are skill type and skill level. A description of skill levels is presented first as the definitions of skill types incorporate some information related to the concept of skill level. Other factors, such as industry and occupational mobility, are also taken into consideration.

Skill level

Skill level is defined generally as the amount and type of education and training required to enter and perform the duties of an occupation. In determining skill level, the experience required for entry, and the complexity and responsibilities typical of an occupation are also considered in relation to other occupations.

Four skill level categories are identified in the NOC. Each major, minor and unit group is assigned to one of the skill levels.

The skill level categories are broad aggregates, reflecting four commonly accepted educational, training or preparatory routes for entering employment. Requirements for individual unit groups or occupations may overlap between the boundaries of the skill levels. For example, some occupations can be entered with either a university degree or a college diploma. When the entry requirements for a unit group or occupation reflect a range of possible educational and training specifications, skill level placement of the group was determined by considering several factors. These include the requirements most generally demanded by employers, the minor group context, complexity of overall responsibilities and knowledge requirements as well as further training and specialization acquired on the job.

The classification describes the educational and training requirements for occupations. However, the education and experience of particular job incumbents may not correspond exactly to the level described. Individuals may be over-qualified for their work or they may work in occupations for which the entry requirements have changed after they became employed.

It is important to note that the skill level categories are not intended to designate socio-economic status or prestige. Rather they are intended to reflect actual occupational entry requirements. These requirements are expressed in terms of the formal educational system and other types of training specified by employers.

Management occupations, while considered a skill type, are assigned to the skill level A category. These occupations are at the top of organizational hierarchies and as such, are characterized by high levels of responsibility, accountability and subject matter expertise gained through either formal education or extensive occupational experience. Management occupations span the entire classification structure and are found in all sectors or areas of the labour market. A range of factors are taken into consideration as determinants for employment in management occupations.

The skill level categories of the NOC are outlined and defined below.

NOC skill level criteria - education/training and other criteria

Skill level A

  • University degree (bachelor's, master's or doctorate)

Skill level B

  • Two to three years of post-secondary education at community college, institute of technology or CÉGEP

    or
  • Two to five years of apprenticeship training

    or
  • Three to four years of secondary school and more than two years of on-the-job training, occupation-specific training courses or specific work experience
  • Occupations with supervisory responsibilities are also assigned to skill level B.
  • Occupations with significant health and safety responsibilities (e.g., fire fighters, police officers and licensed practical nurses) are assigned to skill level B.

Skill level C

  • Completion of secondary school and some short-duration courses or training specific to the occupation

    or
  • Some secondary school education, with up to two years of on-the-job training, training courses or specific work experience

Skill level D

  • Short work demonstration or on-the-job training

    or
  • No formal educational requirements

Skill level is referenced in the code for all occupations with the exception of management occupations. For all non-management occupations the second digit of the numerical code corresponds to skill level. Skill levels are identified as follows: level A - 0 or 1; level B - 2 or 3; level C - 4 or 5; and level D - 6 or 7.

Skill type

Skill type is defined as the type of work performed, although other factors related to skill type are also reflected in the NOC. One of these factors is similarity with respect to the educational discipline or field of study required for entry into an occupation. Another factor is the industry of employment where experience within an internal job ladder or within a specific industry is usually a prerequisite for entry. The 10 skill types, 0 to 9, are presented below and are also identified in the first digit of the NOC numerical code for all occupations.

The ten broad occupational categories of the NOC are based on skill type

0. Management occupations

This skill type category contains legislators, senior management occupations and middle management occupations. While management occupations are defined as a skill type, they are also found throughout all other skill type areas of the classification. The first digit of the code for all management occupations is 0.

These occupations are considered to be at the top of the organizational hierarchy of workplaces or businesses. Decision-making that affects the organization as a whole, or departments within organizations, is undertaken by management. As such, management is characterized by high levels of responsibility, accountability and subject matter expertise. Expertise is acquired through either formal education or extensive occupational experience. For these reasons all management occupations in the NOC 2011 are also included within skill level A.

1. Business, finance and administration occupations

This category contains occupations that are concerned with providing financial and business services, administrative and regulatory services and clerical supervision and support services. Some occupations in this category are unique to the financial and business service sectors; however, most are found in all industries.

Often, occupations at skill levels A and B are supplied from educational programs specific to the profession or occupation. Some occupations at skill level B are also supplied from experienced workers in related administrative support occupations.

2. Natural and applied sciences and related occupations

This category contains professional and technical occupations in the sciences, including physical and life sciences, engineering, architecture and information technology.

Occupations in this skill type category require post-secondary education in an appropriate scientific discipline. Progression from occupations in skill level B to occupations in skill level A is usually dependent on completion of additional formal education.

3. Health occupations

This category includes occupations concerned with providing health care services directly to patients and occupations that provide support to professional and technical staff. Most occupations in this skill type category require post-secondary education in a related health care program. Progression from occupations in skill level B to occupations in skill level A is usually dependent on completion of additional formal education. Occupations in skill level C require short training programs.

4. Occupations in education, law and social, community and government services

This skill type category includes a range of occupations that are concerned with law, public protective services, teaching, counselling, conducting social science research, developing government policy, and administering government and other programs.

Occupations in this skill type category usually require completion of a related post-secondary program. Progression from occupations in skill level B to occupations in skill level A is not usually possible without completion of additional formal education.

5. Occupations in art, culture, recreation and sport

This skill type category includes professional and technical occupations related to art and culture, including the performing arts, film and video, broadcasting, journalism, writing, creative design, libraries and museums. It also includes occupations in recreation and sport.

This category is characterized by occupations which are linked by subject matter to formal post-secondary educational programs but which have, for the most part, a range of acceptable qualifications. Occupations in this category are also characterized by a requirement for creative talent, such as for designers and performers, or for athletic ability. Unit groups for occupations that usually require university graduation in a professional discipline, such as journalism or library science, have been classified in skill level A. Most others have been classified in skill level B in recognition of the wide range of entry routes that are possible.

6. Sales and service occupations

This skill type category contains sales occupations, personal services and security service occupations, and occupations related to the hospitality and tourism industries.

Occupations in skill level B of this category can be linked, for the most part, to formal post-secondary or occupation-specific training programs. Others are characterized by periods of formal on-the-job training other than apprenticeship. Progression from occupations in skill level C or D to those in skill level B usually require completion of related training programs. Some progression through experience is possible for supervisory positions.

7. Trades, transport and equipment operators and related occupations

This skill type category includes construction and mechanical trades, trades supervisors and contractors and operators of transportation and heavy equipment. These occupations are found in a wide range of industrial sectors, with many occurring in the construction and transportation industries.

This category includes most of the apprenticeable trades, including all of those related to the construction industry. Other occupations in this category usually require completion of college or other programs combined with on-the-job training. Progression to supervisory or self-employed contractor status is possible with experience. There is limited mobility or transferability of skills among occupations in this category due to specific apprenticeship, training and licensing requirements for most occupations.

8. Natural resources, agriculture and related production occupations

This category contains supervisory and equipment operation occupations in the natural resource-based sectors of mining, oil and gas production, forestry and logging, agriculture, horticulture and fishing. Most occupations in this category are industry specific and do not occur outside of the primary industries.

Occupations within skill level B of this category generally require completion of college or other post-secondary training programs. Some, however, are characterized by industry-based training and progression through experience.

9. Occupations in manufacturing and utilities

This category contains supervisory and production occupations in manufacturing, processing and utilities.

Occupations in this category are characterized by internal progression and on-the-job training. Workers typically start out in these occupations at entry-level positions and progress to increasingly higher skilled occupations through experience. Mobility between employers or industries may be limited by seniority provisions of collective agreements. The occupations in skill level B of this category are increasingly technical in nature and post-secondary training programs are required for some.

Industry

Industry and occupation are separate variables which can be cross-tabulated to provide detailed information on employment. However, many occupations are found almost solely within one particular industry. For example, mining and automobile assembly occupations occur each within their respective industrial sectors.

During the original research and development of the NOC, it was realized that in many industries, occupational mobility is determined more by internal job ladders than by functional specialization. In consequence, some unit groups include workers of a particular skill level within a specific industry. Although the occupational categorisation resembles in part an industrial categorisation, the variables remain separate and distinct.

Industry was used in the development of classification categories for senior management occupations, for occupations in natural resources, agriculture and related production and for occupations in manufacturing and utilities.

Occupational mobility

In developing the NOC, an effort was made to consider mobility or transferability of skills between occupations. The objective was to develop unit groups where the potential for mobility, or substitution of workers, would be greater within the group than between groups. Movement within groups usually follows when the group is homogeneous in skill level and skill type, indicating increased potential for transferability of competencies and development of specialization. Movement between groups, or inter-occupational mobility, usually reflects a change in skill level (e.g., vertical mobility) or a change in skill type (e.g., acquisition of new responsibilities and diversified skills).

The degree of occupational mobility that exists for unit groups varies. Many unit group descriptions include a statement that indicates the potential for, and type of, mobility that characterizes the unit group.

Other classification considerations

In addition to the previously mentioned criteria, other factors were considered in determining the boundaries between unit groups and the contents of each group. These additional factors were the size of the unit groups and the codability or operational feasibility of the groups. Codability relates to the ease of accurately coding or assigning reported job titles from survey respondents to the occupational groups of the classification.

The size (or estimated number of workers) of the unit group was considered for reasons of statistical reliability and confidentiality. Generally, unit groups which contain fewer than 1,000 Canadian workers have not been delineated.

Because the NOC structure is used to code responses to the National Household Survey and other surveys, it must provide a set of unit groups that can be used for this operational application. The insufficient precision of some survey responses and ambiguities of language were given consideration in finalizing the unit groups.

The NOC Matrix

A matrix classifying the NOC major and minor groups has been developed to provide an overview of the entire classification and to show the organization of the groups by both skill type and skill level.

There are 10 skill types in the NOC identified as 0 to 9. The vertical columns of the matrix correspond to nine of the 10 skill type categories with the exception of management. Management, the first skill type or 0, is organized across the top of the matrix and spans all nine skill types as it is found within all occupational sectors or categories. The first digit of each code identifies the major and minor group as belonging to one of the ten skill type categories, 0 to 9.

The horizontal rows of the matrix correspond to the four skill level categories. Management occupations are by default included in the skill level A category. For all non-management occupations, the second digit of each code identifies the major and minor group as belonging to one of the four skill level categories.

Within each cell of the matrix, the major and minor groups that belong to each skill type and skill level category are listed. Management occupations are the exception, which span all skill type categories and are included in skill level A. The second digit of management occupations identifies the occupational sector of management, for example 031 Managers in health care. (See: Matrix).

Issues and conventions of the NOC

Some of the many issues that were encountered in the development of the NOC and the conventions adopted in response are discussed in the following paragraphs.

Management occupations

Management occupations present a special problem for reliable coding of occupational survey responses. In many cases there is little indication of the level of responsibility, the size of the enterprise or division managed, or the field of specialization.

To be of practical use, a classification of managers must be a compromise between the theoretically optimal and the practical solutions.

Senior management occupations (in major group 00) have been divided on the basis of industry of employment into six unit groups.

Middle and other management occupations are divided into three major groups, 18 minor groups and 42 unit groups on the basis of specialization (e.g., Purchasing managers) or industry of employment (e.g., Postal and courier services managers). In certain cases (e.g., Managers in transportation) groups defined by industry also contain managers in that specialization regardless of their industry of employment.

Supervisors

Supervisors and foremen/women have generally been classified in skill level B.

In most cases, professional and technical occupations are supervised by managerial or professional personnel respectively. However, where supervisors are identified for professional and technical groups, they are generally classified in the same unit groups as the occupations supervised.

Supervisors in the following occupational categories have been classified in supervisor unit groups or minor groups separate from the workers supervised:

  • administrative services occupations
  • nursing occupations
  • sales and service occupations
  • trades and transport and equipment operators
  • occupations in natural resources and agriculture
  • occupations in manufacturing and utilities.

Most minor and unit groups in the occupational categories listed above have a corresponding supervisory group. Occasionally, as in minor group 431, Occupations in front-line public protection services, supervision is provided by managers and there are no corresponding supervisory groups in major group 43.

Trades

All apprenticeable trades are included in skill level B. Their inclusion does not imply an exact equivalence of skill between all trades, but rather that they occupy a range that lies within the boundaries of this skill level category. Information on entry requirements is provided within each unit group description.

Inspectors, testers and graders

Generally, inspectors who require post-secondary education have been classified in separate unit groups in skill level B or with technicians and technologists, also in skill level B. Other non-technical inspectors, testers, graders and samplers have been included either in separate unit groups covering occupations in processing industries or in unit groups of assemblers and fabricators in manufacturing industries. This is reflective of patterns of employment found within industries and the increasing responsibility for quality control that is placed on manufacturing production workers.

Apprentices and trainees

Apprentices and trainees have been classified in the same unit groups as the occupations for which they are training. Similarly, interns, residents and articling students are classified with their respective professional groups.

This convention has been adopted of necessity to prevent a proliferation of unit groups of apprentices. It is not intended to imply equivalence or interchangeability of apprentices or trainees with fully qualified workers.

NOC 2011 coding system

As indicated previously, the first two digits of each code convey meaning with respect to the group's skill type and skill level category.

For all occupations, including management, the first digit of each code identifies the major, minor and unit group as belonging to one of the skill type categories. For all non-management occupations, the second digit of each code identifies the major, minor and unit group as belonging to one of the four skill level categories.

For management occupations, the first two digits also convey meaning. The first digit is always 0 to convey management, while the second digit conveys the skill type category in which the management occupation is found. All management occupations are included as part of skill level A.

The following charts summarize and illustrate the meanings embedded in the coding system.

Classification structure by the skill type category
The skill type category is... when the first digit is...
Management occupations 0
Business, finance and administration occupations 1
Natural and applied sciences and related occupations 2
Health occupations 3
Occupations in education, law and social, community and government services 4
Occupations in art, culture, recreation and sport 5
Sales and service occupations 6
Trades, transport and equipment operators and related occupations 7
Natural resources, agriculture and related production occupations 8
Occupations in manufacturing and utilities 9
Skill type category
The skill level category is... when the second digit is...
Skill Level A 0 or 1
Skill Level B 2 or 3
Skill Level C 4 or 5
Skill Level D 6 or 7

Important note: For management, the first digit is always 0. Senior managers in major group 00 are generally managers of middle managers, therefore the second digit is also 0. For middle management occupations, the second digit represents the skill type categories, from 1 to 9, as above. All management occupations are included in skill level A.

Examples of codes and their meaning
Code Meaning
9231 The first digit indicates skill type category 9, Occupations in manufacturing and utilities. The second digit indicates skill level category B.
6533 The first digit indicates skill type category 6, Sales and service occupations. The second digit indicates skill level category C.
0212 The first digit 0 always indicates a management occupation. All management occupations are part of skill level A. The second digit indicates management in skill type category 2, Natural and applied sciences and related occupations.

Variant for highly aggregated data

A variant of NOC 2011 has been developed jointly by Statistics Canada and Human Resources and Skills Development Canada. It is based on a review of actual practices in the analysis of highly aggregated occupational data, consideration of the highest aggregation level in the International Standard Classification of Occupations (ISCO) and consultation with potential users.

The variant consists of 10 groupings, from a. to j., that are a convenient and useful way to summarize and analyse more detailed classes. The first three classes are homogeneous on skill level. The remaining classes focus on skill type. All classes consist of entire major groups; no major group is split between classes of the variant.

Variant Aggregation Structure

Variant Aggregation Structure
Variant classes Major groups included
a. Management
  • 00 Senior management occupations
  • 01-05 Specialized middle management occupations
  • 06 Middle management occupations in retail and wholesale trade and customer services
  • 07-09 Middle management occupations in trades, transportation, production and utilities
b. Professional
  • 11 Professional occupations in business and finance
  • 21 Professional occupations in natural and applied sciences
  • 30 Professional occupations in nursing
  • 31 Professional occupations in health (except nursing)
  • 40 Professional occupations in education services
  • 41 Professional occupations in law and social, community and government services
  • 51 Professional occupations in art and culture
c. Technical and paraprofessional
  • 22 Technical occupations related to natural and applied sciences
  • 32 Technical occupations in health
  • 42 Paraprofessional occupations in legal, social, community and education services
  • 43 Occupations in front-line public protection services
  • 52 Technical occupations in art, culture, recreation and sport
d. Administration and administrative support
  • 12 Administrative and financial supervisors and administrative occupations
  • 13 Finance, insurance and related business administrative occupations
  • 14 Office support occupations
  • 15 Distribution, tracking and scheduling co-ordination occupations
e. Sales
  • 62 Retail sales supervisors and specialized sales occupations
  • 64 Sales representatives and salespersons - wholesale and retail trade
  • 66 Sales support occupations
f. Personal and customer information services
  • 63 Service supervisors and specialized service occupations
  • 65 Service representatives and other customer and personal services occupations
  • 67 Service support and other service occupations, n.e.c.
  • 34 Assisting occupations in support of health services
  • 44 Care providers and educational, legal and public protection support occupations
g. Industrial, construction and equipment operation trades
  • 72 Industrial, electrical and construction trades
  • 73 Maintenance and equipment operation trades
h. Workers and labourers in transport and construction
  • 74 Other installers, repairers and servicers and material handlers
  • 75 Transport and heavy equipment operation and related maintenance occupations
  • 76 Trades helpers, construction labourers and related occupations
i. Natural resources, agriculture and related production occupations
  • 82 Supervisors and technical occupations in natural resources, agricultural and related production
  • 84 Workers in natural resources, agriculture and related production
  • 86 Harvesting, landscaping and natural resources labourers
j. Occupations in manufacturing and utilities
  • 92 Processing, manufacturing and utilities supervisors and central control operators
  • 94 Processing and manufacturing machine operators and related production workers
  • 95 Assemblers in manufacturing
  • 96 Labourers in processing, manufacturing and utilities

Coding

The NOC provides an overall structure for classifying occupations according to kind of work performed. The lists of example titles are merely indicative of the types of occupations that fit within specific unit groups. The lists of example titles are not exhaustive nor are they intended to be.

When coding an occupation, all the relevant facts about the job and its environment should be obtained. These include the kind of work performed, the most important activities or duties, the job titles, the kind of business, industry or service, and the class of worker described earlier. The more complete and comprehensive the information the coder is able to assemble about the duties performed by a worker on a particular job, the easier it will be to determine the appropriate classification.

To code an occupation, it is possible to start with either the classification structure or the search tool.

Using the structure

When using the structure, it is best to exploit the hierarchical nature of the classification. First the broad occupational category (skill type) which seems most likely to contain the job should be identified. Next the most appropriate major group within the broad occupational category should be found. Skill level can also provide a guide to locating major groups by considering titles with terms such as "technical", "supervisor", "helper", and "labourer". The process should be continued to find the most appropriate minor group within the major group selected. Finally the most appropriate unit group within the minor group selected should be identified. The unit group definition should be read carefully before deciding if this unit group offers the best possible classification. In addition, the example titles listed for the unit group should be examined to ensure that the choice is actually the best.

Using the NOC search tool

  1. First search for the occupation. This can be done by searching using a key part of the occupation title and reviewing the search results to find the four-digit code that contains the occupation sought. Check whether the title appears in any other four-digit code listed. If it does, the corresponding industrial qualifiers should be checked and the one which relates most closely to the one stated by the respondent selected. Using this code, go to the unit group. Read its definition carefully as well as the list of example titles before deciding whether it is the most appropriate classification. Also consult the list of Exclusions for similar occupations that are classified elsewhere.
  2. If the occupation title cannot be found or if the definition appears inappropriate, enter another title in the search. Some suggestions are:
    1. Look for the noun form: answering the phone will be a Receptionist or Telephone clerk
    2. Shorten the title: Electronic data processor to Data processor
    3. Find a synonym: Aircraft mechanic for Aircraft maintenance technician
    4. If the title is inverted, look for it in its natural order e.g. Manager, store may be located using Store manager
  3. Also consider such factors as:
    1. Job location - tunnel worker; bridge keeper
    2. Kind of machines used - cement-mixer operator; hydraulic riveter
    3. Material used - concrete mason; leather handbag maker
    4. Subject matter - music cataloguer; press clipper
    5. Activity performed - locomotive inspector; body shop foreman/woman
    6. Job skills - surgical instrument repairer; tool machinist

Coding procedures for problem responses

The procedure described above assumes responses contain sufficient information for coding. Unfortunately, depending upon the survey methods used, some responses may be problematic. This occurs when the information in the response is either vague or contradictory. Experience at Statistics Canada suggests the following approaches to resolving such problems.

Coding vague responses

It is suggested that vague responses be coded only to the level within the classification that is possible. Of course, before doing so, any information that is available about the respondent should be consulted.

Using education in coding

This is especially useful in coding occupational responses that are vague. The most reliable way of using education is as an exclusionary edit. Certain occupations require a minimum education and it is possible to exclude vague responses from being coded to such occupations if the respondent does not have the minimum education required. Great care must be taken when using education in occupational coding and it should only be used as a last resort.

Coding when the response contains contradictory information

Sometimes the responses will give an occupational title and a description of work performed that are contradictory. A response "labourer, driving dump truck" is contradictory in terms of the classification, as driving a truck is not considered elemental work. This response should be coded as a truck driver in 7511 Transport truck drivers.

In general, it is best to let the description of the work performed predominate over occupational titles when coding.

Some occupational titles can be misleading. Titles that have manager as part of the title are sometimes not managers. For example, project managers and case managers are usually not managers and must be coded based on a description of their work. Special care must be given to responses that have manager, labourer, or consultant as part of the title as these terms have a variety of meanings in the workplace.

Coding responses containing two or more occupations

Where two or more occupations are reported in reply to a question on occupation, the first one mentioned should be coded unless there is additional information to suggest otherwise.


Classification rules

Managers

Managers are usually classified to the broad occupational category 0 Management Occupations. Within this category the senior managers that are the top of a management hierarchy as denoted by terms such as president, chief executive officer, etc. are classified in major group 00 Senior management occupations.

Managers with a management specialty, such as human resource management, are classified according to specialty in major group 01-05 Specialized middle management occupations. However, senior managers with a specialist responsibility would be classified with senior management in major group 00 Senior management occupations.

An attempt has been made to isolate many of the managers of small businesses by classifying managers of retail stores, restaurants, hotels and similar businesses in a separate major group 06 Middle management occupations in retail and wholesale trade.

All other managers are classified according to the type of business managed within major group 07-09 Middle management occupations in trades, transportation, production and utilities.

Proprietors

As a general rule, the class of worker status, that is, whether the respondent works for wages or is self-employed, is not considered for classification purposes. An exception is made for proprietors in retail trade, food and accommodation services and residential home building. These are classified as managers to the following unit groups:

0621
Retail and wholesale trade managers
0631
Restaurant and food service managers
0632
Accommodation service managers
0712
Home building and renovation managers

Contractors

Contractors are classified in several areas of the classification. General contractors in construction are classified in unit group 0711 Construction managers. Renovation contractors and home building contractors are classified in unit group 0712 Home building and renovation managers.

Contractors specializing in a specific trade such as plumbing, electrical, carpentry, etc., are classified together with supervisors to the appropriate unit group for that trade. That is, a plumbing contractor is classified to unit group 7203 Contractors and supervisors, pipefitting trades.

Supervisors and foremen/women

Supervisors are classified to separate unit groups for supervisors where they exist. These are found in the following minor groups for supervisors:

121
Administrative services supervisors
621
Retail sales supervisors
631
Service supervisors
720
Contractors and supervisors, industrial, electrical and construction trades and related workers
730
Contractors and supervisors, maintenance trades and heavy equipment and transport operators
821
Supervisors, logging and forestry
822
Contractors and supervisors, mining, oil and gas
825
Contractors and supervisors, agriculture, horticulture and related operations and services
921
Supervisors, processing and manufacturing occupations
922
Supervisors, assembly and fabrication

This unit group for supervisors is found outside of the supervisor minor groups:

3011
Nursing co-ordinators and supervisors

Where a separate unit group does not exist, supervisors are classified with the workers supervised. For example, in most professional major groups there are no separate unit groups for supervisors, the one exception being unit group 3011 Nursing co-ordinators and supervisors.

Technical occupations follow a similar rule and there are no separate unit groups for supervisors in this area.

Even where separate supervisory unit groups exist, "lead hands" are not classified to them as previous research has indicated that supervision is usually only a minor part of such jobs.

Apprentices

Apprentices are classified within the groups for tradesmen/women. For example an apprentice carpenter is classified to the appropriate trade group, unit group 7271 Carpenters.

Helpers

Helpers are usually considered as labourers. Most helpers will be found in the building trades such as carpenter's helper, mason's helper, roofer's helper, etc. These jobs are not to be confused with formal apprenticeships and are not classified as tradesmen/women but are classified to unit group 7611 Construction trades helpers and labourers.

Labourers

Labourers are classified in separate unit groups in the following major groups:

76
Trades helpers, construction labourers and related occupations
86
Harvesting, landscaping and natural resources labourers
96
Labourers in processing, manufacturing and utilities

Sample questions for obtaining occupation information

The following questions indicate the type of information and the format that could be used to obtain the facts necessary to classify an occupation.

  1. For whom did you work?
    • Name of firm, government agency, etc.
  2. What kind of business, industry or service was this?

    Please give details. For example: primary school, municipal police, wheat farm, shoe store.
  3. What was your work or occupation?

    Please be specific. For example: plumber, fishing guide, wood furniture assembler, secondary school teacher. (If in the armed forces, give rank).
  4. In this work, what were your main activities?

    Please give details. For example: installed residential plumbing, guided fishing parties, made wood furniture products, taught mathematics.
  5. In this job or business, were you mainly:
    • Working for wages, salary, tips or commission?
    • Working without pay for your spouse or another relative in a family farm or business?
    • Self-employed without paid help (alone or in a partnership)?
    • Self-employed with paid help (alone or in a partnership)?

More information on the NOC

For information on the National Occupational Classification (NOC) and its use for programs and services such as, immigrating to Canada, labour market information, job searches and working in Canada, please contact Human Resources and Skills Development Canada.

Footnotes

Footnote 1

This heading is used by Statistics Canada.

Return to footnote 1 referrer

Footnote 2

This heading is used by Human Resources and Skills Development Canada.

Return to first footnote 2 referrer